Altivar Machine ATV340

NVE61643 03/2020

Altivar Machine ATV340

Variable Speed Drives
for Asynchronous and Synchronous Motors

Programming Manual
03/2020
NVE61643.05

www.schneider-electric.com
 The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical character-
istics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not intended as a
substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user
applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk
analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use
thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for
misuse of the information contained herein. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments
or have found errors in this publication, please notify us.
You agree not to reproduce, other than for your own personal, noncommercial use, all or part of this
document on any medium whatsoever without permission of Schneider Electric, given in writing. You also
agree not to establish any hypertext links to this document or its content. Schneider Electric does not grant
any right or license for the personal and noncommercial use of the document or its content, except for a
non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at your own risk. All other rights are reserved.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this
product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data, only the
manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the relevant instructions must
be followed.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in
injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
© 2020 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

2 NVE61643 03/2020
 Table of Contents

Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Part I Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chapter 1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Initial Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Steps for Setting-Up the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Software Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Chapter 2 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Factory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Application Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Display Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Product LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Multipoint Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Structure of the Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Finding a Parameter in This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Chapter 3 Cyber Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Part II Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter 4 [Simply start] SYS- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
[Simply start] SIM- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
[My menu] MYMn- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
[Modified parameters] LMd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Chapter 5 [Dashboard] dSH- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
[System] dst- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
[Dashboard] dSH- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
[kWh Counters]KWC- menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
[Dashboard] dSH- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Chapter 6 [Diagnostics] dIA- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.1 [Diag. data] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
[Diag. data] ddt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
[Service message] SEr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
[Other State] SSt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
[Diagnostics] dAU- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
[Identification] OId- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.2 [Error history] pFH- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6.3 [Warnings] ALr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
[Actual warnings] ALrd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
[Warning group 1 definition] A1C- to [Warning group 5 definition] A5C- Menus . . . . . 71
[Warnings] ALr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Chapter 7 [Display] MOn- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.1 [Energy parameters] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
[Elec Ener Input Counter] ELI- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
[Elec Ener Output Counter] ELO- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
[Mechanical energy] MEC- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
[Energy saving] ESA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.2 [Application parameters] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.3 [M/S parameters] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
[M/S Local Display] MSo- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
[M/S System Display] Msr- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.4 [Motor parameters] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.5 [Drive parameters] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

NVE61643 03/2020 3
 7.6 [Thermal monitoring] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.7 [PID display] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.8 [Counter management] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7.9 [Other state] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.10 [I/O map] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
7.11 [Communication map] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.12 [Data logging] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Chapter 8 [Complete settings] CSt- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
8.1 [Motor parameters] MPA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
[Motor parameters] MPA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
[Data] Mtd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
[Angle test setting] ASA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
[Motor tune] MtU- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
[Motor tune] - [Rotation tune] TRAM- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
[Motor monitoring] MOP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
[Thermal monitoring] tPP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
[Motor monitoring] MOP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
[Motor control] drC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
[Fluxing by DI] FLI- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
[Spd Loop Optimization] MCL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
[Motor control] drC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
[Switching frequency] SWF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
[Input Filter] dCr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
8.2 [Define system units] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.3 [Command and Reference] CrP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
8.4 [Master/Slave] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
8.5 [Hoisting Functions] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
[Brake logic control] BLC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
[High speed hoisting] HSH- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
[Load Sharing] Lds- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
[Rope Slack Handling] Sdr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
8.6 [Hoisting monitoring] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
[Dynamic load detect.] dLd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
8.7 [Machine Functions] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
[Load Sharing] LdS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
[Backlash compensation] bSqM- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
[Positioning by sensors] LPO- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
[Brake logic control] bLC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
[Torque control] tOr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
8.8 [Generic functions] - [Speed limits] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
8.9 [Generic functions] - [Ramp] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.10 [Generic functions] - [Ramp switching] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
8.11 [Generic functions] - [Stop configuration] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
8.12 [Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
8.13 [Generic functions] - [Ref. operations] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
8.14 [Generic functions] - [Preset speeds] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
8.15 [Generic functions] - [+/- speed]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
8.16 [Generic functions] - [+/- speed around ref] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
8.17 [Generic functions] - [Jump frequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
8.18 [Generic functions] - [PID controller] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
8.19 [Generic functions] - [Threshold reached] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
8.20 [Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
8.21 [Generic functions] - [Output contactor cmd] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
8.22 [Generic functions] - [Reverse disable] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
8.23 [Generic functions] - [Torque limitation] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

4 NVE61643 03/2020
 8.24 [Generic functions] - [2nd current limit.]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
8.25 [Generic functions] - [Jog] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
8.26 [Generic functions] - [High Speed Switching] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
8.27 [Generic functions] - [Memo reference frequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
8.28 [Generic functions] - [Brake logic control] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
8.29 [Generic functions] - [Limit switches] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
8.30 [Generic functions] - [Positioning by sensors] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
8.31 [Generic functions] - [Torque control] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
8.32 [Generic functions] - [Parameters switching] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
8.33 [Generic functions] - [Stop after speed timeout] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
8.34 [Generic functions] - [DC bus supply] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
8.35 [Generic functions] - [Multimotors config] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
8.36 [Generic functions] - [24V Supply Output] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
8.37 [Generic Functions] [External Weight Measurement] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
8.38 [Generic monitoring] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
[Process underload] ULd- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
[Process overload] OLd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
[Stall monitoring] StPr- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
[Thermal monitoring] tPP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
[Frequency meter] FqF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
8.39 [Input/Output] - [I/O assignment] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
[DI1 assignment] L1A- to [DI8 assignment] L8A- Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
[DI11 assignment] L11A- to [DI16 assignment] L16A- Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
[DI7 Pulse Input Assign] PI7A- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
[DI8 Pulse Input Assign] PI8A- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
[Encoder Pulse Assign] PTGA- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
[RP assignment] PIA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
[AI1 assignment] AI1A- to [AI5 assignment] AI5A- Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
[AIV1 assignment] Av1A- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
8.40 [Input/Output] - [DI/DQ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
[DI1 Configuration] di1- to [DI8 Configuration] di8- Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
[DI11 Configuration] dI11- to [DI16 Configuration] Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
[DI7 Pulse Config] PAI7- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
[DI8 Pulse Config] PAI8- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
[Pulse Input] PTI- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
[Encoder Config] PG- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
[PTO configuration] Pto- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
[PTO configuration] Ptoo- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
[DQ1 Configuration] dO1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
[DQ2 Configuration] dO2- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
[DQ11 Configuration] dO11- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
[DQ12 Configuration] dO12- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
8.41 [Input/Output] - [Analog I/O]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
[AI1 configuration] AI1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
[AI2 configuration] AI2- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
[AI3 configuration] AI3- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
[AI4 configuration] AI4- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
[AI5 configuration] AI5- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
[AQ1 configuration] AO1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
[AQ2 configuration] AO2- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
[Virtual AI1] AV1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
8.42 [Input/Output] - [Relay] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
[R1 configuration] r1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
[R2 configuration] r2- to [R6 configuration] r6- Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
[Input/Output] io- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

NVE61643 03/2020 5
 8.43 [Encoder configuration] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
8.44 [Embedded Encoder] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
8.45 [Error/Warning handling] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
[Auto fault reset] Atr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
[Fault reset] rSt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
[Catch on the fly] FLr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
[Error detect disabling] InH- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
[External error] EtF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
[Output phase loss] OPL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
[Input phase loss] IPL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
[4-20mA loss] LFL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
[Fallback speed] LFF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
[Fieldbus monitoring] CLL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
[Embedded Modbus TCP] EMtC- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
[Communication module] COMO- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
[Undervoltage handling] USb- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
[Ground Fault] GrFL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
[Motor thermal monit] tHt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
[Encoder monitoring] Sdd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
[Braking Resistor monit] brP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
[Torque or i lim. detect] tId- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
[Drive overload monit] obr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
[Warn grp 1 definition] A1C- to [Warn grp 5 definition] A5C- Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
8.46 [Maintenance]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
[Diagnostics] dAU- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
[Customer event 1] CE1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
[Customer event 2] CE2- to [Customer event 5] CE5- Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
[Customer events] CUEv- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
[Fan management] FAMA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
[Maintenance] CSMA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Chapter 9 [Communication] COM-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
[Modbus Fieldbus] Md1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
[Com. scanner input] ICS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
[Com. scanner output] OCS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
[Modbus HMI] Md2- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
[Embd Eth Config] EtE- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
[Fast Device Replacement] Fdr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
[CANopen] CnO- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
[DeviceNet] dnC- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
[Profibus] PbC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
[Profinet] PnC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
[Powerlink] EPL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
[EtherCAT Module] EtC- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Chapter 10 [File management] FMt- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
[Transfer config file] tCF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
[Parameter group list] FrY- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
[Firmware update diag] FWUD- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
[Identification] OId- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
[Package version] PFV- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
[Firmware update] FWUP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Chapter 11 [My preferences] MYP- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
11.1 [Language] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
11.2 [Password] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

6 NVE61643 03/2020
 11.3 [Parameter access] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
[Restricted channels] PCd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
[Restricted param] PPA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
[Visibility] VIS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
11.4 [Customization] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
[My menu config.] MYC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
[Display screen type] MSC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
[Param. Bar Select] PbS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
[Customer parameters] CYP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
[Service message] SEr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
11.5 [Date & Time settings] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
11.6 [Access level]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
11.7 [Webserver] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
11.8 [Functions key mgnt] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
11.9 [LCD settings] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
11.10 [QR code] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
11.11 [Pairing password] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
[Pairing password] PPi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Part III Maintenance and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Chapter 12 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Chapter 13 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
13.1 Warning Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
13.2 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
13.3 FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Glossary ..................................................... 629

NVE61643 03/2020 7
8 NVE61643 03/2020
 Safety Information

Important Information

NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before
trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout
this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel.
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this
material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of
electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the
hazards involved.

Qualification Of Personnel
Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and understand the contents of this manual and
all other pertinent product documentation are authorized to work on and with this product. In addition, these
persons must have received safety training to recognize and avoid hazards involved. These persons must
have sufficient technical training, knowledge and experience and be able to foresee and detect potential
hazards that may be caused by using the product, by changing the settings and by the mechanical,
electrical and electronic equipment of the entire system in which the product is used. All persons working
on and with the product must be fully familiar with all applicable standards, directives, and accident
prevention regulations when performing such work.

NVE61643 03/2020 9
Intended Use
This product is a drive for three-phase synchronous, reluctance and asynchronous motors and intended
for industrial use according to this manual.
The product may only be used in compliance with all applicable safety standard and local regulations and
directives, the specified requirements and the technical data. The product must be installed outside the
hazardous ATEX zone. Prior to using the product, you must perform a risk assessment in view of the
planned application. Based on the results, the appropriate safety measures must be implemented. Since
the product is used as a component in an entire system, you must ensure the safety of persons by means
of the design of this entire system (for example, machine design). Any use other than the use explicitly
permitted is prohibited and can result in hazards.

Product Related Information

Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure with this drive.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
 Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and understand the contents of this manual
and all other pertinent product documentation and who have received safety training to recognize and
avoid hazards involved are authorized to work on and with this drive system. Installation, adjustment,
repair and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel.
 The system integrator is responsible for compliance with all local and national electrical code
requirements as well as all other applicable regulations with respect to grounding of all equipment.
 Many components of the product, including the printed circuit boards, operate with mains voltage.
 Only use properly rated, electrically insulated tools and measuring equipment.
 Do not touch unshielded components or terminals with voltage present.
 Motors can generate voltage when the shaft is rotated. Prior to performing any type of work on the
drive system, block the motor shaft to prevent rotation.
 AC voltage can couple voltage to unused conductors in the motor cable. Insulate both ends of unused
conductors of the motor cable.
 Do not short across the DC bus terminals or the DC bus capacitors or the braking resistor terminals.
 Before performing work on the drive system:
 Disconnect all power, including external control power that may be present. Take into account that
the circuit breaker or main switch does not de-energize all circuits.
 Place a Do Not Turn On label on all power switches related to the drive system.
 Lock all power switches in the open position.
 Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge.
 Follow the instructions given in the chapter "Verifying the Absence of Voltage" in the installation
manual of the product.
 Before applying voltage to the drive system:
 Verify that the work has been completed and that the entire installation cannot cause hazards.
 If the mains input terminals and the motor output terminals have been grounded and short-circuited,
remove the ground and the short circuits on the mains input terminals and the motor output
terminals.
 Verify proper grounding of all equipment.
 Verify that all protective equipment such as covers, doors, grids is installed and/or closed.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Damaged products or accessories may cause electric shock or unanticipated equipment operation.

DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK OR UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do not use damaged products or accessories.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Contact your local Schneider Electric sales office if you detect any damage whatsoever.

10 NVE61643 03/2020
 This equipment has been designed to operate outside of any hazardous location. Only install this
equipment in zones known to be free of a hazardous atmosphere.

DANGER
POTENTIAL FOR EXPLOSION
Install and use this equipment in non-hazardous locations only.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Your application consists of a whole range of different interrelated mechanical, electrical, and electronic
components, the drive being just one part of the application. The drive by itself is neither intended to nor
capable of providing the entire functionality to meet all safety-related requirements that apply to your
application. Depending on the application and the corresponding risk assessment to be conducted by you,
a whole variety of additional equipment is required such as, but not limited to, external encoders, external
brakes, external monitoring devices, guards, etc.
As a designer/manufacturer of machines, you must be familiar with and observe all standards that apply
to your machine. You must conduct a risk assessment and determine the appropriate Performance Level
(PL) and/or Safety Integrity Level (SIL) and design and build your machine in compliance with all applicable
standards. In doing so, you must consider the interrelation of all components of the machine. In addition,
you must provide instructions for use that enable the user of your machine to perform any type of work on
and with the machine such as operation and maintenance in a safe manner.
The present document assumes that you are fully aware of all normative standards and requirements that
apply to your application. Since the drive cannot provide all safety-related functionality for your entire
application, you must ensure that the required Performance Level and/or Safety Integrity Level is reached
by installing all necessary additional equipment.

WARNING
INSUFFICIENT PERFORMANCE LEVEL/SAFETY INTEGRITY LEVEL AND/OR UNINTENDED
EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Conduct a risk assessment according to EN ISO 12100 and all other standards that apply to your
application.
 Use redundant components and/or control paths for all critical control functions identified in your risk
assessment.
 If moving loads can result in hazards, for example, slipping or falling loads, operate the drive in closed
loop mode.
 Verify that the service life of all individual components used in your application is sufficient for the
intended service life of your overall application.
 Perform extensive commissioning tests for all potential error situations to verify the effectiveness of
the safety-related functions and monitoring functions implemented, for example, but not limited to,
speed monitoring by means of encoders, short circuit monitoring for all connected equipment, correct
operation of brakes and guards.
 Perform extensive commissioning tests for all potential error situations to verify that the load can be
brought to a safe stop under all conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

A specific application note NHA80973 is available on hoisting machines and can be downloaded on
se.com.

NVE61643 03/2020 11
 Drive systems may perform unexpected movements because of incorrect wiring, incorrect settings,
incorrect data or other errors.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Carefully install the wiring in accordance with the EMC requirements.
 Do not operate the product with unknown or unsuitable settings or data.
 Perform a comprehensive commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and,
for critical control functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure.
Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop, overtravel stop, power outage and restart.
 Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions.
 System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the
implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of the link.
 Observe all accident prevention regulations and local safety guidelines (1).
 Each implementation of the product must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper operation
before being placed into service.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

(1) For USA: Additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control and to NEMA ICS 7.1 (latest edition),
Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable-Speed
Drive Systems.

The temperature of the products described in this manual may exceed 80 °C (176 °F) during operation.

WARNING
HOT SURFACES
 Ensure that any contact with hot surfaces is avoided.
 Do not allow flammable or heat-sensitive parts in the immediate vicinity of hot surfaces.
 Verify that the product has sufficiently cooled down before handling it.
 Verify that the heat dissipation is sufficient by performing a test run under maximum load conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

12 NVE61643 03/2020
 Machines, controllers, and related equipment are usually integrated into networks. Unauthorized persons
and malware may gain access to the machine as well as to other devices on the network/fieldbus of the
machine and connected networks via insufficiently secure access to software and networks.

WARNING
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO THE MACHINE VIA SOFTWARE AND NETWORKS
 In your hazard and risk analysis, consider all hazards that result from access to and operation on the
network/fieldbus and develop an appropriate cybersecurity concept.
 Verify that the hardware infrastructure and the software infrastructure into which the machine is
integrated as well as all organizational measures and rules covering access to this infrastructure
consider the results of the hazard and risk analysis and are implemented according to best practices
and standards covering IT security and cybersecurity, such as:
 ISO/IEC 27000 series, ISO/ IEC 15408, IEC 62351, ISA/IEC 62443,
 NIST Cybersecurity Framework,
 Information Security Forum - Standard of Good Practice for Information Security,
 Schneider Electric Recommended Cybersecurity Best Practices.

 Verify the effectiveness of your IT security and cybersecurity systems using appropriate, proven
methods.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Perform a comprehensive commissioning test to verify that communication monitoring properly detects
communication interruptions
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION DUE TO INCORRECT MAINS VOLTAGE
Before switching on and configuring the product, verify that it is approved for the mains voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NVE61643 03/2020 13
14 NVE61643 03/2020
 About the Book

At a Glance

Document Scope
The purpose of this document is to:
 help you to set up the drive,
 show you how to program the drive,
 show you the different menus, modes, and parameters,
 help you in maintenance and diagnostics.

Validity Note
Original instructions and information given in this manual have been written in English (before optional
translation).
This documentation is valid for the Altivar Machine ATV340 drives.
The technical characteristics of the devices described in the present document also appear online. To
access the information online:

Step Action
1 Go to the Schneider Electric home page www.schneider-electric.com.
2 In the Search box type the reference of a product or the name of a product range.
 Do not include blank spaces in the reference or product range.
 To get information on grouping similar modules, use asterisks (*).

3 If you entered a reference, go to the Product Datasheets search results and click on the reference that
interests you.
If you entered the name of a product range, go to the Product Ranges search results and click on the
product range that interests you.
4 If more than one reference appears in the Products search results, click on the reference that interests
you.
5 Depending on the size of your screen, you may need to scroll down to see the datasheet.
6 To save or print a datasheet as a .pdf file, click Download XXX product datasheet.

The characteristics that are described in the present document should be the same as those character-
istics that appear online. In line with our policy of constant improvement, we may revise content over time
to improve clarity and accuracy. If you see a difference between the document and online information, use
the online information as your reference.

NVE61643 03/2020 15
Related Documents
Use your tablet or your PC to quickly access detailed and comprehensive information on all our products
on www.schneider-electric.com.
The internet site provides the information you need for products and solutions:
 The whole catalog for detailed characteristics and selection guides,
 The CAD files to help design your installation, available in over 20 different file formats,
 All software and firmware to maintain your installation up to date,
 A large quantity of White Papers, Environment documents, Application solutions, Specifications... to
gain a better understanding of our electrical systems and equipment or automation,
 And finally all the User Guides related to your drive, listed below:

(Other option manuals and Instruction sheets are available on www.schneider-electric.com)

Title of Documentation Catalog Number

Digital Catalog for Industrial Automation Digit-Cat
ATV340 Catalog DIA2ED2160701EN (English), DIA2ED2160701FR (French)
ATV340 Getting Started - Video FAQ FA367923 (English)

ATV340 Getting Started NVE37643 (English), NVE37642 (French), NVE37644 (German),

NVE37646 (Spanish), NVE37647 (Italian), NVE37648 (Chinese),
NVE37643PT (Portuguese), NVE37643TR (Turkish)
ATV340 Getting Started Annex (SCCR) NVE37641 (English)
Wiring Diagrams for Frame Sizes S1, S2, S3 NVE97896 (English)
ATV340 Installation Manual NVE61069 (English), NVE61071 (French), NVE61074 (German),
NVE61075 (Spanish), NVE61078 (Italian), NVE61079 (Chinese),
NVE61069PT (Portuguese), NVE61069TR (Turkish)
ATV340 Programming Manual NVE61643 (English), NVE61644 (French), NVE61645 (German),
NVE61647 (Spanish), NVE61648 (Italian), NVE61649 (Chinese),
NVE61643PT (Portuguese), NVE61643TR (Turkish)
ATV340 Modbus manual (Embedded) NVE61654 (English)
ATV340 Ethernet manual (Embedded) NVE61653 (English)
ATV340 PROFIBUS DP manual (VW3A3607) NVE61656 (English)
ATV340 DeviceNet manual (VW3A3609) NVE61683 (English)
ATV340 PROFINET manual (VW3A3627) NVE61678 (English)
ATV340 CANopen manual (VW3A3608, 618, NVE61655 (English)
628)
ATV340 POWERLINK manual - (VW3A3619) NVE61681 (English)
ATV340 EtherCAT manual - (VW3A3601) NVE61686 (English)
ATV340 Sercos III manual (embedded) PHA33735 (English), PHA33737 (French), PHA33738 (German),
PHA33739 (Spanish), PHA33740 (Italian), PHA33741 (Chinese)
ATV340 Communication Parameters NVE61728 (English)
ATV340 Embedded Safety Function Manual NVE64143 (English)
ATV340 Safety functions Manual with Module NVE61741 (English), NVE61742 (French), NVE61745 (German),
VW3A3802 NVE61747 (Spanish), NVE61749 (Italian), NVE61752 (Chinese),
NVE61741PT (Portuguese), NVE61741TR (Turkish)
SoMove FDT SoMove_FDT (English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, Chinese)
Altivar 340: DTM ATV340_DTM_Library_EN (English), ATV340_DTM_Lang_FR
(French), ATV340_DTM_Lang_DE (German),
ATV340_DTM_Lang_SP (Spanish), ATV340_DTM_Lang_IT
(Italian), ATV340_DTM_Lang_CN (Chinese)

16 NVE61643 03/2020
 Title of Documentation Catalog Number
Altivar Application Note for Hoisting NHA80973 (English)
Recommended Cybersecurity Best Practices CS-Best-Practices-2019-340 (English)

You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at
www.schneider-electric.com/en/download

Terminology
The technical terms, terminology, and the corresponding descriptions in this manual normally use the
terms or definitions in the relevant standards.
In the area of drive systems this includes, but is not limited to, terms such as error, error message, failure,
fault, fault reset, protection, safe state, safety function, warning, warning message, and so on.
Among others, these standards include:
 IEC 61800 series: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems
 IEC 61508 Ed.2 series: Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related
 EN 954-1 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems
 EN ISO 13849-1 & 2 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems.
 IEC 61158 series: Industrial communication networks - Fieldbus specifications
 IEC 61784 series: Industrial communication networks - Profiles
 IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines – Part 1: General requirements

In addition, the term zone of operation is used in conjunction with the description of specific hazards, and
is defined as it is for a hazard zone or danger zone in the EC Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC) and in ISO
12100-1.
Also see the glossary at the end of this manual.

Contact Us
Select your country on:
www.schneider-electric.com/contact

Schneider Electric Industries SAS

Head Office
35, rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil-Malmaison
France

NVE61643 03/2020 17
18 NVE61643 03/2020
 Altivar Machine ATV340
Introduction
NVE61643 03/2020

Part I
Introduction

Introduction

What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
1 Setup 21
2 Overview 27
3 Cyber Security 43

NVE61643 03/2020 19
Introduction

20 NVE61643 03/2020
 Altivar Machine ATV340
Setup
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 1
Setup

Setup

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Initial Steps 22
Steps for Setting-Up the Drive 24
Software Enhancements 25

NVE61643 03/2020 21
Setup

Initial Steps

Before Powering up the Drive

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Before switching on the device, verify that no unintended signals can be applied to the digital inputs that
could cause unintended movements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

If the drive was not connected to mains for an extended period of time, the capacitors must be restored to
their full performance before the motor is started.

NOTICE
REDUCED CAPACITOR PERFORMANCE
 Apply mains voltage to the drive for one hour before starting the motor if the drive has not been
connected to mains for the following periods of time:
 12 months at a maximum storage temperature of +50°C (+122°F)
 24 months at a maximum storage temperature of +45°C (+113°F)
 36 months at a maximum storage temperature of +40°C (+104°F)

 Verify that no Run command can be applied before the period of one hour has elapsed.
 Verify the date of manufacture if the drive is commissioned for the first time and run the specified
procedure if the date of manufacture is more than 12 months in the past.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

If the specified procedure cannot be performed without a Run command because of internal mains
contactor control, perform this procedure with the power stage enabled, but the motor being at standstill
so that there is no appreciable mains current in the capacitors.

Mains Contactor

NOTICE
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Do not switch on the drive at intervals of less than 60 s.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Using a Motor with a Lower Rating or Dispensing with a Motor Altogether

In factory settings, the motor output phase loss detection is active: [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL is set to
[OPF Error Triggered] YES. For details, refer to the parameter description (see page 501). For
commissioning tests or maintenance phase, the drive could be connected to a small motor power size and
thus trigger an error [Output Phase Loss] OPF2 or [Single output phase loss] OPF1 when a Run
command is applied.For that purpose, the function can be disabled by setting [OutPhaseLossAssign]
OPL to [Function Inactive] nO.
Set also [Motor control type] Ctt to [SVC V] VVC in [Motor parameters] MPA-. For details, refer to .

NOTICE
MOTOR OVERHEATING
Install external thermal monitoring equipment under the following conditions:
 If a motor with a nominal current of less than 20% of the nominal current of the drive is connected.
 If you use the function Motor Switching.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

22 NVE61643 03/2020
 Setup

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If output phase monitoring is disabled, phase loss and, by implication, accidental disconnection of cables,
are not detected.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

NVE61643 03/2020 23
Setup

Steps for Setting-Up the Drive

Drive systems may perform unexpected movements because of incorrect wiring, incorrect settings,
incorrect data or other errors.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Carefully install the wiring in accordance with the EMC requirements.
 Do not operate the product with unknown or unsuitable settings or data.
 Perform a comprehensive commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Tips
Use the [Config. Source] FCSI parameter (see page 540) to restore the factory settings at any time.
NOTE: The following operations must be performed for optimum drive performance in terms of accuracy
and response time:
 Enter the values indicated on the motor nameplate in the [Motor parameters] MPA- menu.
 Perform autotuning with the motor cold and connected using the [Autotuning] tUn parameter.

24 NVE61643 03/2020
 Setup

Software Enhancements

Overview
Since the ATV340 was first launched, it has benefited from the addition of several new functions. The
software version has been updated to V3.1.
Although this documentation relates to version V3.1, it can still be used with earlier versions.
NOTE: The only software version available for ATV340•••••S is the version V1.4.

Enhancements Made to Version V3.1 in Comparison to V2.1

Fallback feature is added on drive outputs. When the corresponding output is controlled by fieldbus, the
output is reset if an error is triggered.
Advanced motor control is available via [Adv. Motor Control] AEMC parameter in the menu [Motor
parameters] MPA- (see page 155). By default, this new feature is enabled. To complete the advanced
motor control, a new tuning is added: the [Rotation tune] TRAM- (see page 177).
In [Ramp] RAMP- menu, [Braking Current Level] BDCL is added to modify the maximum current level
for braking deceleration.

Enhancements Made to Version V2.1 in Comparison to V1.7

In the tab [Data] MTD- of the [Motor Data] MOA- menu, [Torque Scaling] INRT parameter is added.
It allows to show and modify the scaling of parameters such as [Nom Motor Torque] TQS.
In the [Positioning by sensors] LPO- menu, [Memo Slowdown] MSLO parameter is added. It allows to
enable or disable the memorization of the slowdown.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.7 in Comparison to V1.6

In the [Motor parameters] MPA- menu, the [Input Filter] DCR- menu is available, including its related
parameters.
Improvements on [Brake logic control] BLC- function, refer to the new parameters [BRH b5] BRH5,
[Load Maintain Time] MDFT and [Load Mtn Remain Time] MTBF.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.6 in Comparison to V1.5

Improvements on [Brake logic control] BLC- function. Parameters linked to brake relay feedback have
been added and [BRH b4] BRH4 function can be used to trigger an error.
[Output Contactor Cmd] OCC- and [External Weight Meas.] PES- functions are now available.
Improvement of the password protection to limit the access to the menus.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.5 in Comparison to V1.4

Support of VW3A3619 POWERLINK fieldbus module.
In the [Motor control] DRC- menu, "Output Voltage Management and Over modulation" function is
added.
A new possible behavior is added for the STOP/RESET key, see [Stop Key Enable] PST parameter.
Improvements and new functionalities on [Brake logic control] BLC- functions can be found in their
related menus. New parameters are available and the calculation of the [AUTO] AUTO setting values
have been updated.
The virtual analog input type is now settable with [AIV1 type] AV1T parameters.
Support of bidirectional scaled analog inputs, see [AIx range] AIxL parameters.
In the [Complete settings] CST- menu, the [Encoder configuration] IEN- has been updated with
parameters and affectations added to support the VW3A3424 HTL encoder interface module.
In the [Catch on Fly] FLR- menu, a new selection has been added to allow the function to be active
after stop types different than freewheel.
From this new version, the selection of [Never] Stp on [Fan Mode] FFM has no effect.
[Input phase loss] PHF is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.4 in Comparison to V1.1

Firmware evolution to support Altivar Machine ATV340 Sercos III offer (ATV340•••••S).
NVE61643 03/2020 25
Setup

26 NVE61643 03/2020
 Altivar Machine ATV340
Overview
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 2
Overview

Overview

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Factory Configuration 28
Application Functions 30
Display Terminals 32
Product LEDs 36
Multipoint Screen 39
Structure of the Parameter Table 41
Finding a Parameter in This Document 42

NVE61643 03/2020 27
Overview

Factory Configuration

Factory Settings
The drive is factory-set for common operating conditions:
 Display: drive ready [[Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FRH when motor is ready to run and [Motor Frequency]
RFR when motor is running.
 Stop mode when error detected: freewheel.

This table presents the basic parameters of the drive and their factory setting values:

Code Name Factory setting values

bFr [Motor Standard] [50Hz IEC] 50
tCC [2/3-Wire Control] [2-Wire Control] 2C: 2-wire control
Ctt [Motor control type] [SVC V] VVC: voltage vector control
ACC [Acceleration] 3.0 s
dEC [Deceleration] 3.0 s
LSP [Low Speed] 0.0 Hz
HSP [High Speed] 50.0 Hz
ItH [Motor Th Current] Nominal motor current (value depending on drive rating)
Frd [Forward] [DI1] dI1: Digital input DI1
rrS [Reverse] [DI2] dI2: Digital input DI2
Fr1 [Ref Freq 1 Config] [AI1] AI1: Analog input AI1
r1 [R1 Assignment] [Operating State Fault] FLt: the contact opens when the
drive has detected error or when the drive has been switched
off
brA [Dec.Ramp Adapt] [Yes] YES: function active (automatic adaptation of
deceleration ramp)
Atr [Auto Fault Reset] [No] nO: function inactive
Stt [Type of stop] [On Ramp] rMP: on ramp
AO1 [AQ1 assignment] [Motor Frequency] Ofr: Motor frequency
AO2 [AQ2 assignment] [Motor Current] OCr: Motor current
rSF [Fault Reset Assign] [DI4] dI4: Digital input DI4

NOTE: If you want to restore the drive presettings to their factory values, set [Config. Source] FCSi to
[Macro Config] Ini.
Verify whether the above values are compatible with the application and modify them if required.

Inputs / Outputs Differences

On ATV340, depending on the drive catalog number, the inputs and outputs capabilities are not the same.
The following table gives the number of inputs and outputs depending of the drive rating:

ATV340U07N4• to ATV340D22N4• ATV340D30N4E to ATV340D75N4E

Digital inputs 7 8
Digital outputs 2(1) 1
Relays 2 3

AI1 10 Vdc, 0-20mA, Thermal 10 Vdc, 0-20mA, Thermal

AI2 +-10 Vdc +-10 Vdc
AI3 - 10 Vdc, 0-20mA, Thermal

AQ1 10 Vdc, 0-20mA 10 Vdc, 0-20mA

(1) When using:
 DQ1, DI6 is no longer available.
 DQ2, DI7 is no longer available

28 NVE61643 03/2020
 Overview

ATV340U07N4• to ATV340D22N4• ATV340D30N4E to ATV340D75N4E

AQ2 - 10 Vdc, 0-20mA

Pulse Input Dedicated PTI connector DI7, DI8

Pulse Output Dedicated PTO connector DQ1
(1) When using:
 DQ1, DI6 is no longer available.
 DQ2, DI7 is no longer available

NVE61643 03/2020 29
Overview

Application Functions

Introduction
The following tables show the combinations of functions and applications in order to guide your selection.
The functions in these tables relate to the following applications:
 Packaging:
 Palletizer
 Shrink wrapping machines
 Card box erector

 Material Handling:
 Standard crane
 Automatic storage system
 Grouping conveyors

 Material Working:
 Slitter
 Panel dividing saw
 Cable twisting

Each application has its own special features, and the combinations listed here are not mandatory or
exhaustive.
Some functions are designed specifically for a given application. In this case, the application is identified
by a tab in the margin on the relevant programming pages.

Combinations of Functions and Applications functions:

Function Packaging Material Handling Material Working

Brake sequence (see page 277) ✔
Boost for conical motors (see page 197) ✔
Limit switch management (see page 390) ✔
Torque regulation ✔ ✔
Positioning / Autostop on distance ✔ ✔
(see page 392)
Positioning value for PLC (see page 487) ✔ ✔
Load sharing (see page 301) ✔ ✔
Master/Slave management (see page 239) ✔ ✔
Master/Slave on rigid coupling ✔ ✔
Master/Slave on elastic coupling ✔ ✔
High-speed hoisting (see page 413) ✔
High-speed commutation (see page 386) ✔ ✔

Combination of Functions and Monitoring functions:

Function Packaging Material Handling Material Working

External error (see page 499) ✔ ✔ ✔
Catch on the fly (see page 495) ✔ ✔ ✔
Motor Overspeed (see page 617) ✔ ✔ ✔
Torque limitation (see page 378) ✔ ✔
Encoder check (see page 481) ✔ ✔
Reverse disable (see page 221) ✔ ✔
Thermal monitoring of the braking resistor ✔
(see page 516)
Under load detection (see page 424) ✔
Fast stop (see page 328) ✔ ✔ ✔
Dynamic load detection (see page 305) ✔
Mechanical resonance rejection (see page 209) ✔ ✔ ✔

30 NVE61643 03/2020
 Overview

Function Packaging Material Handling Material Working

Stall monitoring (see page 428) ✔ ✔ ✔
Load slipping monitoring (see page 515) ✔
Rope slack and anti rope slack detection ✔
(see page 298)

Combination of Functions and Configuration management:

Function Packaging Material Handling Material Working

Motor switching (see page 415) ✔ ✔
Configuration switching (see page 415) ✔ ✔ ✔
Parameter switching (see page 406) ✔ ✔
Current threshold function (see page 369) ✔ ✔
Torque threshold reached (see page 370) ✔ ✔ ✔
Thermal state reached (see page 370) ✔ ✔ ✔
Automatic fault reset (see page 492) ✔ ✔ ✔
High speed reached (see page 370) ✔ ✔ ✔
Surge voltage on motor (see page 217) ✔
Parameter customization (see page 553) ✔ ✔ ✔
Pulse input configuration (see page 440) ✔ ✔
Dual rating (see page 152) ✔ ✔ ✔

NVE61643 03/2020 31
Overview

Display Terminals

Introduction
The drive is compatible with the Plain Text Display Terminal (VW3A1113) or with the Graphic Display
Terminal (VW3A1111). These display terminals can be ordered separately.
NOTE: In this manual, the term Display Terminal is used when it concerns both display terminals.

Description of the Plain Text Display Terminal (VW3A1113)

The Plain Text Display Terminal is a local control unit which can be either plugged on the drive or mounted
on the door of an enclosure with its dedicated door mounting kit (VW3A1114).

1 STOP / RESET: Stop command / apply a Fault Reset.

2 ESC: used to quit a menu/parameter or remove the currently displayed value in order to revert to the previous value
retained in the memory
3 Graphic display.
4 Home: access directly the home page.
5 RUN: executes the function assuming it has been configured.
6 Touch wheel / OK: used to save the current value or access the selected menu/parameter. The touch wheel is used
to scroll fast into the menus. Up/down arrows are used for precise selections, right/left arrows are used to select
digits when setting a numerical value of a parameter.

NOTE: Keys 1, 5 and 6 can be used to control the drive if control via the Display Terminal is activated. To
activate the keys on the Display Terminal, you first need to set [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 to [Ref.Freq-
Rmt.Term] LCC.

Description of the Graphic Display

Key
1 Display line: its content can be configured
2 [Drive state] HMIS
3 Customer defined

32 NVE61643 03/2020
 Overview

Key
4 Active control channel
 TERM: Terminals
 HMI: Display Terminal
 MDB: Integrated Modbus serial
 CAN: CANopen®
 NET: Fieldbus module
 ETH: Integrated Ethernet (for ATV340•••N4E)
 PWS: DTM-based commissioning software

5 Menu line: indicates the name of the current menu or submenu

6 Menus, submenus, parameters, values, bar charts, and so on, are displayed in drop-down window format
on a maximum of 2 lines. The line or value selected by the navigation button is displayed in reverse video

Description of the Graphic Display Terminal (VW3A1111)

The Graphic Display Terminal is a local control unit which can be mounted on the door of an enclosure with
its dedicated door mounting kit (VW3A1112). The Graphic Display Terminal embeds a real-time clock used
for the time stamping of logged data and all other functions which require time information.

1 STOP / RESET: Stop command / apply a Fault Reset.

2 LOCAL / REMOTE: used to switch between local and remote control of the drive.
3 ESC: used to quit a menu/parameter or remove the currently displayed value in order to revert to the previous value
retained in the memory
4 F1 to F4: function keys used to access drive id, QR code, quick view, and submenus. Simultaneous press of F1 and
F4 keys generates a screenshot file in the Graphic Display Terminal internal memory.
5 Graphic display.
6 Home: used to access directly at the home page.
7 Information: used to have more information about menus, submenus, and parameters. The selected parameter or
menu code is displayed on the first line of the information page.
8 RUN: executes the function assuming it has been configured.
9 Touch wheel / OK: used to save the current value or access the selected menu/parameter. The touch wheel is used
to scroll fast into the menus. Up/down arrows are used for precise selections, right/left arrows are used to select
digits when setting a numerical value of a parameter.
10 RJ45 Modbus serial port: used to connect the Graphic Display Terminal to the drive in remote control.
11 Mini-B USB port: used to connect the Graphic Display Terminal to a computer.
12 Battery (10 years service life. Type: CR2032). The battery positive pole points to the front face of the Graphic
Display Terminal .

NOTE: Keys 1, 8 and 9 can be used to control the drive if control via the Display Terminal is activated. To
activate the keys on the Display Terminal, you first need to set [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 to [Ref.Freq-
Rmt.Term] LCC.

NVE61643 03/2020 33
Overview

Description of the VW3A1111 Graphic Display

1 Display line: its content can be configured

2 Menu line: indicates the name of the current menu or submenu
3 Menus, submenus, parameters, values, bar charts, and so on, are displayed in drop-down window format on a
maximum of five lines. The line or value selected by the navigation button is displayed in reverse video
4 Section displaying tabs (1 to 4 by menu), these tabs can be accessed using F1 to F4 keys

NOTE: The numbers in front of the menus and submenus in the Graphic Display Terminal are different
from chapters numbers in this programming manual.
Display line details:

Key
1 [Drive state] HMIS
2 Customer defined parameter value
3 Customer defined parameter value
4 Active control channel
 TERM: terminals
 HMI: Display Terminal
 MDB: integrated Modbus serial
 CAN: CANopen®
 NET: fieldbus module
 ETH: integrated Ethernet (for ATV340•••N4E)
 PWS: DTM-based commissioning software

5 Present time
6 Battery level

34 NVE61643 03/2020
 Overview

Graphic Display Terminal Connected to a Computer

NOTICE
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE COMPUTER
Do not connect the Graphic Display Terminal to the drive via a Modbus RJ45 link and to the computer via
a USB link at the same time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The Graphic Display Terminal is recognized as a USB storage device named SE_VW3A1111 while
plugged on a computer.
This allows to access the saved drive configurations (DRVCONF menu) and the Graphic Display Terminal
screenshots (PRTSCR menu).
Screenshots can be stored by a simultaneous press on F1 and F4 function keys

How To Update Language Files on the Graphic Display Terminal?

The Graphic Display Terminal (VW3A1111) language files can be updated.

Download the latest version of language files here: Languages_Drives_VW3A1111
Unzip the file and follow the instructions of the ReadMe text file.

How to customize the logo displayed at power on of the Graphic Display Terminal?

From the firmware version V2.0 of the Graphic Display Terminal, the logo displayed at power on by the
Graphic Display Terminal can be customized. By default, the Schneider-Electric logo is displayed.
To modify the displayed logo, you must:
 Create your own logo and save it as a bitmap file (.bmp) with the name logo_ini. The logo must be saved
in black & white and the dimensions must be 137x32 pixels.
 Connect the Graphic Display Terminal to a computer via an USB cable.
 Copy your logo (logo_init.bmp) in the folder KPCONFIG of the Graphic Display Terminal.

At next power on of the Graphic Display Terminal connected to the drive, your own logo should be
displayed.
If the logo of Schneider-Electric is still displayed, verify the characteristics of your file and the location
where it has been copied.

NVE61643 03/2020 35
Overview

Product LEDs

Introduction
The drive embeds status LEDs that are used to indicate the drive status.
The number of LEDs available varies according to the drive rating.
 For ATV340U07N4• to ATV340D22N4•: 4 LEDs.
 For ATV340D30N4E to ATV340D75N4E: 10 LEDs.

LEDs Description ATV340U07N4• to ATV340D22N4•

Following table provides the details of the drive status LEDs:

Item LED Color & status Description

1 STATUS OFF Indicates that the drive is powered off
Green flashing Indicates that the drive is not running, ready to start
Green blinking Indicates that the drive is in transitory status (acceleration,
deceleration, and so on)
Green on Indicates that the drive is running
Yellow on Device visual identification when using the DTM based
commissioning software
2 Warning/Error Red flashing Indicates that the drive has detected a warning
Red on Indicates that the drive has detected an error
3 ASF Yellow on Indicates that the safety function has been triggered
4 COM Yellow flashing Indicates embedded Modbus serial activity

36 NVE61643 03/2020
 Overview

LEDs Description ATV340D30N4E to ATV340D75N4E

Following table provides the details of the drive status LEDs:

Item LED Color & status Description

1 STATUS OFF Indicates that the drive is powered off
Green flashing Indicates that the drive is not running, ready to start
Green blinking Indicates that the drive is in transitory status (acceleration,
deceleration, and so on)
Green on Indicates that the drive is running
Yellow on Device Visual identification function when using SoMove or the
device DTM
2 Warning/Error Red flashing Indicates that the drive has detected a warning
Red on Indicates that the drive has detected an error
3 ASF Yellow on Indicates that the safety function has been triggered

Following table provides the details of the embedded Ethernet LEDs:

Item LED Color & status Description

4 LNK1 OFF No link.
Green/Yellow flashing Power on testing.
Green on Link established at 100 Mbit/s.
Green flashing Link established at 10 Mbit/s.
Yellow flashing Fieldbus activity at 100 Mbit/s.
Yellow on Fieldbus activity at 10 Mbit/s.
5 MS OFF No power is supplied to the device.
Green/Red flashing Power up testing.
Green on The device is operating correctly.
Green flashing The device has not been configured.
Red flashing The device has detected a recoverable minor detected error.
Red on The device has detected a non-recoverable major detected
error.
6 NS OFF The device does not have an IP address or powered off.
Green/Red flashing Power on testing.
Green on A connection is established to control the command word.
Green flashing Device has a valid IP, but no command word connection.
Red flashing Duplicated IP.
Red on An established connection to control the command word is
closes or timed out.

NVE61643 03/2020 37
Overview

Item LED Color & status Description

7 LNK2 OFF No link.
Green/Yellow flashing Power on testing.
Green on Link established at 100 Mbit/s.
Green flashing Link established at 10 Mbit/s.
Yellow flashing Fieldbus activity at 100 Mbit/s.
Yellow on Fieldbus activity at 10 Mbit/s.

Following table provides the details of the embedded Modbus serial LEDs:

Item LED Color & status Description

8 COM Yellow flashing Indicates embedded Modbus serial activity

Following table provides the details of the fieldbus module LEDs:

Item LED Color & status Description

9 NET 1 Green/Red For details, refer to the fieldbus manual
10 NET 2 Green/Red For details, refer to the fieldbus manual

Sercos III LEDs on ATV340•••••S

Please refer to the ATV340 Sercos III manual PHA33735 (English).

38 NVE61643 03/2020
 Overview

Multipoint Screen

Overview
Generally, a Display Terminal is connected to only one drive. However, communication is possible
between a Display Terminal and several Altivar drives (ATV320, ATV340, ATV600, and ATV900)
connected on the same Modbus serial fieldbus via the RJ45 port (HMI or Modbus serial). In such a case,
the multipoint mode is automatically applied on the Display Terminal.
The multipoint mode allows you to:
 Have an overview of all the drives connected on the fieldbus (drive state and two selected parameters).
 Access to all the menus of each drive connected on the fieldbus.
 Command a stop on all the connected drives with the STOP/RESET key (irrespective of the present
screen displayed). The type of stop can be individually configured on each drive with the parameter
[Stop Key Enable] PST in the menu [Command and Reference] CRP- (see page 221).
Apart the Stop function linked to the STOP/RESET key, the multipoint mode does not allow to apply a Fault
Reset and command the drive via the Display Terminal: in multipoint mode, the Run key and the
Local/Remote key are deactivated.

Prerequisites
To use the multipoint mode:
 The Display Terminal software version must be equal to or higher than V2.0.
 For each drive, the command channel and the reference channel must be set in advance to a value
different from [Ref.Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC (see page 221).
 The address of each drive must be configured in advance to different values by setting the parameter
[Modbus Address] ADD in the [Modbus Fieldbus] MD1- (see page 530).
 If the connection to the drive is done via the HMI RJ45 port, the parameter settings in [Modbus HMI]
MD2- must be compliant with the Display Terminal usage (see page 534).
 If the connection to the drive is done via the Modbus serial RJ45 port, the parameter settings in [Modbus
Fieldbus] Md1- must be compliant with the Display Terminal usage (see page 530).

Example of Installation Topology

The following figure gives a topology example using four drives, a Modbus “T” tap-off (VW3A8306TF03)
and one Graphic Display Terminal (VW3A1111) linked to one Modbus splitter block (LU9GC3):

NVE61643 03/2020 39
Overview

Screens for Multipoint Mode

The following figure gives the browsing between the different screens linked to the multipoint mode:

On the fieldbus common with the Display Terminal, if two or more drives are powered on, you access to
the [connection in progress] screen. If there is no address selected by the Display Terminal or no
recognized address, the Display Terminal is locked on this screen. Press OK key to access to the [Multi-
point Addresses] screen. Otherwise, if there are addresses-selected and one of them have been
recognized by the Display Terminal, the screen switches automatically to [Multipoint screen].
The [Multi-point Addresses] screen allows to select, by pressing OK key, the addresses of the drives you
want to connect with. Up to 32 addresses can be selected (address setting range: 1…247). When all the
addresses have been selected, press ESC key to access to the [Multipoint screen].
NOTE: To help to prevent a low refresh rate of the Display Terminal screen, do not select addresses that
are not corresponding to drive addresses.
On the [Multipoint screen], the touch wheel is used to navigate between the drive overviews. Access to the
menus of the selected drive by pressing OK key. Return to the [Multipoint screen] by pressing ESC key.
NOTE: To access the [Multi-point Addresses] screen from the [Multipoint screen], press F1 key.
If a drive triggers an error, the Display Terminal goes automatically to the [Multipoint screen] on the
overview of the latest drive who has triggered an error.
The two parameters given in the drive overview can be modified individually on each drive in [Param. Bar
Select] [PbS-] menu (see page 555).

40 NVE61643 03/2020
 Overview

Structure of the Parameter Table

General Legend

Pictogram Description
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu.
When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for
the corresponding function, their description is detailed in these menus, on the pages indicated,
to aid programming.
Setting of this parameter can be done during operation or when stopped.
NOTE: It is advisable to stop the motor before modifying any of the settings.
To modify the assignment of the parameter, reinforced validation is required.

Parameter Presentation
Below is an example of a parameter presentation:

NVE61643 03/2020 41
Overview

Finding a Parameter in This Document

With the Manual

It is possible to use either the parameter name or the parameter code to search in the manual the page
giving details of the selected parameter.

Difference Between Menu and Parameter

A dash after menu and submenu codes is used to differentiate menu commands from parameter codes.
Example:

Level Name Code

Menu [Ramp] rAMP-
Parameter [Acceleration] ACC

42 NVE61643 03/2020
 Altivar Machine ATV340
Cyber Security
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 3
Cyber Security

Cyber Security

Cyber Security

Introduction
Cyber Security is a branch of network administration that addresses attacks on or by computer systems
and through computer networks that can result in accidental or intentional disruptions.
The objective of Cyber Security is to help provide increased levels of protection for information and physical
assets from theft, corruption, misuse, or accidents while maintaining access for their intended users.
No single Cyber Security approach is adequate. Schneider Electric recommends a defense-in-depth
approach. Conceived by the National Security Agency (NSA), this approach layers the network with
security features, appliances, and processes.
The basic components of this approach are:
 Risk assessment
 A security plan built on the results of the risk assessment
 A multi-phase training campaign
 Physical separation of the industrial networks from enterprise networks using a demilitarized zone
(DMZ) and the use of firewalls and routing to establish other security zones
 System access control
 Device hardening
 Network monitoring and maintenance

This chapter defines the elements that help you configure a system that is less susceptible to cyber attacks.
For detailed information on the defense-in-depth approach, refer to the TVDA: How Can I Reduce
Vulnerability to Cyber Attacks in the Control Room (STN V2) on the Schneider Electric website.
To submit a Cyber Security question, report security issues, or get the latest news from Schneider Electric,
visit the Schneider Electric website.

Password Management
The system is secured thanks to several passwords:
 Drive password (see page 549) must contain six characters (blanks are allowed)
 Webserver password (see page 559) must contain:
 A total of eight characters
 At least one upper-case letter
 At least one lower-case letter
 At least one special character (for example, @, #, $)
 No blank character

NOTE: After five unsuccessful login attempts, the access must be reactivated by the administrator.
Schneider Electric recommends to:
 Modify the password every 90 days
 Use a dedicated password (not related to your personal password)

NOTE: No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences if anyone hacks your
product password and if you use the same password for personal usage.

Backing-up and Restoring the Software Configuration

To protect your data, Schneider Electric recommends backing-up the device configuration and keeping
your backup file in a safe place. The backup is available in the device DTM, using "load from device" and
"store to device" functions.

Remote Access to the Drive

When remote access is used between a device and the drive, ensure your network is secure
(VPN,Firewall…).

NVE61643 03/2020 43
Cyber Security

Machines, controllers, and related equipment are usually integrated into networks. Unauthorized persons
and malware may gain access to the machine as well as to other devices on the network/fieldbus of the
machine and connected networks via insufficiently secure access to software and networks.

WARNING
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO THE MACHINE VIA SOFTWARE AND NETWORKS
 In your hazard and risk analysis, consider all hazards that result from access to and operation on the
network/fieldbus and develop an appropriate cybersecurity concept.
 Verify that the hardware infrastructure and the software infrastructure into which the machine is
integrated as well as all organizational measures and rules covering access to this infrastructure
consider the results of the hazard and risk analysis and are implemented according to best practices
and standards covering IT security and cybersecurity, such as:
 ISO/IEC 27000 series, ISO/ IEC 15408, IEC 62351, ISA/IEC 62443,
 NIST Cybersecurity Framework,
 Information Security Forum - Standard of Good Practice for Information Security,
 Schneider Electric Recommended Cybersecurity Best Practices.

 Verify the effectiveness of your IT security and cybersecurity systems using appropriate, proven
methods.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Data Flow Restriction

To secure the access to the drive and limit the data flow, the use of a firewall device is required.
ConneXium Tofino Firewall Product
The ConneXium TCSEFEA Tofino Firewall is a security appliance that provides levels of protection against
cyber threats for industrial networks, automation systems, SCADA systems, and process control systems.
This Firewall is designed to permit or deny communications between devices connected to the external
network connection of the Firewall and the protected devices connected to the internal network connection.
The Firewall can restrict network traffic based on user defined rules that would permit only authorized
devices, communication types and services.
The Firewall includes built-in security modules and an off-line configuration tool for creating secure zones
within an industrial automation environment.

Control Command Restriction

To prevent unauthorized use of the command of the drive, it is possible to grant access to a limited number
of IP address using the IP master parameter.
The parameter IP Master defines which device can command with the device. This parameter is available
in the device DTM.

Deactivation of unused functions

To avoid unauthorized access, it is advisable to deactivate unused functions.
Example: WebServer, Fast Device Replacement …

44 NVE61643 03/2020
 Altivar Machine ATV340
Programming
NVE61643 03/2020

Part II
Programming

Programming

What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
4 [Simply start] SYS- 47
5 [Dashboard] dSH- 55
6 [Diagnostics] dIA- 61
7 [Display] MOn- 73
8 [Complete settings] CSt- 149
9 [Communication] COM- 529
10 [File management] FMt- 539
11 [My preferences] MYP- 547

NVE61643 03/2020 45
Programming

46 NVE61643 03/2020
 Altivar Machine ATV340
Simply start SYS-
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 4
[Simply start] SYS-

[Simply start] SYS-

Introduction

[Simply start] SYS- menu contains 3 tabs for quick access to mains features:
 Simply Start tab which gives a quick access to basic parameters to set.
 My Menu tab which is a user-defined menu for quick access to specific parameters.
 Modified Parameters tab which gives a quick access to the 10 last modified parameters.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Simply start] SIM- Menu 48
[My menu] MYMn- Menu 54
[Modified parameters] LMd- Menu 54

NVE61643 03/2020 47
Simply start SYS-

[Simply start] SIM- Menu

Access
[Simply start] [Simply start]

About This Menu

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Fully read and understand the manual of the connected motor.
 Verify that all motor parameters are correctly set by referring to the nameplate and the manual of the
connected motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

This menu provides a quick access to the basic parameters to set.

[Motor Standard] bFr

Motor standard.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVC.

This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters:

 [High Speed] HSP
 [Motor Freq Thd] Ftd
 [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS
 [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS
 [Max Frequency] tFr

Setting Code / Value Description

[50 Hz IEC] 50 IEC
Factory setting
[60 Hz NEMA] 60 NEMA

[Nominal motor power] nPr

Nominal motor power.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVC, and

 [Motor param choice] MPC is set to [Mot Power] nPr.

Rated motor power given on the nameplate, in kW if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [50Hz IEC] 50, in
HP if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60Hz NEMA] 60.

Setting Description
According to drive rating Setting range
Factory setting: according to the drive rating

48 NVE61643 03/2020
 Simply start SYS-

[Nom Motor Voltage] UnS

Nominal motor voltage.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVC.

Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate.

Setting Description
100.0...690.0 Vac Setting range
Factory setting: according to drive rating and [Motor Standard] bFr

[Nom Motor Current] nCr

Rated motor current given on the nameplate.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVC.

Setting Description
0.25...1.8 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: according to drive rating and [Motor Standard] bFr
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Nominal Motor Freq] FrS

Nominal motor frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVC.

The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to 60 Hz.

Setting Description
10.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 50.0 Hz

NVE61643 03/2020 49
Simply start SYS-

[Nominal Motor Speed] nSP

Nominal motor speed.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVC.

If the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, use one of the formulas to
calculate the rated speed:

 Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x

 Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors)

 Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors).

Setting Description
0...65,535 rpm Setting range
Factory setting: according to drive rating

[Motor 1 Cosinus Phi] COS

Nominal motor cosinus Phi.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVC, and

 [Motor param choice] MPC is set to [Mot Cosinus] COS.

Setting Description
0.50...1.00 Setting range
Factory setting: according to the drive rating

[2/3-Wire Control] tCC

2-wire or 3-wire control.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If this parameter is changed, the parameters [Reverse Assign] rrS and [2-wire type] tCt and the
assignments of the digital inputs are reset to the factory setting.
Verify that this change is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

50 NVE61643 03/2020
 Simply start SYS-

Setting Code / Value Description

[2-Wire Control] 2C 2-wire control (level commands): This is the input state (0 or 1) or edge (0
to 1 or 1 to 0), which controls running or stopping.
Example of source wiring:

DI1 Forward
DIx Reverse

Factory setting
[3-Wire Control] 3C 3-wire control (pulse commands) [3 wire]: A forward or reverse pulse is
sufficient to command starting, a stop pulse is sufficient to command
stopping.
Example of source wiring:

DI1 Stop
DI2 Forward
DIx Reverse

[Max Frequency] tFr

Maximum output frequency.
The factory setting is 60 Hz, or preset to 72 Hz if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to 60 Hz.
To help prevent [Motor Overspeed] SOF error, it is recommended to have [Max Frequency] TFR equal
to or higher than 110% of [High Speed] HSP.

Setting Description
10.0...599.0 Hz(1) Setting range
Factory setting: 60 Hz
(1) The maximum of the range is 10 * [Nominal Motor Freq] FRS for an asynchronous law or 10 * [Sync Nominal
Freq] FRSS for a synchronous law.

[Autotuning] tUn

WARNING
UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT
Autotuning moves the motor in order to tune the control loops.
 Only start the system if there are no persons or obstructions in the zone of operation.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

During autotuning, noise development and oscillations of the system are normal.
If [Autotuning Type] tunt is set to [Standard] std, during autotuning, the motor makes small
movements.
If [Autotuning Type] tunt is set to [Rotation] rot, during autotuning, the motor runs at half of its
nominal frequency.
In any case, the motor has to be stopped before performing a tune operation. Verify that the application
does not make the motor turn during the tune operation.
The tune operation optimizes:
 The motor performances at low speed.
 The estimation of the motor torque.

NVE61643 03/2020 51
Simply start SYS-

Autotuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a “freewheel stop” or “fast stop”
function has been assigned to a digital input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
Autotuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands, which will be taken into account after the
autotuning sequence.
If autotuning has detected error, the drive always displays [No action] nO and, depending on the
configuration of [Tuning Error Resp] tnL, may switch to [Autotuning] tUn detected error mode.
Autotuning may last for several seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the Display Terminal to
change to [No action] nO.
NOTE: The motor thermal state has a significant influence on the tuning result. Always perform a motor
tuning with the motor stopped and cold. Verify that the application does not have the motor operate during
a tuning operation.
To redo a motor tuning, wait that it is stopped and cold. Set first [Autotuning] tUn to [Erase Autotuning]
CLr, then redo the motor tuning.
The use of the motor tuning without doing a [Erase Autotuning] CLr first is used to get the thermal state
estimation of the motor.
The cable length has an influence on the tune result. If the wiring is modified, it is necessary to redo the
tune operation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No action] nO Autotuning not in progress

Factory setting
[Apply Autotuning] YES Autotuning is performed immediately if possible, then the parameter
automatically changes to [No action] nO. If the drive state does not allow
the tune operation immediately, the parameter changes to [No action] nO
and the operation must be done again.
[Erase Autotuning] CLr The motor parameters measured by the autotuning function are reset. The
default motor parameter values are used to control the motor. [Autotuning
Status] tUS is set to [Not done] tAB.

[Autotuning Status] tUS

Autotuning status.
(for information only, cannot be modified)
This parameter is not saved at drive power off. It shows the autotuning status since last power-on.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not done] tAb Autotune is not done

Factory setting
[Pending] PEnd Autotune has been requested but not yet performed
[In Progress] PrOG Autotune is in progress
[Error] FAIL Autotune has detected an error
[Autotuning Done] dOnE Autotuning is done.
The motor parameters measured by the autotuning function are used to
control the motor.

[Tune Selection] StUn

Tune selection.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Default] tAb The default motor parameter values are used to control the motor
Factory setting
[Measure] MEAS The values measured by the autotuning function are used to control the
motor
[Custom] CuS The values manually set are used to control the motor

52 NVE61643 03/2020
 Simply start SYS-

[Motor Th Current] ItH

Motor thermal monitoring current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate.

Setting Description

0.2...1.8 In(1) Setting range

Factory setting: According to drive rating
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Acceleration] ACC
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS. To have a repeatability in the ramps, the
value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.

Setting Description
0.0...6,000.0 s (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 3.0 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] Inr.

[Deceleration] dEC
Time to decelerate from the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS to 0. To have a repeatability in the ramps, the
value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.

Setting Description
0.0...6,000.0 s (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 3.0 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] Inr.

[Low Speed] LSP

Low speed.
Motor frequency at minimum reference, can be set between 0 and [High Speed] HSP.

Setting Description

0.0... [High Speed] HSP Hz Setting range

Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[High Speed] HSP

High speed.
Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low Speed] LSP and [Max Frequency]
tFr. The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60Hz NEMA] 60.
To help prevent [Motor Overspeed] SOF error, it is recommended to have [Max Frequency] TFR equal
to or higher than 110% of [High Speed] HSP.

Setting Description

0.0...[Max Frequency] TFR Hz Setting range

Factory setting: 50.0 Hz

NVE61643 03/2020 53
Simply start SYS-

[My menu] MYMn- Menu

Access
[Simply start] [My menu]

About This Menu

This menu contains the parameters selected in the [My menu config.] MyC- Menu.
NOTE: This menu is empty by default.

[Modified parameters] LMd- Menu

Access
[Simply start] [Modified parameters]

About This Menu

This menu gives a quick access to the 10 last modified parameters.

54 NVE61643 03/2020
 Altivar Machine ATV340
Dashboard dSH-
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 5
[Dashboard] dSH-

[Dashboard] dSH-

Introduction

[Dashboard] dSH- menu contains tabs for quick access to system and display features:
 System tab to configure the main system parameters.
 Energy tab which provides a complete access for instantaneous power counters and energy reports by
means of graphics on the Display Terminal.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[System] dst- Menu 56
[Dashboard] dSH- Menu 57
[kWh Counters]KWC- menu 58
[Dashboard] dSH- Menu 59

NVE61643 03/2020 55
Dashboard dSH-

[System] dst- Menu

Access
[Dashboard] [System]

[Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH

Frequency reference before ramp (signed value).
Actual frequency reference linked to the motor regardless of which channel for reference value has been
selected. This parameter is in read-only mode.

Setting Description
-[High Speed] HSP...[High Speed] Setting range
HSP Hz Factory setting: –

[Drive State] HMIS

Drive state.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Autotuning] tUn Autotuning
[In DC inject.] dCb DC Injection
[Ready] rdY Drive ready
[Freewheel] nSt Freewheel stop control
[Running] rUn Motor in steady state or run command present and zero reference
[Accelerating] ACC Acceleration
[Decelerating] dEC Deceleration
[Current limitation] CLI In current limitation
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[No Mains Voltage] nLP Control is powered on but the DC bus is not loaded
[control.stop] CtL Controlled stop
[Dec. adapt.] Obr Adapted deceleration
[Output cut] SOC Stand by output cut
[Undervoltage USA Undervoltage warning
Warning]
[“Operating State FLt Product has detected an error
"Fault"“]
[DCP Flashing dCP DCP flashing mode
Mode]
[STO Active] StO Safe Torque Off active
[Firmware Update] FWUP Firmeware update
[Angle test] ASA Angle setting

[Motor Current] LCr

Motor current.

Setting Description
According to drive rating Setting range
Factory setting: –

56 NVE61643 03/2020
 Dashboard dSH-

[Motor speed] SPd

Motor speed in rpm.
This parameter displays the estimated rotor speed without motor slip.

Setting Description
0...65,535 rpm Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Motor Therm state] tHr

Motor thermal state.
The nominal motor thermal state is 100%, the [Motor Overload] OLF threshold is set to 118%.

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Dashboard] dSH- Menu

Access
[Dashboard]

[Trq/Spd] Cts
Displays the torque versus speed curve.

NVE61643 03/2020 57
Dashboard dSH-

[kWh Counters]KWC- menu

Access
[Dashboard] [kWh Counters]

About This Menu

This menu presents many energy objects available for instantaneous data and kW consumption reports.
It offers the possibility to display logged data with graphics by pressing the F4 function key.

[Elc Energy Cons] OC4

Electrical energy consumed by the motor in TWh.
This parameter can be accessed if [Elc energy cons(TWh)] OC4 is not set to 0.

Setting Description
0...999 TWh Setting range
Factory setting: Read Only

[Elc Energy Cons] OC3

Electrical energy consumed by the motor in GWh.

Setting Description
0...999 GWh Setting range
Factory setting: Read Only

[Elc Energy Cons] OC2

Electrical energy consumed by the motor in MWh.

Setting Description
0...999 MWh Setting range
Factory setting: Read Only

[Elc Energy Cons] OC1

Electrical energy consumed by the motor in kWh.

Setting Description
0...999 kWh Setting range
Factory setting: Read Only

[Elc Energy Cons] OC0

Electrical energy consumed by the motor in Wh.

Setting Description
0...999 Wh Setting range
Factory setting: Read Only

[Acv Elc Out Pwr Estm] EPrW

Active electrical output power estimation.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Setting range
Value in kW or HP according to [Motor Standard] bFr setting
Factory setting: Read Only

58 NVE61643 03/2020
 Dashboard dSH-

[Elc Egy Today] OCt

Electrical energy consumed today by the motor in kWh.

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 kWh Setting range in kWh
Factory setting: Read Only

[Elc Egy Yesterday] OCY

Electrical energy consumed yesterday by the motor in kWh.

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 kWh Setting range in kWh
Factory setting: Read Only

[Dashboard] dSH- Menu

Access
[Dashboard]

About This Menu

Using F4 function key on the Display Terminal, it is possible to select one of the following view for the
[Energy] tab.

[Instant kW Trend] CV1

Displays the instantaneous electrical energy curve at the drive output.

[Daily kWh Report] HSd

Displays the daily energy histogram.

[Weekly kWh Report] HSW

Displays the weekly energy histogram.

[Monthly kWh Report] HSM

Displays the monthly energy histogram.

[Yearly kWh Report] HSY

Displays the yearly energy histogram.

NVE61643 03/2020 59
Dashboard dSH-

60 NVE61643 03/2020
 Altivar Machine ATV340
Diagnostics dIA-
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 6
[Diagnostics] dIA-

[Diagnostics] dIA-

Introduction

[Diagnostics] dIA- menu presents drive and application data useful when diagnostics is required.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
6.1 [Diag. data] 62
6.2 [Error history] pFH- Menu 67
6.3 [Warnings] ALr- Menu 70

NVE61643 03/2020 61
Diagnostics dIA-

Section 6.1
[Diag. data]

[Diag. data]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Diag. data] ddt- Menu 63
[Service message] SEr- Menu 65
[Other State] SSt- Menu 65
[Diagnostics] dAU- Menu 66
[Identification] OId- Menu 66

62 NVE61643 03/2020
 Diagnostics dIA-

[Diag. data] ddt- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Diag. data]

About This Menu

This menu presents the actual warning and detected error in addition to drive data.

[Last Warning] LALr

Last warning which occurred.
The list of warning codes is available in the chapter "Diagnostics and Troubleshooting" (see page 570).

[Last Error] LFt

Last error which occurred.
The list of error codes is available in the chapter "Diagnostics and Troubleshooting" (see page 572).

[Identification Error] inf6

Identification Error (inF6).
This parameter can be accessed if [Last Error] lft is [Identification Error] inf6.

Setting Description
0...12 (value in Hex.) Value = 0x00 : No error detected
Value = 0x01 : No response of the option module
Value = 0x02 : Signature reception timeout
Value = 0x03 : ACK reception timeout
Value = 0x04 : Signature length
Value = 0x05 : CheckSum
Value = 0x06 : Unknown state
Value = 0x07 : UART receive
Value = 0x08 : Unknown protocol version
Value = 0x09 : Unknown module type
Value = 0x0A : More than 5 unsuccessful tries
Value = 0x0B : Unknown module type
Value = 0x0C : Option module not supported by the slot
Value = 0x0D : Same option module in more than one slot
Value = 0x0E : O1SV not received
Value = 0x0F : O1SV option module software version not compatible
Value = 0x10 : reserved
Value = 0x11 : reserved
Value = 0x12 : Control terminal module not present or not recognized
Factory setting: –

[Internal Error 19] infj

Encoder module error code.
This parameter can be accessed if [Last Error] lft is [Internal Error 19] infj.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting Range
Factory setting: –

[Encoder Fdbck Error] enCE

Encoder feedback error code.
This parameter can be accessed if [Last Error] lft is [Encoder Feedback Loss] spf.

NVE61643 03/2020 63
Diagnostics dIA-

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Encoder error Id
1: Encoder power supply overcurrent
10: AB encoder: A-line disconnected
11: AB encoder: B-line disconnected
12: AB encoder: tracking error
13: AB encoder: spike error
20: Resolver: LOS error
21: Resolver: DOS error
22: Resolver: LOT error
30: SinCos: loss of signal
31: SinCos: loss of signal
32: SinCos: tracking error
33: SinCos: spike error
40: Hiperface: timeout while waiting for response and retry exceeded
41: Hiperface: encoder type is not known and can not be read from encoder
EEPROM
42: Hiperface: Hiperface command GetAbsolutePosition error
43: Hiperface: checksum error detected and retry exceeded
50: Endat: communication error
51: Endat: encoder not connected
52...56: Endat: error reading EnDat21 parameter
57: Endat: encoder does not support EnDat22
58: Endat: runtime compensation procedure
59: Endat: runtime compensation procedure
60: Endat: error in cyclic communication
Factory setting: –

[Nb Of Start] nSM

Number of motor starts (resettable).

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[Motor Run Time] rtHH

Motor run time.
Run elapsed time display (resettable) in 0.1 hours (length of time the motor has been switched on).

Setting Description
0.0...429,496,729.5 h Setting range
Factory setting: _

64 NVE61643 03/2020
 Diagnostics dIA-

[Service message] SEr- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Diag. data] [Service message]

About This Menu

This menu presents the service messages.
This is a user-defined service message configured in [My preferences] MYP [Customization] CUS
[Service messages] SEr.

[Other State] SSt- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Diag. data] [Other State]

About This Menu

List of secondary states.

List
[Sleep Active] SLM
[Set 1 active] CFP1
[Set 2 active] CFP2
[Set 3 active] CFP3
[Automatic restart] AUtO
[DC Bus Charged] dbL
[Fast stop Active] FSt
[Fallback Frequency] FrF
[Speed Maintained] rLS
[Type of stop] Stt
[Encoder Config] iCC
[In braking] brs
[DC Bus Ripple Warn] DCRW
[Ref Freq Warning] SrA
[Forward] MFrd
[Reverse] MrrS
[In motor fluxing] FLX
[Autotuning] tUn

NVE61643 03/2020 65
Diagnostics dIA-

[Diagnostics] dAU- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Diag. data] [Diagnostics]

About This Menu

This menu allows to make simple test sequences for diagnostics.

[FAN Diagnostics] FNT

Diagnostics of internal fan(s).
This will start a test sequence.

[HMI LED Diagnostics] HLT

Diagnostics of product LED(s).
This will start a test sequence.

[IGBT Diag w motor]IWT

Diagnostics of product IGBT(s).
This will start a test sequence with the connected motor (open circuit/short-circuit).

[IGBT Diag w/o motor]IWOT

Diagnostics of product IGBT(s).
This will start a test sequence without the motor (short-circuit).

[Identification] OId- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Diag. data] [Identification]

About This Menu

This is a read-only menu that cannot be configured. It enables the following information to be displayed:
 Drive reference, power rating, and voltage
 Drive software version
 Drive serial number
 Type of option modules present, with their software version
 Display Terminal type and version

66 NVE61643 03/2020
 Diagnostics dIA-

Section 6.2
[Error history] pFH- Menu

[Error history] pFH- Menu

[Error history] pFH- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Error history]

About This Menu

This menu shows the 15 last detected errors (dP1 to dPF).
Pressing OK key on the selected error code in the Error history list displays the drive data recorded when
the error has been detected.
NOTE: Same content for [Last Error 1] dP1 to [Last Error F] dPF.

[Last Error 1] dP1

Last error 1.
Identical to [Last Error] LFt (see page 63).

[Drive State] HS1

HMI status.
Identical to [Drive State] HMIS (see page 56).

[Last Error 1 Status] Ep1

Status of last error 1.
DRIVECOM status register (same as [ETA state word] EtA).

[ETI state word] Ip1

ETI state word.
ETI status register (see the communication parameter file).

[Cmd word] CMP1

Cmd word.
Command register (same as [Cmd word] CMd).

[Motor current] LCP1

Motor current (same as [Motor Current] LCr).

Setting Description
0...2*In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: _
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Output frequency] rFp1

Output frequency (same as [Output frequency] rFr).

Setting Description
-3,276.7...3,276.7 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: _

NVE61643 03/2020 67
Diagnostics dIA-

[Elapsed Time] rtp1

Elapsed time.

Setting Description
0...65,535 h Setting range
Factory setting: _

[DC bus voltage] ULp1

DC bus voltage (same as [DC bus voltage] VBUS).

Setting Description
1.0...860.0 Vac Setting range: [No meas.] ULNUNK is displayed if no value is measured.
Factory setting: _

[Motor therm state] tHP1

Motor thermal state (same as [Motor Therm state] tHr).

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Command Channel] dCC1

Command channel (same as [Command channel] CMdC).

Setting Code / Value Description

[Terminals] tEr Terminal block
[Ref. Freq- LCC Display Terminal
Rmt.Term]
[Modbus] Mdb Modbus serial
[CANopen] CAn CANopen
[Com. Module] nEt Fieldbus module
[Ethernet Module] Eth Embedded Ethernet
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[PC tool] pws DTM based commissioning software

[Ref Freq Channel] drC1

Channel for reference frequency (same as [Ref Freq Channel] rFCC).
Identical to [Command channel] dCC1 (see page 68).

[Motor Torque] OtP1

Estimated motor torque value (same as [Motor Torque] Otr).
NOTE: The displayed value is always positive in motor mode and negative in generator mode whatever
the direction.

Setting Description
-300...300% Setting range
Factory setting: _

68 NVE61643 03/2020
 Diagnostics dIA-

[Drive Thermal State] tdP1

Measured drive thermal state (same as [Drive Therm State] tHd).

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: _

[IGBT Junction Temp] tJP1

Estimated junction temperature value.

Setting Description
0...255°C Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Switching Frequency] SFP1

Switching frequency applied (related to [Switching Frequency] SFr).

Setting Description
0...65,535 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Last Error 2] dP2 to [Last Error F] dPF

Last error 2... Last error F
Identical to [Last Error1] dP1 (see page 67).

NVE61643 03/2020 69
Diagnostics dIA-

Section 6.3
[Warnings] ALr- Menu

[Warnings] ALr- Menu

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Actual warnings] ALrd- Menu 71
[Warning group 1 definition] A1C- to [Warning group 5 definition] A5C- Menus 71
[Warnings] ALr- Menu 71

70 NVE61643 03/2020
 Diagnostics dIA-

[Actual warnings] ALrd- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Warnings] [Actual warnings]

About This Menu

List of current warnings.
If a warning is active, and appears on the Display Terminal.

List of Available Warnings

The list of warning codes is available in the chapter "Diagnostics and Troubleshooting" (see page 570).

[Warning group 1 definition] A1C- to [Warning group 5 definition] A5C- Menus

Access
[Diagnostics] [Warnings] [Warning group 1 definition] to [Warning group 5 definition]

About This Menu

The following submenus group the warnings into 1 to 5 groups, each of which can be assigned to a relay
or a digital output for remote signaling.
When one or a number of warnings selected in a group occurs, this warning group is activated.

List of Warnings
The list of warning codes is available in the chapter "Diagnostics and Troubleshooting" (see page 570).

[Warnings] ALr- Menu

Access
[Diagnostics] [Warnings]

About This Menu

This menu presents the warning history (30 past warnings).

[Warning History] ALH

Identical to [Last warning] LALr (see page 63).

NVE61643 03/2020 71
Diagnostics dIA-

72 NVE61643 03/2020
 Altivar Machine ATV340
Display MOn-
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 7
[Display] MOn-

[Display] MOn-

Introduction

[Display] MOn- menu shows monitoring data related to the drive and the application.
It offers an application-oriented display in terms of energy, cost, cycle, efficiency, ...
This is available with customized units and graphics view.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
7.1 [Energy parameters] 74
7.2 [Application parameters] 80
7.3 [M/S parameters] 81
7.4 [Motor parameters] 86
7.5 [Drive parameters] 88
7.6 [Thermal monitoring] 92
7.7 [PID display] 93
7.8 [Counter management] 94
7.9 [Other state] 96
7.10 [I/O map] 97
7.11 [Communication map] 120
7.12 [Data logging] 144

NVE61643 03/2020 73
Display MOn-

Section 7.1
[Energy parameters]

[Energy parameters]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Elec Ener Input Counter] ELI- Menu 75
[Elec Ener Output Counter] ELO- Menu 76
[Mechanical energy] MEC- Menu 78
[Energy saving] ESA- Menu 79

74 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

[Elec Ener Input Counter] ELI- Menu

Access
[Display] [Energy parameters] [Elec Ener Input Counter]

About This Menu

This menu presents the input electrical energy data.

[Real Input Energy] IE4

Input electrical power consumed (TWh).
This parameter can be accessed if [Real Input Energy] IE4 is not set to 0.

Setting Description
-999...999 TWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Real Input Energy)] IE3

Input electrical power consumed (GWh).

Setting Description
-999...999 GWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Real Input Energy] IE2

Input electrical power consumed (MWh).

Setting Description
-999...999 MWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Real Input Energy] IE1

Input electrical power consumed (kWh).

Setting Description
-999...999 kWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Real Input Energy] IE0

Input electrical power consumed (Wh).

Setting Description
-999...999 Wh Setting range
Factory setting: _

NVE61643 03/2020 75
Display MOn-

[Elec Ener Output Counter] ELO- Menu

Access
[Display] [Energy parameters] [Elec Ener Output Counter]

About This Menu

This menu presents the output electrical energy data.

[Acv Elc out pwr estm] EPrW

Active electrical output power estimation.

Setting Description
According to the drive rating Setting range in kW if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [50Hz IEC] 50 or in
HP if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60Hz NEMA] 60
Factory setting: _

[Real Consumption] OE4

Electrical energy consumed (TWh).
This parameter can be accessed if [Real Consumption] oE4 is not set to 0.

Setting Description
-999...999 TWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Real Consumption] OE3

Electrical energy consumed (GWh).

Setting Description
-999...999 GWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Real Consumption] OE2

Electrical energy consumed (MWh).

Setting Description
-999...999 MWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Real Consumption] OE1

Electrical energy consumed (kWh).

Setting Description
-999...999 kWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Real Consumption] OE0

Electrical energy consumed (Wh).

Setting Description
-999...999 Wh Setting range
Factory setting: _

76 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

[Elc Egy Today] OCt

Electrical energy consumed today by the motor (kWh).

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 kWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Elc Egy Yesterday] OCY

Electrical energy consumed yesterday by the motor (kWh).

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 kWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Over-Consumption Thd] PCAH

Power level for over-consumption.

Setting Description
[Under-Consumption Thd] Setting range
PCAL...200.0% Factory setting: 0.0%

[Under-Consumption Thd] PCAL

Power level for under-consumption.
Maximum value = PCAH if PCAH ≤ 100%.

Setting Description
0.0...100.0% or [Over-Consumption Thd] PCAH if Setting range
PCAH ≤ 100% Factory setting: 0.0%

[Over/Under-Cons Delay] PCAt

Over/under-consumption detection time.

Setting Description
0...60 min Setting range
Factory setting: 1 min

[Peak Output Power] MOEP

Peak output power.

Setting Description
According to the drive rating Setting range
Factory setting: _

NVE61643 03/2020 77
Display MOn-

[Mechanical energy] MEC- Menu

Access
[Display] [Energy parameters] [Mechanical energy]

About This Menu

This menu presents the output mechanical energy data.

[Power Estim Value] OPrW

Motor shaft power estimation.

Setting Description
According to the drive rating Setting range in kW if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [50Hz IEC] 50 or in
HP if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60Hz NEMA] 60
Factory setting: _

[Motor Consumption] ME4

Energy consumption (TWh).
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Consumption] mE4 is not set to 0.

Setting Description
0...999 TWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Motor Consumption] ME3

Energy consumption (GWh).

Setting Description
0...999 GWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Motor Consumption] ME2

Energy consumption (MWh).

Setting Description
0...999 MWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Motor Consumption] ME1

Energy consumption (kWh).

Setting Description
0...999 kWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Motor Consumption] ME0

Energy consumption (Wh).

Setting Description
0...999 Wh Setting range
Factory setting: _

78 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

[Energy saving] ESA- Menu

Access
[Display] [Energy parameters] [Energy saving]

About This Menu

This menu presents the comparison in term of cost, energy, CO2 between solutions with and without drive.

[Reference Power] PrEF

Reference Power without drive

Setting Description
0.00...655.35 kW Setting range in kW if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [50Hz IEC] 50 or in
HP if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60Hz NEMA] 60.
Factory setting: 0.00 kW

[kWh Cost] ECSt

Cost of the kWh.

Setting Description
0.00...655.35 $ Setting range in € if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [50 Hz IEC] 50 or in
$ if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60Hz NEMA] 60.
Factory setting: _

[CO2 Ratio] ECO2

Quantity of CO2 by kWh.

Setting Description
0.000...65.535 kg/kWh Setting range
Factory setting: 0.000 kg/kWh

[Energy Saved] ESAv

Energy saved with the drive solution.

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 kWh Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Money Saved] CASH

Cost saved with the drive solution.

Setting Description
0.00...42,949,672 $ Setting range in € if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [50 Hz IEC] 50 or in
$ if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60 Hz NEMA] 60.
Factory setting: _

[Co2 Saved] CO2S

CO2 saved with the drive solution.

Setting Description
0.0...429,496,729.5 t Setting range
Factory setting: _

NVE61643 03/2020 79
Display MOn-

Section 7.2
[Application parameters]

[Application parameters]

[Application parameters] apr- Menu

Access
[Display] [Application parameters]

About This Menu

This menu displays information related to the application.

[Application State] APPS

Application state.
This parameter indicates the drive application state.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Running] rUn No application function in progress; the drive is running
[Stop] StOP No application function in progress; the drive is not running
[Local Mode LOCAL Forced local mode activated
Active]
[Channel 2 Active] OvEr Override speed control mode activated
[Manual Mode MAnU Motor running; manual PID mode is active
Active]
[PID Active] Auto Motor running; auto PID mode is active
[Boost In progress] booSt The boost is in progress
[Sleep Active] SLEEP The sleep is active
[BL In Progress] bQS Backlash sequence is in progress

80 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

Section 7.3
[M/S parameters]

[M/S parameters]

About this Menu

This menu can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] msCm is not set to [No] no.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[M/S Local Display] MSo- Menu 82
[M/S System Display] Msr- Menu 84

NVE61643 03/2020 81
Display MOn-

[M/S Local Display] MSo- Menu

Access
[Display] [M/S parameters] [M/S Local Display]

About This Menu

This menu present the master slave local display related parameters.
This menu can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] msCm is not set to [No] no.

[M/S Status] MSS

M/S function status.

Setting Code / Value Description

[None] nOne Not configured
[M/S Local Control] nACt M/S local control
[M/S Not Ready] nrdy M/S not ready
[M/S Ready] ready M/S ready
[M/S Running] run M/S running
[M/S Warning] alarm M/S warning

[M/S Master Speed Ref] MSMS

M/S Master speed reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description
-599.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: _

[M/S Master Torq Ref] FMTR

M/S Master torque reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Nm Setting range according to drive ratings and [TQS torque scaling] INRT
setting.
Factory setting: _

[M/S Local Speed Ref] mssr

M/S Local speed reference.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] no, and
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAvE.

Setting Description
-599.0...599 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: _

82 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

[M/S Local Torq Ref] FTOR

M/S Local torque reference.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] no, and
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAvE.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Nm Setting range according to drive ratings and [TQS torque scaling] INRT
setting.
Factory setting: _

[Motor Frequency] rFr

Motor frequency.
This parameter displays the estimated rotor frequency without motor slip.

Setting Description
-3,276.7...3,276.7 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Motor Torque (Nm)] otqn

Motor torque.
Output torque value.
NOTE: The displayed value is always positive in motor and negative in generator mode whatever the
direction.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Nm Setting range according to drive ratings and [TQS torque scaling] INRT
setting.
Factory setting: _

NVE61643 03/2020 83
Display MOn-

[M/S System Display] Msr- Menu

Access
[Display] [M/S parameters] [M/S System Display]

About This Menu

This menu present the master slave system related parameters.
This menu can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] msCm is set to [MultiDrive Link] MdL.

[M/S Local Speed Ref] mssr

M/S output speed reference.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] no, and
 [M/S Device ID] MSid is set to [Slave] SLAvE.

Setting Description
-599.0...599 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: _

[M/S Local Torq Ref] FTOR

M/S output torque reference.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] no, and
 [M/S Device ID] MSid is set to [Slave] SLAvE.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Nm Setting range.
Factory setting: _

[M/S Device Selection] msdn

M/S device selection.
This parameter allows to select the device parameters to be displayed.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Master] mster Master
Factory setting
[Slave 1] SLV1 Slave 1
[Slave 2] SLV2 Slave 2
[Slave 3] SLV3 Slave 3
[Slave 4] SLV4 Slave 4
[Slave 5] SLV5 Slave 5
[Slave 6] SLV6 Slave 6
[Slave 7] SLV7 Slave 7
[Slave 8] SLV8 Slave 8
[Slave 9] SLV9 Slave 9
[Slave 10] SLV10 Slave 10

84 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

[M/S Device Status] msdS

M/S device status.
Status of the device selected using [M/S Device Selection] MSdn.

Setting Code / Value Description

[None] nOne Not configured
[M/S Not Ready] nrdy M/S not ready
[M/S Ready] ready M/S ready
[M/S Running] run M/S running
[M/S Warning] alarm M/S warning

[M/S Device Speed Ref] msxs

M/S device speed reference.
Displays the local speed reference value of the device selected using [M/S Device Selection] MSdn.

Setting Description
-599.0...599 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: _

[M/S Device Torq Ref] FXT

M/S device torque reference.
Displays the local torque reference value of the device selected using [M/S Device Selection] MSdn.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Nm Setting range according to drive ratings and [TQS torque scaling] INRT
setting.
Factory setting: _

NVE61643 03/2020 85
Display MOn-

Section 7.4
[Motor parameters]

[Motor parameters]

[Motor parameters] MMO- Menu

Access
[Display] [Motor parameters]

About This Menu

This menu shows the motor-related parameters.

[Motor Speed] Spd

Motor speed.
This parameter displays the estimated rotor speed without motor slip.

Setting Description
0...65,535 rpm Setting range
Factory setting:–

[Signed Mech Speed] Spd1

Signed motor mechanical speed.

Setting Description
-100,000...100,000 rpm Setting range
Factory setting:–

[Motor Voltage] UOP

Motor voltage.

Setting Description
0...65,535 V Setting range
Factory setting:–

[Motor Power] OPr

Motor power.
Output power in % (100% = nominal motor mechanical power).

Setting Description
-300...300% Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Nom Motor Torque] tqn

Computed nominal motor torque in Nm (+/- 2% tolerance).
This parameter is impacted by a modification of [Magnetizing Current] IDA.

Setting Description
0.01...65,535 Nm Setting range according to drive ratings and [TQS torque scaling] INRT
setting.
Factory setting: _

86 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

[Motor Torque] Otr

Motor torque.
Output torque value (100% = [Nom Motor Torque] TQN).
NOTE: The displayed value is always positive in motor mode and negative in generator mode whatever
the direction.

Setting Description
-300.0... 300.0% Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Motor Torque (Nm)] Otqn

Motor torque (Nm).
Output torque value.
NOTE: The displayed value is always positive in motor mode and negative in generator mode whatever
the direction.

Setting Description
-32,767 Nm...32,767 Nm Setting range according to drive ratings and [TQS torque scaling] INRT
setting.
Factory setting: _

[Motor Current] LCr

Motor current.

Setting Description
0.00...65,535 A Setting range according to drive ratings
Factory setting: –

[Motor Therm state] tHr

Motor thermal state.
The normal motor thermal state is 100%, the [Motor Overload] OLF threshold is set to 118%.

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: –

NVE61643 03/2020 87
Display MOn-

Section 7.5
[Drive parameters]

[Drive parameters]

[Drive parameters] MPI- Menu

Access
[Display] [Drive parameters]

About This Menu

This menu shows the drive-related parameters.

[AIV1 Image input] AIv1

AIV1 Image input.
This parameter is read-only. It enables to display the speed reference applied to the motor via the fieldbus
channel.

Setting Description
-10,000...10,000 (1) Setting range
Factory setting: –
1): range according to [AIV1 Type] AV1T.

[Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH

Frequency reference before ramp.
This parameter is read-only. It enables to display the reference frequency applied to the motor, regardless
of which channel for reference value has been selected.

Setting Description
-599.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0 Hz

[Ref Frequency] LFr

Reference frequency.
This parameter only appears if the function has been enabled. It is used to change the reference frequency
from the remote control. OK does not have to be pressed to enable a change of reference.

Setting Description
-599.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Torque ref.] Ltr

Torque reference.
This parameter only appears if the function has been enabled. It is used to change the torque reference
value from the remote control. OK does not have to be pressed to enable a change of reference value.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [Not Assigned] no, and
 [Torque ref. channel] tr1 is set to [Ref. Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC.

Setting Description
-300.0...300.0% Setting range
Factory setting: –

88 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

[Torque reference] trr

Torque reference.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAvE, and
 [M/S Control Type] MSCT is set to:
 [Torque Direct] trqd, or
 [Torque Reverse] trqr, or
 [Torque Custom] trqC.

Setting Description
-3,276.7...3,276.7 % Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Motor Frequency] rFr

Motor frequency.
This parameter displays the estimated rotor frequency without motor slip.

Setting Description
-3,276.7...3,276.7 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Stator Frequency] sfq

Stator frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr

Setting Description
[No Freq Applied] no...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Rotor Frequency] rfq

Rotor frequency.
This parameter displays the estimated rotor frequency with motor slip.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr

Setting Description
[No Freq Applied] no...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Measured output fr.] mmf

Measured output frequency.
This parameter can be accessed only if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded encoder is
used, and the available selections will depend on the type of encoder module used.

Setting Description
-3,276.7...3,276.7 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: –

NVE61643 03/2020 89
Display MOn-

[Multiplying Coeff.] MFr

Multiplying coefficient.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ref Freq - Multiply] MA2,MA3 has been assigned.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Measured Freq] Fqs

Pulse input measured frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [Frequency meter] fqf is not set to [Not Configured] no.

Setting Description
0...30 KHz Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Mains Voltage] uLn

Mains voltage based on AC bus measurement, motor running or stopped.

Setting Description
1.0...860.0 Vac Setting range: [no meas.] ULNUNK is displayed if no value is measured.
Factory setting: –

[Mains Voltage phase 1-2] uL1

Mains voltage phase 1-2 measurement.

Setting Description
-3,276.7...3,276.7 Vac Setting range: [No meas.] ULNUNK is displayed if no value is measured.
Factory setting: –

[Mains Voltage phase 2-3] uL2

Mains voltage phase 2-3 measurement.

Setting Description
-3,276.7...3,276.7 Vac Setting range: [No meas.] ULNUNK is displayed if no value is measured.
Factory setting: –

[Mains Voltage phase 3-1] uL3

Mains voltage phase 3-1 measurement

Setting Description
-3,276.7...3,276.7 Vac Setting range: [No meas.] ULNUNK is displayed if no value is measured.
Factory setting: –

[Mains Frequency] FAC

Actual mains frequency.

Setting Description
0.0...999.9 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: –

90 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

[DC Bus Voltage] vbuS

DC bus voltage.

Setting Description
0...6,553.5 Vdc Setting range: [No meas.] ULNUNK is displayed if no value is measured.
Factory setting: –

[Drive Therm State] tHd

Drive thermal state.
The normal drive thermal state is 100%, the [Drive Overheating] OHF threshold is set to 118%

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Used Param. Set] CFpS

Used parameter set.
Configuration parameter status (can be accessed if parameter switching function has been enabled).

Setting Code / Value Description

[None] nO Not assigned
[Set N°1] CFP1 Parameter set 1 active
[Set N°2] CFP2 Parameter set 2 active
[Set N°3] CFP3 Parameter set 3 active

[Config. active] Cnfs

Active configuration.

Setting Code / Value Description

[In progress] nO Transitory state
[Config. No.0] CnF0 Configuration 0 active
[Config. No.1] CnF1 Configuration 1 active
[Config. No.2] CnF2 Configuration 2 active
[Config 3 active] CnF3 Configuration 3 active

NVE61643 03/2020 91
Display MOn-

Section 7.6
[Thermal monitoring]

[Thermal monitoring]

[Thermal Monitoring] tPM- Menu

Access
[Display] [Thermal Monitoring]

About This Menu

The content of this menu can be accessed if the thermal monitoring function has been activated.

Wiring
Refer to the wiring (see page 184)wiring of the [Thermal monitoring] tPP- menu.

[AI1 Th Value] tH1v

AI1 thermal value.

Setting Description
-15...200°C Setting range
Factory setting: –

[AI3 Th Value] tH3v

AI3 thermal value.
Identical to [AI1 Th Value] tH1v.

[AI4 Th Value] tH4v

AI4 thermal value.
Identical to [AI1 Th Value] tH1v.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[AI5 Th Value] tH5v

AI5 thermal value.
Identical to [AI1 Th Value] tH1v.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[Enc Th Value] thev

Encoder thermal sensor value

Setting Description
-15...200°C Setting range
Factory setting: –

92 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

Section 7.7
[PID display]

[PID display]

[PID display] PIC- Menu

Access
[Display] [PID display]

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
Following parameters can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] no.

[Internal PID ref] rPI

Internal PID reference.

Setting Description
0...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: 150

[PID Reference] rPC

PID setpoint value.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[PID feedback] rPF

PID feedback value.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[PID Error] rPE

PID error value.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: –

[PID Output] rPO

PID output value.

Setting Description
[PID Min Output] pol...[PID Max Setting range
Output] poh Factory setting: _

NVE61643 03/2020 93
Display MOn-

Section 7.8
[Counter management]

[Counter management]

[Counter Management] ELt- Menu

Access
[Display] [Counter Management]

About This Menu

This menu shows the drive and motor-related counters.

[Motor Run Time] rtHH

Motor run time.
Run elapsed time display (resettable) in 0.1 hours (length of time the motor has been switched on).

Setting Description
0.0...429,496,729.5 h Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Power-on Time] PtHH

Power-on time (resettable) or counter can be set to 0 by using the [Time Counter Reset] rPr parameter.

Setting Description
0.0...429,496,729.5 h Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Fan Operation Time] FPbt

Fan operation time.
As soon as [Fan Operation Time] FPbt reach the predefined value of 45,000 hours, a warning [Fan
Counter Warning] FCtA is triggered.
[Fan Operation Time] FPbt counter can be set to 0 by using the [Time Counter Reset] rPr parameter.

Setting Description
0...500,000 h Setting range
Factory setting: Read Only

[Nb Of Start] nSM

Number of motor starts (resettable) or counter can be set to 0 by using the [Time Counter Reset] rPr
parameter.

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Time Counter Reset] rPr

Time counter reset.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting

94 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Run Time Reset] rtH Run time reset
[Power ON Time PtH Power ON time reset
Reset]
[Reset Fan FtH Reset fan counter
Counter]
[Clear NSM] nsm Clear number of motor starts

NVE61643 03/2020 95
Display MOn-

Section 7.9
[Other state]

[Other state]

[Other state] SSt- Menu

Access
[Display] [Other state]

About This Menu

List of secondary states.

List
[Sleep Active] SLM
[Set 1 active] CFP1
[Set 2 active] CFP2
[Set 3 active] CFP3
[Automatic restart] AUtO
[DC Bus Charged] dbL
[Fast stop Active] FSt
[Fallback Frequency] FrF
[Speed Maintained] rLS
[Type of stop] Stt
[Encoder Config] iCC
[In braking] brs
[DC Bus Ripple Warn] DCRW
[Ref Freq Warning] SrA
[Forward] MFrd
[Reverse] MrrS
[In motor fluxing] FLX
[Autotuning] tUn

96 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

Section 7.10
[I/O map]

[I/O map]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Digital Input Map] LIA- Menu 98
[AI1] AI1C- Menu 99
[AI2] AI2C- Menu 101
[AI3] AI3C- Menu 102
[AI4] AI4C- Menu 103
[AI5] AI5C- Menu 104
[Analog inputs image] AiA- Menu 105
[Digital output map] LOA- Menu 105
[AQ1] AO1C- Menu 106
[AQ2] AO2C- Menu 110
[PTO Frequency] PtoC- Menu 112
[DI7 frequency measured] PFC7- Menu 114
[DI8 frequency measured] PFC8- Menu 116
[PTI Freq Measured] PTIF- Menu 117
[Freq. signal image] FSI- Menu 119

NVE61643 03/2020 97
Display MOn-

[Digital Input Map] LIA- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Digital Input Map]

About This Menu

This menu presents the state and assignment of digital inputs.
Read-only parameters, cannot be configured.
If no functions have been assigned, [Not assigned] nO is displayed. Use the touch wheel to scroll through
the functions.

98 NVE61643 03/2020
 Display MOn-

[AI1] AI1C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog inputs image] [AI1]

[AI1] AI1C
Physical value AI1.
AI1 customer image: value of analog input 1.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: –

NOTE: The parameters [AI1 Assignment] AI1A, [AI1 min value] UIL1, [AI1 max value] UIH1 and
[AI1 filter] AI1F can be accessed on the Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the [AI1] AI1C
parameter.

[AI1 Assignment] AI1A

Analog input AI1 functions assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with input AI1 in order
to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
[Torque Ref Offset] tqo Torque offset source
[Torque Ref Ratio] tqr Torque ratio source
[Ref Freq Channel 1] Fr1 Reference frequency channel 1
Factory Setting
[Ref Freq Channel 2] Fr2 Reference frequency channel 2
[Ref Frequency 2 SA2 Reference frequency 2 summing
Summing]
[Torque limitation] taa Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
[Torque limitation 2] taa2 Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
[Subtract Ref Freq 2] dA2 Subtract reference frequency 2
[Manual PID Ref.] PIM Manual speed reference of the PID controller (auto-man)
[PID Ref Frequency] FPI PID reference frequency
[Ref Frequency 3 SA3 Reference frequency 3 summing
Summing]
[Ref Frequency 1B] Fr1b Reference frequency 1B
[Subtract Ref Freq 3] dA3 Subtract reference frequency 3
[Forced local] FLOC Forced local reference source1
[Ref Frequency 2 MA2 Reference frequency 2 multiplier
multiplier]
[Ref Frequency 3 MA3 Reference frequency 3 multiplier
multiplier]
[Torque reference] tr1 Torque regulation: torque set point 1
[Torque reference 2] tr2 Torque regulation: torque set point 2
[External Feed teff External feed-forward
Forward]
[M/S Speed Ref In] mssi Master Slave: speed input
[M/S Trq Ref In] msti Master Slave: torque input
[Weight input] PES External weight sensor input

NVE61643 03/2020 99
Display MOn-

[AI1 min value] UIL1

AI1 minimum value.
AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] ai1t is set to [Voltage] 10u.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AI1 max value] UIH1

AI1 maximum value.
AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] ai1t is set to [Voltage] 10u.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

[AI1 min. value] CrL1

AI1 minimum value.
AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] ai1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AI1 max. value] CrH1

AI1 maximum value.
AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] ai1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

[AI1 filter] AI1F

AI1 filter.
Interference filtering.

Setting Description
0.00...10.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 s

100 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[AI2] AI2C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog inputs image] [AI2]

[AI2] AI2C
Physical value AI2.
AI2 customer image: value of analog input 2.
Identical to [AI1] AI1C (see page 99).

[AI2 Assignment] AI2A

Configuration of AI2.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 99).

[AI2 min value] UIL2

AI2 minimum value.
AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2T is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 100).

[AI2 max value] UIH2

AI2 maximum value.
AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2T is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 100).

[AI2 filter] AI2F

AI2 filter.
Interference filtering.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 100).

NVE61643 03/2020 101

Display MOn-

[AI3] AI3C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog inputs image] [AI3]
This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22 kW.

[AI3] AI3C
Physical value AI3.
AI3 customer image: value of analog input 3.
Identical to [AI1] AI1C (see page 99).

[AI3 Assignment] AI3A

Configuration of AI3.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 99).

[AI3 min value] UIL3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3T is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 100).

[AI3 max value] UIH3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3T is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 100).

[AI3 min. value] CrL3

This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3T is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 100).

[AI3 max. value] CrH3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3T is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 100).

[AI3 Filter] AI3F

AI3 filter.
Interference filtering.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 100).

102 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[AI4] AI4C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog inputs image] [AI4]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[AI4] AI4C
Physical value AI4.
AI4 customer image: value of analog input 4.
Identical to [AI1] AI1C (see page 99).

[AI4 Assignment] AI4A

AI4 functions assignment. If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 99).

[AI4 min value] UIL4

AI4 minimum value.
AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] AI4T is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 100).

[AI4 max value] UIH4

AI4 maximum value.
AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] AI4T is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 100).

[AI4 min. value] CrL4

AI4 minimum value.
AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] AI4T is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 100).

[AI4 max. value] CrH4

AI4 maximum value.
AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] AI4T is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 100).

[AI4 filter] AI4F

AI4 filter.
Interference filtering.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 100).

NVE61643 03/2020 103

Display MOn-

[AI5] AI5C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog inputs image] [AI5]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[AI5] AI5C
AI5 customer image: value of analog input 5.
Identical to [AI1] AI1C (see page 99).

[AI5 Assignment] AI5A

AI5 functions assignment. If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 99).

[AI5 min value] UIL5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] AI5T is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 100).

[AI5 max value] UIH5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] AI5T is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 100).

[AI5 min. value] CrL5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] AI5T is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 100).

[AI5 max. value] CrH5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] AI5T is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 100).

[AI5 filter] AI5F

AI5 filter.
Interference filtering.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 100).

104 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[Analog inputs image] AiA- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog inputs image]

[Enc Resistor Value] tHEr

Encoder thermal resistor value.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 An encoder module has been inserted or embedded encoder is used, and
 [Enc Therm Sensor Type] tHEt is not set to [None] nonE.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Digital output map] LOA- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Digital output map]

About This Menu

DQ assignment for drives with a power greater than 22kW.
DQ1, DQ2 for drives with a power lower than 30kW.
R1, R2 assignment.
R3 assignment for drives with a power greater than 22kW.
R4, R5, R6 assignment if VW3A3204 relay output option module has been inserted.
DQ11, DQ12 assignment if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
On the Display Terminal, click the digital output to see the assignment.
Read-only parameters, cannot be configured.
It displays the function which is assigned to a digital output. If no function has been assigned, [Not
assigned] nO is displayed.
It allows to verify the delay, active state, and holding time set for the digital output. Possible values are
identical as those in the configuration menu.

NVE61643 03/2020 105

Display MOn-

[AQ1] AO1C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Analog outputs image] [AQ1]

Minimum and Maximum Output Values

The minimum output value, in volts, corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the
maximum value corresponds to its upper limit. The minimum value may be greater than the maximum
value.

PA Parameter assigned
C / VO Current or voltage output
UL Upper limit
LL Low limit
1 [Min Output] AOLx or UOLx
2 [Max Output] AOHx or UOHx

Scaling of the Assigned Parameter

The scale of the assigned parameter can be adapted in accordance with requirements by modifying the
values of the lower and upper limits with two parameters for each analogic output.
These parameters are given in %. 100% corresponds to the total variation range of the configured
parameter, so: 100% = upper limit - lower limit.
For example, [Sign. torque] Stq which varies between –3 and +3 times the rated torque, 100%
corresponds to 6 times the rated torque.
 The [Scaling AQx min] ASLx parameter modifies the lower limit: new value = lower limit + (range x
ASLx). The value 0% (factory setting) does not modify the lower limit.
 The [Scaling AQx max] ASHx parameter modifies the upper limit: new value = lower limit + (range x
ASLx). The value 100% (factory setting) does not modify the upper limit.
 [Scaling AQx min] ASLx must always be lower than [Scaling AQx max] ASHx.

106 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

UL Upper limit of the assigned parameter

LL Lower limit of the assigned parameter
NS New scale
ASHx Scaling max
ASLx Scaling min

Application Example
The value of the motor current at the AQ1 output is to be transferred with 0...20 mA, range 2 In motor, In
motor being the equivalent of a 0.8 In drive.
 The [Motor Current] OCr parameter varies from 0 to 2 times the rated drive current.
 [Scaling AQ1 min] ASL1 must not modify the lower limit, which therefore remains at its factory setting
of 0%.
 [Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1 must modify the upper limit by 0.5x the rated motor torque, or 100 - 100/5
= 80% (new value = lower limit + (range x ASH1).

[AQ1] AO1C
AQ1 customer image: value of analogic output 1.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[AQ1 assignment] AO1

AQ1 assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
NOTE: In this case, the output can be activated/deactivated by fieldbus.
refer to [Enable AQ1 fallback] AOF1 (see page 469)
[Motor Current] OCr Current in the motor, from 0 to 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the
Installation manual and on the drive nameplate)
[Motor Frequency] OFr Output frequency, from 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
Factory Setting
[Ramp out.] OrP From 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[Motor torq.] trq Motor torque, from 0 to 3 times the rated motor torque
[Sign. torque] Stq Signed motor torque, between –3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ sign corresponds to the motor mode and the – sign to the generator mode
(braking).
[sign ramp] OrS Signed ramp output, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr

NVE61643 03/2020 107

Display MOn-

Setting Code / Value Description

[PID ref.] OPS PID controller reference between [Min PID reference] PIP1 and [Max
PID reference] PIP2
[PID feedbk] OPF PID controller feedback between [Min PID feedback] PIF1 and [Max PID
feedback] PIF2
[PID error] OPE PID controller detected error between –5% and +5% of [Max PID feedback]
PIF2 – [Min PID feedback] PIF1
[PID output] OPI PID controller output between [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP
[Motor power] OPr Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Nominal Motor Power] nPr
[Mot thermal] tHr Motor thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Drv thermal] tHd Drive thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Torque 4Q] tr4q Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ and - signs correspond to the physical direction of the torque, regardless
of mode (motor or generator)
[Measured Motor ofrr Measured motor frequency
Freq]
[Sig. o/p frq.] OFS Signed output frequency, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[Mot therm2] tHr2 Motor thermal 2 state
[Mot therm3] tHr3 Motor thermal 3 state
[Mot therm4] tHr4 Motor thermal 4 state
[Unsigned Trq Ref] utr Unsigned torque reference
[Signed Trq Ref] str Signed torque reference
[Torque lim.] tql Torque limit
[Motor volt.] UOP Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS
[M/S Out Speed msso Master / slave output speed reference
Reference]
[M/S Out Torque msto Master / slave output torque reference
Reference]

[AQ1 Min Output] UOL1

AQ1 minimum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AQ1 max Output] UOH1

AQ1 maximum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

[AQ1 min output] AOL1

AQ1 minimum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

108 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[AQ1 max output] AOH1

AQ1 maximum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

[Scaling AQ1 min] ASL1

Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a percentage of the maximum possible variation.

Setting Description
0.0...100.0% Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0%

[Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1

Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter, as a percentage of the maximum possible variation.

Setting Description
0.0...100.0% Setting range
Factory setting: 100.0%

[AQ1 Filter] AO1F

Interference filtering.

Setting Description
0.00...10.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 s

NVE61643 03/2020 109

Display MOn-

[AQ2] AO2C- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O Map] [Analog outputs image] [AQ2]
This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22kW.

[AQ2] AO2C
AQ2 customer image: value of analog output 2.
Identical to [AQ1] AO1C (see page 107).

[AQ2 Assignment] AO2

AQ2 assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
[Motor Current] OCr Current in the motor, from 0 to 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the
Installation manual and on the drive nameplate)
Factory Setting
[Motor Frequency] OFr Output frequency, from 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[Ramp out.] OrP From 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[Motor torq.] trq Motor torque, from 0 to 3 times the rated motor torque
[Sign. torque] Stq Signed motor torque, between –3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ sign corresponds to the motor mode and the – sign to the generator mode
(braking).
[sign ramp] OrS Signed ramp output, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[PID ref.] OPS PID controller reference between [Min PID reference] PIP1 and [Max
PID reference] PIP2
[PID feedbk] OPF PID controller feedback between [Min PID feedback] PIF1 and [Max PID
feedback] PIF2
[PID error] OPE PID controller detected error between –5% and +5% of [Max PID feedback]
PIF2 – [Min PID feedback] PIF1
[PID output] OPI PID controller output between [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP
[Motor power] OPr Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Nominal Motor Power] nPr
[Mot thermal] tHr Motor thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Drv thermal] tHd Drive thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Torque 4Q] tr4q Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ and - signs correspond to the physical direction of the torque, regardless
of mode (motor or generator)
[Measured Motor ofrr Measured motor frequency
Freq ]
[Sig. o/p frq.] OFS Signed output frequency, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[Mot therm2] tHr2 Motor thermal 2 state
[Mot therm3] tHr3 Motor thermal 3 state
[Mot therm4] tHr4 Motor thermal 4 state
[Unsigned Trq Ref] utr Unsigned torque reference
[Signed Trq Ref] str Signed torque reference
[Torque lim.] tql Torque limit
[Motor volt.] UOP Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS
[M/S Out Speed msso Master / slave output speed reference
Reference]
[M/S Out Torque msto Master / slave output torque reference
Reference]

110 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[AQ2 Min Output] UOL2

AQ2 minimum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 min Output] UOL1 (see page 108).

[AQ2 Max Output] UOH2

AQ2 maximum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 max Output] UOH1 (see page 108).

[AQ2 Min Output] AOL2

AQ2 minimum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 Min Output] AOL1 (see page 254).

[AQ2 Max Output] AOH2

AQ2 maximum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 Max Output] AOH1 (see page 254).

[Scaling AQ2 min] ASL2

Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.
Identical to [Scaling AQ2 min] ASL1 (see page 109).

[Scaling AQ2 max] ASH2

Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.
Identical to [Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1 (see page 109).

[AQ2 Filter] AO2F

Interference filtering.
Identical to [AQ1 Filter] AO1F (see page 109).

NVE61643 03/2020 111

Display MOn-

[PTO Frequency] PtoC- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O Map] [Analog outputs image] [PTO Frequency]
This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22 kW.

[PTO Frequency] PtoC

Pulse train output frequency value.

Setting Description
0.00...655.35 kHz Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[PTO Assign] Pto

Pulse train output assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
NOTE: In this case, the output can be activated/deactivated by fieldbus.
refer to [Enable AQ1 fallback] AOF1 (see page 469)
[Motor Current] OCr Current in the motor, from 0 to 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the
Installation manual and on the drive nameplate)
[Motor Frequency] OFr Output frequency, from 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
Factory Setting
[Ramp out.] OrP From 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[Motor torq.] trq Motor torque, from 0 to 3 times the rated motor torque
[Sign. torque] Stq Signed motor torque, between –3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ sign corresponds to the motor mode and the – sign to the generator mode
(braking).
[sign ramp] OrS Signed ramp output, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[PID ref.] OPS PID controller reference between [Min PID reference] PIP1 and [Max
PID reference] PIP2
[PID feedbk] OPF PID controller feedback between [Min PID feedback] PIF1 and [Max PID
feedback] PIF2
[PID error] OPE PID controller detected error between –5% and +5% of [Max PID feedback]
PIF2 – [Min PID feedback] PIF1
[PID output] OPI PID controller output between [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP
[Motor power] OPr Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Nominal Motor Power] nPr
[Mot thermal] tHr Motor thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Drv thermal] tHd Drive thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Torque 4Q] tr4q Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ and - signs correspond to the physical direction of the torque, regardless
of mode (motor or generator)
[Measured Motor ofrr Measured motor frequency
Freq]
[Sig. o/p frq.] OFS Signed output frequency, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[Mot therm2] tHr2 Motor thermal 2 state
[Mot therm3] tHr3 Motor thermal 3 state
[Mot therm4] tHr4 Motor thermal 4 state
[Unsigned Trq Ref] utr Unsigned torque reference
[Signed Trq Ref] str Signed torque reference
[Torque lim.] tql Torque limit

112 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Motor volt.] UOP Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS
[M/S Out Speed msso Master / slave output speed reference
Reference]
[M/S Out Torque msto Master / slave output torque reference
Reference]

[PTO Max Output Freq] PtoH

Pulse train output maximum output frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [PTO Assign] PTO is not set to [Not configured] nO.

Setting Description
1.00...30.00 kHz Setting range
Factory setting: 4.00 kHz

NVE61643 03/2020 113

Display MOn-

[DI7 frequency measured] PFC7- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Freq. signal image] [DI7 frequency measured]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed on the Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the [DI7
Frequency Measured] PFC7 parameter.
This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22 kW.

[DI7 Frequency Measured] PFC7

Filtered customer pulse input frequency reference.

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[DI7 Pulse Input Assign] PI7A

DI7 pulse input assignment.
It displays all the functions associated with the pulse input in order to verify, for example, for compatibility
problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
[Torque Ref Offset] tqo Torque offset source
[Torque Ref Ratio] tqr Torque ratio source
[Ref Frequency 1] Fr1 Reference frequency 1
[Ref Frequency 2] Fr2 Reference frequency 2
[Ref Frequency 2 SA2 Reference frequency 2 summing
Summing]
[PID Feedback] PIF PI controller feedback
[Torque limitation] taa Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
[Torque limitation taa2 Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
2]
[Subtract Ref Freq dA2 Subtract reference frequency 2
2]
[Manual PID Ref.] PIM Manual speed reference of the PID controller (auto-man)
[PID Ref FPI PID reference frequency
Frequency]
[Ref Frequency 3 SA3 Reference frequency 3 summing
Summing]
[Ref Frequency Fr1b Reference frequency 1B
1B]
[Subtract Ref Freq dA3 Subtract reference frequency 3
3]
[Forced local] FLOC Forced local reference source1
[Ref Frequency 2 MA2 Reference frequency 2 multiplier
multiplier]
[Ref Frequency 3 MA3 Reference frequency 3 multiplier
multiplier]
[Torque reference] tr1 Torque regulation: torque set point 1
[Torque reference tr2 Torque regulation: torque set point 2
2]
[Frequency Meter] fqf Frequency meter function activation

114 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

Setting Code / Value Description

[External Feed teff External feed-forward
Forward]
[M/S Speed Ref In] MSSI M/S Master speed reference input
[M/S Trq Ref In] MSTI M/S Master torque reference input
[Weight input] PES External weight sensor input

[DI7 PulseInput Low Freq] PIL7

Di7 pulse input low frequency.
Pulse input scaling parameter of 0% in Hz x 10 unit.

Setting Description
0.00...30,000.00 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0 Hz

[DI7 PulseInput High Freq] PIH7

Di7 pulse input high frequency.
Pulse input scaling parameter of 100% in Hz x 10 unit.

Setting Description
0.00...30.00 kHz Setting range
Factory setting: 30.00 kHz

[DI7 Frequency Filter] PFI7

Interference filtering pulse input cut-off time of the low-filter.

Setting Description
0...1,000 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

NVE61643 03/2020 115

Display MOn-

[DI8 frequency measured] PFC8- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Freq. signal image] [DI8 frequency measured]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed on the Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the [DI8
Frequency Measured] PFC8 parameter.
This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22 kW.

[DI8 Frequency Measured] PFC8

Filtered customer pulse input frequency reference.
Identical to [DI7 frequency measured] PFC7 (see page 114).

[DI8 Pulse Input Assign] PI8A

DI8 pulse input assignment.
Identical to [DI7 Pulse Input Assign] PI7A (see page 114).

[DI8 PulseInput Low Freq] PIL8

DI8 pulse input low frequency.
Identical to [DI7 PulseInput Low Freq] PIL7 (see page 115).

[DI8 PulseInput High Freq] PIH8

DI8 pulse input high frequency.
Identical to [DI7 PulseInput High Freq] PIH7 (see page 115).

[DI8 Frequency Filter] PFI8

Interference filtering pulse input cut-off time of the low-filter.
Identical to [DI7 Frequency Filter] PFI7 (see page 115).

116 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[PTI Freq Measured] PTIF- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Freq. signal image] [PTI Freq Measured]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed on the Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the [PTI Freq
Measured] PTIF parameter.
This menu can be accessed on drives with a power lower than 30 kW.

[PTI Freq Measured] PTIF

PTI frequency measured

Setting Description
-21,474,836.47…21,474,836.47 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: Read Only

[RP assignment] PIA

Pulse input assignment

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
[Torque Ref Offset] tqo Torque offset source
[Torque Ref Ratio] tqr Torque ratio source
[Ref Frequency 1] Fr1 Reference frequency 1
[Ref Frequency 2] Fr2 Reference frequency 2
[Ref Frequency 2 SA2 Reference frequency 2 summing
Summing]
[PID Feedback] PIF PI controller feedback
[Torque limitation] taa Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
[Torque limitation 2] taa2 Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
[Subtract Ref Freq dA2 Subtract reference frequency 2
2]
[Manual PID Ref.] PIM Manual speed reference of the PID controller (auto-man)
[PID Ref FPI PID reference frequency
Frequency]
[Ref Frequency 3 SA3 Reference frequency 3 summing
Summing]
[Ref Frequency 1B] Fr1b Reference frequency 1B
[Subtract Ref Freq dA3 Subtract reference frequency 3
3]
[Forced local] FLOC Forced local reference source1
[Ref Frequency 2 MA2 Reference frequency 2 multiplier
multiplier]
[Ref Frequency 3 MA3 Reference frequency 3 multiplier
multiplier]
[Torque reference] tr1 Torque regulation: torque set point 1
[Torque reference tr2 Torque regulation: torque set point 2
2]
[Frequency Meter] fqf Frequency meter function activation
[External Feed teff External feed-forward
Forward]
[M/S Speed Ref In] MSSI M/S Master speed reference input
[M/S Trq Ref In] MSTI M/S Master torque reference input

NVE61643 03/2020 117

Display MOn-

[PTI Low Freq] PTIL

Pulse Train Input low frequency.

Setting Description
-1000000.00...1000000.00 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0 Hz

[PTI High Freq] PTIH

Pulse Train Input high frequency.

Setting Description
-1000000.00...1000000.00 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0 Hz

[PTI Filter Time Analog] PTIT

PTI filter time analog

Setting Description
0...1000 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

[PTI Mode] PTIM

PTI mode

Setting Code / Value Description

[A/B] Ab A/B input signals
Factory Setting
[Pulse/Dir] Pd Pulse direction input signals
[CW/CCW] CwCCW Clockwise/Counterclockwise input signals

[PTI Filter Time Inp] PTIS

PTI Filter Time Input

Setting Description
0.00...13.00 µs Setting range
Factory setting: 0.25 µs

[PTI Counting Dir Inv] PTII

PTI direction inversion

Setting Code / Value Description

[OFF] OFF No inversion of counting direction
Factory Setting
[ON] On Inversion of counting direction

118 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[Freq. signal image] FSI- Menu

Access
[Display] [I/O map] [Freq. signal image]

[Encoder Pulse Freq] ECFR

Encoder pulse frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 an encoder module has been inserted, and
 [Encoder usage] ENU is set to [Speed Reference] PGR, and
 [Reference Type] PGA is set to [Frequency Generator] PTG

Setting Description
-21,474,836.47...21,474,836.47_kHz Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Encoder Frequency] EIFC

Encoder frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 an encoder module has been inserted, and
 [Encoder usage] ENU is set to [Speed Reference] PGR, and
 [Reference Type] PGA is set to [Frequency Generator] PTG

Setting Description
-21,474,836.47...21,474,836.47_kHz Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

NVE61643 03/2020 119

Display MOn-

Section 7.11
[Communication map]

[Communication map]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Communication map] CMM- Menu 121
[Modbus network diag] Mnd-Menu 124
[Com. scanner input map] ISA- Menu 125
[Com scan output map] OSA- Menu 126
[Modbus HMI Diag] MdH- Menu 127
[Ethernet Emb Diag] MPE- Menu 128
[DeviceNet Diag] dvn- Menu 129
[Profibus Diag] Prb- Menu 130
[PROFINET Diag] Prn- Menu 132
[EtherCAT Module Diag] Etd- Menu 134
[Powerlink Diag] PWL- Menu 135
[Command word image] CWI- Menu 136
[Freq. ref. word map] rWI- Menu 137
[CANopen map] CnM- Menu 138
[PDO1 image] PO1- Menu 139
[PDO2 image] PO2- Menu 141
[PDO3 image] PO3- Menu 142
[CANopen map] CnM- Menu 143

120 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[Communication map] CMM- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map]

[Command Channel] CMdC

Command channel.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Terminals] tEr Terminal block source
Factory Setting
[Ref.Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC Command via Display Terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Command via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-CANopen] CAn Command via CANopen if a CANopen module has been inserted
[Ref. Freq-Com. Module] nEt Command via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been inserted
[Embedded Ethernet] EtH Command via Embedded Ethernet
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Cmd Register] CMd

Command register.
[Control Mode] CHCF is not set to [I/O profile] IO
Possible values in CiA402 profile, separate, or not separate mode:

Bit Description, Value

0 Set to 1: "Switch on"/Contactor command
1 Set to 0: "Disable voltage"/Authorization to supply AC power
2 Set to 0: "Quick stop"
3 Set to 1: "Enable operation"/Run command
4 to 6 Reserved (= 0)
7 "Fault reset" acknowledgment active on 0 to 1 rising edge
8 Set to 1: Halt stop according to the [Type Of Stop] Stt parameter without leaving the operation enabled
state
9 and 10 Reserved (= 0)
11 to 15 Can be assigned to commands

Possible values in the I/O profile. On state command [2-Wire Control] 2C:

Bit Description, Value

0 Forward (on state) command:
0: No forward command
1: Forward command
NOTE: The assignment of bit 0 cannot be modified. It corresponds to the assignment of the terminals.
It can be switched. Bit 0 Cd00 is only active if the channel of this control word is active.
1 to 15 Can be assigned to commands

Possible values in the I/O profile. On edge command [3-Wire Control] 3C:

Bit Description, Value

0 Stop (run authorization):
0: Stop
1: Run is authorized on a forward or reverse command
1 Forward (on 0 to 1 rising edge) command
2 to 15 Can be assigned to commands
NOTE: The assignment of bits 0 and 1 cannot be modified. It corresponds to the assignment of the terminals. It can
be switched. Bits 0 Cd00 and 1 Cd01 are only active if the channel of this control word is active.

NVE61643 03/2020 121

Display MOn-

[Ref Freq Channel] rFCC

Channel of reference frequency.
Identical to [Command Channel] CMdC (see page 121)

[Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH

Frequency reference before ramp (signed value).
This parameter is read-only. It enables to display the reference frequency applied to the motor, regardless
of which channel for reference value has been selected.

Setting Description
-599.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0 Hz

[CIA402 State Reg] EtA

CIA402 State Register.
Possible values in CiA402 profile, separate, or not separate mode:

Bit Description, Value

0 "Ready to switch on", awaiting power section line supply
1 "Switched on", ready
2 "Operation enabled", running
3 Operating detected error state:
0: Inactive
1: Active
4 "Voltage enabled", power section line supply present:
0: Power section line supply unavailable
1: Power section line supply present
NOTE: When the drive is powered by the power section only, this bit is always at 1.
5 Quick stop
6 "Switched on disabled", power section line supply locked
7 Warning:
0: No warning
1: Warning
8 Reserved (= 0)
9 Remote: command or reference via the network
0: Command or reference via the Display Terminal
1: Command or reference via the network
10 Targets reference reached:
0: The reference is not reached
1: The reference has been reached
NOTE: When the drive is in speed mode, this is the speed reference.
11 "Internal limit active", reference outside limits:
0: The reference is within the limits
1: The reference is not within the limits
NOTE: When the drive is in speed mode, the limits are defined by the [Low speed] LSP and
[High speed] HSP parameters.
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 "Stop key", STOP via stop key:
0: STOP key not pressed
1: Stop triggered by the STOP key on the Display Terminal
15 "Direction", direction of rotation:
0: Forward rotation at output
1: Reverse rotation at output
NOTE: The combination of bits 0, 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6 defines the state in the DSP 402 state chart (see the communication
manuals).

122 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

Possible values in the I/O profile:

Bit Description, Value

0 Reserved (= 0 or 1)
1 Ready:
0: Not ready
1: Ready
2 Running:
0: The drive does not start if a reference other than zero is applied
1: Running, if a reference other than zero is applied, the drive can start
3 Operating detected error state:
0: Inactive
1: Active
4 Power section line supply present:
0: Power section line supply unavailable
1: Power section line supply present
5 Reserved (= 1)
6 Reserved (= 0 or 1)
7 Warning
0: No warning
1: Warning
8 Reserved (= 0)
9 Command via a network:
0: Command via the terminals or the Display Terminal
1: Command via a network
10 Reference reached:
0: The reference is not reached
1: The reference has been reached
11 Reference outside limits:
0: The reference is within the limits
1: The reference is not within the limits
NOTE: When the drive is in speed mode, the limits are defined by LSP and HSP parameters.
12 Reserved (= 0)
13 Reserved (= 0)
14 Stop via STOP key:
0: STOP key not pressed
1: Stop triggered by the STOP key on the Display Terminal
15 Direction of rotation:
0: Forward rotation at output
1: Reverse rotation at output
NOTE: The value is identical in the CiA402 profile and the I/O profile. In the I/O profile, the description of the values
is simplified and does not refer to the CiA402 (Drivecom) state chart.

NVE61643 03/2020 123

Display MOn-

[Modbus network diag] Mnd-Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Modbus network diag]

About This Menu

Used for the Modbus serial communication port at the bottom of the control block. Refer to the Modbus
serial embedded communication manual for a complete description.

[COM LED] MdB1

View of the Modbus communication LED.

[Mdb Frame Nb] M1Ct

Modbus network frames counter: number of processed frames.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Mb NET CRC errors] M1EC

Modbus network CRC error countered: number of CRC errors

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

124 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[Com. scanner input map] ISA- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Modbus network diag] [Com. scanner input map]

About This Menu

Used for CANopen® and Modbus network.

[Com Scan In1 val.] nM1

Com scanner input 1 value. Value of the first input word.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Com Scan In2 val.] nM2

Com scanner input 2 value. Value of the second input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 125).

[Com Scan In3 val.] nM3

Com scanner input 3 value. Value of the third input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 125).

[Com Scan In4 val.] nM4

Com scanner input 4 value. Value of the fourth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 125).

[Com Scan In5 val.] nM5

Com scanner input 5 value. Value of the fifth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 125).

[Com Scan In6 val.] nM6

Com scanner input 6 value. Value of the sixth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 125).

[Com Scan In7 val.] nM7

Com scanner input 7 value. Value of the seventh input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 125).

[Com Scan In8 val.] nM8

Com scanner input 8 value. Value of the eighth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 (see page 125).

NVE61643 03/2020 125

Display MOn-

[Com scan output map] OSA- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Com scan output map]

About This Menu

Used for CANopen® and Modbus networks.

[Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1

Com scanner output 1 value. Value of the first output word.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Com Scan Out2 val.] nC2

Com scanner output 2 value. Value of the second output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 126).

[Com Scan Out3 val.] nC3

Com scanner output 3 value. Value of the third output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 126).

[Com Scan Out4 val.] nC4

Com scanner output 4 value. Value of the fourth output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 126).

[Com Scan Out5 val.] nC5

Com scanner output 5 value. Value of the fifth output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 126).

[Com Scan Out6 val.] nC6

Com scanner output 6 value. Value of the sixth output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 126).

[Com Scan Out7 val.] nC7

Com scanner output 7 value. Value of the seventh output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 126).

[Com Scan Out8 val.] nC8

Com scanner output 8 value. Value of the eighth output word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 (see page 126).

126 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[Modbus HMI Diag] MdH- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Modbus HMI Diag]

About This Menu

Used for the Modbus serial communication port at the front of the control block (used by the Display
Terminal)

[COM LED] Mdb2

View of the Modbus HMI communication LED.

[Mdb NET frames] M2Ct

Terminal Modbus 2: number of processed frames.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Mdb NET CRC errors] M2EC

Terminal Modbus 2: number of CRC errors.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

NVE61643 03/2020 127

Display MOn-

[Ethernet Emb Diag] MPE- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Ethernet Emb Diag]

About This Menu

Refer to the Modbus TCP Ethernet-IP communication manual for a complete description.

[MAC @] MACE
MAC address of the embedded Ethernet adapter.
Read-only parameter.
The address format is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX.

[ETH emb Rx frames] ErXE

Ethernet embedded Rx frames counter.

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[ETH emb Tx frames] EtXE

Ethernet embedded Tx frames counter.

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[ETH emb error frames] EErE

Ethernet embedded error frames counter.

Setting Description
0...4,294,967,295 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Ethernet Rate Data] ArdE

Actual data rate.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Auto] AUtO Automatic
[10M. full] 10F 10 Mega bytes full-duplex
[10M. half] 10H 10 Mega bytes half-duplex
[100M. full] 100F 100 Mega bytes full-duplex
[100M. half] 100H 100 Mega bytes half-duplex

128 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[DeviceNet Diag] dvn- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [DeviceNet Diag]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed if DeviceNet module (VW3A3609) has been inserted.

[Data rate used] bdrU

Data rate used by the fieldbus module.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Automatic] AUtO Automatic detection
Factory setting
[125 Kbps] 125k 125,000 Bauds
[250 Kbps] 250k 250,000 Bauds
[500 Kbps] 500k 500,000 Bauds

[Fieldbus Error] EPF2

External detected error from fieldbus module.

Setting Description
0...1 0: No Error
1: Profile error, verify the settings on [Command and Reference] CRP-
menu.

[Fieldbus Com Interrupt] CnF

Fieldbus module communication interruption. Refer to the related fieldbus manual.

Setting Description
0...65,535 0: No error
1: Error triggered by network
2: Duplicated MAC ID
3: FIFO Rx error
4: FIFO Tx error
5: CAN overrun
6: Transmission error
7: Bus off
8: IO timeout
9: Acknowledge error
10: DeviceNet network reset
11: IO connection deleted
12: No network power
13: IOC error

NVE61643 03/2020 129

Display MOn-

[Profibus Diag] Prb- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication] [Profibus Diag]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessible if Profibus DP module (VW3A3607) has been inserted.

[Data rate used] bdrU

Data rate used by the fieldbus module.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Automatic] AUtO Automatic detection

Factory setting
[9.6 Kbps] 9k6 9,600 Bauds
[19.2 Kbps] 19k2 19,200 Bauds
[93.75 Kbps] 93k7 93,750 Bauds
[187.5 Kbps] 187k 187,500 Bauds
[500 Kbps] 500k 500,000 Bauds
[1.5 Mbps] 1M5 1.5 MBauds
[3 Mbps] 3M 3 MBauds
[6 Mbps] 6M 6 MBauds
[12 Mbps] 12M 12 MBauds

[PPO profile used] PrFL

PPO profile in use.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not configured] UnGG Not configured

[1] 1 PROFIdrive
[100] 100 Device specific
[101] 101 Device specific
[102] 102 Device specific
[106] 106 Device specific
[107] 107 Device specific

[DP Master Active] dPMA

Active master: 1 or 2.

Setting Code / Value Description

[MCL1] 1 Master 1
Factory setting
[MCL2] 2 Master 2

[Fieldbus Error] EPF2

External detected error from fieldbus module.

130 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[Fieldbus Com Interrupt] CnF

Fieldbus module communication interruption. Refer to the related fieldbus manual.

Setting Description

0...65,535 0: No error
1: Network timeout for received requests
2: Identification error between the module and the master
3: Master in clear mode
4: Master class 2 timeout

[InternCom Error1] ILF1

Option module communication interruption. Refer to the related fieldbus manual.

Setting Description

0...65,535 Setting range

Factory setting: Read only

NVE61643 03/2020 131

Display MOn-

[PROFINET Diag] Prn- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [PROFINET Diag]

About This Menu

Following parameters are accessible if PROFINET® module (VW3A3627) has been inserted.

[MAC @] MAC
MAC address of the PROFINET module.
read-only parameter.
The address format is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX.

[PPO profile used] PrFL

PPO profile in use.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not configured] UnGG Not configured

[1] 1 PROFIdrive
[100] 100 Device specific
[101] 101 Device specific
[102] 102 Device specific
[106] 106 Device specific
[107] 107 Device specific

[iPar Status] IPAE

PROFINET: IPAR service status.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Idle State] IdLE Idle state

[Init] Init Initialization
[Configuration] COnF Configuration
[Ready] rdY Ready
[Operational] OPE Operational
[Not Configured] UCFG Not configured
[Unrecoverable UrEC Unrecoverable detected error
Error]

[iPar Error Code] IPAd

IPar detected error code.

Setting Description

0...5 Setting range

Factory setting: Read only

[DP Master Active] dPMA

Active master: 1 or 2.

Setting Code / Value Description

[MCL1] 1 Master 1
Factory setting

132 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

Setting Code / Value Description

[MCL2] 2 Master 2

[Fieldbus Error] EPF2

External detected error from fieldbus module.

Setting Description
0...13 0: No Error
9: Duplicate IP
10: No IP address
12: IPAR unconfigured
13: IPAR file unrecognized

[Fieldbus Com Interrupt] CnF

Fieldbus module communication interruption.

Setting Description

0...65,535 0: No error
1: Network timeout
2: Network overload
3: Ethernet carrier loss
17: IOC scanner error

[InternCom Error1] ILF1

Option module communication interruption.

Setting Description

0...65,535 Setting range

Factory setting: Read only

NVE61643 03/2020 133

Display MOn-

[EtherCAT Module Diag] Etd- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [EtherCAT Module Diag]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed if EtherCAT module (VW3A3601) has been inserted.

[External Error] epf2

External detected error from fieldbus module.

[Fieldbus Com Interrupt] Cnf

Fieldbus module communication interruption.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: _

[InternCom Error1] ilf1

Internal communication interruption 1.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: _

134 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[Powerlink Diag] PWL- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Powerlink Diag]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be access if Powerlink module (VW3A3619) has been inserted. Refer to the
Powerlink communication manual for a complete description.
This menu contains read-only parameters.

[Mac @] ] MAC
MAC address of the POWERLINK module.
The address format is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX

[Fieldbus Error] ] EPF2

External detected error from fieldbus module.

[Fieldbus Com Interrupt] CnF

Fieldbus module communication interruption. Refer to the related fieldbus manual.

Setting Description
0...65,535 0: No network interruption
1: Unspecified interruption
17: Lost of link (2 ports)
23: Invalid Sync Manager configuration
25: No valid outputs
27: Sync Manager watchdog (1 port)
29: Invalid Sync Manager out configuration
30: Invalid Sync Manager in configuration
31: Invalid watchdog configuration
36: Invalid input mapping
37: Invalid output mapping
38: Inconsistent settings
43: No valid inputs and outputs
44: Sync error
80: EE no access
81: EE error
96: 0x60

[InternCom Error1] ILF1

Option module communication interruption.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read-only

NVE61643 03/2020 135

Display MOn-

[Command word image] CWI- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Command word image]

About This Menu

Command word image.

[Modbus Cmd] CMd1

Command word image built with Modbus port source.
Identical to [CMD Register] CMd (see page 121).

[CANopen Cmd] CMd2

Command word image built with CANopen® port source.
Identical to [CMD Register] CMd (see page 121).

[COM. Module Cmd.] CMd3

Command word image built with fieldbus module source.
Identical to [CMD Register] CMd (see page 121).

[Ethernet Embd cmd.] CMd5

Command word image built with Ethernet embedded source.
Identical to [CMD Register] CMd (see page 121).

136 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[Freq. ref. word map] rWI- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [Freq. ref. word map]

About This Menu

Frequency reference image.

[Modbus Ref Freq] LFr1

Frequency reference image built with Modbus port source (LFR_MDB).

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[CAN Ref Freq] LFr2

Frequency reference image built with CANopen® port source (LFR_CAN).

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Com Module Ref Freq] LFr3

Frequency reference image built with fieldbus module source (LFR_COM).

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Ethernet Embd Ref Freq] LFr5

Embedded Ethernet reference frequency.

Setting Description
-32,767...32,767 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

NVE61643 03/2020 137

Display MOn-

[CANopen map] CnM- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [CANopen map]

About This Menu

This menu is visible if a CANopen fieldbus module is present. Refer to the CANopen communication
module manual.

[RUN LED] COn

Bitfield: view of the CANopen® Run LED status.

[ERR LED] CAnE

Bitfield: view of the CANopen® error LED status.

138 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[PDO1 image] PO1- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [CANopen map] [PDO1 image]

About This Menu

View of the Receive PDO1 and Transmit PDO1.

[Receive PDO1-1] rp11

First frame of the receive PDO1.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Receive PDO1-2] rp12

Second frame of the receive PDO1.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Receive PDO1-3] rp13

Third frame of the receive PDO1.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Receive PDO1-4] rp14

Fourth frame of the receive PDO1.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Transmit PDO1-1] tp11

First frame of the transmit PDO1.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Transmit PDO1-2] tp12

Second frame of the transmit PDO1.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Transmit PDO1-3] tp13

Third frame of the transmit PDO1.

NVE61643 03/2020 139

Display MOn-

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Transmit PDO1-4] tp14

Fourth frame of the transmit PDO1.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

140 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[PDO2 image] PO2- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [CANopen map] [PDO2 image]

About This Menu

View of the RPDO2 and TPDO2: same structure as [PDO1 image] PO1- (see page 139).

[Receive PDO2-1] rp21

First frame of the receive PDO2.

[Receive PDO2-2] rp22

Second frame of the receive PDO2.

[Receive PDO2-3] rp23

Third frame of the receive PDO2.

[Receive PDO2-4] rp24

Fourth frame of the receive PDO2.

[Transmit PDO2-1] tp21

First frame of the transmit PDO2.

[Transmit PDO2-2] tp22

Second frame of the transmit PDO2.

[Transmit PDO2-3] tp23

Third frame of the transmit PDO2.

[Transmit PDO2-4] tp24

Fourth frame of the transmit PDO2.

NVE61643 03/2020 141

Display MOn-

[PDO3 image] PO3- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [CANopen map] [PDO3 image]

About This Menu

View of the RPDO3 and TPDO3.

[Receive PDO3-1] rp31

First frame of the receive PDO3.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Receive PDO3-2] rp32

Second frame of the receive PDO3.
Identical settings as in [Receive PDO3-1] rp31.

[Receive PDO3-3] rp33

Third frame of the receive PDO3.
Identical settings as in [Receive PDO3-1] rp31.

[Receive PDO3-4] rp34

Fourth frame of the receive PDO3.
Identical settings as in [Receive PDO3-1] rp31.

[Transmit PDO3-1] tp31

First frame of the transmit PDO3.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Transmit PDO3-2] tp32

Second frame of the transmit PDO3.
Identical settings as in [Transmit PDO3-1] tp31.

[Transmit PDO3-3] tp33

Third frame of the transmit PDO3.
Identical settings as in [Transmit PDO3-1] tp31.

[Transmit PDO3-4] tp34

Fourth frame of the transmit PDO3.
Identical settings as in [Transmit PDO3-1] tp31.

142 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[CANopen map] CnM- Menu

Access
[Display] [Communication map] [CANopen map]

About This Menu

CANopen® image.

[Canopen NMT state] nMtS

Drive NMT state of the CANopen® slave.

Settings Code / Value Description

[Boot] bOOt Bootup
[Stopped] StOP Stopped
[Operation] OPE Operational
[Pre-op] POPE Pre-Operational

[Number of TX PDO] nbtp

Number of transmit PDO.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Number of RX PDO] nbrp

Number of receive PDO.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[CANopen Error] ErCO

Error registry CANopen®.

Setting Description
0...5 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[RX Error Counter] rEC1

Number of receive error counter (not saved at power off).

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[TX Error Counter] tEC1

Number of transmit errors countered (not saved at power off).

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

NVE61643 03/2020 143

Display MOn-

Section 7.12
[Data logging]

[Data logging]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Distributed logging] dLO- Menu 145
[Log dstrb prm select] LdP- Menu 146
[Distributed logging] dLO- Menu 147

144 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[Distributed logging] dLO- Menu

Access
[Display] [Data logging] [Distributed logging]

About This Menu

This menu is used to store data following specific parameters.
The distributed logging function allows to log up to four parameter distributions at the same time. Each
parameter storage is synchronized with the same sample time.
The result of this function gives the possibility to extract a bar graph with 10 bars (every 10% of the defined
maximum value) to visualize the distribution for each of the four selected parameters.
NOTE: Any modification of the data logging function configuration will clear the data previously stored.
This function aims at extracting samples of data to store them. When available, these samples can be
uploaded by other tools (SoMove and/or Webserver). Data logging meets the need to record and store data
over time.
The drive can store the following data:

Type of [Data logging] Description [Data logging] storage: Access

Automatic/Manual
Drive identification Drive identification data Automatic, in [Dashboard] SoMove
dSH- menu Webserver
Even warning logging Warning logging Automatic, in [Dashboard] SoMove
dSH- menu Webserver
Even error logging Error logging Automatic, in [Dashboard] SoMove
dSH- menu Webserver
Distribution logging 4 Distribution data Manual Webserver
Energy logging 1 Energy logging data Automatic, in [Dashboard] SoMove
dSH- menu Webserver

Activation
To activate [Distributed logging] dLO-:
 Select 1 to 4 data to store with [Log dstrb prm select] LdP-
 Set [Log Distrib State] LdEn to [Start] StArt

The logging starts as soon as the motor is running.

To stop logging, set [Log Distrib State] LdEn to [Stop] StOP.

[Log Distrib State] LdEn

Logging distribution state.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Stop] StOP Distribution logging disabled
Factory setting
[Start] StArt Distribution logs only when the motor is started
[Always] Always Distribution logs all the time
[Reset] Reset Distribution logging reset (configuration, data)
[Clear] Clear Clear distribution data
[Error] Error An error has been detected during distribution logging

NVE61643 03/2020 145

Display MOn-

[Log dstrb prm select] LdP- Menu

Access
[Display] [Data logging] [Distributed logging] [Log dstrb prm select]

About This Menu

This menu allows you to select up to 4 parameters for data logging. The peak value for each parameter is
also stored.

[Log Distrib. Data 1] Ldd1

Logging distribution data 1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Distrib. Log. nO Distribution logging disable

Disable] Factory setting
[Motor Frequency] rFr Motor frequency
[Motor Current] LCr Motor current
[Motor Speed] SPd Motor speed
[Motor Voltage] UOP Motor voltage
[Motor Mech. OPrW Motor mechanical power
Power]
[Input Elec. Power] IPrW Input electrical power
[Output Elec. EPrW Output electrical power
Power]
[Motor Torque] Otr Motor torque
[Mains Voltage] ULn Mains voltage
[DC BUS Voltage] VbUS DC BUS voltage
[PID Feedback] rPF PID feedback
[AI1 Th Value] tH1v Thermal sensor AI1
[AI3 Th Value] tH3v Thermal sensor AI3
[AI4 Th Value] tH4v Thermal sensor AI4
[AI5 Th Value] tH5v Thermal sensor AI5
[Drive Thermal tHd Drive thermal state
State]
[Motor Therm tHr Motor thermal state
State]
[DBR Thermal tHb DBR thermal state
State]

[Log Distrib. Data 2] Ldd2

Logging distribution data 2.
Identical to [Log Distrib. Data 1] Ldd1 (see page 146).

[Log Distrib. Data 3] Ldd3

Logging distribution data 3.
Identical to [Log Distrib. Data 1] Ldd1 (see page 146).

[Log Distrib. Data 4] Ldd4

Logging distribution data 4.
Identical to [Log Distrib. Data 1] Ldd1 (see page 146).

146 NVE61643 03/2020

 Display MOn-

[Distributed logging] dLO- Menu

Access
[Display] [Data logging] [Distributed logging]

About This Menu

NOTE: If a log data exceeds the user defined maximum values for log distribution data, this value will not
be stored in the log distribution.

[Log Distrib Slp Time] LdSt

Logging distribution sample time.

Setting Code / Value Description

[200 ms] 200MS 200 ms
[1 second] 1S 1s
Factory setting
[2 second] 2S 2s
[5 second] 5S 5s

[Dist Max Val 1] LdM1

Maximum value of the log distribution data 1.

Setting Description
10...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Dist Max Val 2] LdM2

Maximum value of the log distribution data 2.

Setting Description
10...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Dist Max Val 3] LdM3

Maximum value of the log distribution data 3.

Setting Description
10...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

[Dist Max Val 4] LdM4

Maximum value of the log distribution data 4.

Setting Description
10...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: Read only

NVE61643 03/2020 147

Display MOn-

148 NVE61643 03/2020

 Altivar Machine ATV340
Complete settings CSt-
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 8
[Complete settings] CSt-

[Complete settings] CSt-

Introduction

[Complete settings] CSt- menu presents all the settings related to drive functions for:
 Motor and drive configuration
 Application functions
 Monitoring functions

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
8.1 [Motor parameters] MPA- Menu 151
8.2 [Define system units] 219
8.3 [Command and Reference] CrP- Menu 221
8.4 [Master/Slave] 236
8.5 [Hoisting Functions] 276
8.6 [Hoisting monitoring] 305
8.7 [Machine Functions] 307
8.8 [Generic functions] - [Speed limits] 319
8.9 [Generic functions] - [Ramp] 321
8.10 [Generic functions] - [Ramp switching] 325
8.11 [Generic functions] - [Stop configuration] 327
8.12 [Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection] 333
8.13 [Generic functions] - [Ref. operations] 336
8.14 [Generic functions] - [Preset speeds] 338
8.15 [Generic functions] - [+/- speed] 341
8.16 [Generic functions] - [+/- speed around ref] 344
8.17 [Generic functions] - [Jump frequency] 347
8.18 [Generic functions] - [PID controller] 349
8.19 [Generic functions] - [Threshold reached] 369
8.20 [Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command] 371
8.21 [Generic functions] - [Output contactor cmd] 374
8.22 [Generic functions] - [Reverse disable] 377
8.23 [Generic functions] - [Torque limitation] 378
8.24 [Generic functions] - [2nd current limit.] 382
8.25 [Generic functions] - [Jog] 384
8.26 [Generic functions] - [High Speed Switching] 386
8.27 [Generic functions] - [Memo reference frequency] 388
8.28 [Generic functions] - [Brake logic control] 389
8.29 [Generic functions] - [Limit switches] 390
8.30 [Generic functions] - [Positioning by sensors] 392
8.31 [Generic functions] - [Torque control] 399
8.32 [Generic functions] - [Parameters switching] 406
8.33 [Generic functions] - [Stop after speed timeout] 411
8.34 [Generic functions] - [DC bus supply] 413
8.35 [Generic functions] - [Multimotors config] 415
8.36 [Generic functions] - [24V Supply Output] 419

NVE61643 03/2020 149

Complete settings CSt-

Section Topic Page

8.37 [Generic Functions] [External Weight Measurement] 420
8.38 [Generic monitoring] 423
8.39 [Input/Output] - [I/O assignment] 432
8.40 [Input/Output] - [DI/DQ] 437
8.41 [Input/Output] - [Analog I/O] 457
8.42 [Input/Output] - [Relay] 474
8.43 [Encoder configuration] 481
8.44 [Embedded Encoder] 488
8.45 [Error/Warning handling] 491
8.46 [Maintenance] 522

150 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.1
[Motor parameters] MPA- Menu

[Motor parameters] MPA- Menu

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Motor parameters] MPA- Menu 152
[Data] Mtd- Menu 156
[Angle test setting] ASA- Menu 167
[Motor tune] MtU- Menu 170
[Motor tune] - [Rotation tune] TRAM- Menu 177
[Motor monitoring] MOP- Menu 183
[Thermal monitoring] tPP- Menu 184
[Motor monitoring] MOP- Menu 193
[Motor control] drC- Menu 196
[Fluxing by DI] FLI- Menu 200
[Spd Loop Optimization] MCL- Menu 203
[Motor control] drC- Menu 213
[Switching frequency] SWF- Menu 216
[Input Filter] dCr- Menu 218

NVE61643 03/2020 151

Complete settings CSt-

[Motor parameters] MPA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters]

About This Menu

If high rating is selected, drive current limitation is extended to 1.8. In and maximum values of motor
parameters linked to current and/or power are reduced. When switching from one to another selection, all
the related parameters are set to their factory setting values.
In any case, the maximum current of the drive does not change. Setting the drive to high rating mode
decreases the nominal values for the motor parameters. It means that for the same motor, an oversized
drive is required in high rating mode.

ATV340 Motor Control Types

ATV340 drive embeds 8 motor control types which covers all the use cases depending of the application.
The following table shows the Motor Control types selection depending of the application needs:

Control Motor Type [Motor Control Type] CTT Description

selection
Open-Loop Asynchronous motor [SVC V] VVC Voltage vector control law
with slip compensation
[U/F VC 5pts] UF5 5 points U/F vector control
law
[Energy Sav.] NLD Energy saving control law
Synchronous motor [Sync. mot.] SYN Permanent magnet control
law
[SYN_U VC] SYNU Permanent magnet control
law for variable torque
applications
Reluctance motor [Reluctance Motor] SRVC Reluctance motor control
law

Closed-Loop 1 Asynchronous motor [FVC] FVC Current vector control law

Synchronous motor [Sync.CL] FSY Permanent magnet control
law
(1) For these applications, an encoder must be present and configured.

Parameters List for Asynchronous Motors

The following table shows the minimum parameters list that needs to be configured for asynchronous
motors depending of [Motor Control Type] CTT selection:
NOTE: After setting these parameters, it is recommended to perform an [Autotuning] TUN to optimize the
performances.

Parameters [SVC V] VVC [FVC] FVC [U/F VC 5pts] UF5 [Energy Sav.] NLD
[Motor Standard] BFR ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
[Nominal Motor Power] ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
NPR
[Nom Motor Voltage] ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
UNS
[Nom Motor Current] ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
NCR
[Nominal Motor Freq] ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
FRS
[Nominal Motor Speed] ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
NSP
(1) Encoder settings depend of the encoder used on the application. (see page 481) or (see page 488)

152 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters [SVC V] VVC [FVC] FVC [U/F VC 5pts] UF5 [Energy Sav.] NLD
[Encoder Type] UECP or ✔ (1)
[Emb Enc Type] EECP
[Encoder supply volt.] ✔ (1)
UECV or [Emb Enc
Supply Volt] EECV
[Encoder usage] ENU or ✔ (1)
[Emb Enc Usage] EENU
(1) Encoder settings depend of the encoder used on the application. (see page 481) or (see page 488)

Parameters List for Synchronous or Reluctance Motors

The following table shows the minimum parameters list that needs to be configured for synchronous or
reluctance motors depending of [Motor Control Type] CTT selection:
NOTE: After setting these parameters, it is recommended to perform an [Autotuning] TUN to optimize the
performances

Parameters [Sync. mot.] SYN [Sync.CL] FSY [SYN_U VC] SYNU [Reluctance Motor]
SRVC
[Sync Nominal I] nCrS ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
[Nom SyncMotor Speed] ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
nSPS
[Nom Motor torque] tqS ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
[Pole pairs] PPnS ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
[Angle setting type] ASt ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
[Encoder Type] UECP or ✔ (1)
[Emb Enc Type] EECP
[Encoder supply volt.] ✔ (1)
UECV or [Emb Enc
Supply Volt] EECV
[Encoder usage] ENU or ✔ (1)
[Emb Enc Usage] EENU
[Autotuning Type] tunt ✔ (2)
(1) Encoder settings depend of the encoder used on the application. (see page 481) or (see page 488)
(2) [Autotuning Type] tunt can be changed to optimize the performances with Reluctance motors.

[Dual Rating] drt

Dual rating state.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Normal Duty] nOrMAL Normal rating, drive current limitation is 1.5 In
[Heavy Duty] HIGH High rating, drive current limitation is 1.8 In
Factory setting

[Motor Control Type] Ctt

Motor control type.
NOTE: Select the motor control type before entering parameter values.

Setting Code / Value Description

[SVC V] VVC Voltage vector control: Open-loop voltage flux vector control with automatic
slip compensation according to the load. It supports operation with a
number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive (if motors are
identical).
Factory setting

NVE61643 03/2020 153

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[FVC] FvC Current vector control closed loop: Closed-loop current flux vector control
for motors with encoder sensor; this option can be selected if an encoder
module has been inserted or embedded encoder is used.
NOTE: Verify the embedded encoder (see page 488) or the encoder
option (see page 481) before selecting [FVC] FvC.
[U/F VC 5pts] UFS 5–segment V/F profile:

The profile is defined by the values of parameters UnS, FrS, U1 to U5

and F1 to F5.
FrS > F5 > F4 > F3 > F2 > F1
NOTE: U0 is the result of an internal calculation based on motor
parameters and multiplied by UFr (%). U0 can be adjusted by modifying
UFr value.
[Sync. mot.] Syn Open-loop synchronous motors: Motor control type specific for permanent
magnet synchronous motors.
[Energy Sav.] nLd Specific motor control type optimized for energy saving.
This motor control type automatically reduces the drive output current
according to the motor load. This automatic current level adaptation allows
energy saving for periods when load is kept to a minimum and preserves
the drive performance up to full load.
[Sync.CL] FSy Closed-loop synchronous motor: For permanent magnet synchronous
motors, with encoder. This selection is only possible if an encoder module
has been inserted or embedded encoder is used.
NOTE: Verify the embedded encoder (see page 488) or the encoder
option (see page 481) before selecting [Sync.CL] FSy
[SYN_U VC] SYnU Open-loop synchronous motor: Motor control type specific for permanent
magnet synchronous motors. This motor control type is used for variable
torque applications.
[Reluctance Motor] SrVc Synchronous reluctance Motor: Motor control type for reluctance motors.
This motor control type is used for variable torque applications. If the
maximum output current of the drive is not equal or greater than the motor
current, this will lead to a lake of torque performances. [Stall Monitoring]
StPC function helps to prevent a motor overload by monitoring the motor
current and the speed rise time.

154 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Adv. Motor Control] AEMC

Advanced motor control.
This parameter enhances the standard motor control. It improves the dynamic and static performances
(such as, but not limited to, torque accuracy and torque dynamics) especially at low frequency and at
frequency greater than the motor nominal frequency.
Disable this feature to retrieve the same motor control behavior available on software version older than
V3.1 (excluded). Enabling this feature with a configuration used on an older software version requires to
verify the setting of the motor control parameters.
In case of configuration transfer, if the configuration is coming from a software version older than V3.1
(excluded), this parameter is set to [No] No automatically.
If this parameter is set to [Yes] Yes, it is not possible to transfer the configuration to a drive with a software
version older than V3.1 (excluded).
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] CTT is set to [SVC V] VVC, [FVC] FVC or
[Energy Sav.] NLD.
Modifying [Motor Control Type] CTT resets [Adv. Motor Control] AEMC to factory settings. However, this
parameter is forced to [No] No if [Motor Control Type] CTT is set to a value different from [SVC V] VVC,
[FVC] FVC or [Energy Sav.] NLD.
Enabling advanced motor control makes [Rotation Tune] TRAM- function accessible (see page 177).

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Disabled.
[Yes] YES Enabled.
Factory setting

NVE61643 03/2020 155

Complete settings CSt-

[Data] Mtd- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Motor data] [Data]

About This Menu

For synchronous motor parameters. Dedicated parameters can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt
is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Fully read and understand the manual of the connected motor.
 Verify that all motor parameters are correctly set by referring to the nameplate and the manual of the
connected motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

This table presents the steps to follow to set and optimize the motor data:

Step Action
1 Enter the motor nameplate
2 Perform the [Autotuning] tUn operation
3 Adjust [Syn. EMF constant] PHS to optimize the behavior:
 Start the motor at minimal stable frequency available on the machine (at minimum load).
 Check and note the [% error EMF sync] rdAE value:
 If the [% error EMF sync] rdAE value is lower than 0%, then [Syn. EMF constant] PHS may be
increased.
 If the [% error EMF sync] rdAE value is upper than 0%, then [Syn. EMF constant] PHS may be
reduced.
[% error EMF sync] rdAE value should be closed to 0%.
 Stop the motor for modify [Syn. EMF constant] PHS in accordance with the value of the [% error EMF
sync] rdAE (previously noted).

[Motor Standard] bFr

Motor standard.
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters:
 [High Speed] HSP
 [Motor Freq Thd] Ftd
 [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS
 [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS
 [Max Frequency] tFr

NOTE: The factory setting value is changed to [60 Hz NEMA] for catalog numbers.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Setting Code / Value Description

[50 Hz IEC] 50 IEC
Factory setting
[60 Hz NEMA] 60 NEMA

156 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Max Frequency] tFr

Maximum output frequency.
The factory setting is 60 Hz, or preset to 72 Hz if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to 60 Hz.
To help prevent [Motor Overspeed] SOF error, it is recommended to have [Max Frequency] TFR equal
to or higher than 110% of [High Speed] HSP.

Setting Description

10.0...599.0 Hz (1) Setting range

Factory setting: 60 Hz
(1) The maximum of the range is 10 * [Nominal Motor Freq] FRS for an asynchronous law or 10 * [Sync Nominal
Freq] FRSS for a synchronous law.

[Nominal Motor Power] nPr

Nominal motor power.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Rated motor power given on the nameplate, in kW if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [50Hz IEC] 50, in
HP if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60Hz NEMA] 60.

Setting Description
According to drive rating –
Factory setting: according to the drive rating

[Nom Motor Voltage] UnS

Nominal motor voltage.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate.

Setting Description
100...690 Vac Setting range
Factory setting: according to drive rating and [Motor Standard] bFr

[Nom Motor Current] nCr

Rated motor current given on the nameplate.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Setting Description

0.25...1.8 In (1) Setting range

Factory setting: according to drive rating and [Motor Standard] bFr
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

NVE61643 03/2020 157

Complete settings CSt-

[Nominal Motor Freq] FrS

Nominal motor frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to 60 Hz.

Setting Description
10.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 50 Hz

[Nominal Motor Speed] nSP

Nominal motor speed.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

If the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, use one of the formulas to
calculate the rated speed:

 Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x

 Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors)

 Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors).

Setting Description
0...65,535 rpm Setting range
Factory setting: according to drive rating

[Motor Param Choice] MPC

Motor parameter choice.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Mot Power] nPr Motor power
Factory setting
[Mot Cosinus] COS Motor cosinus

[Motor 1 Cosinus Phi] COS

Nominal motor cosinus Phi.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Motor param choice] MPC is set to [Mot Cosinus] COS, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or

158 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or

 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Setting Description
0.50...1.00 Setting range
Factory setting: according to the drive rating

[Nominal motor slip] nSL

Motor nominal slip, calculated by the drive.
This is a read-only parameter.
To modify the nominal motor slip, modify the [Rated motor speed] nSP.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Setting Description
0...6553.5 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: _

[AsyncMotor R Stator] rSA

Asynchronous motor stator resistance.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

The factory setting is replaced by the result of the autotuning operation if it has been performed.

Setting Description
0...65,535 mOhm Setting range
Factory setting: 0 mOhm

[Magnetizing Current] IdA

Magnetizing current.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

This parameter impacts the setting of [Nom Motor Torque] TQN.

Setting Description
0...6,553.5 A Setting range
Factory setting: 0 A

NVE61643 03/2020 159

Complete settings CSt-

[AsyncMotor Lf Induct] LFA

Asynchronous motor leakage inductance.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

The factory setting is replaced by the result of the autotuning operation if it has been performed.

Setting Description
0...655.35 mH Setting range
Factory setting: 0 mH

[Rotor Time Const] trA

Rotor time constant.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Setting Description
0...65,535 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

[Sync Nominal I] nCrS

Sync motor nominal current.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Setting Description
0.25...1.8 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: according to the drive rating.
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Nom SyncMotor Speed] nSPS

Nominal synchronous motor speed.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Setting Description
0...48,000 rpm Setting range
Factory setting: according to the drive rating.

160 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Torque scaling] INRT

Torque scaling.
This parameter shows the scaling of [Motor torque (Nm)] OTQN, [Nom Motor Torque] TQN, [Nom Motor
Torque] TQS, [M/S Master Torq Ref] FMTR, [M/S Device Torq Ref] FXT and [M/S Local Torq Ref]
FTOR.
According to your needs, you can adjust the torque scaling multiplying by 10 the default torque unit.
Factory setting: according to the drive rating.

Setting Code / Value Description

[0.001] 0001 Unit: 0.001 Nm
Absolute setting range: 0.001…65.535 Nm
Setting range: -32.767…+32.767 Nm
[0.01] 001 Unit: 0.01 Nm
Absolute setting range: 0.01…655.35 Nm
Setting range: -327.67…+327.67 Nm
[0.1] 01 Unit: 0.1 Nm
Absolute setting range: 0.1…6,553.5 Nm
Setting range: -3,276.7…+3,276.7 Nm
[1] 1 Unit: 1 Nm
Absolute setting range: 1…65,535 Nm
Setting range: -32,767…+32,767 Nm
[10] 10 Unit: 10 Nm
Absolute setting range: 10…655,350 Nm
Setting range: -327,670…+327,670 Nm

[Nom Motor torque] tqS

Nominal motor torque
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Setting Description
0.1...6,553.5 Nm Setting range according to drive ratings and [TQS torque scaling] INRT
setting.
Factory setting: _

[Pole pairs] PPnS

Pole pairs.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Setting Description
1...240 Setting range
Factory setting: according to the drive rating.

NVE61643 03/2020 161

Complete settings CSt-

[Angle setting type] ASt

Automatic angle setting type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

[PSI align] PSI and [PSIO align] PSIO are working for all types of synchronous motors. [SPM align]
SPMA and [IPM align] IPMA increase performances depending on the type of synchronous motor.
[Rotational Current Injection] RCI may be used where [PSI align] PSI and [PSIO align] PSIO do not
give expected performances.

Setting Code / Value Description

[IPM align] IPMA Alignment for IPM motor. Alignment mode for Interior-buried Permanent
Magnet motor (usually, this kind of motor has a high saliency level). It uses
high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment mode.
[SPM align] SPMA Alignment for SPM motor. Mode for Surface-mounted Permanent Magnet
motor (usually, this kind of motor has a medium or low saliency level). It
uses high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment
mode.
[PSI align] PSI Pulse signal injection. Standard alignment mode, without rotor motion
The angle measurement is realized by monitoring the stator current
response to a pulse signal injection over a wide range of frequencies
[PSIO align] PSIO Pulse signal injection - optimized. Optimized alignment mode, without rotor
motion
Same operation as [PSI align] PSI is performed over an optimized range
of frequencies
The measurement time is reduced after the first run order or tune operation,
even if the drive has been turned off
Factory setting
[Rotational Current rCi Rotational current injection. Alignment mode with rotor motion.
Injection] This alignment mode realizes the mechanical alignment of the rotor and the
stator; it requires up to 4 s.
The motor needs to be stopped and without resistive torque.
NOTE: This setting is recommended when a sinus filter is used on the
application.
NOTE: For synchronous reluctance motor, it is recommended to use this
setting.
[No align] nO No alignment

[Syn. EMF constant] PHS

Synchronous motor EMF constant
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU.

PHS adjustment allows you to reduce the current in operation without load.

Setting Description
0...6,553.5 mV/rpm Setting range
Factory setting: 0 mV/rpm

162 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[SyncMotor Stator R] rSAS

Calculated synchronous motor stator R.
Cold state stator resistance (per winding). The factory setting is replaced by the result of the tuning
operation if it has been performed.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

You can enter the value if you know it.

Description
Setting
0...65,535 mOhm Setting range
Factory setting: 0 mOhm

[Autotune L d-axis] LdS

Autotune L d-axis.
Axis "d" stator inductance in mH (per phase).
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

On motors with smooth poles [Autotune L d-axis] LdS = [Autotune L q-axis] LqS = Stator inductance L.
The factory setting is replaced by the result of the autotuning operation if it has been performed.

Setting Description
0...655.35 mH Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[Autotune L q-axis] LqS

Autotune L q-axis.
Axis "q" stator inductance in mH (per phase).
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

On motors with smooth poles [Autotune L d-axis] LdS = [Autotune L q-axis] LqS = Stator inductance L.
The factory setting is replaced by the result of the autotuning operation if it has been performed.

Setting Description
0...655.35 mH Setting range
Factory setting: 0

NVE61643 03/2020 163

Complete settings CSt-

[Sync Nominal Freq] FrSS

Synchronous motor nominal frequency.
Nominal motor frequency for synchronous motor in Hz unit. Automatically updated according to [Nom
SyncMotor Speed] nSPS and [Pole pairs] PPnS data.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Description
Setting
10.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: nSPS x PPnS / 60

[PSI Align Curr Max] MCr

Maximum current of PSI alignment.
Current level in % of [Sync Nominal I] nCrS for [PSI align] PSI and [PSI Oalign] PSIO angle shift
measurement modes. This parameter has an impact on the inductor measurement.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

This current must be equal to or higher than the maximum current level of the application; otherwise an
instability may occur.
If [PSI Align Curr Max] MCr is set to [AUTO] AUtO, [PSI Align Curr Max] MCr is adapted by the drive
according to the motor data settings.

Setting Description
[AUTO] AUtO...300% Setting range
Factory setting: [AUTO] AUtO

NOTE: In case of instability, [PSI Align Curr Max] MCR should be increased by steps up to obtain the
requested performances.

[Current Filter Time] CrtF

Filter time of the current.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Description
[AUTO] AUtO...100.0 ms Setting range
Factory setting: [AUTO] AUtO

164 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Currents Filter] CrFA

Internal currents filter time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Description
Setting
0.0...100.0 ms Setting range
Factory setting: According to drive rating

[% error EMF sync] rdAE

Ratio D-axis current.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU.

Use [% error EMF sync] rdAE to adjust [Syn. EMF constant] PHS, [% error EMF sync] rdAE should
be closed to 0%.
If the [% error EMF sync] rdAE value is:
 Lower than 0%:[Syn. EMF constant] PHS may be increased.
 Upper than 0%: [Syn. EMF constant] PHS may be reduced.

For the all steps to follow to optimize the synchronous motor settings (see page 156).

Setting Description
0.0...6,553.5% Setting range
Factory setting: –

[Tangential Main Inductance] L0A

Tangential main inductance
This parameter is estimated via the tune in rotation and is used by the magnetic saturation curve. Only
enter manually a value if you are copying a drive configuration that has been tuned via the tune in rotation
(see page 177).
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.

Setting Description
0...65535 mH Setting range
Factory setting: 0
(1): For drives with power range ≤ 15 kW. If the power range is greater than 160 kW, the range is 0…65,535 µH else
the range is 0.00…655.35 mH.

[Flux curve coeff A] ALFA

Flux saturation curve coefficient A.
This parameter is estimated via the tune in rotation and it is used by the magnetic saturation curve. Only
enter manually a value if you are copying a drive configuration that has been tuned via the tune in rotation
(see page 177).
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.

Setting Description
-327.67 %...327.67 % Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 %

NVE61643 03/2020 165

Complete settings CSt-

[Flux curve coeff B] BET0

Flux saturation curve coefficient B.
This parameter is estimated via the tune in rotation and it is used by the magnetic saturation curve. Only
enter manually a value if you are copying a drive configuration that has been tuned via the tune in rotation
(see page 177).
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.

Setting Description
-327.67 %...327.67 % Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 %

[Nameplate Nominal Flux] PHI0

Nameplate nominal flux. Read-only parameter.
This parameter is calculated from the motor nameplate and it is used for internal calculation. This
parameter is used for Schneider Electric services purpose
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Description
0.00...655.35 Wb Setting range
Factory setting: -

[Rotor Nominal Flux] PHIA

Rotor nominal flux. Read-only parameter.
This parameter is the flux corresponding to [Magnetizing current] IDA and used in the Flux/Current
model for motor control.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Description
0.0...655.35 Wb Setting range
Factory setting: -

[Main Inductance] LA
Main Inductance Read-only parameter.
This parameter is the result of an internal calculation using [Rotor Nominal flux] PHIA and [Magnetizing
current] IDA.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Description
0...65535 mH (1) Setting range
Factory setting: -
(1): For drives with power range≤ 15 kW. If the power range is greater than 160 kW, the range is 0…65,535 µH else
the range is 0.00…655.35 mH.

166 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Angle test setting] ASA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Motor data] [Angle test setting]

About This Menu

For synchronous motor parameters.
This menu can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync.CL.] FSY.

And if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded encoder is used.

[Angle setting type] ASt

Auto angle setting type.
[PSI align] PSI and [PSIO align] PSIO are working for all types of synchronous motors. [SPM align]
SPMA and [IPM align] IPMA increase performances depending on the type of synchronous motor.
[Rotational Current Injection] RCI may be used where [PSI align] PSI and [PSIO align] PSIO do not
give expected performances.

Setting Code / Value Description

[IPM align] IPMA Alignment for IPM motor. Alignment mode for Interior-buried Permanent
Magnet motor (usually, this kind of motor has a high saliency level). It uses
high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment mode.
[SPM align] SPMA Alignment for SPM motor. Mode for Surface-mounted Permanent Magnet
motor (usually, this kind of motor has a medium or low saliency level). It
uses high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment
mode.
[PSI align] PSI Pulse signal injection. Standard alignment mode, without rotor motion
The angle measurement is realized by monitoring the stator current
response to a pulse signal injection over a wide range of frequencies
[PSIO align] PSIO Pulse signal injection - optimized. Optimized alignment mode, without rotor
motion
Same operation as [PSI align] PSI is performed over an optimized range
of frequencies
The measurement time is reduced after the first run order or tune operation,
even if the drive has been turned off
Factory setting
[Rotational Current rCi Rotational current injection. Alignment mode with rotor motion.
Injection] This alignment mode realizes the mechanical alignment of the rotor and the
stator; it requires up to 4 s.
The motor needs to be stopped and without resistive torque.
NOTE: This setting is recommended when a sinus filter is used on the
application.
NOTE: For synchronous reluctance motor, it is recommended to use this
setting.
[No align] nO No alignment

[Angle auto-test] ASA

Angle setting.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Auto angle setting is not done
Factory setting
[Yes] Yes Auto angle setting is requested.
[Done] dOne Auto angle setting is done.

NVE61643 03/2020 167

Complete settings CSt-

[Angle Test Assign] ASL

Auto angle setting activation by logic signal.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

NOTE: If a line contactor function has been configured, the contactor closes during measurement.

[Angle setting Mode] ATA

Automatic auto angle setting activation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Automatic auto angle setting is not activated
[Run Command] AUto Auto angle setting launched at run command if the drive is not aligned state.
Factory setting

[Angle offset value] AsV

Auto angle setting value.
Phase-shift angle between the motor and the encoder. 8192 corresponds to 360°.

Setting Description
[No]...8192 Automatic auto angle setting value
Factory setting: [No] no

168 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Angle setting status] AStS

Auto angle setting status.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not done] tAb Angle setting value is not defined
Factory setting
[Pending] Pend Angle setting is in waiting state
[In progress] PrOg Angle setting function is in progress
[Error] Fail Angle Setting function failed
[Done] done Angle function is OK
[Custom Value] CUS The phase-shift angle value has been entered by the user via the display
terminal or serial Link

NVE61643 03/2020 169

Complete settings CSt-

[Motor tune] MtU- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Motor data] [Motor tune]

[Autotuning] tUn

WARNING
UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT
Autotuning moves the motor in order to tune the control loops.
 Only start the system if there are no persons or obstructions in the zone of operation.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

During autotuning, noise development and oscillations of the system are normal.
If [Autotuning Type] tunt is set to [Standard] std, during autotuning, the motor makes small
movements.
If [Autotuning Type] tunt is set to [Rotation] rot, during autotuning, the motor runs at half of its
nominal frequency.
In any case, the motor has to be stopped before performing a tune operation. Verify that the application
does not make the motor turn during the tune operation.
If [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [Reluctance Motor] SrVC, the drive operates the mechanical
alignment of the motor ([Angle setting type] ASt set to [Rotational Current Injection] rCI) prior to start
the autotuning.
The tune operation optimizes:
 The motor performances at low speed.
 The estimation of the motor torque.
 The accuracy of the estimation of the process values in sensorless operation and monitoring.

Autotuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a “freewheel stop” or “fast stop”
function has been assigned to a digital input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
Autotuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands, which will be taken into account after the
autotuning sequence.
If autotuning has detected an error, the drive always displays [No action] nO and, depending on the
configuration of [Tuning Error Resp] tnL, may switch to [Autotuning] tUn detected error mode.
Autotuning may last for several seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the Display Terminal to
change to [No action] nO.
NOTE: The motor thermal state has a significant influence on the tuning result. Always perform a motor
tuning with the motor stopped and cold. Verify that the application does not have the motor operate during
a tuning operation.
To redo a motor tuning, wait that it is stopped and cold. Set first [Autotuning] tUn to [Erase Autotuning]
CLr, then redo the motor tuning.
The use of the motor autotuning without doing a [Erase Autotuning] CLr first is used to get the thermal
state estimation of the motor.
The cable length has an influence on the tune result. If the wiring is modified, it is necessary to redo the
tune operation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No action] nO Autotuning not in progress

Factory setting
[Apply Autotuning] YES Autotuning is performed immediately if possible, then the parameter
automatically changes to [No action] nO. If the drive state does not allow
the tune operation immediately, the parameter changes to [No] nO and the
operation must be done again.

170 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Erase Autotuning] CLr The motor parameters measured by the autotuning function are reset. The
default motor parameter values are used to control the motor. [Autotuning
Status] tUS is set to [Not done] tAB.

[Autotuning Status] tUS

Autotuning status.
This parameter is not saved at drive power-off. It shows the autotuning status since the last power-on (for
information only, cannot be modified).

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not done] tAb The autotuning is not done

Factory setting
[Pending] PEnd The autotuning has been requested but not yet performed
[In Progress] PrOG The autotuning is in progress
[Error] FAIL The autotuning has detected an error
[Done] dOnE The motor parameters measured by the autotuning function are used to
control the motor

[Auto tuning usage] tunu

Auto tune usage.
This parameter shows the way used to modify the motor parameters according to its estimated thermal
state.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no No thermal state estimation

Factory setting
[Therm Mot] tm Statoric thermal state estimation based on nominal current and current
consumed by the motor.

[Tuning Error Resp] tnL

Response to autotune error.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting

[Autotuning Assign] tUL

Autotuning input assignment.
The autotuning is performed when the assigned input or bit changes to 1.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
NOTE: The autotuning causes the motor to start up.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.

NVE61643 03/2020 171

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Autotuning Type] tunt

Autotuning type.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [Reluctance Motor] SrVC.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Standard] Std Standard autotune

Factory setting
[Rotation] rot Autotune in rotation.
This selection can be used for:
 Optimization of energy saving
 Application with low inertia
 Application that requires high motor control performances.

With this selection, less than 30% of resistive load must be present on the
application to optimize the autotuning result.
During the autotune sequence, the motor will be started to half of its nominal
frequency during maximum 45 seconds.

[Automatic autotune] AUt

Automatic autotune.

WARNING
UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT
If this function is activated, autotuning is performed each time the drive is switched on.
 Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

The motor must be stopped when switching on the drive.

This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

172 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function deactivated

Factory setting
[Yes] YES A tuning is automatically done at each power-up

[Tune Selection] StUn

Tune selection.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Default] tAb The default motor parameter values are used to control the motor
Factory setting
[Measure] MEAS The values measured by the autotuning function are used to control the
motor
[Custom] CUS The values manually set are used to control the motor

[Saliency mot. state] SMOt

Information on synchronous motor saliency.
This parameter can be accessed if :
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Tune Selection] Stun is set to [Measure] MEAS, and
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or

 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVC.
This parameter helps to optimization of motor control performances for synchronous motors.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Tune not done
[Low salient] LLS [Low saliency level.
Recommended configuration: [Angle setting type] ASt = [PSI align] PSI
or [PSIO align] PSIO and [HF inj. activation] HFI = [No] nO
[Med salient] MLS Medium saliency level.
[Angle setting type] ASt = [SPM align] SPMA and [HF inj. activation]
HFI = [Yes] YES can be used to improve performances
[High salient] HLS High saliency level.
[Angle setting type] ASt = [IPM align] IPMA and [HF inj. activation]
HFI = [Yes] YES can be used to improve performances.

[Autotuning Lvl Of Current] tCr

Tune current ratio.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
This parameter shows the level of current applied to the motor during auto tuning, in percent of the drive
nominal current.
This parameter has an impact on the inductor measurement.

Setting Description
[Auto]auto...300% Factory setting: [Auto]auto

NVE61643 03/2020 173

Complete settings CSt-

[Angle setting type] ASt

Automatic angle setting type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVC.

[PSI align] PSI and [PSIO align] PSIO are working for all types of synchronous motors. [SPM align]
SPMA and [IPM align] IPMA increase performances depending on the type of synchronous motor.
[Rotational Current Injection] RCI may be used where [PSI align] PSI and [PSIO align] PSIO do not
give expected performances.

Setting Code / Value Description

[IPM align] IPMA Alignment for IPM motor. Alignment mode for Interior-buried Permanent
Magnet motor (usually, this kind of motor has a high saliency level). It uses
high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment mode.
[SPM align] SPMA Alignment for SPM motor. Mode for Surface-mounted Permanent Magnet
motor (usually, this kind of motor has a medium or low saliency level). It
uses high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment
mode.
[PSI align] PSI Pulse signal injection. Standard alignment mode, without rotor motion
The angle measurement is realized by monitoring the stator current
response to a pulse signal injection over a wide range of frequencies
[PSIO align] PSIO Pulse signal injection - optimized. Optimized alignment mode, without rotor
motion
Same operation as [PSI align] PSI is performed over an optimized range
of frequencies
The measurement time is reduced after the first run order or tune operation,
even if the drive has been turned off
Factory setting
[Rotational Current rCi Rotational current injection. Alignment mode with rotor motion.
Injection] This alignment mode realizes the mechanical alignment of the rotor and the
stator; it requires up to 4 s.
The motor needs to be stopped and without resistive torque.
NOTE: This setting is recommended when a sinus filter is used on the
application.
NOTE: For synchronous reluctance motor, it is recommended to use this
setting.
[No align] nO No alignment

[PSI Align Curr Max] MCr

Maximum current of PSI alignment.
Current level in % of [Sync Nominal I] nCrS for [PSI align] PSI and [PSI Oalign] PSIO angle shift
measurement modes. This parameter has an impact on the inductor measurement.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

This current must be equal to or higher than the maximum current level of the application; otherwise an
instability may occur.
If [PSI Align Curr Max] MCr is set to [AUTO] AUtO, [PSI Align Curr Max] MCr is adapted by the drive
according to the motor data settings.

174 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Description
[AUTO] AUtO...300% Setting range
Factory setting: [AUTO] AUtO

[Rotational Current Level] rCL

Rotational current level.
This parameter can be accessed if [Angle setting type] ast is set to [Rotational Current Injection] rCi.
The current level should be set according to the torque required during the alignment operation.

Setting Description
10...300% Setting range, as a percentage of the nominal motor current
Factory setting: 75%

[Rotational Torque Current] rtC

Rotational torque current.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Angle setting type] ast is set to [Rotational Current Injection] rCi, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU.

Setting Description
0...300% Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

[RCI Max Freq] rCSP

RCI maximum output frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Angle setting type] ast is set to [Rotational Current Injection] rCi, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU.

Setting Description
[AUTO] AUtO...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: [AUTO] AUtO

[RCI Round Nb] rCrP

RCI round number.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Angle setting type] ast is set to [Rotational Current Injection] rCi, and if
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU.

Setting Description
[AUTO] AUtO...32767 Setting range
Factory setting: [AUTO] AUtO

NVE61643 03/2020 175

Complete settings CSt-

[RCI With Transformer] rCIr

RCI alignment with transformer.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and if
 [Angle setting type] AST is set to [Rotational Current Injection] RCI

 [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:

 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Sync.CL] FSY, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SRVC.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Function active

176 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Motor tune] - [Rotation tune] TRAM- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Motor data] [Motor tune] [Rotation tune]

Overview
This menu can be accessed if [Adv. Motor Control] AEMC is set to [Yes] Yes.
The tune in rotation is used to estimate the nominal magnetizing current ([Magnetizing current] IDA), to
identify and take into account the magnetic saturation by tracking the electrical operating range of the
motor. This function completes [Adv. Motor Control] AEMC feature.
The tune in rotation helps to improve the performances especially at low frequency, at frequency greater
than the motor nominal frequency and for closed loop control.
Example of application
Application requiring torque control accuracy, torque dynamics and motor frequency greater than [Nominal
Motor Freq] FRS.
Incompatibility
 The tune in rotation does not manage [Brake Logic Control] BLC- function: [Brake assignment] BLC
must be set to [No] NO. If a brake is used, the brake must be handled manually to perform the tune in
rotation.
 The tune in rotation is not compatible with the use of Sinus filter.
 The tune in rotation is only compatible with drive controlling a single asynchronous motor.

Prerequisites to perform a tune in rotation

 Expert access: [Access Level] LAC = [Expert] EPR,
 Asynchronous motor: [Motor Control Type] CTT = [SVC V] VVC, [FVC] FVC or [Energy Sav.] NLD.
 Advanced Motor Control activated: [Adv. Motor Control] AEMC = [Yes] YES,
 Motor nameplate is entered,
 The motor must be at cold state to perform a tune in rotation,
 It is advisable to perform the tune in rotation with minimum of load or without load,
 The motor must be free to operate all along the execution of tune in rotation. During the tune in rotation,
the motor should operate in stable and normal conditions. For example, no current limitation must be
triggered.
Standard procedure for performing a tune in rotation

WARNING
UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT
Autotuning moves the motor in order to tune the control loops
 Only start the system if there are no persons or obstructions in the zone of operation.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Step Action
1 Set [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP to [Saturation] SATF.
2 Set [Rotation Tune Enable] TUNR to [Apply autotuning] YES.
3 At next run order, the tune in rotation is performed.
During the tune in rotation, the motor operates at a frequency defined by the parameter [Rotation Tune Freq]
TLFR and [Drive State] HMIS shows [Autotuning] TUN.
Note:
 The run order must remain active during the tune in rotation.
 At the beginning of the tune in rotation, a standstill motor tuning is performed in order to measures the motor
stator resistance ([AsyncMotor R Stator] RSA) and the leakage inductance ([AsyncMotor Lf Inductance]
LFA).
 [Rotor time const] TRA, [Magnetizing current] IDA and [Nominal motor slip] NSL are not measured via
standstill motor tuning. It is the result of an internal calculation.
 After the standstill motor tuning, several current cycles are repeated (number depending on [Nb of
Repetitions] TNBR). The motor operates all through this phase without stopping.
 The tune in rotation can last more than a minute depending on the motor, the drive setting and the
configuration of the tune in rotation.

NVE61643 03/2020 177

Complete settings CSt-

Step Action
4 At the end of the tune in rotation, [Rotation Tune Status] TURS switches to [Autotuning Done] DONE. The
motor is stopped and the run order can be removed.
[Rotor time const] TRA, [Magnetizing Current] IDA, [Tangential Main Inductance] L0A, [Flux curve coeff
A] ALFA and [Flux curve coeff B] BET0 are updated.
Also, at the end of the tune in rotation:
 [Rotation Tune Enable] TUNR switches back to [No action] No,
 [Rotation Tune Select] STUR switches to [Measure] MEAS,
 [Autotuning Status] TUS switches to [Autotuning Done] DONE.

Error detected during tune in rotation

Refer to [Autotuning Error] TNF description (see page 626)

[Rotation Tune Type] EFAP

Rotation Tune Type. This parameter modifies the used Flux/Current model.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Standard] LINF1 Standard.
Linear approach of the magnetic curve calculated from motor nameplate
parameters.
Factory setting
[Saturation] SATF Saturation.
Non-linear approach of the magnetic saturation curve.
This setting requires to perform a tune in rotation to estimate IDA, L0A,
ALFA and BET0.

[Rotation Tune Enable] TUNR

Rotation Tune Enable.

WARNING
UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT
Autotuning moves the motor in order to tune the control loops.
 Only start the system if there are no persons or obstructions in the zone of operation.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

This parameter can be accessed if [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No Action] No The tune in rotation is not in progress and not requested.
Factory setting

178 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Apply Autotuning] YES The tune in rotation will be performed at next run order, then the parameter
automatically changes to [No action] nO.
To help repeatability of the results, it is advisable to erase the tune in
rotation before performing a new one.
NOTE: The tune in rotation cannot be requested if [Brake Logic Control]
BLC is configured or if [Sinus Filter Activation] OFI is set to [Yes] YES.
[Erase Autotuning] CLR L0A, IDA, ALFA and BET0 are reset. The default values are used
to control the motor. [Rotation Tune Status] TURS switches to [Not done]
TAB.
NOTE: It does not affect standstill motor tuning parameters (RSA and
LFA are not reset).

[Rotation Tune Status] TURS

Rotation Tune Status. Read-only parameter.
This parameter can be accessed if [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.
This parameter is not saved at drive power-off. It shows the status of the tune in rotation since the last
power-on.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Done] TAB The tune in rotation is not done since the last power-on.
Factory setting
[Pending] PEND The tune in rotation has been requested but not yet performed.
[In Progress] PROG The tune in rotation is in progress.
[Error] FAIL The tune in rotation has detected an error.
[Autotuning Done] DONE The tune in rotation is done.
The motor parameters measured by the tune in rotation are used to control
the motor.

[Rotation Tune Select] STUR

Rotation Tune Selection. Read-only parameter.
This parameter can be accessed if [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Default] TAb The default motor parameter values are used to control the motor
Factory setting
[Measure] MEAS The values measured by the tune in rotation are used to control the motor.
[Custom] CUS The values manually set are used to control the motor.
NOTE: At least one of the following parameters has been entered manually:
L0A, ALFA or BET0.

[Autotuning Status] tUS

Autotuning status. Read-only parameter.
This parameter is not saved at drive power-off. It shows the standstill motor tuning status since the last
power-on (for information only, cannot be modified).

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not done] tAb Standstill motor tuning is not done since the last power-on.
Factory setting
[Pending] PEnd Standstill motor tuning has been requested but not yet performed
[In Progress] PrOG Standstill motor tuning is in progress
[Error] FAIL Standstill motor tuning has detected an error
[Done] dOnE Standstill motor tuning is done.
The motor parameters measured by the autotuning function are used to
control the motor

NVE61643 03/2020 179

Complete settings CSt-

[Rotation Tune Freq] TLFR

Rotation tune reference frequency.
During the tune in rotation, the motor operates at this frequency. If [High Speed] HSP is lower than
[Rotation Tune Freq] TLFR, the motor operates at [High Speed] HSP.
This parameter can be accessed if [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.
This parameter is reset to factory settings if [Motor Standard] BFR or [Nominal Motor Freq] FRS is
modified.
For robustness, it is advisable to let this parameter set to its factory setting.

Setting Code/Value Description

[Auto] Auto it corresponds to [Nominal Motor Freq] FRS/2
Factory setting
0.1...599.0 Hz Setting range

[Nb of Repetitions] TNBR

Number of autotuning sequence repetitions.
During the tune in rotation, one or several current cycles are repeated. The motor operates all through this
phase without stopping. This parameter modifies the number of cycles.
This parameter can be accessed if [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.
Increasing the number of cycles helps to improve the accuracy of the tune in rotation. The duration of tune
in rotation is also increased.

Setting Description
1...3 Setting range
Factory setting: 1

[Main Inductance] LA
Main Inductance Read-only parameter.
This parameter is the result of an internal calculation using [Rotor Nominal flux] PHIA and [Magnetizing
current] IDA.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Description
0...65535 mH (1) Setting range
Factory setting: -
(1): For drives with power range≤ 15 kW. If the power range is greater than 160 kW, the range is 0…65,535 µH else
the range is 0.00…655.35 mH.

[Tangential Main Inductance] L0A

Tangential main inductance
This parameter is estimated via the tune in rotation and is used by the magnetic saturation curve. Only
enter manually a value if you are copying a drive configuration that has been tuned via the tune in rotation.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.

Setting Description
0...65535 mH Setting range
Factory setting: 0
(1): For drives with power range ≤ 15 kW. If the power range is greater than 160 kW, the range is 0…65,535 µH else
the range is 0.00…655.35 mH.

180 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Nameplate Nominal Flux] PHI0

Nameplate nominal flux. Read-only parameter.
This parameter is calculated from the motor nameplate and it is used for internal calculation. This
parameter is used for Schneider Electric services purpose
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Description
0.00...655.35 Wb Setting range
Factory setting: -

[Rotor Nominal Flux] PHIA

Rotor nominal flux. Read-only parameter.
This parameter is the flux corresponding to [Magnetizing current] IDA and used in the Flux/Current
model for motor control.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Description
0.0...655.35 Wb Setting range
Factory setting: -

[Flux curve coeff A] ALFA

Flux saturation curve coefficient A.
This parameter is estimated via the tune in rotation and it is used by the magnetic saturation curve. Only
enter manually a value if you are copying a drive configuration that has been tuned via the tune in rotation.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.

Setting Description
-327.67 %...327.67 % Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 %

[Flux curve coeff B] BET0

Flux saturation curve coefficient B.
This parameter is estimated via the tune in rotation and it is used by the magnetic saturation curve. Only
enter manually a value if you are copying a drive configuration that has been tuned via the tune in rotation.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.

Setting Description
-327.67 %...327.67 % Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 %

[1st Id min current] IDL1

First Id min current level in rotation.
This parameter determines the min level of magnetizing current (Id) reached during the first current cycle
of the tune in rotation. It is expressed in % of nominal magnetizing current ([Magnetizing current] IDA).
This parameter is reset to factory setting if [Magnetizing current] IDA is modified.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.

Setting Description
0%...[1st Id max current] IDH1 Setting range
Factory setting: 50 %)

NVE61643 03/2020 181

Complete settings CSt-

[1st Id max current] IDH1

First Id max current level in rotation.
This parameter determines the max level of magnetizing current (Id) reached during the first current cycle
of the tune in rotation. It is expressed in % of nominal magnetizing current ([Magnetizing current] IDA).
This parameter is reset to factory setting if [Magnetizing current] IDA is modified.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.

Setting Description
[1st Id min current] IDL1… 300 % Setting range
Factory setting: 100%)

[2nd Id min current] IDL2

Second Id max current level in rotation.
This parameter determines the min level of magnetizing current (Id) reached during all current cycles of
the tune in rotation after the first one. It is expressed in % of nominal magnetizing current ([Magnetizing
current] IDA).
This parameter is reset to factory setting if [Magnetizing current] IDA is modified.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Nb of Repetitions] TNBR is greater than 1.

Setting Description
0 %... [2nd Id max current] IDH2 Setting range
Factory setting: 20 %

[2nd Id max current] IDH2

Second Id max current level in rotation.
This parameter determines the mac level of magnetizing current (Id) reached during all current cycles of
the tune in rotation after the first one. It is expressed in % of nominal magnetizing current ([Magnetizing
current] IDA).
This parameter is reset to factory setting if [Magnetizing current] IDA is modified.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Nb of Repetitions] TNBR is greater than 1.

Setting Description
[2nd Id min current] IDL2… 300 % Setting range
Factory setting: 120 %)

[Autotuning flux verif] TUNV

Autotuning flux verification value. Read-only parameter.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Rotation Tune Type] EFAP is set to [Saturation] SATF.

This parameter is used for Schneider Electric services purpose.

Setting Code/Value Description

[NA] NA Value not available.
The tune in rotation has not yet been performed since the last power-on or [Nb
of Repetitions] TNBR is set to 1.
Factory setting
1...65,535 % A numerical value is displayed after a successful tune in rotation if [Nb of
Repetitions] TNBR is set to 2 or 3.

182 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Motor monitoring] MOP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Motor monitoring]

[Motor Th Current] ItH

Motor thermal monitoring current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate.

Setting Description

0.2...1.8 In(1) Setting range

Factory setting: According to drive rating
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Motor Thermal Mode] tHt

Motor thermal monitoring mode.
NOTE: An error is detected when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and reactivation occurs
when the state falls back below 100%.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No thermal monitoring
[Self cooled] ACL Self ventilated motor
Factory setting
[Force-cool] FCL Fan-cooled motor

[MotorTemp ErrorResp] OLL

Overload error response.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Free wheel
Factory setting

NVE61643 03/2020 183

Complete settings CSt-

[Thermal monitoring] tPP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Motor monitoring] [Thermal monitoring]

About This Menu

The thermal monitoring function helps to prevent against high temperature by monitoring the real
temperature by the drive.
PTC, PT100, PT1000, and KTY84 thermal probes are supported by this function.
The function gives the possibility to manage 2 levels of monitoring:
 A Warning level: the drive triggers an event without stopping the application.
 An Error level: the drive triggers an event and stops the application.

The thermal probe is monitored for the following detected error:

 Overheating
 Probe break (loss of signal)
 Probe short-circuit

Activation
[AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS allows you to activate the thermal monitoring on the related analog input:
 [No] nO: the function is disabled
 [Yes] yES: the thermal monitoring is enabled on the related AIx.

Type of Thermal Probe Selection

[AIx Type] AIxt allows you to select the type of thermal sensor(s) connected on the related analog
input:
 [No] nO: no sensor
 [PTC Management] ptc: one to six PTC (in serial) is used
 [KTY] KtY: 1 KTY84 is used
 [PT100] 1Pt2: 1 PT100 connected with two wires is used
 [PT1000] 1Pt3: 1 PT1000 connected with two wires is used
 [PT100 in 3 wires] 1Pt23: 1 PT100 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5 only)
 [PT1000 in 3 wires] 1Pt33: 1 PT1000 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5 only)
 [3 PT100 in 3 wires] 3Pt23: 3 PT100 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5 only)
 [3 PT1000 in 3 wires] 3Pt33: 3 PT1000 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5 only)

2-wire thermal probes are supported on analog input 2 to analog input 5.

Wiring for PT100 and PT1000 Probes

For 2-wire probes, the following wirings are possible:

184 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI1 Th Monitoring] tH1S

Activation of the thermal monitoring on AI1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Yes

[AI1 Type] AI1t

AI1 assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Th Monitoring] tH1S is not set to [No] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
Factory setting
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA

[AI1 Th Error Resp] tH1b

Thermal monitoring response to a detected error for AI1.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is not set to
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

[AI1 Th Error Level] tH1F

Error detection level for AI1.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 110.0°C

[AI1 Th Warn Level] tH1A

Warning level for AI1.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

NVE61643 03/2020 185

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 90.0°C

[AI1 Th Value] tH1v

AI1 thermal value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description
-15.0...200.0°C Setting range
Factory setting: _

[AI3 Th Monitoring] tH3S

Activation of the thermal monitoring on AI3.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[YES] YES Yes

[AI3 Type] AI3t

AI3 assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Th Monitoring] tH3S is not set to [No] no.
Identical to [AI1 Type] AI1t (see page 185) with factory setting: [Current] 0A.

[AI3 Th Error Resp] tH3b

Thermal monitoring response to a detected error for AI3.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

186 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI3 Th Error Level] tH3F

Error detection level for AI3.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 110.0°C

[AI3 Th Warn Level] tH3A

Warning level for AI3.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 90.0°C

[AI3 Th Value] tH3v

AI3 thermal value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description
-15.0...200.0°C Setting range
Factory setting: _

[AI4 Th Monitoring] tH4S

Activation of the thermal monitoring on AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[YES] YES Yes

[AI4 Type] AI4t

AI4 assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Th Monitoring] tH4S is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc

NVE61643 03/2020 187

Complete settings CSt-

[AI4 Th Error Resp] tH4b

Thermal monitoring response to a detected error for AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] Ai4t is not set to
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

[AI4 Th Error Level] tH4F

Error detection level for AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] Ai4t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 110.0°C

[AI4 Th Warn Level] tH4A

Warning level for AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] Ai4t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 90.0°C

[AI4 Th Value] tH4v

AI4 thermal value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] Ai4t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description
-15.0...200.0°C Setting range
Factory setting: _

188 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI5 Th Monitoring] tH5S

Activation of the thermal monitoring on AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[YES] YES Yes

[AI5 Type] AI5t

AI5 assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Th Monitoring] tH5S is not set to [No] nO.
Identical to [AI4 Type] AI4t (see page 187).

[AI5 Th Error Resp] tH5b

Thermal monitoring response to a detected error for AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] Ai5t is not set to
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

[AI5 Th Error Level] tH5F

Error detection level for AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] Ai5t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 110.0°C

NVE61643 03/2020 189

Complete settings CSt-

[AI5 Th Warn Level] tH5A

Warning level for AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] Ai5t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description

-15.0...200.0°C Setting range

Factory setting: 90.0°C

[AI5 Th Value] tH5v

AI5 thermal value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] Ai5t is not set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Current] 0A, or
 [PTC Management] PtC.

Setting Description
-15.0...200.0°C Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Enc Therm Sensor Type] tHEt

Encoder thermal sensor type.
This parameter can be accessed if an encoder module different from a HTL encoder has been inserted or
embedded encoder is used.

Settings Code/Value Description

[None] nOnE None
Factory settings
[PTC] PtC PTC
[PT100] 1Pt2 PT100
[PT1000] 1Pt3 PT1000
[KTY] ktY KTY
[Klixon] kLix Klixon

[Enc Th ErrorResp] tHEb

Thermal monitoring response to a detected error for the encoder input.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 An encoder module has been inserted or embedded encoder is used, and
 [Enc Therm Sensor Type] tHEt is not set to [None] nOnE.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO External detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] Stt (see page 327),
without tripping. In this case, the detected error relay does not open and the
drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected error disappears, according
to the restart conditions of the active command channel (for example,
according to [2/3-wire control] tCC and [2-wire type] tCt
(see page 234)if control is via the terminals). Configuring a warning for this
detected error is recommended (assigned to a digital output, for example)
in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

190 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Fallback speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed(1)
[Speed rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected error
maintained] occurred, as long as the detected error is active and the run command has
not been removed(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC Injection] dCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with some other
functions
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

[Enc Th Error Level] tHEF

Thermal error level for encoder.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 An encoder module has been inserted or embedded encoder is used, and
 [Enc Therm Sensor Type] tHEt is not set to:
 [None] nOnE, or
 [PTC] PtC.

Setting Description
-15.0...200.0°C Setting range
Factory setting: 110.0°C

[Enc Th Warn Level] tHEA

Thermal warning level for encoder.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 An encoder module has been inserted or embedded encoder is used, and
 [Enc Therm Sensor Type] tHEt is not set to:
 [None] nOnE, or
 [PTC] PtC.

Setting Description
-15.0...200.0°C Setting range
Factory setting: 90.0°C

[Enc Th Value] tHEV

Encoder thermal value.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 An encoder module has been inserted or embedded encoder is used, and
 [Enc Therm Sensor Type] tHEt is not set to:
 [None] nOnE, or
 [PTC] PtC.

Setting Description
-15.0...200.0°C Setting range
Factory setting: _

NVE61643 03/2020 191

Complete settings CSt-

[Fallback Speed] LFF

Fallback speed.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

192 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Motor monitoring] MOP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Motor monitoring]

About This Menu

The thermal monitoring function helps to prevent the motor from overheating by an estimation of the
thermal state of the motor.

[Current Limitation] CLI

Internal current limit.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
 Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor.
 Verify that the parameter [Current Limitation] CLi is set to a value lower or equal to the value shown
in this table.
 Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements
in determining the current limit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NOTE: If the setting is less than 0.25. In, the drive may lock in [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL if this has
been enabled. If it is less than the no-load motor current, the motor cannot run.

Setting Description
0...1.8 In(1) Setting range
Factory setting: 1.8 In(1)
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Attenuation Time] SOP

Attenuation time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor surge limit.] SVL is not set to [No] No.
The value of the [Volt surge limit. opt ] SOP parameter corresponds to the attenuation time of the cable
used. It is defined to help to prevent the superimposition of voltage wave reflections resulting from long
cable lengths. It limits over-voltages to twice the DC bus rated voltage.
As surge voltage depends on many parameters such as types of cable, different motor powers in parallel,
different cable lengths in parallel, and so on, it is recommend the use of an oscilloscope to check the over-
voltage values obtained at the motor terminals.
To retain the overall drive performance, do not increase the SOP value unnecessarily.

Setting Code / Value Description

[6 µs] 6 6 µs
[8 µs] 8 8 µs
Factory setting
[10 µs] 10 10 µs

NVE61643 03/2020 193

Complete settings CSt-

[Sinus Filter Activation] OFI

Sinus filter activation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] srvC.

NOTICE
DAMAGE TO THE SINUS FILTER
Do not set the maximum output frequency [Max frequency ] tFr to a value greater than 100 Hz on
system with a sinus filter.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No sinus filter
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Use of a sinus filter to limit over-voltages on the motor and reduce the
ground detected error leakage current or in case of applications with Step-
Up transformer.

[Output Short Circuit Test] Strt

Output short circuit test configuration.
The drive outputs are tested at every power-up irrespective of the configuration of this parameter. If this
parameter is set to [Yes] YES, the test is also done every time a run command is applied. These tests
cause a slight delay (a few ms). In the event of an error, the drive locks.
The drive output short-circuit (terminals U-V-W): SCF error can be detected.
The factory setting value is changed to [Yes] YES depending on the catalog numbers.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not test at run command
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Output short circuit test at each run command

[Motor Therm Thd] ttd

Motor thermal threshold for [Motor Thermal Thd] TSA warning activation.

Setting Description
0...118% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Motor2 therm. level] ttd2

Motor 2 thermal level for [Motor2 Thermal Thd] TS2 warning activation.

Setting Description
0...118% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

194 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Motor3 therm. level] ttd3

Motor 3 thermal level for [Motor3 Thermal Thd] TS3 warning activation.

Setting Description
0...118% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Motor4 therm. level] ttd4

Motor 4 thermal level for [Motor4 Thermal Thd] TS4 warning activation.

Setting Description
0...118% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

NVE61643 03/2020 195

Complete settings CSt-

[Motor control] drC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Motor control]

About This Menu

This menu shows the motor control related parameters.

[IR compensation] UFr

This parameter is used to optimize torque at low speed, or to adapt to special cases (for example: for
motors connected in parallel, decrease [IR compensation] UFr). If there is insufficient torque at low
speed, increase [IR compensation] UFr. A too high value can avoid the motor to start (locking) or change
the current limiting mode.

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Slip compensation] SLP

Slip compensation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [SVC V] VVC, or
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [Energy Sav.] NLD.

The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessarily exact.

If the slip setting is lower than the actual slip, the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state,
but at a lower speed than the reference.
If the slip setting is higher than the actual slip, the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.

Setting Description
0...300% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[U1] U1 to [U5] U5
V/F profile setting.
Voltage point 1 on 5 points V/F to Voltage point 5 on 5 points V/F.
These parameters can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0...800 Vac Setting range according to rating
Factory setting: 0 Vac

[F1] F1 to [F5] F5
Frequency point 1 on 5 points V/F to Frequency point 5 on 5 points V/F.
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] UF5.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

196 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Output Ph Rotation] PHr

Output phase rotation.
Modifying this parameter operates as an inversion of 2 of the three motor phases. This results in changing
the direction of rotation of the motor.

Setting Code / Value Description

[ABC] AbC Standard rotation
Factory setting
[ACB] ACb Opposite rotation

[Inertia Factor] SPGU

Inertia factor
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr, and
 [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UFS, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU.

Setting Description
1...1,000% Setting range
Factory setting: 40%

[Boost Activation] bOA

Boost activation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
The factory setting of this parameter is modified to:
 [Inactive] No if [Motor Control Type ]CTT is set to [Reluctance Motor] SRVC.
 [Constant ]CSTE if [Motor Control Type] CTT is set to [Sync. mot.] SYN, [SYN_U VC] SYNU or
[Sync.CL] FSY.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Inactive] nO No boost
[Dynamic] dYnA Dynamic boost, the magnetizing current value is modified according to the
motor load.
Factory setting
NOTE: Drive manages itself the value [Magnetizing Current] iDA to
optimize the performances.
NOTE: This selection can't be accessed if [Motor Control Type] CTT is
set to [Sync. mot.] Syn, [Sync.CL] FSY, [Reluctance Motor] SrVC or
[SYN_U VC] SYNU.
[Static] StAt Static boost, the magnetizing current value follows the profile whatever the
motor load
NOTE: With this selection the [Boost] boo and [Freq Boost] FAb are
taken into account.
NOTE: This selection can be used for conical motor with [Boost] boo sets
to a negative value.
[Constant] CStE Constant boost, the magnetizing current is maintained in case of change of
direction of the motor. An additional parameter is available to handle the
deceleration and stop phase. Cste can be accessed if [Motor Control
Type] Ctt is set to [Sync. mot.] Syn, [Sync.CL] FSY, [Reluctance
Motor] SRVC or [SYN_U VC] Synu.
NOTE: With this selection only [Boost] boo is taken into account.

NVE61643 03/2020 197

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Conical Motor] CMOT Conical boost, can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is not set to
[Sync. mot.] Syn, [Sync.CL] FSY, [Reluctance Motor] SRVC and
[SYN_U VC] Synu.
NOTE: With this selection, it is possible to adjust the [Boost] boo for
acceleration and [Boost On Deceleration] boo2 for deceleration.

[Boost] bOO
Value at 0 Hz: % of nominal magnetizing current (taken into account if different from 0).
A too high value of [Boost] bOO can result in a magnetic saturation of the motor, which leads to a torque
reduction.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr, and
 [Boost Activation] BOA is not set to [Inactive]No.

NOTE: For synchronous motors, it is recommended to set this value to optimize control at low speed.

Setting Description
-100...100% Setting range
If [Boost Activation] BOA is set to [Dynamic] DYNA, [Boost] BOo is set
to 25%.
Factory setting: 0%

[Boost On Deceleration] bOO2

Value in % of nominal magnetizing current (taken into account if different from 0).
This parameter is used during deceleration phase to quickly reduce the magnetizing current at stop phase.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr, and
 [Boost Activation] BOA is set to [Conical Motor]Cmot.

Setting Description
-100...0% Setting range
Factory setting: -25%

[Freq Boost] FAb

Value at 0 Hz: speed threshold to reach nominal magnetizing current.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr, and
 [Boost Activation] BOA is not set to [NO]No, and
 [Boost Activation] BOA is not set to [Constant]CSte.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
If [Boost Activation] BOA is set to [Dynamic] DYNA, [Freq Boost] FAB
is set to 30.0 Hz.
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

NOTE: For synchronous motors, it is recommended to set this value to optimize control at low speed.

198 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Braking level] Vbr

Braking transistor command level.

Setting Description
335...1130 V Setting range
Factory setting: According to drive rating voltage

NVE61643 03/2020 199

Complete settings CSt-

[Fluxing by DI] FLI- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Motor control] [Fluxing by DI]

About This Menu

Configure the fluxing by digital input.

[Motor fluxing] FLU

Motor fluxing configure

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
If the parameter [Motor fluxing] FLu is set to [Continuous] Fct, fluxing is always active, even if the
motor does not run.
 Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the flux current to be applied.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup, magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the
motor.
In [Continuous] FCt mode, the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up.
in [Not continuous] FnC mode, fluxing occurs when the motor starts up.
The flux current is greater than [Nom Motor Current] nCr (configured rated motor current) when the flux
is established and is the adjusted to the motor magnetizing current.
If [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [Sync. mot.] SYn, the [Motor fluxing] FLU parameter causes the
alignment of the motor and not the fluxing.
If [Brake assignment] bLC is not [No] nO), the [Motor fluxing] FLU parameter has no effect.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not continuous] FnC Non-continuous mode
[Continuous] FCt Continuous mode
This option is not possible if [Auto DC Injection] AdC (see page 333) is
[Yes] YES or if [Type of stop] Stt (see page 327) is [Freewheel] nSt
[No] FnO Function inactive
Factory setting

[Fluxing assignment] FLI

Fluxing input assignment

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the flux current to be applied.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Assignment is only possible if [Motor fluxing] FLU is set to [Not continuous] FnC.

200 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

If a DI or a bit is assigned to the motor fluxing command, flux is built up when the assigned input or bit is
at 1.
If a DI or a bit has not been assigned, or if the assigned DI or bit is at 0 when a run command is sent, fluxing
occurs when the motor starts.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Angle setting type] ASt

Automatic angle setting type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrvC.

[PSI align] PSI and [PSIO align] PSIO are working for all types of synchronous motors. [SPM align]
SPMA and [IPM align] IPMA increase performances depending on the type of synchronous motor.
[Rotational Current Injection] RCI may be used where [PSI align] PSI and [PSIO align] PSIO do not
give expected performances.

Setting Code / Value Description

[IPM align] IPMA Alignment for IPM motor. Alignment mode for Interior-buried Permanent
Magnet motor (usually, this kind of motor has a high saliency level). It uses
high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment mode.
[SPM align] SPMA Alignment for SPM motor. Mode for Surface-mounted Permanent Magnet
motor (usually, this kind of motor has a medium or low saliency level). It
uses high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment
mode.
[PSI align] PSI Pulse signal injection. Standard alignment mode, without rotor motion
The angle measurement is realized by monitoring the stator current
response to a pulse signal injection over a wide range of frequencies

NVE61643 03/2020 201

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[PSIO align] PSIO Pulse signal injection - optimized. Optimized alignment mode, without rotor
motion
Same operation as [PSI align] PSI is performed over an optimized range
of frequencies
The measurement time is reduced after the first run order or tune operation,
even if the drive has been turned off
Factory setting
[Rotational Current rCi Rotational current injection. Alignment mode with rotor motion.
Injection] This alignment mode realizes the mechanical alignment of the rotor and the
stator; it requires up to 4 s.
The motor needs to be stopped and without resistive torque.
NOTE: This setting is recommended when a sinus filter is used on the
application.
NOTE: For synchronous reluctance motor, it is recommended to use this
setting.
[No align] nO No alignment

202 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Spd Loop Optimization] MCL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Motor control] [Spd Loop Optimization]

About This Menu

This procedure can be done if [Motor control type] CTT is not set to [U/F VC 5pts] UF5 or [SYN_U VC]
SYNU.

Recommended Procedure for Setting the High-Performance Speed Loop

Step Action
1 Enter the motor parameters. If you subsequently modify one of these, you have to perform this whole
procedure again.
2 The value of the inertia being driven must be entered in the [Application Inertia] JAPL parameter.
(see page 209)
NOTE: If a motor parameter is modified, the estimated inertia is recalculated and updated (parameters
[Estim. app. inertia] JESt and [Inertia Mult. Coef.] JMUL. [Application Inertia] JAPL returnes to its
default value according to the new value of [Estim. app. inertia] JESt.
3 Check the speed loop response time by first setting [Feed forward] FFP to 0 (see graphs on next page).
4 If necessary, adjust the bandwidth and stability using parameters [FreqLoop Stab] STA and
[FreqLoopGain] FLG (see page 206).
5 To optimize ramp following, increase the feedforward parameter [[Feed forward] FFP as indicated on
the next page until the best result is obtained.
6 The feedforward term bandwidth can be adjusted if necessary (as shown on the next page) to further
improve the ramp following or to filter the noise on the speed reference.

High-Performance speed Loop - Setting the [Feed forward] FFP Parameter

This is used to adjust the level of dynamic torque feedforward required for accelerating and decelerating
the inertia. The effect of this parameter on ramp following is illustrated below. Increasing the value of FFP
allows the ramp to be followed more closely. However, if the value is too high, overspeed occurs. The
optimum setting is obtained when the speed follows the ramp precisely; this depends on the accuracy of
the [Application Inertia] JAPL parameter, (see page 209) and the [Encoder filter value] FFr
parameter setting (see page 209)
ffp settings

Initial response with FFP=0 Increase in FFP

R: Reference division R: Reference division

NVE61643 03/2020 203

Complete settings CSt-

Increase in FFP Increase in FFP

R: Reference division R: Reference division

High-Performance Speed Loop - Setting the [FeedFwd Bandwidth] FFV Parameter

This is used to adjust the bandwidth of the dynamic torque feedforward term. The effect of this parameter
on ramp following is illustrated below. Decreasing the value of FFV reduces the effect of noise on the
speed reference (torque ripple). However, too great a decrease in relation to the ramp settings (on short
ramps) causes a delay, and ramp following is adversely affected. Increasing the value of FFV allows the
ramp to be followed more closely, but also heightens noise sensitivity. The optimum setting is obtained by
reaching the best compromise between ramp following and the existing noise sensitivity.
ffv settings

Initial response with FFV=100% Reduction in FFV

R: Reference division R: Reference division

Increase in FFV
R: Reference division

204 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Speed loop type] SSL

Speed loop type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] CTT is not set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYNU.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Standard] Std Standard speed loop
Factory setting
[High Perf] HPF High-performance speed loop. It is advised to deactivate [Dec.Ramp Adapt
] brA = [No] no

[Speed prop. gain] SPG

Speed loop proportional gain.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [Standard] std, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYNU.

Setting Description

0...1,000% Setting range

Factory setting: 40%

[Speed time integral] SIt

Speed loop integral time constant.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [Standard] std, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYNU.

Setting Description

1...65,535 ms Setting range

Factory setting: According to the drive rating.

[K speed loop filter] SFC

Speed filter coefficient (0(IP) to 1(PI)).

Setting Description

0...100 Setting range

Factory setting: 65

[Spd est. filter time] FFH

Filter time of the estimated speed.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Description

0.0...100.0 ms Setting range

Factory setting: According to the drive rating

NVE61643 03/2020 205

Complete settings CSt-

[FreqLoop Stab] STA

Frequency loop stability (Speed loop damping factor).
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYNU.

Stability: Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient, according to the dynamics of the
machine. Gradually increase the stability to increase control loop attenuation and thus reduce any
overspeed.

Setting Description

0...100% Setting range

Factory setting: 20%

[FreqLoopGain] FLG
Frequency loop gain (Speed loop bandwidth).
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYNU.

Used to adapt the response of the machine speed transients according to the dynamics. For machines with
high resistive torque, high inertia of fast cycles, increase the gain gradually.

Setting Description

0...100% Setting range

Factory setting: 20%

[Feed forward] FFP

Feed-Forward term activation and setting.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYNU.

Percentages of the high-performance regulator feedforward term. 100% corresponds to the term
calculated using the value of [Application Inertia] JAPL.

Setting Description

0...200% Setting range

Factory setting: 0%

206 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[FeedFwd Bandwidth] FFV

Bandwidth of the filter of feed-forward term.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYNU.

Bandwidths of the high-performance speed loop feedforward term, as a percentage of the predefined
value.

Setting Description

20...500% Setting range

Factory setting: 100%

[External FeedFwd Assign] tEff

External feed-forward mode

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Analog input is not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
NOTE: AI3 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref.Freq- LCC Reference Frequency via remote terminal
Rmt.Term]
[Ref. Freq- Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
Modbus]
[Ref. Freq- CAn Reference frequency via CANopen if a CANopen module has been inserted
CANopen]
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been
Module] inserted
[Embedded EtH Embedded Ethernet
Ethernet]
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[DI7 PI7...PI8 Digital input DI7...DI8 used as pulse input
PulseInput]...[DI8
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
PulseInput]
22 kW.
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up to
22kW.

NVE61643 03/2020 207

Complete settings CSt-

[Inertia Mult. Coef.] JMUL

Scaling factor for inertia displays.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYNU.

Increment for [Application Inertia] JAPL and [Estim. app. inertia] JESt parameters, calculated by the
drive, in read-only mode: 0.1 gm², 1 gm², 10 gm², 100 gm², 1000 gm².

Setting Description
0.0...6553.5 gm² Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 gm²

[Estim. app. inertia] JEST

Estimated application inertia.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYNU.

The inertia being driven is estimated by the drive according to the motor parameters, in read-only mode.
Speed loop default settings are determined by the drive from this inertia.
Increment given by [Inertia Mult. Coef.] JMUL: - 0.1 gm², 1 gm², 10 gm², 100 gm² or 1000 gm².

Setting Description
1...9,999 kg.m² Setting range
Factory setting: –

[App. Inertia Coef.] JACo

Adjustable application inertia ratio.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYNU.

Coefficient which fixes the ratio between [Estim. app. inertia] JESt and [Application Inertia] JAPL
parameters.
[Application Inertia] JAPL = [Estim. app. inertia] JESt x [App. Inertia Coef. ] JACO.

Setting Description
0.10...100.00 Setting range
Factory setting: 1

208 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Application Inertia] JAPL

Adjustable application inertia.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to:
 [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYNU.

Adjustable application inertia used by the drive to optimize speed loop settings).
Increment given by [Inertia Mult. Coef.] JMUL: 0.1 gm², 1 gm², 10 gm², 100 gm² or 1000 gm².
NOTE: If a motor parameter is modified, the estimated inertia is recalculated and updated (parameters
[Estim. app. inertia] JESt and [Inertia Mult. Coef.] JMUL). [Application Inertia] JAPL is also returned
to its default value according to the new value of [Estim. app. inertia] JESt.

Setting Description
0.00...655.35 kgm² Setting range
Factory setting: -

[Encoder filter activ.] FFA

Encoder feedback filter activation.
This parameter can be accessed if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded encoder is used.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Encoder usage] Enu is not set to [No] no, or
 [Emb Enc Usage] EEnu is not set to [No] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Filter deactivated
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Filter activated

[Encoder filter value] FFr

Encoder feedback filter value.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Encoder filter activ.] FFA is set to [Yes] yes.

Setting Description
0.0...40.0 ms Setting range
Factory setting: according to encoder rating

[Notch Filter Activation] NFA

Notch filter activation.
This parameter activates the notch filter function. Two independent notch filters can be configured.
The notch filter central frequency should be set at or slightly higher than the mechanical resonance
frequency. The main task is to identify as precise as possible the resonance frequency.
NOTE: Vibrations may occurs at frequencies higher than the mechanical resonance frequency, depending
on the settings of the speed loop and motor parameters. It is important to identify the real mechanical
resonance frequency.
Perform the following actions for the commissioning:
1. Set the motor data
2. Set the application data
3. Set the speed loop settings
4. In case of vibrations, set the Notch filter settings as described bellow
5. If the performances are not OK, restart from step 3

NVE61643 03/2020 209

Complete settings CSt-

This parameter can be accessed if:

 An encoder module has been inserted or embedded encoder is used.
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF.

Setting Code / Value Description

[First] 1ST Notch filter 1 enabled
[2nd] 2nd Notch filter 2 enabled
[All] ALL Notch filters 1 and 2 enabled
[No] no No notch filter enabled
Factory setting

Notch filter settings

210 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Notch Filter Freq 1] NFf1

Notch filter 1 central frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Notch Filter Activation] nFA is set to:
 [First] 1sT, or
 [All] ALL.

Setting Description
10.0...150.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 15.0 Hz

[Notch Filter Bdw 1] NFB1

Notch filter 1 bandwidth.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Notch Filter Activation] nFA is set to:
 [First] 1sT, or
 [All] ALL.

This parameter defines the bandwidth of the notch filter 1. Filter with higher bandwidth provides better
stability margin when the load resonant frequency changes (with trolley position or load).
NOTE: Rising the bandwidth can interfere with the expect drive dynamic (reducing the dynamic of the
speed loop).

Setting Description
10...400% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Notch Filter Depth 1] NFD1

Notch filter 1depth.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Notch Filter Activation] nFA is set to:
 [First] 1sT, or
 [All] ALL.

This parameter defines the gain of the notch filter 1 at the central frequency. When NFD1=100%, no filter
is applied.

Setting Description
0...99% Setting range
Factory setting: 10%

NVE61643 03/2020 211

Complete settings CSt-

[Notch Filter Freq 2] NFF2

Notch filter 2 central frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Notch Filter Activation] nFA is set to:
 [Second] 2nd, or
 [All] ALL.

Setting Description
10.0...150.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 85.0 Hz

[Notch Filter Bdw 2] NFB2

Notch filter 2 bandwidth.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Notch Filter Activation] nFA is set to:
 [Second] 2nd, or
 [All] ALL.

This parameter defines the bandwidth of the notch filter 2. Filter with higher bandwidth provides better
stability margin when the load resonant frequency changes (with trolley position or load).
NOTE: Rising the bandwidth can interfere with the expect drive dynamic (reducing the dynamic of the
speed loop).

Setting Description
10...400% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Notch Filter Depth 2] NFD2

Notch filter 2 depth.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Speed loop type] SSL is set to [High Perf] HPF, and
 [Notch Filter Activation] nFA is set to:
 [Second] 2nd, or
 [All] ALL.

This parameter defines the gain of the notch filter 2 at the central frequency. When NFD2 =100%, no
filter is applied.

Setting Description
0...99% Setting range
Factory setting: 25%

212 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Motor control] drC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Motor control]

About This Menu

This menu shows the motor control related parameters.

[HF inj. activation] HFI

Activation of HF injection.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] SrVc.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no HF injection inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] yes HF injection active

[HF injection freq.] FrI

Frequency of the HF injection signal.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [HF inj. activation] HFi is set to [yes] yes.

Setting Description
250...1000 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 500 Hz

[HF pll bandwidth] SPb

Bandwidth of the HF PLL.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [HF inj. activation] HFi is set to [yes] yes.

Setting Description
0...400% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Current Level Align] ILr

Current level of the HF alignment.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [HF inj. activation] HFi is set to [yes] yes.

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: 50%

NVE61643 03/2020 213

Complete settings CSt-

[Boost level align.] SIr

Boost level for IPMA alignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Description
0...200% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Angle error Comp.] PEC

Angle position error compensation.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [HF inj. activation] HFi is set to [yes] yes.

Setting Description
0...500% Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

About Output Voltage Management and Overmodulation

[Overmodul. Activation] OVMA

Overmodulation activation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPR.
The purpose of the overmodulation is to:
 compensate the voltage loss in DC bus when the drive is loaded.
 increase the maximum possible voltage to reduce current consumption at high motor voltage and limit
thermal effect on the motor.
In factory settings, the motor supplied by the intermediate of the drive has:
 a common output voltage mode not null depending on the DC bus supply.
 No overmodulation ([Overmodul. Activation] OVMA is set to [No] No): sinusoidal phase to phase
voltage.
 output voltage limited to the maximum possible value depending on DC bus supply which depends on
the main power supply.

1 Maximum possible value of Output voltage limitation (default value)

2 VLim with numeric value under the maximum limitation
3 Output voltage
4 Output voltage limitation with full overmodulation (hexagon form)

214 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Default] DEFAULT Overmodulation is not configured
By default, the Output voltage limitation describes a circle with at maximum
radius depending of DC bus voltage.
The radius can be reduced to a lower value by setting a numerical value to
[Output voltage limitation] Vlim.
Factory setting
[Full] FULL Overmodulation is active and full.
The output voltage limitation describes a regular hexagon depending of DC
bus voltage.
The phase to phase voltages are not sinusoidal.

[Output voltage limitation] VLIM

Output voltage limitation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPR.
The purpose of this parameter is to modify the output voltage limitation to a lower value than the maximum
default value.
The unit of the numerical value of this parameter is in phase to phase rms voltage.
This parameter cannot be set to a numerical value if [Overmodul. Activation] OVMA is set to [FULL]
full.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Default] DEFAULT Default value of Output Voltage limitation.
The Output Voltage limitation is at the maximum capability of the DC bus
voltage depending on [Overmodul. Activation] OVMA setting.
Factory setting
0...9999 V Setting range of the output limitation voltage.
Set a value lower than the corresponding [Default] Default value to
reduce the maximum output voltage limitation. If the numerical value is
higher than the corresponding [Default] Default value, this
corresponding value is considered.

NVE61643 03/2020 215

Complete settings CSt-

[Switching frequency] SWF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Switching frequency]

[Switching frequency] SFr

Drive switching frequency.
Adjustment range: The maximum value is limited to 4 kHz if [Motor surge limit.] SVL parameter is
configured.
If [Sinus Filter Activation] OFI is set to [Yes] YES, the minimum value is 2 kHz and the maximum value
is limited to 6 kHz or 8 kHz according to drive rating.
NOTE: In the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive automatically reduces the switching frequency
and reset it once the temperature returns to normal.
In case of high-speed motor, it is advised to increase the PWM frequency [Switching frequency] SFr at
8, 12 kHz or 16 kHz

Setting Description
2...8 or 16 kHz according to drive rating Setting range
Factory setting: 4.0 kHz or 2.5 kHz according to the drive rating

[Noise Reduction] nrd

Motor noise reduction.
Random frequency modulation helps to prevent any resonance, which may occur at a fixed frequency.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Fixed frequency
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Frequency with random modulation

[Switch Freq Type] SFt

Switching frequency type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.
The motor switching frequency is modified (reduced) when the internal temperature of the drive is too high.

Setting Code / Value Description

[SFR type 1] HF1 Heating loss optimization
Allows the system to adapt the switching frequency according to the motor
frequency. This setting optimizes the heating loss of the drive in order to
improve the drive efficiency.
Factory setting
[SFR type 2] HF2 Allows the system to keep a constant chosen switching frequency
[Switching frequency] SFr whatever the motor frequency [Output
frequency] rFr.
With this setting, the motor noise is kept as low as possible by a high
switching frequency.
In the event of overheating, the drive automatically decreases the switching
frequency.
It is restored to its original value when the temperature returns to normal.

216 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Motor Surge Limit.] SVL

Surge voltage limitation.
This parameter is forced to [No] NO if [Sinus Filter Activation] OFI is set to [Yes] YES.
This function limits motor over-voltages and is useful in the following applications:
 NEMA motors
 Old or poor quality motors
 Spindle motors
 Rewound motors

This parameter can remain set to [No] nO for 230/400 Vac motors used at 230 Vac, or if the length of cable
between the drive and the motor does not exceed:
 4 m with unshielded cables
 10 m with shielded cables

NOTE: When [Motor Surge Limit.] SVL is set to [Yes] yes, the maximum switching frequency
[Switching freq.] SFr is modified.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Function active

[Attenuation Time] SOP

Attenuation time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor surge limit.] SVL is not set to [No] No. The value of the
[Attenuation Time] SOP parameter corresponds to the attenuation time of the cable used. It is defined to
help to prevent the superimposition of voltage wave reflections resulting from long cable lengths. It limits
over-voltages to twice the DC bus rated voltage. As surge voltage depends on many parameters such as
types of cable, different motor powers in parallel, different cable lengths in parallel, and so on, It is
recommended to use an oscilloscope to check the over-voltage values obtained at the motor terminals. If
the higher value of [Attenuation Time] SOP is not enough according to the cable lengths, an output filter
or a dV/dt filter must be used.
To retain the overall drive performance, do not increase the SOP value unnecessarily.

Setting Code / Value Description

[6 µs] 6 6 µs
[8 µs] 8 8 µs
Factory setting
[10 µs] 10 10 µs

NVE61643 03/2020 217

Complete settings CSt-

[Input Filter] dCr- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Motor parameters] [Input Filter]

About This Menu

This function monitors the ripple on the DC bus by detecting instabilities. It is not used to detect input phase
loss.
On the DC bus, if the oscillation frequencies are inconsistent with those observed on the mains supply, and
if the amplitude is inconsistent with the drive capability (such as the DC bus capacitors), the drive triggers
[DC Bus Ripple Warn] DCRW warning.
Depending on the setting of [DC Bus Ripple Config] DCRC, if [DC Bus Ripple Warn] DCRW warning is
persistent during an amount of time set by an internal fixed value, [DC Bus Ripple Error] DCRE error is
triggered.

[Input Filter] IFI

Use of an input filter.
This parameter is forced to [No] NO if:
 [Motor Control Type] CTT is not set to [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, or
 [U1] U1 or … or [U5] U5 is configured, or
 [F1] F1 or … or [F5] F5 is configured.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No input filter used.
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Motor control performance is adjusted to consider the use of an input filter
in order to help to prevent ripple on the DC bus.

[DC Bus Ripple Config] DCRC

Configuration of the DC bus ripple monitoring.
This parameter is preset to [Error] FLT, if [Input Filter] IFI is set to [Yes] YES.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO DC bus ripple monitoring function is inactive.
This selection can't be accessed if [Input Filter] IFI is set to [Yes] YES.
Factory setting
[Warning] WARN DC bus ripple monitoring function is enabled.
In case of DC bus ripple, the drive triggers [DC Bus Ripple Warn] DCRW
warning.
[Error] FLT The DC bus ripple monitoring function is fully enabled. The drive triggers
[DC Bus Ripple Error] DCRE error if [DC Bus Ripple Warn] DCRW
warning is persistent.

218 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.2
[Define system units]

[Define system units]

[Define system units] SUC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Define system units]

About This Menu

In order to be easy to configure, commission, operate, and maintain, the drive uses the application units.
The physicals that are concerned by application units are:
 Temperature values
 Currency values

NOTE: Some other default system units are automatically deduced from configurable system units or from
other parameters.
System unit applies by default to all communication parameters and HMI (Display Terminal, Web server,
DTM-based software).
When a system unit is changed, there is no rescaling of values. Numerical values are kept, but the meaning
of these values is not the same:
 After a change, the behavior of the product will not change (the system stays numerically the same).
 If new values are written through communication or through HMI in new unit, then the behavior is
impacted. In that case, all parameters should be reconfigured according to the new selected unit.
 In order to avoid issues due to a modification of system unit parameters, system units should be
modified only during the installation of the product and before the commissioning of the functions.
The precision of the physical values is selected at the same time as the unit.
By default, values are signed.
Default range of values are:

16 bits values 32 bits values

-32,768...32,767 -2,147,483,648...2,147,483,648

[Temperature unit] SUtp

Default system application unit used for temperature.
Available temperature units:

Unit Symbol Conversion

Celsius Degree °C –
Fahrenheit Degree °F TF = 9/5*Tc+32

Setting Code / Value Description

[0.1°C] 01C 0.1 °C
Factory setting
[0.1°F] 01F 0.1 °F

NVE61643 03/2020 219

Complete settings CSt-

[Currency unit list] SUCU

Default system application unit used for currency.

Setting Code / Value Description

[EURO] EUrO Euro
Factory setting
[$] dollar Dollar
[£] pound Pound
[Krone] Kr Krone
[Renminbi] rMb Renminbi
[Other] OtHEr Other

220 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.3
[Command and Reference] CrP- Menu

[Command and Reference] CrP- Menu

[Command and Reference] CrP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Command and Reference]

Command and Reference Channels Parameter Can Be Accessed

Run commands (forward, reverse, stop, and so on) and references can be sent using the following
channels:

Command Reference
Terminals: Digital inputs DI Terminals: Analog inputs AI, pulse input
Display Terminal Display Terminal
Integrated Modbus Integrated Modbus
CANopen® CANopen
Fieldbus module Fieldbus module
– +/– speed via the Display Terminal
Integrated Ethernet Integrated Ethernet
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

NOTE: The stop keys on the Display Terminal can be programmed as non-priority keys. A stop key can
only have priority if the [Stop Key Enable] PSt parameter menu is set to [Stop Key Priority ] YES or
[Stop Key Priority All] All.
The behavior of the drive can be adapted according to requirements:
 [Not separ.] SIM: Command and reference are sent via the same channel.
 [Separate] SEP: Command and reference may be sent via different channels.In these configurations,
control via the communication bus is performed in accordance with the DRIVECOM standard with only
5 freely assignable bits (see communication parameter manual). The application functions cannot be
accessed via the communication interface.
 [I/O profile] IO: The command and the reference can come from different channels. This configuration
both simplify and extends use via the communication interface. Commands may be sent via the digital
inputs on the terminals or via the communication bus. When commands are sent via a bus, they are
available on a word, which acts as virtual terminals containing only digital inputs. Application functions
can be assigned to the bits in this word. More than one function can be assigned to the same bit.
NOTE: Stop commands from the Display Terminal remain active even if the terminals are not the active
command channel.

NVE61643 03/2020 221

Complete settings CSt-

Reference Channel for [Not separ.] SIM, [Separate] SEP and [I/O profile] IO Configurations, PID Not Configured

(1) Note: Forced local is not active in [I/O].

The black square represents the factory setting assignment.

Fr1: terminals (including I/O extension module), Display Terminal, integrated Modbus, CANopen®,
embedded Ethernet, DI7 PulseInput, DI8 PulseInput.
Fr1b, for SEP and IO: terminals (including I/O extension module), Display Terminal, integrated
Modbus, CANopen®, embedded Ethernet, DI7 PulseInput, DI8 PulseInput.
Fr1b, for SIM: terminals (including I/O extension module), DI7 PulseInput, DI8 PulseInput.
SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3, MA2, MA3: terminals (including I/O extension module), Display Terminal,
integrated Modbus, CANopen®, embedded Ethernet, DI7 PulseInput, DI8 PulseInput, and AI Virtual 1.
Fr2: terminals (including I/O extension module), Display Terminal, integrated Modbus, CANopen®,
embedded Ethernet, and Ref Freq via DI..

222 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Reference Channel for [Not separ.] SIM, [Separate] SEP and [I/O profile] IO Configurations, PID Configured with PID
References at the Terminals

(1) Note: Forced local is not active in [I/O profile].

(2) Ramps not active if the PID function is active in automatic mode.

The black square represents the factory setting assignment.

Fr1: terminals (including I/O extension module), Display Terminal, integrated Modbus, CANopen®,
embedded Ethernet, DI7 PulseInput, DI8 PulseInput.
Fr1b, for SEP and IO: terminals (including I/O extension module), Display Terminal, integrated
Modbus, CANopen®, embedded Ethernet, DI7 PulseInput, DI8 PulseInput.
Fr1b, for SIM: terminals (including I/O extension module), DI7 PulseInput, DI8 PulseInput.
SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3: terminals (including I/O extension module), Display Terminal, integrated
Modbus, CANopen®, embedded Ethernet, DI7 PulseInput, DI8 PulseInput.
Fr2: terminals (including I/O extension module), Display Terminal, integrated Modbus, CANopen®,
embedded Ethernet, and Ref Freq via DI..

NVE61643 03/2020 223

Complete settings CSt-

Command Channel for [Not separ.] SIM configuration

Reference and command, not separate.
The command channel is determined by the reference channel. The parameters FR1, FR2, RFC,
FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command.
Example: If the reference is Fr1 = AI1 (analog input at the terminals), control is via DI (digital input at
the terminals).

The black square represents the factory setting assignment.

224 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Command Channel for [Separate] Sep configuration

Separated Reference and command.
The parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command.
Example: If the reference is in forced local mode via AI1 (analog input at the terminals), command in forced
local mode is via DI (digital input at the terminals).
The command channels CD1 and CD2 are independent of the reference channels FR1, FR1B and
FR2.

The black square represents the factory setting assignment, except for [Control Mode] CHCF.

[Cmd channel 1] Cd1 and [Cmd channel 2] Cd2: Terminals, Display Terminal, integrated Modbus,
integrated CANopen®, communication card

Command Channel for I/O profile io configuration

Separated Reference and command, as in [Separate] Sep configuration.
The command channels CD1 and CD2 are independent of the reference channels FR1, FR1B and
FR2.

NVE61643 03/2020 225

Complete settings CSt-

The black square represents the factory setting assignment, except for [Control Mode] CHCF.

[Cmd channel 1] Cd1 and [Cmd channel 2] Cd2: Terminals, Display Terminal, integrated Modbus,
integrated CANopen®, communication card
A command or an action can be assigned:
 To a fixed channel by selecting a Digital input (Dix) or a Cxxx bit:
 By selecting, for example, LI3, this action will be triggered by the digital input DI3 regardless of which
command channel is switched.
 By selecting, for example, C114, this action will be triggered by integrated Modbus with bit 14
regardless of which command channel is switched.
 To a switchable channel by selecting a CDxx bit:
 By selecting, for example, Cd11, this action will be triggered by: LI12 if the terminals channel is active,
C111 if the integrated Modbus channel is active, C211 if the integrated CANopen® channel is active,
C311 if the communication card channel is active, C511 if the Ethernet channel is active.
If the active channel is the graphic display terminal, the functions and commands assigned to CDxx
switchable internal bits are inactive.
NOTE: Several CDxx does not have equivalent digital inputs and can only be used for switching between
2 networks.

[Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1

Configuration reference frequency 1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
[AI1] AI1 Analog input AI1
Factory Setting
[AI2]...[AI3] AI2...AI3 Analog input AI2...AI3
NOTE: AI3 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater
than 22 kW.
[AI Virtual 1] AIv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref.Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC Reference Frequency via remote terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-CANopen] CAn Reference frequency via CANopen if a CANopen module has been
inserted
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been
Module] inserted
[Embedded Ethernet] EtH Embedded Ethernet
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up to
22kW.

226 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Ref.1B channel] Fr1b

Configuration reference frequency 1B.
Identical to [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 (see above) with factory setting: [Not Configured] no.

[Ref 1B switching] rCb

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This parameter can cause unintended movements, for example an inversion of the direction of the
rotation of the motor, a sudden acceleration or a stop.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not cause unintended movements.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Select switching (1 to 1B).

 If the assigned input or bit is at 0, [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 is active.
 If the assigned input or bit is at 1, [Ref.1B channel] Fr1b is active.

[Ref 1B switching] rCb is forced to [Ref Freq Channel 1] Fr1 if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Not
separ. ] SIM with [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 assigned via the terminals (analog inputs, pulse input).
NOTE: Activating this function from an other active command channel will also activate the monitoring of
this new channel.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ref Freq Channel Fr1 Reference channel = channel 1 (for RCB)
1]
[Ref.1B channel] Fr1b Reference channel = channel 1b (for RCB)
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

NVE61643 03/2020 227

Complete settings CSt-

[Reverse Disable] rIn

Reverse directions disable.
Lock of movement in reverse direction does not apply to direction requests sent by digital inputs.
Reverse direction requests sent by digital inputs are taken into account.
Reverse direction requests sent by the Display Terminal or sent by the line are not taken into account.
Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID, summing input, and so on, is interpreted as a zero
reference (0 Hz).

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory Setting
[Yes] YES Yes

[Control Mode] CHCF

Mixed mode configuration.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Disabling [I/O profile] IO resets the drive to the factory settings.
 Verify that restoring the factory settings is compatible with the type of wiring used.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not separ.] SIM Reference and command, not separate
Factory Setting
[Separate] SEP Separate reference and command. This assignment cannot be accessed in
[I/O profile] IO
[I/O profile] IO I/O profile

[Command Switching] CCS

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This parameter can cause unintended movements, for example an inversion of the direction of the
rotation of the motor, a sudden acceleration or a stop.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not cause unintended movements.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Control channel switch.

This parameter can be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Separate] SEP or to [I/O profile] IO.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, channel [Cmd channel 1] Cd1 is active.If the assigned input or bit is at
1, channel [Cmd channel 2] Cd2 is active.
NOTE: Activating this function from an other active command channel will also activate the monitoring of
this new channel.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Command Cd1 Command channel = channel 1 (for CCS)
channel 1] Factory setting
[Command Cd2 Command channel = channel 2 (for CCS)
channel 2]

228 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Cmd channel 1] Cd1

Command channel 1 assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Separate] SEP or [I/O profile] IO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Terminals] tEr Terminal block source
Factory Setting
[Ref.Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC Command via Display Terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Command via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-CANopen] CAn Command via CANopen if a CANopen module has been inserted
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Command via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been inserted
Module]
[Embedded Ethernet] EtH Command via Embedded Ethernet
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Cmd channel 2] Cd2

Command channel 2 assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Separate] SEP or [I/O profile] IO.
Identical to [Cmd channel 1] Cd1 with factory setting [Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb.

NVE61643 03/2020 229

Complete settings CSt-

[Freq Switch Assign] rFC

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This parameter can cause unintended movements, for example an inversion of the direction of the
rotation of the motor, a sudden acceleration or a stop.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not cause unintended movements.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

frequency switching assignment.

If the assigned input or bit is at 0, channel [Ref Freq Channel 1] FR1 is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, channel [Ref Freq Channel 2] FR2 is active.
NOTE: Activating this function from an other active command channel will also activate the monitoring of
this new channel.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ref Freq Channel Fr1 Reference channel = channel 1 (for RFC)
1]
[Ref Freq Channel Fr2 Reference channel = channel 2 (for RFC)
2]
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Ref Freq 2 Config] Fr2

Configuration reference frequency 2.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned. If [Control Mode] CHCF is set to[ Not separ.] SIM, the
command is at the terminals with a zero reference. If [Control Mode]
CHCF is set to [Separate] SEP or [I/O profile] IO, the reference is zero.
Factory Setting

230 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
NOTE: AI3 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[AI Virtual 1] AIv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[Ref Frequency via UPdt +/– speed command assigned to DIx
DI]
[Ref.Freq- LCC Reference frequency via Graphic Display Terminal
Rmt.Term]
[Ref. Freq- Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
Modbus]
[Ref. Freq- CAn Reference frequency via CANopen if a CANopen module has been inserted
CANopen]
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been
Module] inserted
[Embedded Eth Integrated Ethernet
Ethernet]
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[DI7 PI7...PI8 Digital input DI7...DI8 used as pulse input
PulseInput]...[DI8
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
PulseInput]
22 kW.
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up to
22kW.

[Copy Ch1-Ch2] COP

Copy channel 1 reference frequency to channel 2.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This parameter can cause unintended movements, for example an inversion of the direction of the
rotation of the motor, a sudden acceleration or a stop.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not cause unintended movements.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Can be used to copy the current reference and/or the command with switching in order to avoid speed
surges, for example.
If [Control Mode] CHCF (see page 228) is set to [Not separ.] SIM or [Separate] SEP, copying is
possible only from channel 1 to channel 2.
If [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [I/O profile] IO, copying is possible in both directions.A reference or a
command cannot be copied to a channel on the terminals.The reference copied is [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq]
FrH (before ramp) unless the destination channel reference is set via +/– speed. In this case, the
reference copied is [Output frequency] rFr (after ramp).

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No copy
Factory Setting
[Reference SP Copy reference
Frequency]

NVE61643 03/2020 231

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Command] Cd Copy command
[Cmd + Ref ALL Copy reference and command
Frequency]

As the Display Terminal may be selected as the command and/or reference channel, its action modes can
be configured.
Comments:
 The Display Terminal command/reference is only active if the command and/or reference channels from
the terminal are active except for BMP with Local/ Remote key (command via the Display Terminal),
which takes priority over these channels. Press Local/ Remote key again to revert control to the selected
channel.
 Command and reference via the Display Terminal are impossible if the latter is connected to more than
one drive.
 The preset PID reference functions can only be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Not separ.]
SIM or [Separate] SEP.
 The command via the Display Terminal can be accessed regardless of the [Control Mode] CHCF.

[Forced Local Freq] FLOC

Forced local reference source assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned (control via the terminals with zero reference)
Factory Setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
NOTE: AI3 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref.Freq- LCC Graphic Display Terminal
Rmt.Term]
[DI7 PI7...PI8 Digital input DI7...DI8 used as pulse input
PulseInput]...[DI8
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
PulseInput]
22 kW.
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up to
22kW.

[Time-out Forc. Local] FLOt

Time for channel confirmation after forced local.
This parameter can be accessed if [Forced Local Assign] FLO is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.1...30.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 s

232 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Forced Local Assign] FLO

Forced local assignment.
Forced local mode is active when the input is at state 1.
[Forced Local Assign] FLO is forced to [No] nO if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [I/O profile] IO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted

[Reverse Assign] rrS

Reverse assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

NVE61643 03/2020 233

Complete settings CSt-

[2/3-wire control] tCC

2-wire or 3-wire control.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If this parameter is changed, the parameters [Reverse Assign] rrS and [2-wire type] tCt and the
assignments of the digital inputs are reset to the factory setting.
Verify that this change is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[2-Wire Control] 2C 2-wire control (level commands): This is the input state (0 or 1) or edge (0
to 1 or 1 to 0), which controls running or stopping.
Example of source wiring:

DI1 Forward
DIx Reverse

Factory setting
[3-Wire Control] 3C 3-wire control (pulse commands) [3 wire]: A forward or reverse pulse is
sufficient to command starting, a stop pulse is sufficient to command
stopping.
Example of source wiring:

DI1 Stop
DI2 Forward
DIx Reverse

[2-wire type] tCt

Type of 2-wire control.
This parameter can be accessed if [2/3-wire control] tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that the parameter setting is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Level] LEL State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run (1) or stop (0)
[Transition] trn A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation in
order to avoid accidental restarts after a break in the supply mains
Factory setting

234 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Level With Fwd PFO State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the “forward” input
Priority] takes priority over the “reverse” input

[Stop Key Enable] PSt

STOP/RESET key enable.
Setting this function to no disables the STOP key of the Display Terminal if the setting of the parameter
[Command Channel] CMdC is not [Ref. Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Only set this parameter to nO if you have implemented appropriate alternative stop functions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

If 2-wire control by level is active (parameter [2/3-Wire Control] tCC set to [2-Wire Control] 2C and
parameter [2-wire type] TCT set to [Level] LEL or [Level With Fwd Priority] PFO) and the parameter
PST is set to [Stop Key Priority All] All, the motor starts if the STOP/RESET key of the Display
Terminal is pressed while a run command is active.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Only set the parameter [Stop Key Enable] PSt to [Stop Key Priority All] All in 2-wire control by level
after having verified that this setting cannot result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Irrespective of the configuration of [Stop Key Enable] PSt, if the active command channel is the Graphic
Display Terminal, the STOP/RESET key performs:
 in run, a stop according to the [Type of stop] Stt,
 in “Operating State Fault", a fault reset command.

The following table gives the behavior of the function when the Graphic Display Terminal is not the active
command channel:

Setting Code / Value Description

[Stop Key No nO Disables the STOP/RESET key on the Display Terminal.
Priority]
[Stop Key Priority] YES Gives priority to the STOP/RESET key on the Display Terminal.
Only the stop function is enabled. The stop is performed in freewheel.
Factory Setting
[Stop Key Priority All Gives priority to the STOP/RESET key on the Graphic Display Terminal.
All] The fault reset function and the stop function are enabled. The stop is
performed depending on [Type of Stop] STT setting value.
NOTE: The Fault Reset function is disabled in Multipoint mode (see page 39).

[HMI cmd.] bMP

HMI command.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Stop] StOP Stops the drive (although the controlled direction of operation and reference
of the previous channel are copied (to be taken into account on the next
RUN command))
[Bumpless] bUMP Does not stop the drive (the controlled direction of operation and the
reference of the previous channel are copied)
[Disabled] dIS Disabled
Factory Setting

NVE61643 03/2020 235

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.4
[Master/Slave]

[Master/Slave]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
MultiDrive Link Mechanism 237
[M/S System Architecture] MSA- Menu 239
[Speed Ref AI1 Config.] MSr1- Menu 242
[Speed Ref AI2 Config.] MSr2- Menu 243
[Speed Ref AI3 Config.] MSr3- Menu 244
[Speed Ref AI4 Config.] MSr4- Menu 245
[Speed Ref AI5 Config.] MSr5- Menu 246
[M/S System Architecture] MSA- Menu 247
[Torque Ref AI1 Config.] Mtr1- Menu 248
[Torque Ref AI2 Config.] Mtr2- Menu 249
[Torque Ref AI3 Config.] Mtr3- Menu 250
[Torque Ref AI4 Config.] Mtr4- Menu 251
[Torque Ref AI5 Config.] Mtr5- Menu 252
[M/S System Architecture] MSA- Menu 253
[Speed Ref AQ1 Config.] MSM1- Menu 254
[Speed Ref AQ2 Config.] MSM2- Menu 255
[M/S System Architecture] MSA- Menu 256
[Torque Ref AQ1 Config.] MtM1- Menu 257
[Torque Ref AQ2 Config.] MtM2- Menu 258
[M/S System Architecture] MSA- Menu 259
[M/S Control] MSt- Menu 261
[M/S Torque Control] MSq- Menu 263
[M/S Control] MSt- Menu 267
[M/S Filters] MSF- Menu 268
[Load Sharing M/S] MSb- Menu 271
[M/S Control] MSt- Menu 274

236 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

MultiDrive Link Mechanism

Introduction
MultiDrive Link function allows direct communication between a drives group.
This communication is done through an Ethernet link between each drives.
Some drive functions can be configured with the MultiDrive Link.

Topology
MultiDrive Link function is an Ethernet based protocol.
It can be used in following topologies:
 Daisy chain
 Star
 Redundant ring with RSTP

More information about topologies is available in ATV340 Embedded Ethernet Manual.

MultiDrive Link Properties

MultiDrive Link Group:
A MultiDrive Link group can be composed of:
 Master, which is mandatory.
 Up to 10 Slaves.

Only 1 master must be present in a MultiDrive Link group.

Each drive, acting as slave, must have its own slave identification.

Data Exchange Principle:

Each drive of the MultiDrive Link group sends data to all the drives of its group.
These data are sorted in data groups which are specifics for each application used in combination.
These data are sent using UDP frames with multicast IP addressing.

Network Configuration
The MultiDrive Link function uses the following network resources:
 IP address: 239.192.152.143
 UDP ports: 6700 and 6732
 Non routed networks

If the MultiDrive Link function is used over an Ethernet network, it is mandatory to take into account theses
resources for its configuration.
Only one MultiDrive Link group can be used on a same Ethernet network.

Drive Configuration
Each drive used on a MultiDrive Link group must have an IP address.
This IP address can be set manually or assigned by a DHCP server.

MultiDrive Link Communication Monitoring

A permanent monitoring of the communication is performed by each drive of the MultiDrive Link Group to
avoid:
 Execution of the same command
 Corruption of data on the MultiDrive Link group

NVE61643 03/2020 237

Complete settings CSt-

Duplicate Slave ID:

The following table shows how the function reacts in case of duplicate slave ID detection:

If a Duplicate Slave ID is… Then…

Detected at the same time in the MultiDrive Link group It is not possible to identify the valid drive.
In this case, both drives:
 are considered invalid
 are unavailable on the MultiDrive Link group
 don't send data on the MultiDrive Link group

Detected and already one drive with this Slave ID is The existing drive is considered valid.
running The duplicate drive:
 is considered invalid
 is not available on the MultiDrive Link group
 don't send data on the MultiDrive Link group

NOTE: There is no effect on the application in this case.

Intruder:
A drive is considered as intruder of a MultiDrive Link group if its Slave ID is not consistent with the number
of slaves declared on Master configuration.
If the drive Slave ID is not consistent with the configuration then it:
 Considers itself as invalid
 Don't send data on the MultiDrive Link group
 Don't accept data from the MultiDrive Link group

238 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[M/S System Architecture] MSA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture]

About This Menu

This menu allows the user to configure its Master/Slave architecture.
Master/Slave architecture configuration: allows configuring the communication mode between the Master
and Slaves. Which drive is the Master and which ones are the Slaves. It also allows to assign speed and
torque reference values.
Master/Slave error response: allows configuring how the Master or Slaves react if an error is detected
(Master not present, Slave not ready or communication link error).
The following diagram shows the Master/Slave related parameters depending on their configuration:

* [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr

The following table shows the visibility of the parameters in [Analog] AnA or in [MultiDrive Link] MDL
mode:

[M/S Comm Mode] MSCM Analog MultiDrive Link

M/S communication mode
[M/S Device ID] MSId: - - Master Slave 1 to
Master or Slave ID selection Slave 10
[M/S Device Role] MSdt: Master Slave - -
Master or Slave selection
[M/S Number of Slaves] MSSn: - - 0 to 10 -
M/S number of slaves
[M/S Speed Ref In Assign] MSSI: - Analog Input - -
M/S Master speed reference input assignment
[M/S Trq Ref In Assign] MStI: - Analog Input - -
M/S Master torque reference input assignment
[M/S Speed Ref Out Assign] MSSO: Analog Output Analog Analog Analog
M/S speed reference output assignment Output* Output* Output*
[M/S Trq Ref Out Assign] MStO: Analog Output Analog Analog Analog
M/S torque reference output assignment Output* Output* Output*
[M/S Local Mode Assign] MSdI: - - Digital Input Digital Input
M/S local mode input assignment
* Parameters that can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr

NVE61643 03/2020 239

Complete settings CSt-

[M/S Comm Mode] MSCM Analog MultiDrive Link

M/S communication mode
[M/S Comm ErrorResp] MSCb: - - Error Error
M/S Response to communication error Response Response
[M/S Device ErrorResp] MSdb: - - Error Error
M/S Response to device error Response Response
[M/S Device Error Delay] MSdd: - - Error Delay Error Delay
M/S device error delay
* Parameters that can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr

NOTE:
Master/Slave function can be configured only if:
 [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [SVC V] VVC or [FVC] FVC or [Sync. mot.] SYn or [Sync.CL]
FSY.
 [BRH b0] BRH0 is set to [0] 0.

NOTE: When a drive acts as a slave, [Low Speed] LSP and [High Speed] HSP must be configured
same as master.
NOTE: The drive must be restart to apply the Master/Slave configuration.
NOTE: Drives with a power equal to or lower than 22 kW cannot be used as master in analog mode if there
is no extension module of Digital and Analog I/O (VW3A3203).
NOTE: Master/Slave function in MultiDrive Link mode can only be used with ATV340•••N4E drives.

[M/S Comm Mode] MSCM

Master / Slave communication mode.
Activate Master Slave and select communication mode to exchange data between drives involved in the
Master Slave architecture.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Master/Slave is not configured.
Factory setting
[MultiDrive Link] MdL Master/Slave is configured using MultiDrive Link
[Analog] ANA Master/Slave is configured using Analog I/Os.
It is recommended to wire a digital output of the slave assigned to
[Operating State Fault] FLt to a digital input of the master set to [Ext Error
assign] EtF, with this setting, an error on the slave drive generates a stop
to the master.
NOTE: If it is required, a digital output of the slaves assigned to [Operating
State Fault] FLt can be wired to a digital input of the master sets to [Ext
Error assign] EtF in order to stop the master if an error is detected on a
slave drive.

[M/S Device ID] MSId

Master / Slave ID selection.
This parameter selects the Drive identification number for the Master Slave application.
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [MultiDrive Link] MdL

Setting Code / Value Description

[Master] MStER Master
Factory setting
NOTE: Be sure that autotune has been done before selecting a drive as
master. Otherwise, use the [M/S Local Mode Assign] MSDI input to
disable temporary the Master/Slave function and perform autotune.
[Slave1]...[Slave10] SLv1...SLv10 Slave ID

240 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[M/S Device Role] MSdt

Master / Slave selection.
Select if the drive is the master or a slave.
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [Analog] Ana

Setting Code / Value Description

[Master] MStER The Drive is configured as the Master Drive. (it provides the speed and
torque reference value to Slaves).
Factory setting
[Slave] SLAvE The Drive is configured as a Slave Drive. (it uses the speed and torque
reference value from the Master).

[M/S Number of Slaves] MSSn

Master / Slave number of slaves.
Total number of slaves in the Master Slave architecture. The maximum number of slaves is 10 in multi-
drive link architecture. In Analog architecture the maximum number of slaves depends on Analog I/O
capabilities.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [MultiDrive Link] MdL, and
 [M/S Device ID] MSID is set to [Master] MStEr.

Setting Description
0...10 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[M/S Speed Ref In Assign] MSSI

Master / Slave speed reference input assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [Analog] ANA, and
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAvE.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Analog input is not configured
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted

NVE61643 03/2020 241

Complete settings CSt-

[Speed Ref AI1 Config.] MSr1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Speed Ref AI1 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAVE, and
 [M/S Speed Ref In Assign] MSSi is set to [AI1] Ai1.

[AI1 Type] AI1t

Configuration of analog input AI1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
Factory setting
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA

[AI1 min value] UIL1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AI1 max value] UIH1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

[AI1 min. value] CrL1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AI1 max. value] CrH1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

242 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Speed Ref AI2 Config.] MSr2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Speed Ref AI2 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAVE, and
 [M/S Speed Ref In Assign] MSSi is set to [AI2] Ai2.

[AI2 Type] AI2t

Configuration of analog input AI2.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc
Factory setting

[AI2 min value] UIL2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 242).

[AI2 max value] UIH2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 242).

NVE61643 03/2020 243

Complete settings CSt-

[Speed Ref AI3 Config.] MSr3- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Speed Ref AI3 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAVE, and
 [M/S Speed Ref In Assign] MSSi is set to [AI3] Ai3.

[AI3 Type] AI3t

Configuration of analog input AI3.
Identical to [AI2 Type] AI2t (see page 243) with factory setting: [Current] 0A.

[AI3 min value] UIL3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 242).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

[AI3 max value] UIH3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 242).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

[AI3 min. value] CrL3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 242).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

[AI3 max. value] CrH3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 242).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

244 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Speed Ref AI4 Config.] MSr4- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Speed Ref AI4 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAVE, and
 [M/S Speed Ref In Assign] MSSi is set to [AI4] Ai4.

[AI4 Type] AI4t

Configuration of analog input AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc

[AI4 min value] UIL4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 242).

[AI4 max value] UIH4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 242).

[AI4 min. value] CrL4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 242).

[AI4 max. value] CrH4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 242).

NVE61643 03/2020 245

Complete settings CSt-

[Speed Ref AI5 Config.] MSr5- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Speed Ref AI5 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAVE, and
 [M/S Speed Ref In Assign] MSSi is set to [AI5] Ai5.

[AI5 Type] AI5t

Configuration of analog input AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI4 Type] AI4t. (see page 245)

[AI5 min value] UIL5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] AI5t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 242).

[AI5 max value] UIH5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] AI5t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 242).

[AI5 min. value] CrL5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] AI5t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 242).

[AI5 max. value] CrH5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] AI5t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 242).

246 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[M/S System Architecture] MSA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture]

[M/S Trq Ref In Assign] MStI

Master / Slave torque reference input assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [Analog] AnA
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAvE
 [M/S Control Type] MSCt is set to [Torque Direct] trqd, [Torque Reverse] trqr or [Torque
Custom] trqC.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Analog input is not configured
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted

NVE61643 03/2020 247

Complete settings CSt-

[Torque Ref AI1 Config.] Mtr1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Torque Ref AI1 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAVE, and
 [M/S Trq Ref In Assign] MSti is set to [AI1] Ai1.

[AI1 Type] AI1t

Configuration of analog input AI1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
Factory setting
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA

[AI1 min value] UIL1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AI1 max value] UIH1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

[AI1 min. value] CrL1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AI1 max. value] CrH1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

248 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Torque Ref AI2 Config.] Mtr2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Torque Ref AI2 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAVE, and
 [M/S Trq Ref In Assign] MSti is set to [AI2] Ai2.

[AI2 Type] AI2t

Configuration of analog input AI2.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc
Factory setting

[AI2 min value] UIL2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 248).

[AI2 max value] UIH2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 248).

NVE61643 03/2020 249

Complete settings CSt-

[Torque Ref AI3 Config.] Mtr3- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Torque Ref AI3 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAVE, and
 [M/S Trq Ref In Assign] MSti is set to [AI3] Ai3.

[AI3 Type] AI3t

Configuration of analog input AI3.
Identical to [AI2 Type] AI2t (see page 243) with factory setting: [Current] 0A.

[AI3 min value] UIL3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 248).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

[AI3 max value] UIH3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 248).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

[AI3 min. value] CrL3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 248).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

[AI3 max. value] CrH3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 248).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

250 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Torque Ref AI4 Config.] Mtr4- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Torque Ref AI4 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAVE, and
 [M/S Trq Ref In Assign] MSti is set to [AI4] Ai4.

[AI4 Type] AI4t

Configuration of analog input AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc

[AI4 min value] UIL4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 248).

[AI4 max value] UIH4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 248).

[AI4 min. value] CrL4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 248).

[AI4 max. value] CrH4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 248).

NVE61643 03/2020 251

Complete settings CSt-

[Torque Ref AI5 Config.] Mtr5- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Torque Ref AI5 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAVE, and
 [M/S Trq Ref In Assign] MSti is set to [AI5] Ai5.

[AI5 Type] AI5t

Configuration of analog input AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI4 Type] AI4t. (see page 245)

[AI5 min value] UIL5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 248).

[AI5 max value] UIH5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to:
 [Voltage] 10U, or
 [Voltage+/-] n10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 248).

[AI5 min. value] CrL5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] AI5t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 248).

[AI5 max. value] CrH5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] AI5t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 248).

252 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[M/S System Architecture] MSA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture]

[M/S Speed Ref Out Assign] MSSO

Master / Slave output speed reference.
Analog output selected for speed reference for the Master Drive.
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Analog output for speed reference is not configured.
Factory setting
[AQ1 assignment] AO1 Analog Output for speed reference is configured to AO1.
[AQ2 assignment] AO2 Analog Output for speed reference is configured to AO2.
In order to monitor the loss of signal, it is recommended to use a 4-20mA link between the master and the slave and
to configure the monitoring function in the [4-20 mA loss] LFL- menu.

NOTE: To allow configuration, outputs default configuration must be unconfigured.

NVE61643 03/2020 253

Complete settings CSt-

[Speed Ref AQ1 Config.] MSM1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Speed Ref AQ1 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if [M/S Speed Ref Out Assign] MSSo is set to [AQ1 assignment] Ao1.

[AQ1 Type] AO1t

AQ1 type.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting

[AQ1 min output] AOL1

AQ1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AQ1 max output] AOH1

AQ1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

[AQ1 min Output] UOL1

AQ1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AQ1 max Output] UOH1

AQ1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

254 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Speed Ref AQ2 Config.] MSM2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Speed Ref AQ2 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if [M/S Speed Ref Out Assign] MSSo is set to [AQ2 assignment] Ao2.

[AQ2 Type] AO2t

AQ2 type.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting

[AQ2 min output] AOL2

AQ2 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 min output] AOL1 (see page 254).

[AQ2 max output] AOH2

AQ2 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 max output] AOH1 (see page 254).

[AQ2 min Output] UOL2

AQ2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 min Output] UOL1 (see page 254).

[AQ2 max Output] UOH2

AQ2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 max Output] UOH1 (see page 254).

NVE61643 03/2020 255

Complete settings CSt-

[M/S System Architecture] MSA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture]

[M/S Trq Ref Out Assign] MStO

Master / Slave output torque reference.
Analog output selected for torque reference for the Master Drive.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Analog output for torque reference is not configured.
Factory setting
[AQ1 assignment] AO1 Analog Output for speed reference is configured to AO1.
[AQ2 assignment] AO2 Analog Output for speed reference is configured to AO2.
In order to monitor the loss of signal, it is recommended to use a 4-20mA link between the master and the slave andto
configure the monitoring function in the [4-20 mA loss] LFL- menu.

NOTE: To allow configuration, outputs default configuration must be unconfigured.

256 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Torque Ref AQ1 Config.] MtM1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Torque Ref AQ1 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if [M/S Trq Ref Out Assign] MSSo is set to [AQ1 assignment] Ao1.

[AQ1 Type] AO1t

AQ1 type.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting

[AQ1 min output] AOL1

AQ1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AQ1 max output] AOH1

AQ1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

[AQ1 min Output] UOL1

AQ1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AQ1 max Output] UOH1

AQ1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

NVE61643 03/2020 257

Complete settings CSt-

[Torque Ref AQ2 Config.] MtM2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture] [Torque Ref AQ2 Config.]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if [M/S Trq Ref Out Assign] MSSo is set to [AQ2 assignment] Ao2.

[AQ2 Type] AO2t

AQ2 type.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting

[AQ2 min output] AOL2

AQ2 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 min output] AOL1 (see page 257).

[AQ2 max output] AOH2

AQ2 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 max output] AOH1 (see page 257).

[AQ2 min Output] UOL2

AQ2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 min Output] UOL1 (see page 257).

[AQ2 max Output] UOH2

AQ2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 max Output] UOH1 (see page 257).

258 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[M/S System Architecture] MSA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S System Architecture]

[M/S Local Mode Assign] MSDI

Master / Slave local mode assignment.
Digital input used to switch between Master/Slave automatic operation and local control mode (for example
in maintenance mode).
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [MultiDrive Link] MdL.
NOTE: It is recommended to use this mode when system is stopped and, if possible, motor mechanically
disconnected.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted

[MDL Comm Timeout] MLto

MultiDrive Link communication timeout.
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [MultiDrive Link] MdL.

Setting Description
0.01...10.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.05 s

[M/S Comm ErrorResp] MSCb

Master / Slave response to a communication error.
Define how will react the drive when a multi-drive link communication error is detected.
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [MultiDrive Link] MdL.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp

NOTE: If the master is in [Ramp stop] rMP the slave has to be set to [Freewheel Stop] YES.

NVE61643 03/2020 259

Complete settings CSt-

[M/S Device ErrorResp] MSdb

Master / Slave response to device error.
Define how will react the Drive when a device is lost
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM set to [MultiDrive Link] MdL.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

NOTE: If the master is in [Ramp stop] rMP the slave has to be set to [Freewheel Stop] YES, [Speed
maintained] rLS and [Fallback Speed] LFF are not available for slave drives.

[M/S Device Error Delay] MSdd

Master / Slave device error delay.
Monitoring delay before the system is ready. If one of the drives in the system is not ready after this delay,
a [M/S Device Error] MSdF is triggered.
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [MultiDrive Link] MdL.

Setting Description
0...60 s Setting range
Factory setting: NO wait infinite time

[Fallback Speed] LFF

Fallback speed.
This parameter can be accessed if the error response parameter is set to [Fallback Speed] lff.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

260 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[M/S Control] MSt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S Control]

About This Menu

This menu is used to configure the type of control used in Master/Slave.
This function can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] nO.

Master/Slave Mechanical Coupling

The Master / Slave mechanical coupling type allow selecting two types of coupling:
 [Rigid] rIGId coupling means that the rotor speed of each motor is forced to be the same by the
application. This choice is typically used for coupling such as gearbox, toothed belt and when the
elasticity is closed to '0'.
 In the [Elastic] ELaSt coupling, the motors rotors are not the same, due to elasticity or slip in the
coupling. This type of coupling is use for example for overhead conveyor (using a tension system), long
belt.
Selecting the [Elastic] ELaSt coupling give access to same parameters a [Rigid] rIGId coupling
plus:
 [M/S Filters] MSF-
 [Load Sharing M/S] MSb-
 [M/S Out Torque Ref Select] MSot-

Configuring parameters in the [Elastic] ELaSt coupling and then selecting [Rigid] rIGId coupling
will disable the [Elastic] ELaSt configured parameters. Conversely, switching from [Rigid] rIGId
coupling to [Elastic] ELaSt coupling has not effect on the [Rigid] rIGId coupling parameters.

Master/Slave Control Type

The Master / Slave control type allow selecting which type of control will be applied on slave and direction
of slave related to direction of Master:
 [Speed Direct] SPdd: Slave follows speed reference of Master in same direction.
 [Speed Reverse] SPdr: Slave follows speed reference of Master in reverse direction. Typically for
face to face motors.
 [Torque Direct] trqd: Slave follows torque reference of Master in same direction.
 [Torque Reverse] trqr: Slave follows torque reference of Master in reverse direction. Typically for
face to face motors.
 [Torque Custom] trqC: Slave follows torque reference of Master around speed reference. Direction
of speed can be adjusted with [Speed Ref Direction] SSd and direction of torque with [Torque ref. sign]
tSd.
Allows to apply a torque ratio or a torque ramp in case of application needs.
The following table shows the possible cases between [Speed Ref Direction] SSd and [Torque ref. sign]
tSd when [M/S Control Type] MSCt is set to [Torque Custom] trqC:

[Speed Ref Direction] SSd [Torque ref. sign] tSd [M/S Control Type] MSCt
Inactive Inactive Slave runs in same direction as
Master (speed and torque)
Inactive Active Slave runs in same direction as
Master but apply opposite torque
Active Inactive Slave runs in reverse direction of
Master and applies opposite torque
Active Active Slave runs in reverse direction of
Master for speed and torque.

NVE61643 03/2020 261

Complete settings CSt-

Stop Configuration
The slaves have different stop behavior depending of their configuration and master stop type.
When the master stops in freewheel:
 If [M/S Control Type] MSCt is set to [Speed Direct] SPdd or [Speed Reverse] SPdr, the slaves
stop following its [Type of stop] Stt configuration.
 If [M/S Control Type] MSCt is set to [Torque Direct] trQd or [Torque Reverse] trQr or [Torque
Custom] trQc, the slaves stop following [Torque control stop] tSt or [Type of stop] Stt,
depending of the priority between them.
Example: If [Torque control stop] tSt is set to [Freewheel Stop] nSt and [Type of stop] Stt is set to
[On Ramp] rMP, the slaves will stop in freewheel.
When the master stops on ramp:
 If [M/S Control Type] MSCt is set to [Speed Direct] SPdd or [Speed Reverse] SPdr, the slaves
stop following the master ramp in speed control.
 If [M/S Control Type] MSCt is set to [Torque Direct] trQd or [Torque Reverse] trQr or [Torque
Custom] trQc, the slaves stop following the master ramp in torque control.

Brake management
Brake sequence is managed only by the Master.
The Master manages its brake according to its brake sequence, in [MultiDrive Link] MdL or [Analog]
Ana. Optionally, the Master can manage the brakes of the slaves by the same brake command. The
release and engage times of brakes in the application have to be the same.

Brake sequence is managed by the Master and Slaves.

In [MultiDrive Link] MdL brakes can be managed on each Drive. The synchronization of the release and
engage times are managed by the Master through the [MultiDrive Link] MdL.

[M/S Coupling Type] MSMC

Master / Slave mechanical coupling type.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Rigid] rIGId Rigid coupling
Factory setting
[Elastic] ELaSt Elastic coupling

[M/S Control Type] MSCt

Master / Slave control type.
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Device Role] MSDt is set to [Slave] SLAvE or [M/S Device
ID] MSID is set to [Slave 1]to[Slave 10].

Setting Code / Value Description

[Torque Direct] trqd Torque direct control
Factory setting
[Torque Reverse] Trqr Torque reverse control
[Torque Custom] trqC Torque custom control
Allow to apply a torque ratio a torque ramp in case of different motors
[Speed Direct] SPdd Speed direct control
Is not a available if [M/S Coupling Type] MSMC is set to [Rigid] rIGId
[Speed Reverse] SPdr Speed reverse control
Is not a available if [M/S Coupling Type] MSMC is set to [Rigid] rIGId

262 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[M/S Torque Control] MSq- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S Control] [M/S Torque Control]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAvEor [M/S Device ID]MSID is set to [Slave1] to
[Slave10], and
 [M/S Control Type] MSCT is set to:
 [Torque Direct] trqd, or
 [Torque Reverse] trqr, or
 [Torque Custom] trqC.

[Speed Ref Direction] ssd

Speed reference direction.
Assignment for sign inversion of reference speed value coming from the master.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCm is not set to [No] no, and
 [M/S Control Type] MSCT is set to [Torque Custom] trqc.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[Yes] yes Yes
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

NVE61643 03/2020 263

Complete settings CSt-

[Torque ref. sign] tSd

Assignment for the inversion of the sign of the reference for the torque regulation function.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCm is not set to [No] no, and
 [M/S Control Type] MSCT is set to [Torque Custom] trqc.

Identical to [Speed Ref Direction] ssd.

[Torque ratio] trt

Torque ratio.
This parameter is used in case of using a slave motor with a different nominal torque than the master
motor, or to unbalance torque between master and slave.
This parameter applies a factor in % on the torque reference received from the master.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCm is not set to [No] no, and
 [M/S Control Type] MSCT is set to [Torque Custom] trqc.

Setting Description

0.0...1000.0% Coefficient applied to [Torque ref. channel] tr1 or [Torque ref. 2 channel]
tr2
Factory setting: 100.0%

[Torque Ref Offset] tqop

Torques reference offset.
This parameter is used to scale the torque reference value.
This parameter applies an offset in % on the torque reference.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] nO, and
 [M/S Control Type] MSCT is set to [Torque Custom] trqC.

Setting Description

-1000.0...1000.0% Setting range

Factory setting: 0.0%

[Torque ramp time] trp

Torque ramp time.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] nO, and
 [M/S Control Type] MSCT is set to [Torque Custom] trqC.

Setting Description

0.0...99.99 s Rise and fall time for a variation of 100% of the rated torque
Factory setting: 3.00 s

[Torque control stop] tSt

Torque control stop type.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Speed] SPd Speed regulation stop, in accordance with the type of stop configuration
[Freewheel Stop] nSt Factory setting: Freewheel stop
[Spin] SPn Zero torque stop, but maintaining the flux in the motor (only in closed loop)

264 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Spin time] SPt

Torque regulation: spin time.
Spin time following stop in order to remain ready to restart quickly.
This parameter specifies the time the motor is maintained fluxed after the zero speed is attained.
This parameter can be accessed if [Torque control stop] tSt is set to [Spin] SPn.

Setting Description

0.0...3600.0 s Setting range

Factory setting: 1.0 s

[Positive deadband] dbp

Torque regulation positive dead band.
The torque control is effective in an area defined by [Positive deadband] dbP and [Negative deadband]
dbn around the speed reference value.
Outside of this area, the drive switch automatically in speed control to make speed returns inside the torque
control area.
Value added algebraically to the speed reference.
Example for [Positive deadband] dbp = 10:
 If reference = + 50 Hz: + 50 + 10 = 60 Hz
 If reference = - 50 Hz: - 50 + 10 = - 40 Hz

Setting Description

0.0...2 x [Max Frequency] tFr Setting range

Factory setting: 10.0 Hz

[Negative deadband] dbn

Torque regulation negative dead band.
The torque control is effective in an area defined by [Positive deadband] dbP and [Negative deadband]
dbn around the speed reference value.
Outside of this area, the drive switch automatically in speed control to make speed returns inside the torque
control area.
Value subtracted algebraically from the speed reference.
Example for [Negative deadband] dbn = 10:
 If reference = + 50 Hz: + 50 - 10 = 40 Hz
 If reference = - 50 Hz: - 50 - 10 = - 60 Hz

Setting Description

0.0...2 x [Max Frequency] tFr Setting range

Factory setting: 10.0 Hz

[Torque ctrl time out] rtO

Torque control time-out.
Time following automatic exit of torque control mode in the event of an error or a warning has been
triggered.

Setting Description
0.0...999.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 60 s

NVE61643 03/2020 265

Complete settings CSt-

[Torque Ctrl ErrorResp] tOb

Response to torque control error.
Response of drive once time [Torque ctrl time out] rtO has elapsed.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Warning] ALrM Warning is triggered on timeout
Factory setting
[Error] FLt An error is triggered with freewheel stop

[Low Torque] Ltq

Low torque threshold limit.
Torque applied on slave will be limited between [Low Torque] Ltq and [High Torque ] Htq (expressed
in % of nominal torque).
This parameter cannot be higher than [High Torque] HTQ.

Setting Description

-300.0...[High Torque] HTQ Setting range

Factory setting: -300.0%

[High Torque] Htq

High torque threshold limit.
This parameter cannot be lower than [Low Torque] Ltq.

Setting Description

[Low Torque] Ltq...300.0% Setting range

Factory setting: 300.0%

266 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[M/S Control] MSt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S Control]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] nO.

[Torque Filter] TRF

This function provides a filter on the torque reference for Slaves Drives to deal with dynamic control
constraints (such as a communication delays). Select if the filtering on the input torque reference is present
or not.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAvEor [M/S Device ID]MSID is set to [Slave1] to
[Slave10], and
 [M/S Control Type] MSCT is set to:
 [Torque Direct] trqd, or
 [Torque Reverse] trqr, or
 [Torque Custom] trqC.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Input torque reference filtering is disabled
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Input torque reference filtering is enabled

[Torque Filter Bandwidth] TRw

Defines the bandwidth of the filter in Hertz.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Torque Filter] TRF is set to [Yes] YES, and
 [M/S Control Type] MSCT is set to:
 [Torque Direct] trqd, or
 [Torque Reverse] trqr, or
 [Torque Custom] trqC.

Setting Description
1...1000 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 20 Hz.

NVE61643 03/2020 267

Complete settings CSt-

[M/S Filters] MSF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S Control] [M/S Filters]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if [M/S Coupling Type] MSMC is set to [Elastic] ELASt and [Access Level]
LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
Master control speed and Slave is torque controlled. This feature allows configuring the transfer function
between Master and Slave according to the dynamic of the coupling (elastic).
The advanced filter can be set independently on Master or/and Slaves to compensate the elasticity of the
coupling:

1 Master
2 Slave
3 Advanced filter can be set for this elastic coupling

[M/S Advanced Filter] MSFE

Master / Slave advanced filter activation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Advanced filtering disable
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Advanced filtering enable

[M/S Advanced Filter Freq] MSFF

Defines the frequency of the filter in Hz.
Influence of the [M/S Advanced Filter Freq] MSFF Parameter

MSFF MSFF increase

268 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Advanced Filter] MSFE is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
10.0...150 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 15.0 Hz

[M/S Advanced Filter Bdw] MSFb

Defines the bandwidth. Means the width of the stop-band of the filter in % of the filter frequency.
Influence of the [M/S Advanced Filter Bdw] MSFb Parameter

MSFb MSFb increase

This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Advanced Filter] MSFE is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
10...400% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[M/S Advanced Filter Depth] MSFd

Defines the attenuation level at the filter frequency.
Influence of the [M/S Advanced Filter Depth] MSFd Parameter

MSFd MSFd increase

This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Advanced Filter] MSFE is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...99% Setting range
Factory setting: 10%

NVE61643 03/2020 269

Complete settings CSt-

[M/S Advanced Filter Gain] MSFG

Defines the gain of the filter. 100% means a unitary gain.
Influence of the [M/S Advanced Filter Gain] MSFG Parameter

MSFG MSFG increase

This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Advanced Filter] MSFE is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...1000% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[M/S Advanced Filter Coeff] MSFC

Master / Slave advanced filter coefficient.
Influence of the [M/S Advanced Filter Coeff] MSFC Parameter

MSFC MSFC increase

This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Advanced Filter] MSFE is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...1000% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

270 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Load Sharing M/S] MSb- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S Control] [Load Sharing M/S]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if:
 [M/S Coupling Type] MSMC is set to [Elastic] ELASt, and
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt or [M/S Device ID] MSID is set to [Master] mster.

Or if:
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAvE or [M/S Device ID] MSID is set to [Slave1] to
[Slave10], and
 [M/S Control Type] MSCT is set to:
 [Speed Direct] spdd, or
 [Speed Reverse] spdr.

Load sharing, Parameters That can be Accessed at Expert Level

Principle:

The load sharing factor K is determined by the torque and speed, with two factors K1 and K2 (K = K1 x K2).

S Speed
T Torque
Rt Rated torque

NVE61643 03/2020 271

Complete settings CSt-

[Load sharing] LBA

Load balancing configuration.
When 2 motors are connected mechanically and therefore at the same speed, and each is controlled by a
drive, this function can be used to improve torque distribution between the two motors. To do this, it varies
the speed based on the torque.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] yes Function active

[Load correction] LbC

Nominal speed load balance correction.
This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] LbA is not set to [No] no.

T Torque
Nt Nominal torque
F Frequency

Setting Description
0.0...1000.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Correction min spd] LbC1

Low Speed for torque decreasing function speed reference.
Minimum speed for load correction in Hz. Below this threshold, no corrections are made. Used to prevent
correction at very low speed if this would hamper rotation of the motor.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Load sharing] LbA is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description
0.0...999.9 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

272 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Correction max spd] LbC2

High speed for torque decreasing function speed reference.
Speed threshold in Hz above which maximum load correction is applied.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Load sharing] LbA is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description
LbC1...1000.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Torque offset] LbC3

Torque offset for torque correction.
Minimum torque for load correction as a % of the rated torque. Below this threshold, no corrections are
made. Used to avoid torque instabilities when the torque direction is not constant.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Load sharing] LbA is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description
0...300% Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

[Sharing filter] LbF

Time constant filter.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Load sharing] LbA is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description
100...20,000 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 100 ms

[M/S Balance Trq Ref Sel] MSIb

Master / Slave load balancing torque reference selection.
This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] LBA is not set to [No] nO.
If [M/S Advanced Filter] MSFE is set to [No] nO, this parameter have no effect.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Applied] no Not applied
[Before Advanced bFILt Before advanced filter
Filter] Factory setting
[After Advanced AFILt After filter
Filter]

NVE61643 03/2020 273

Complete settings CSt-

[M/S Control] MSt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Master/Slave] [M/S Control]

About This Menu

This function can be accessed if [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is not set to [No] nO.
The following diagram shows the influence of reference entries and selections in the Master/Slave
structure:

[M/S Torque Ref Entry] MSIt

Master / Slave torque reference entry in control chain.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Advanced Filter] MSFE is not set to [No] nO.
 [M/S Coupling Type] MSMC is set to [Elastic] ELASt, and
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAvE or[M/S Device ID] MSID is set to [Slave 1] to
[Slave 10].

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Applied] no Not applied
[Before Advanced bFIlt Before advanced filter
Filter] Factory setting
[After Advanced AFilt After advanced filter
Filter]

[M/S Out Torque Ref Select] MSOt

Master / Slave output torque reference selection.
Select the input routing of balancing feature.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [M/S Coupling Type] MSMC is set to [Elastic] ELASt, and
 [M/S Advanced Filter] MSFE is not set to [No] nO.

Identical to [M/S Torque Ref Entry] MSIt.

274 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[M/S Speed Ref Entry] MSIS

Master / Slave speed reference entry in control chain.
Select the routing of the new speed reference input.
This parameter can be accessed if [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Slave] SLAvE or [M/S Device
ID] MSID is set to [Slave 1] to [Slave 10].

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Applied] no Not applied
[Before Ramp] brMP The input speed reference is before the ramp input in the control scheme
Factory setting
[After Ramp] ArMP The input speed reference is after the ramp input in the control scheme
[Before Control bCtrL The input speed reference is before the control input in the control scheme
Loop]

[M/S Out Speed Ref Select] MSOS

Master / Slave output speed reference selection.
Identical to [M/S Speed Ref Entry] MSIS.

NVE61643 03/2020 275

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.5
[Hoisting Functions]

[Hoisting Functions]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Brake logic control] BLC- Menu 277
[High speed hoisting] HSH- Menu 295
[Load Sharing] Lds- Menu 301
[Rope Slack Handling] Sdr- Menu 304

276 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Brake logic control] BLC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Hoisting Functions] [Brake logic control]

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
Used to control one or several electromagnetic brake(s) via a single output of the drive, for horizontal and
vertical hoisting applications, and for unbalanced machines.
For vertical movements, the objective is to maintain motor torque in the lifting direction during the release
and the application of the brake, in order to hold the load. Start smoothly when the brake is released and
stop smoothly when the brake is applied.
For horizontal movements, the objective is to synchronize during the beginning of the movement the
release of the brake with the built-up of torque and during stopping the application of the brake with the
zero speed, in order to help prevent jerking.

Instructions for Brake Logic Control for a Vertical Hoisting Application

WARNING
INSUFFICIENT PERFORMANCE LEVEL/SAFETY INTEGRITY LEVEL AND/OR UNINTENDED
EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Conduct a risk assessment according to EN ISO 12100 and all other standards that apply to your
application.
 Use redundant components and/or control paths for all critical control functions identified in your risk
assessment.
 If moving loads can result in hazards, for example, slipping or falling loads, operate the drive in closed
loop mode.
 Verify that the service life of all individual components used in your application is sufficient for the
intended service life of your overall application.
 Perform extensive commissioning tests for all potential error situations to verify the effectiveness of
the safety-related functions and monitoring functions implemented, for example, but not limited to,
speed monitoring by means of encoders, short circuit monitoring for all connected equipment, correct
operation of brakes and guards.
 Perform extensive commissioning tests for all potential error situations to verify that the load can be
brought to a safe stop under all conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Take into account all information provided in the application note NHA80973 for hoisting machines that can
be downloaded on se.com.

When the drive transitions to operating state Fault, the mains contactor and the brake contactor must be
deenergized.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Assign [Operating state fault] FLT to output relay R1.
 Connect the coil of the mains contactor to output relay R1.
 Connect the brake contactor downstream of the mains contactor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Step Action
1 Assign [Brake assignment] BLC. It activates the function and the assigned output controls the command
to release/apply the brake.
2 Verify [Movement type] Bst is set to [Hoisting] Ver.

NVE61643 03/2020 277

Complete settings CSt-

Step Action
3 [Brake Release Pulse] bIP: YES. Ensure that the direction of rotation FW corresponds to lifting the load.
For applications in which the load being lowered is very different from the load being lifted, set [Brake
Release Pulse] bIP = [2 IBR ] 2Ibr (e.g., ascent always with a load and descent always without a
load).
4 Assign [Brake contact] BCI to handle the brake contact feedback and/or [Brake Relay Fdbk] BRI to
handle the brake contactor feedback. If necessary, adjust [brake fdbk filter] FBCI and/or [brake Rly
Fdbk Filter] FBRI.
5 Brake release current [Brk Release Current] Ibr and [Brake release I Rev] Ird if [Brake Release
Pulse] bIP = [2 IBR ] 2Ibr: adjust the brake release current to the rated current indicated on the
motor. During testing, adjust the brake release current in order to hold the load smoothly.
6 Acceleration time: for hoisting applications it is advisable to set the acceleration ramps to more than 0.5
seconds. Ensure that the drive does not exceed the current limit.
The same recommendation applies for deceleration.
Reminder: for a hoisting movement, a braking resistor should be used.
7 [Brake Release time] brt: set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical
brake to release.
This parameter must consider the maximum value of [brake fdbk filter] FBCI and [brake Rly Fdbk Filter]
FBRI.
8 [Brake release freq] bIr, in open-loop mode only: Leave in [Auto] Auto, adjust if necessary.
9 [Brake engage freq] bEn: leave in [Auto], adjust if necessary.
10 [Brake engage time] bEt: set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical
brake to engage.
This parameter must consider the maximum value of [brake fdbk filter] FBCI and [brake Rly Fdbk Filter]
FBRI.

Instructions for Brake Logic Control for an Horizontal Hoisting Application

WARNING
INSUFFICIENT PERFORMANCE LEVEL/SAFETY INTEGRITY LEVEL AND/OR UNINTENDED
EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Conduct a risk assessment according to EN ISO 12100 and all other standards that apply to your
application.
 Use redundant components and/or control paths for all critical control functions identified in your risk
assessment.
 If moving loads can result in hazards, for example, slipping or falling loads, operate the drive in closed
loop mode.
 Verify that the service life of all individual components used in your application is sufficient for the
intended service life of your overall application.
 Perform extensive commissioning tests for all potential error situations to verify the effectiveness of
the safety-related functions and monitoring functions implemented, for example, but not limited to,
speed monitoring by means of encoders, short circuit monitoring for all connected equipment, correct
operation of brakes and guards.
 Perform extensive commissioning tests for all potential error situations to verify that the load can be
brought to a safe stop under all conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Take into account all information provided in the application note NHA80973 for hoisting machines that can
be downloaded on se.com.

When the drive transitions to operating state Fault, the mains contactor and the brake contactor must be
deenergized.

278 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Assign [Operating state fault] FLT to output relay R1.
 Connect the coil of the mains contactor to output relay R1.
 Connect the brake contactor downstream of the mains contactor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Step Action
1 Assign [Brake assignment] BLC. It activates the function and the assigned output controls the command
to release/apply the brake.
2 Set [Movement type] Bst to [Traveling] Hor.
3 [Brake Release Pulse] bIP: no
4 Assign [Brake contact] BCI to handle the brake contact feedback and/or [Brake Relay Fdbk] BRI to
handle the brake contactor feedback. If necessary, adjust [brake fdbk filter] FBCI and/or [brake Rly
Fdbk Filter] FBRI.
5 [Brk Release Current] Ibr: set to 0.
6 [Brake Release time] brt: set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical
brake to release.
This parameter must consider the maximum value of [brake fdbk filter] FBCI and [brake Rly Fdbk Filter]
FBRI.
7 [Brake engage freq] bEn, in open-loop mode only: leave in [Auto] Auto, adjust if necessary.
8 [Brake engage time] bEt: set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical
brake to engage.
This parameter must consider the maximum value of [brake fdbk filter] FBCI and [brake Rly Fdbk Filter]
FBRI.

NVE61643 03/2020 279

Complete settings CSt-

Horizontal Movement in Open-Loop Mode

280 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Vertical Movement in Open-Loop Mode

NVE61643 03/2020 281

Complete settings CSt-

Vertical or Horizontal Movement in Closed-Loop Mode

282 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Behavior at run command

When run command is given, the drive over-fluxes the motor during a short time in order to generate a
sufficient motor torque. The level of the torque is set with the parameter [Brk Release Current] Ibr.This
torque is required to maintain the load during the release of the brake and before starting speed control.
The parameter [Rotor Time Const] trA is the time needed by the motor to be fluxed. This parameter is
computed by the drive using the values of the parameters [Nom Motor Current] nCr, [Motor 1 Cosinus
Phi] COS, [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS and [Nominal Motor Speed] nSP which have to be set properly
according to the motor specification.
Before releasing the brake, by the means of the relay output R2 set with the parameter [Brake assignment]
bLC, the drive verifies the two following conditions:
 The fluxing current is stable.
 The torque set point is reached.

If one of the both conditions is not fulfilled, the drive does not release the brake and triggers the error [Brake
Control] bLF.
This error can be triggered, for example, if one phase of the motor is not properly connected to the motor
output of the drive.

[Brake assignment] bLC

Brake function assignment.
[Brake assignment] bLC is forced to [No] nO if :
 [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [U/F VC 5pts] UF5, [SYN_U VC] SYnU, [Sync. mot.] SYn,
[Reluctance Motor] SrVC.
 [DC Injection Assign] dCI is not set to [Not Assigned] nO
 [Catch On Fly] FLr is not set to [No] nO
 [Jog Assign] JOG is not set to [Not Assigned] nO
 [PID feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] nO
 [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL is set to [No Error Triggered] OAC
 [BL mode] BQM is not set to [Not configured] nO

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[R2]...[R3] r2...r3 Relay output R2...R3
NOTE: R3 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22 kW.
[R4]...[R6] r4...r6 Relay output R4...R6 if VW3A3204 relay output option module has been
inserted
[DQ11 Digital dO11...dO12 Digital output DQ11...DQ12 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
Output]...[DQ12 inserted
Digital Output]
[DQ1 Digital dO1...dO2 Digital output DQ1...DQ2
Output]...[DQ2
NOTE: DQ2 selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
Digital Output]
30 kW.

NVE61643 03/2020 283

Complete settings CSt-

[Movement type] bSt

Brake sequence type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] nO.
This parameter is forced to [Hoisting] VER if [Weight sensor Assign] PES is assigned.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Traveling] HOr Resistive-load movement (translational motion of overhead crane, for
example).
[Hoisting] vEr Driving-load movement (hoisting winch, for example).
Factory setting

[Brake contact] BCI

Brake contact input.
This parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] nO.
If the brake has a monitoring contact (closed for released brake).

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Brake Fdbk Filter] FbCI

Brake feedback filter.
The parameter can be accessed if [Brake contact] bCI is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...5000 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 100 ms

284 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Brake Relay Fdbk] BRI

Brake relay feedback input. (also known as brake contactor feedback input)
The parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] nO.
Identical to [Brake contact] BCI.

[Brake Rly Fdbk Filter] FBRI

Brake relay feedback filter. (also known as brake contactor feedback filter)
The parameter can be accessed if [Brake Relay Fdbk] BRI is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...1000 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 100 ms

[Brake Release Pulse] bIP

Brake release pulse.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] nO, and
 [Weight Sensor Assign] PES is set to [Not configured] NO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] No The motor torque is given in the required operating direction, at current [Brk
Release Current] Ibr.
Factory setting: if [Movement type] BST = [Traveling] HOr
[Yes] YES The motor torque is always Forward (check that this direction corresponds
to ascending), at current [Brk Release Current] Ibr.
Factory setting: if [Movement type] BST = [Hoisting] vEr
[2 IBR] 2ibr The torque is in required direction, at current [Brk Release Current] Ibr
Forward and [Brake release I Rev] Ird for Reverse, for certain specific
applications.

[Brk Release Current] Ibr

Brake release current level.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] nO, and
 [Weight Sensor Assign] PES is set to [Not configured] NO.

Setting Description
0...1.1 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: [Nom Motor Current] nCr
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Brake release I Rev] ird

Brake release current level for going down.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] nO, and
 [Brake Release Pulse] BIP is set to [2 IBR] 2IBR, and
 [Weight Sensor Assign] PES is set to [Not configured] NO.

Setting Description
0...1.1 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 0
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

NVE61643 03/2020 285

Complete settings CSt-

[Brake Release time] brt

Brake release time.
The parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment ] bLC is not set to [No] nO

Setting Description
0.0...5.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.50 s
NOTE: The minimum value considered internally by the drive is the maximum of [Brake Fdbk Filter] FBCI and
[Brake Rly Fdbk Filter] FBRI.

[Brake release freq] bIr

Brake release frequency.
The parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is not [FVC] fvC or [Sync.CL] FSY and
if [Movement type] BST is set to [Hoisting] ver.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Auto] Auto The drive takes a value based on the rated slip of the motor, calculated
using the drive parameters
0.0...10.0 Hz Manual control
Factory setting:
 0 If [Movement type] BST is set to [Traveling] HOR or [Hoisting] VER
and in closed loop.
 [Auto] AUtO if [Movement type] BST is set to [Hoisting] VER and in
open loop

[Brake engage frequency] bEn

Brake engage frequency threshold.
The parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is not set to [FVC] fvC or [Sync.CL] FSY
and if [Brake assignment] BLC is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Auto] Auto The drive takes a value based on the rated slip of the motor, calculated
using the drive parameters
0.0...10.0 Hz Manual control
Factory setting:
 0 in closed loop.
 [Auto] AUtO in open loop

[Brake engage at 0] bECd

Brake engage delay when 0 speed is attained with a reference frequency = 0 Hz.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to:
 [FVC] FVC, or
 [Sync.CL] FSY.

This parameter can be used to adjust the brake engage delay once zero speed has been reached.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] No Brake does not engage while zero speed is maintained.
Factory setting
0.0...30.0 s Brake engage delay once zero speed is reached.
NOTE: The brake engagement type depends on [BRH b6] BRH6 setting
value.

286 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Brake engage delay] tbE

Temporization at brake engage frequency.
The parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment ] bLC is not set to [No] nO.
Time delay before request to engage brake. To delay brake engagement, if you wish the brake to be
engaged when the drive comes to a complete stop.

Setting Description
0.00...5.00 s Factory setting: 0.00 s

[Brake engage time] bET

Brake engage time.
The parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment ] bLC is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.00...5.00 s Factory setting: 0.50 s
NOTE: The minimum value considered internally by the drive is the maximum of [Brake Fdbk Filter] FBCI and
[Brake Rly Fdbk Filter] FBRI.

[Auto DC inj Level 1] SdC1

Auto DC injection level 1.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

This parameter can be accessed if:

 [Movement Type] BST is set to [Traveling] HOR, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to [FVC] FVC or [Sync.CL] FSY.

Setting Description
0...1.1 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 0.7 In (1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Engage at reversal] bEd

Brake engage at speed inversion.
Can be used to select whether or not the brake engages on transition to zero speed when the operating
direction is reversed.
The parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment ] bLC is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] No The brake does not engage
Factory setting
[Yes] YES The brake engages

NVE61643 03/2020 287

Complete settings CSt-

[Jump at reversal] JdC

Brake: Jump frequency at direction change.
This parameter can be accessed if
 [Motor control type] Ctt is not set to:
 [FVC] FVC, or
 [Sync.CL] FSY, and

 [Movement type] BST is set to [Hoisting] ver.

When the reference direction is reversed, this parameter can be used to avoid loss of torque (and
consequential release of load) on transition to zero speed. Parameter is not applicable if [Engage at
reversal] bEd is set to [Yes] YES.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Auto] Auto The drive takes a value based on the rated slip of the motor, calculated
using the drive parameters
0.0...10.0Hz Manual control
Factory setting:
 0 If [Movement type] BST is set to [Traveling] HOR or [Hoisting] VER
and in closed loop.
 [Auto] AUtO if [Movement type] BST is set to [Hoisting] VER and in
open loop

[Time to restart] ttr

Brake time to restart.
Time between the end of a brake sequence and the start of the next brake release sequence.
The parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment ] bLC is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.00...15.00 s Factory setting: 0.00 s

[BRH b0] BRH0

Selection of the brake restart sequence if a run command is repeated while the brake is engaging.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr,
 [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No],
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [No] No.

Use in open-loop and closed-loop mode

NOTE: [BRH b0] BRH0 is forced to [0] 0 if Master/Slave function is enabled ([M/S Comm Mode ]MSCM
is set to a value different from [No] No).
A run command may be requested during the brake engagement phase. Whether or not the brake release
sequence is executed depends on the value selected for [BRH b0] brH0.

288 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

NOTE:
 if a run command is requested during the [Time to restart] ttr phase, the complete brake control
sequence is initialized.
 If a run command is requested with [Engage at reversal] bEd active, the complete brake control
sequence is initialized.

Setting Code / Value Description

[0] 0 The engage/release sequence is executed in full.
Factory setting
[1] 1 During the brake engagement phase, if the run command is request:
 Before the end of [Brake engage delay] TBE, the run command is
considered immediately,
 During [Brake engage time] BET phase, the run command is
considered with the handling of [Brake release time] BRT time before
the restart;
 After [Brake engage time] BET phase, the brake logic sequence is
completed in full.

[BRH b1] brH1

Deactivation of the brake contact in steady state error.
This parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] no and if [Access Level]
LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Code / Value Description

[0] 0 The brake contact in steady state error is active (error is triggered if the
contact is open during operation). [Brake Feedback] brF is monitored in
all operating phases
Factory setting
[1] 1 The brake contact in steady state error is inactive. [Brake Feedback] brF
is only monitored during the brake release and engage phases.

NVE61643 03/2020 289

Complete settings CSt-

[BRH b2] BRH2

Taking the brake contact into account for the brake control sequence.
This parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] no and if [Access Level]
LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
If a digit input is assigned to the brake contact.
 [BRH b2] brH2 = [0] 0: During the brake release sequence, the reference is enabled at the end of
the time [Brake Release time] brt. During the brake engage sequence, the current changes to [0] 0
according to the ramp [Current ramp time] brr at the end of the [Brake engage time] bEt.
 [BRH b2] brH2 = [1] 1: When the brake is released, the reference is enabled when the [brake
contact] BCI digit input changes to 1. When the brake is engaged, the current changes to 0
according to the ramp [Current ramp time] brr when the [brake contact] BCI digit input changes to
0.

Setting Code / Value Description

[0] 0 The engage/release sequence is executed in full.
Factory setting
[1] 1 The brake is released immediately.

[BRH b3] brH3

In closed-loop mode only. Management of the absence of [Brake contact] BCI and/or [Brake Relay Fdbk]
BRI response, if it is assigned.

WARNING
FALLING LOAD
 Only set [BRH b3] brH3 to [1] (1) if your application monitors the associated warning [Brk cont. al]
bCA, for example, by assigning the warning bCA to an output.
 If the warning bCA is triggered, the following action must be taken by the user.
a. Move the load to a safe position.
b. Power off the drive.
c. Identify and remove the cause of the warning.
d. Verify correct operation of all electrical and mechanical components of the brake before resuming
regular operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

This parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] no and if [Access Level]
LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

290 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[0] 0 During the brake engage sequence, the brake contact and brake contactor
(relay) feedback must be open before the end of [Brake engage time]
bEt, otherwise the drive locks in a [Brake Feedback] brF brake contact
error.
Factory setting
[1] 1 During the brake engage sequence, the brake contact and brake contactor
(relay) feedback must be open before the end of [Brake engage time]
bEt, otherwise a [Brake Contact Warn] bCA is triggered and zero speed
is maintained.
If this setting is used, behavior of the drive depends on the setting of [BRH
b5] BRH5. Refer to the description of [BRH b5] BRH5 for appropriate
settings depending on your needs.

[BRH b4] brH4

WARNING
FALLING LOAD
 Only set the parameter [BRH_b4] brH4 to [1] 1 if your application monitors the associated warning
bSA, for example, by assigning the warning bSA to an output.
 If the warning bSA is triggered, the following action must be taken by the user.
a. Move the load to a safe position.
b. Power off the drive.
c. Identify and remove the cause of the warning.
d. Verify correct operation of all electrical and mechanical components of the brake before resuming
regular operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

In closed-loop mode only. Out of the brake sequence (after [Time to restart] TTR time) and depending
[BRH b4] BRH4 setting, triggering of an error or activation of the speed loop at zero if a movement, for
which no command has been given, occurs (measurement of a speed greater than a fixed minimum
threshold determined by [BRH_b4_freq] BFTD).
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Code / Value Description

[0] 0 If a movement occurs for which no command has been given, [Load Mvt
Error] MDCF error is triggered.
Factory setting
Note:
 If this setting is used, behavior of the drive depends on the setting of
[BRH_b4_freq] BFTD. Refer to the description of [BRH_b4_freq]
BFTD for appropriate settings depending on your needs.
 This behavior is irrespective of the command profile and available in all
drive operating state except 2- Switch on disabled, 7- Fault
Reaction Active and 8 – Fault states.
[1] 1 If a movement occurs for which no command has been given, the drive
switches to zero speed regulation, with no brake release command, and a
[Load Mvt Warn] bSA warning is triggered.
NOTE: If this setting is used, behavior of the drive depends on the setting
of [BRH_b4_freq] BFTD and [BRH b5] BRH5. Refer to the description
of these parameters for appropriate settings depending on your needs.

NVE61643 03/2020 291

Complete settings CSt-

[BRH b5] brH5

This parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] no and if [Access Level]
LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
The setting of this parameter impacts the operating states of the drive within load movement is monitored,
and the priority of the zero speed maintain compared to some events. It is linked to the parameters [BRH
b3] brH3 and [BRH b4] brH4.
Irrespective of the setting, the zero speed maintain has no priority compared to:
 A new run command in order to control the drive and move the load,
 An active STO,
 A lock of the drive with the function linked to the parameter [drive lock] LES.
 A stop command coming from a channel other than the active command channel if [BRH b5] BRH5
is set to [0] 0 (see the table below).
 A triggered error if [BRH b5] BRH5 is set to [0] 0 (see the table below).

If one of this event occurs, the zero speed maintain is interrupted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[0] 0 Load movement is monitored only in the following drive operating states:
 CIA402 command profile: 5-Operation Enabled, 6-Quick Stop
Active.
 Other command profiles (Graphic Display Terminal, I/O, etc): 3-Ready
to switch on, 4-Switched-on, 5-Operation enabled.
For example, when the product is controlled under Cia402 profile:
 In Freewheel stop (NST) or in Operating State Fault (FLT), the load
movement detection is not monitored.
 If the drive is stopped by a halt command (bit 8 of the command word
CMD), the drive remains in operation enabled then, the load movement
detection is monitored.
The zero speed maintain has no priority compared to a triggered error and
a stop command coming from a channel other than the active command
channel.
Factory setting
[1] 1 Irrespective of the command profile, in all drive operating state except 7-
Fault Reaction Active and 8 - Fault states, the load movement
monitoring function is active.
The zero speed maintain has priority compared to an error that can be
disabled (see [Disable Error Detect] INH (see page 497)).

[BRH b6] brH6

This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
Selection of the brake engage type if [Brake engage at 0] BECD is set to a numeric value.

Setting Code / Value Description

[0] 0 The brake is closed (including the handling of [Brake Engage Time] BET)
and the zero speed is still maintained. Then:
 If a reference frequency other than zero is requested, the command to
release the brake is sent following torque application with the handling
of [Brake Release Time] BRT.
 If a stop command (external to the drive) is requested, the brake engage
sequence is completed.
Factory setting
NOTE: the stop command is only considered after [Brake Engage Time]
BET.
[1] 1 After the delay set by [Brake engage at 0] BECD, A stop command is
executed by the drive, the brake engage sequence is fully executed.

292 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Current ramp time] brr

Brake current ramp.
The parameter can be accessed if [Brake assignment ] bLC is not set to [No] nO.
Torque current ramp time (increase and decrease) for a current variation equal to [Brk Release Current]
Ibr.

Setting Description
0.00...5.00 s Factory setting: 0.00 s

[BRH_b4_freq] bFtd
BRH_b4 frequency threshold detection.
This parameter represents the detection threshold for [BRH b4] brh4. The required value depends on
the response of the mechanical installation.
If the value of the parameter [BRH_b4_freq] bFtd is too low, this may lead to unwanted triggering of
load movement monitoring.
If the value of the parameter [BRH_b4_freq] bFtd is too high, the load movement monitoring may not
trigger when required.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Verify that the setting of this parameter is suitable for the application by performing comprehensive
commissioning tests for all load conditions and all potential error conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting [BRH_b4_freq] bFtd to [NO] NO disables load movement monitoring. Unintended movements
and falling of the load are not detected with this setting.

WARNING
FALLING LOAD
Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

This parameter can be accessed if

 [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] nO and,
 [Motor Control Type] CTT is set to [FVC] FVC or [Sync.CL] FSY.

This parameter cannot be set to [No] No if [BRH b4 ]BRH4 is set [1] 1. Setting back [BRH b4] BRH4
to [0] 0 does not set [BRH_b4_freq] BFTD to [No] No.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] No The load movement monitoring function is disabled.
0.1...10 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 10% of [Nominal Motor Freq] FRS or [Sync Nominal Freq]
FRSS depending on [Motor control type] CTT.

NVE61643 03/2020 293

Complete settings CSt-

[Load Maintain Time] MDFT

Load maintain time before error.
When zero speed maintain is activated, [Load Mvt Error] MDCF error is triggered at the end of this
duration.
If zero speed maintain is active, the remaining time before triggering the error is displayed with the
parameter [Load Mtn Remain Time] MTBF. If a new run command is applied, the load movement
monitoring function is temporary inactive and the remaining time [Load Mtn Remain Time] MTBF is
frozen.
Reset of [Load Mtn Remain Time] MTBF requires a power cycle or a product restart.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [BRH b5] BRH5 is set to [1] 1 and,
 [Motor Control Type] CTT is set to [FVC] FVC or [Sync.CL] FSY.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] No Time before error is deactivated.
Factory setting
1...60 min Setting range

[Load Mtn Remain Time] MTBF

Load maintain remaining time before error.
Read-only parameter.
This parameter can be accessed if [Load Maintain Time] MDFT is not set to [No] No.

Setting Description
0...3,600 s Setting range
Factory setting: -

294 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[High speed hoisting] HSH- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Hoisting Functions] [High speed hoisting]

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
This function can be used to optimize the cycle times for hoisting movements for zero or lightweight loads.
It authorizes operation at "constant power" in order to reach a speed greater than the rated speed without
exceeding the rated motor current.
The speed remains limited by the [High speed] HSP.
The function acts on the speed reference pedestal and not on the reference itself.

Principle

There are two possible operating modes:

 Speed reference mode: the maximum permissible speed is calculated by the drive during a speed step
that is set so that the drive can measure the load.
 Current limitation mode: the maximum permissible speed is the speed that supports current limitation in
motor mode, in the "ascending" direction only. For the "descending" direction, operation is in Speed
reference mode.

NVE61643 03/2020 295

Complete settings CSt-

Speed Reference Mode

A / D Ascend or descend command

R Reference
F Frequency
Cl Calculated limit
oSP Adjustable speed step for load measurement
t0S Load measuring time

2 parameters are used to reduce the speed calculated by the drive, for ascending and descending.

296 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Current Limiting Mode

A Ascend command
R Reference
F Frequency
L Limit imposed by current limitation
C Current
SCL Adjustable speed threshold, above which current limitation is active
CLO Current limitation for high-speed function

NOTE: The speed reached for a specific current will be lower in case of network undervoltage in
comparison with nominal network voltage.

Working at Constant Torque up to 87Hz

Depending of the motor isolation class, it is possible to supply motor with a voltage greater than one
specified for its coupling.
For example, a 230/400 Vac motor wired and coupled (in delta) to work at 230 Vac / 50 Hz can be supplied
at 400 V to work with constant torque up to 87 Hz.
Some motors have information on nameplate to work at 400 Vac / 87 Hz
To allow the high speed hoisting function working at 87 Hz, the following parameters must be configured
as follows:

Step Action
1 Configure [Max Frequency] TFR to 87 Hz.

NVE61643 03/2020 297

Complete settings CSt-

Step Action
2 Configure [High Speed] HSP to 87 Hz.
3 Configure [Nom Motor Current] NCR with the nominal current for delta coupling written on
motor nameplate.
4 Configure [Nominal Motor Freq] FRS to 87 Hz.
5 Configure [Nom Motor Voltage] UNS with the result of following formula:

6 Configure [Nominal Motor Speed] NSP with the result of following formula:

NOTE: With Np: with

7 Configure [Nominal motor power] NPR with the result of following formula:

NOTE: With Np: with

8 Perform an autotuning of the motor by setting [Autotuning] TUN to value [Yes] YES.

Rope Slack
The Rope slack function can be used to help to prevent starting up at high speed when a load has been
set down ready for lifting but the rope is still slack (as illustrated below).

S Speed
L Load

The speed step (OSP parameters) is used to measure the load. The effective measurement cycle will not
be triggered until the load reaches the adjustable threshold [Rope slack trq level] rStL, which
corresponds to the weight of the hook.

298 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

A digital output or a relay can be assigned to the indication of the Rope slack state in the[Input/Output]
I_O- menu.
NOTE: The speed reached for a specific current will be lower in case of network undervoltage in
comparison with nominal network voltage.

[High speed hoisting] HSO

High Speed Optimized activation function.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive
Factory setting
[Reference SSO Speed reference mode
Frequency]
[Current Limit] CSO Current limitation mode

[Motor speed coeff.] COF

Coefficient Optimize Forward (motor quadrant).
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] HSO is set to [Speed ref] SSO.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Gen. speed coeff] COr

Coefficient Optimize Reverse (generator quadrant).
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] HSO is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 50%

[Load measuring tm.] tOS

Torque measuring time.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] HSO is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.10...65.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.50 s

[Measurement spd] OSp

Optimize Speed.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] HSO is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 40 Hz

NVE61643 03/2020 299

Complete settings CSt-

[High speed I Limit] CLO

Current Limitation Optimize.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] HSO is set to [I Limit] CSO.
NOTE: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] OPL error if this has
been enabled.

Setting Description
0...1.1 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: In(1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

[I Limit. frequency] SCL

Frequency threshold, above which the high-speed limitation current is active.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] HSO is set to [I Limit] CSO.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 40.0 Hz

[Rope slack config.] rSd

Load measurement feedback.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] HSO is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive
Factory setting
[Weight drI Measurement of the load by estimating the torque generated by the drive
Estimation]
[Ext Weight PES Measurement of the load using a weight sensor. It can only be assigned if
Sensor] [Ext Weight Sensor] PES is not set to [Not configured] NO.

[Rope slack trq level] rStL

Adjustment threshold corresponding to a load weighing slightly less than the hook when off-load, as a %
of the rated load.
This parameter can be accessed if [Rope slack config.] rSd has been assigned.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

300 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Load Sharing] Lds- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Hoisting Functions] [Load Sharing]

About This Menu

Principle:

The load sharing factor K is determined by the torque and speed, with two factors K1 and K2 (K = K1 x K2).

S Speed
T Torque
Rt Rated torque

[Load sharing] LBA

Load balancing configuration
When 2 motors are connected mechanically and therefore at the same speed, and each is controlled by a
drive, this function can be used to improve torque distribution between the two motors. To do this, it varies
the speed based on the torque.
This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [SVC V] VVC or [FVC] FVC
or [Sync. mot]. SYN or [Sync.CL] FSY.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] yes Function active

NVE61643 03/2020 301

Complete settings CSt-

[Load correction] LbC

Nominal speed load balance correction.
This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] LbA is set to [Yes] YES.

T Torque
t Nominal torque
F Frequency

Setting Description
0...1000.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Correction min spd] LbC1

Low Speed for torque decreasing function speed reference
Minimum speed for load correction in Hz. Below this threshold, no corrections are made. Used to prevent
correction at very low speed ifthis would hamper rotation of the motor.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr and if [Load sharing]
LbA = [Yes] YES

Setting Description
0...999.9 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Correction max spd] LbC2

High speed for torque decreasing function speed reference.
Speed threshold in Hz above which maximum load correction is applied.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr and if [Load sharing]
LbA = [Yes] YES

Setting Description
LbC1 Hz at 1000.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0 Hz

[Torque offset] LbC3

Torque offset for torque correction.
Minimum torque for load correction as a % of the rated torque. Below this threshold, no corrections are
made. Used to avoid torque instabilities when the torque direction is not constant.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr and if [Load sharing]
LbA = [Yes] YES

Setting Description
0...300% Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

302 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Sharing filter] LbF

Time constant filter.
This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] LbA = [Yes] YES and if [Access Level] LAC is set
to [Expert] EPr. Used in the event of flexible mechanical coupling in order to avoid instabilities.

Setting Description
100...20000 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 100 ms

NVE61643 03/2020 303

Complete settings CSt-

[Rope Slack Handling] Sdr- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Hoisting Functions] [Rope Slack Handling]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] HSO is not set to [No] nO.

[Rope slack config.] rSd

Load measurement feedback.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function not active
Factory setting
[Weight drI Drive motor torque estimation
Estimation]
[Ext Weight PES Measurement of the load using a weight sensor. It can only be assigned if
Sensor] [Ext Weight Sensor] PES is not set to [Not configured] NO.

[Rope slack trq level] rStL

Torque level for rope slack detection.
This parameter can be accessed if [Rope slack config.] rSd is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

304 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.6
[Hoisting monitoring]

[Hoisting monitoring]

[Dynamic load detect.] dLd- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Hoisting monitoring] [Dynamic load detect.]

About This Menu

This detection is only possible with the high-speed hoisting function. It can be used to detect if an obstacle
has been reached, triggering a sudden (upward) increase or (downward) decrease in the load.
Load variation detection triggers a [Dynamic Load Error] dLF. The [Dyn. load Mgt.] dLb parameter can
be used to configure the response of the drive in the event of this detected error.
Load variation detection can also be assigned to a relay or a digital output.
There are two possible detection modes, depending on the configuration of high-speed hoisting:
 Speed reference mode
[High speed hoisting] HSO is set to [Speed ref] SSO.
Torque variation detection.
During high-speed operation, the load is compared to that measured during the speed step. The
permissible load variation and its duration can be configured. If exceeded, an error is triggered.
 Current limitation mode
[High speed hoisting] HSO is set to [Current Limit] CSO. On ascend, during high-speed operation, an
increase in load will result in a drop in speed. Even if high-speed operation has been activated, if the
motor frequency drops below the [I Limit Frequency] SCL threshold, an error is triggered. The
detection is realized only for a positive variation of the load and only in the high-speed area (area upper
to [I Limit Frequency] SCL).On descend, operation takes the form of speed reference mode.

[Dynamic load time] tLd

Activation of load variation detection and adjustment of time delay for taking load variation detected an
error [Dynamic Load Error] dLF into account.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No load variation detection
Factory setting
0.00...10.00 s Adjustment of the time delay for taking detected an error into account.

[Dyn. load threshold] dLd

Adjustment of the trip threshold for load variation detection, as a % of the load measured during the speed
step.

Setting Description
1...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Dyn. load Mgt.] dLb

Drive response in the event of a load varation dected error.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

NVE61643 03/2020 305

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Spd maintained] rLS Speed maintained as long as the detected error persists and the run
command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

306 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.7
[Machine Functions]

[Machine Functions]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Load Sharing] LdS- Menu 308
[Backlash compensation] bSqM- Menu 309
[Positioning by sensors] LPO- Menu 318
[Brake logic control] bLC- Menu 318
[Torque control] tOr- Menu 318

NVE61643 03/2020 307

Complete settings CSt-

[Load Sharing] LdS- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Machine Functions] [Conveyor Functions] [Load Sharing]

About This Menu

Identical to [Load Sharing] LdS- menu (see page 301)

308 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Backlash compensation] bSqM- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Machine Functions] [Backlash compensation]

About This Menu

This menu presents:
 The backlash compensation sequence.
 The backlash compensation sequence dedicated to the Master/Slave on rigid coupling.

The purpose of this menu is to provide a dedicated sequence to compensate backlashes in order to reduce
the wear gears by limiting the torque at the moment of the impact:

This menu is dedicated to non driving loads (horizontal movement) without brakes. It is available either in
torque control or speed control.

Backlash Sequence
The purpose of the backlash sequence is to regulate speed startup under a torque limitation allowing
motion until the backlash is fully compensated. The load torque will become greater than the torque
limitation and stop the movement. Then the run can proceed starting from applied limitation torque.
There are three different use cases:
 Backlash sequence at startup only (UC-1)
 Stop at direction change (UC-2)
 Regulate 0Hz speed at direction change (UC-3)

Those use cases depends on the control mode:

Torque control Speed control

Open loop (UC-1) (UC-1)
(UC-2) (UC-2)
Closed loop (UC-1) (UC-1)
(UC-3) (UC-3)

NVE61643 03/2020 309

Complete settings CSt-

Backlash sequence at startup only (UC-1)

The backlash sequence is configured only during starts of the drive and become transparent once it is in
run:

Stop at direction change (UC-2)

The drive stops when the direction of the movement changes and the drive will start if the run order is still
present. Then do a backlash sequence according to its new direction:

310 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Regulate 0Hz speed at direction change (UC-3)

On a changing direction the drive will regulate the 0Hz speed and proceed to the backlash sequence
according to the new direction of movement to come back in run at the end of the sequence:

Backlash Sequence Dedicated to the Master/Slave on Rigid Coupling

The purpose of this menu is to provide backlash compensation dedicated to Master/Slave architectures in
a rigid coupling context. The goal is to limit the impact torque on toothed wheels in order to reduce the wear.
There are four different Multiple Drive backlash compensation sequences strategies:
 Direct sequential slave backlash compensation (1)
 Direct simultaneous slave backlash compensation (2)
 Controlled sequential slave backlash compensation (3)
 Controlled simultaneous slave backlash compensation (4)

The following diagram shows how to configure the different compensation sequences strategies:

NVE61643 03/2020 311

Complete settings CSt-

Direct sequential slave backlash compensation (1)

Each Slave will compensate its backlash by switching in speed control. Doing its sequence one at the time
assuming that the settings allow compensating the backlash angle in the configured time. At the end, the
master launches its own backlash sequence, meanwhile the Master stays in stop (open loop) or regulating
0Hz speed (closed loop):

a Slave 1 starts
b Slave 2 starts, Slave 1 stops
c Slave 2 stops
d All slaves run start
e 0Hz regulation or stop

312 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Direct simultaneous slave backlash compensation (2)

All slaves will compensate their backlashes angle simultaneously assuming that the tuning allows
compensating the backlash angle in the configured time. Meanwhile the Master stays in stop (open loop)
or regulating 0Hz speed (closed loop):

a All slaves stop

b All slaves start
c 0Hz regulation or stop

NVE61643 03/2020 313

Complete settings CSt-

Controlled sequential slave backlash compensation (3)

All Slaves will compensate their backlashes angle one at the time. When it is done they notify to the Master.
Meanwhile the Master stays in stop (open loop) or regulating 0Hz speed (closed loop). Then starts
compensating its backlash and go in run as soon as the last Slave has compensated its backlash:

a Slave 1 starts
b Slave 2 starts, Slave 1 stops
c Slave 2 stops
d All slaves start
e 0Hz regulation or stop
f Slave 1 feedback
g Slave 2 feedback

314 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Controlled simultaneous slave backlash compensation (4)

All Slaves will compensate their backlashes angle simultaneously broadcasting to the Master when it is
done. Meanwhile the Master drive stays in stop (open loop) or regulating 0Hz speed (closed loop).
Then starts compensating its backlash and go in run as soon as the last Slave has compensated its
backlash:

a Stop orders when feedback is done

b All slaves start
c 0Hz regulation or stop
d Slave 1 feedback
e Slave 2 feedback

[BL Mode] bqM

Backlash mode.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] no Backlash compensation not configured
Factory setting
[On Start] StArt Backlash compensation is performed on each Drive start (run order
appears or halt disappear)
[On Start + Dir CHGdir Backlash compensation is performed on each Drive start (run order
Change] appears or halt disappear) and on each direction change
[On Master MS Backlash compensation managed through Master/Slave function.
Request]

NVE61643 03/2020 315

Complete settings CSt-

[BL Type] bqMM

Backlash type.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [BL Mode] bqM is not set to [Not Configured] no, and
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [MultiDrive Link] MdL, and
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Master] MStEr.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Sequential] SEq Each slave will do its sequence one by one
Factory setting
[Simultaneous] SiMuL Backlash compensation is performed on each Drive start (run order
appears or halt disappear)

[BL Slave Fdbck] bqMC

Backlash on slave(s) feedback.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [BL Mode] bqM is not set to [Not Configured] no, and
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [MultiDrive Link] MdL, and
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Master] MStEr, and
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Master does not take into account the slaves feedback
[Yes] YES Master takes into account the slaves feedback
Factory setting

[BL Time] bqMt

Backlash time.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [BL Mode] bqM is not set to [Not Configured] no, and
 [M/S Comm Mode] MSCM is set to [MultiDrive Link] MdL, and
 [M/S Device Role] MSdt is set to [Master] MStEr, and
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [BL Slave Fdbck] bqMC is set to [No] no.

Description
Setting
0.1...100.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.5 s

[BL Ref Freq] bqSL

Backlash reference frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [BL Mode] bqM is not set to [Not Configured] no.

Description
Setting
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 1% of [Nominal Motor Freq] FRS or [Sync Nominal Freq]
FRSS depending on [Motor control type] CTT.

[BL Acceleration] bqA

Backlash acceleration.
Backlash Acceleration ramp value.
This parameter can be accessed if [BL Mode] bqM is not set to [Not Configured] no.

316 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Description
Setting

0.01...999.90 s (1) Setting range

Factory setting: 10.00 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 9,999 according to [Ramp increment] Inr

[BL Trq Lim Value] bqtL

Backlash torque limitation value.
This parameter can be accessed if [BL Mode] bqM is not set to [Not Configured] no.

Description
Setting
0.0...100.0% Setting range
Factory setting: 5.0%

[BL Monit Delay] bqt

Backlash torque limitation monitoring delay.
Delay from beginning of backlash speed ramp and check of torque limitation.
This parameter can be accessed if [BL Mode] bqM is not set to [Not Configured] no.

Description
Setting
0.1...100.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.5 s

NOTE: To adjust this parameter, the time needed by Angle test function must be considered.

[BL Start Delay] bqSt

Backlash start delay.
Time spent in stop or standstill before backlash sequence.
This parameter can be accessed if [BL Mode] bqM is not set to [Not Configured] no.

Description
Setting
0.0...100.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 s

[BL Timeout] bqFd

Backlash timeout.
This parameter can be accessed if [BL Mode] bqM is not set to [Not Configured] no.

Description
Setting
0.0...100.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 5.0 s ([BL Monit Delay] bqtx10)

[BL ErrorResp] bqFb

Backlash compensation error response.
This parameter can be accessed if [BL Mode] bqM is not set to [Not Configured] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting

NVE61643 03/2020 317

Complete settings CSt-

[Positioning by sensors] LPO- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Machine Functions] [Positioning by sensors]

About This Menu

Identical to [Positioning by sensors] LPO- menu (see page 392)

[Brake logic control] bLC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Machine Functions] [Brake logic control]

About This Menu

Identical to [Brake logic control] BLC- menu (see page 277)

[Torque control] tOr- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Machine Functions] [Torque control]

About This Menu

Identical to [Torque control] tOr- menu (see page 399)

318 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.8
[Generic functions] - [Speed limits]

[Generic functions] - [Speed limits]

[Speed limits] SLM- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Speed limits]

[Low Speed] LSP

Motor frequency at low speed.

Setting Description

0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range

Factory setting: 0 Hz

[High Speed] HSP

Motor frequency at high speed.
To help prevent [Motor Overspeed] SOF error, it is recommended to have [Max Frequency] TFR equal
to or higher than 110% of [High Speed] HSP.

Setting Description

0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range

Factory setting: 50.0 Hz

[Ref Freq Template] bSP

Low speed management (template).
This parameter defines how the speed reference is taken into account, for analog inputs and pulse input
only. In the case of the PID controller, this is the PID output reference.
The limits are set by the [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP parameters.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Standard] bSd

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0, the frequency = [Low speed] LSP

Factory setting

NVE61643 03/2020 319

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Pedestal] bLS

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0 to [Low speed] LSP, the frequency = [Low speed] LSP

[Deadband] bnS

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0 to LSP the frequency = 0

[Deadband at 0%] bnS0

F Frequency
R Reference

This operation is the same as [Standard] bSd, except that in the following
cases at zero reference, the frequency = 0: The signal is less than [Min
value], which is greater than 0 (example: 1 Vdc on a 2–10 Vdc input). The
signal is greater than [Min value], which is greater than [Max value]
(example: 11 Vdc on a 10–0 Vdc input).
If the input range is configured as “bidirectional”, the operation remains
identical to [Standard] bSd.

320 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.9
[Generic functions] - [Ramp]

[Generic functions] - [Ramp]

[Ramp] rAMP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Ramp]

[Ramp Type] rPt

Type of ramp.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Linear] LIn Linear ramp
Factory setting
[S-Ramp] S S ramp
[U-Ramp] U U ramp
[Customized] CUS Customer ramp

[Ramp increment] Inr

This parameter is valid for [Acceleration] ACC, [Deceleration] dEC, [Acceleration 2] AC2 and
[Deceleration 2] dE2.

Setting Code / Value Description

[0.01] 0.01 Ramp up to 99.99 seconds
[0.1] 0.1 Ramp up to 999.9 seconds
Factory setting
[1] 1 Ramp up to 6,000 seconds

[Acceleration] ACC
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS.
To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the
application.

Setting Description

0.00...6,000.00 s (1) Setting range

Factory setting: 3.00 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 according to [Ramp increment] Inr

[Deceleration] dEC
Time to decelerate from the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS to 0.
To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the
application.

Setting Description

0.00...6,000.00 s (1) Setting range

Factory setting: 3.00 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 according to [Ramp increment] Inr

NVE61643 03/2020 321

Complete settings CSt-

[Begin Acc round] tA1

Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a percentage of the [Acceleration] ACC or [Acceleration 2]
AC2 ramp time.
Can be set from 0 to 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is set to [Customized] CUS.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 10%

[End Acc round] tA2

Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a percentage of the [Acceleration] ACC or [Acceleration 2]
AC2 ramp time.
Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Acc round] tA1).
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is set to [Customized] CUS.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 10%

[Begin Dec round] tA3

Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a percentage of the [Deceleration] dEC or [Deceleration 2]
dE2 ramp time.
Can be set from 0 to 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is set to [Customized] CUS.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 10%

[End Dec round] tA4

Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a percentage of the [Deceleration] dEC or [Deceleration 2]
dE2 ramp time.
Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Dec round] tA3).
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is [Customized] CUS.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 10%

322 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Dec.Ramp Adapt] brA

Deceleration ramp adaptation.

Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at a too low value
according to the inertia of the load, which can cause an overvoltage detected error.
The function is incompatible with applications requiring:
 Positioning on a ramp

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive.
NOTE:
[Dec.Ramp Adapt] brA if forced to [No] no if:
 [Brake assignment] BLC is configured, or
 [Braking balance] BBA is set to [Yes], or
 [Motor control type] CTT is set to [Reluctance Motor] SRVC and
[Dec.Ramp Adapt] brA was set to [High Torque] DYNA.
[Yes] YES Function active, for applications that do not require strong deceleration
Factory setting
[High Torque] dYnA Addition of a constant current flow component.
The [High Torque] dYnA selection appears depending on the rating of the
drive and [Motor control type] Ctt. It enables stronger deceleration to be
obtained than with [Yes] YES. Use comparative testing to determine your
selection.
When [Dec.Ramp Adapt] brA is configured on [High Torque] dYnA, the
dynamic performances for braking are improved by the addition of a current
flow component. The aim is to increase the iron loss and magnetic energy
stored in the motor.

[Braking balance] BBA

Braking balance
This parameter is used to balance the braking power between drives linked through the DC bus.
This parameter is forced to [No] No if [Dec.Ramp Adapt] BRA is set to a value different from [No] No.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Function inactive.
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Function active.

NVE61643 03/2020 323

Complete settings CSt-

[Braking Resistor] BrC

Braking resistor connected.
NOTE: The factory setting value of the parameter is changed to [Yes] Yes if [Brake assignment] BLC
is configured.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive
Factory setting
NOTE: With this selection [DB unit op. circuit] BUFO error can't be
triggered.
[Yes] YES Function active
NOTE: This parameter is forced to [Yes] yes if [Dec.Ramp Adapt] brA
is set to [No] nO on drive with power greater than 22 kW.

[Braking Current Level] BDCL

Maximum braking current level.
This parameter modifies the maximum current level that can be reached during the adaptation of the
braking deceleration. Increasing the maximum value increases the motor current loss via iron loss and
magnetic energy stored in the motor.
It is expressed in % of nominal magnetizing current ([Magnetizing current] IDA).
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Dec. Ramp Adapt] BRA is set to [High Torque] DYNA.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Auto] Auto Automatic: it corresponds to 125 %.
Factory setting.
0.1...500.0% Settings range.

324 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.10
[Generic functions] - [Ramp switching]

[Generic functions] - [Ramp switching]

[Ramp switching] rpt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Ramp switching]

[Ramp 2 Thd] Frt

Ramp 2 frequency threshold
The second ramp is switched if the value of [Ramp 2 Thd] Frt is not 0 (0 deactivates the function) and
the output frequency is greater than [Ramp 2 Thd] Frt.
Threshold ramp switching can be combined with [Ramp Switch Assign] rPS switching as follows:

DI or Bit Frequency Ramp

0 < Frt ACC, dEC
0 > Frt AC2, dE2
1 < Frt AC2, dE2
1 > Frt AC2, dE2

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Ramp Switch Assign] rPS

Ramp switching.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration

NVE61643 03/2020 325

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Acceleration 2] AC2
Acceleration 2 ramp time.
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of
this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 Thd] Frt is greater than 0 or if [Ramp Switch Assign] rPS
is assigned.

Setting Description

0.0...6,000 s (1) Setting range

Factory setting: 5.0 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] Inr.

[Deceleration 2] dE2
Time to decelerate from the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS to 0. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of
this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Ramp 2 Thd] Frt is greater than 0, or
 [Ramp Switch Assign] rPS is assigned.

Setting Description
0.0...6,000 s (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 5.0 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] Inr.

326 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.11
[Generic functions] - [Stop configuration]

[Generic functions] - [Stop configuration]

[Stop configuration] Stt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Stop configuration]

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

[Type of stop] Stt

Normal stop mode.
Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command.

Setting Code / Value Description

[On Ramp] rMP Stop on ramp, if [Brake assignment] bLC or [Low speed time out] tLS
are configured, or if [Motor fluxing] FLU is set to [Continuous] FCt only
a [On Ramp] rMP is possible.
Factory setting
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[Freewheel] nSt Freewheel stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection stop.
Available if [Motor control type ] Ctt is not set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] srvC

[Freewheel stop] nSt

Freewheel stop.
The stop is activated when the input or the bit changes to 0. If the input returns to state 1 and the run
command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3-wire control] tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C
and if [2-wire type] tCt is set to [Level] LEL or [Fwd priority] PFO. If not, a new run command must
be sent.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration

NVE61643 03/2020 327

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[DI1 (Low L1L...L8L Digital input DI1...DI8 used at low level
level)]...[DI8 (Low
NOTE: DI8 low level selection can be accessed on drives with a power
level)]
greater than 22kW.
[DI11 (Low L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if VW3A3203 I/O extension
level)]...[DI16 (Low module has been inserted
level)]

[Freewheel stop Thd] FFt

Freewheel stop threshold.
Speed threshold below which the motor switches to freewheel stop.
This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed
threshold.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Type of stop] Stt is set to [Fast stop] FSt or [On Ramp] rMP, and
 [Auto DC Injection] AdC is configured, and.
 [Brake Assignment] BLC is not configured.

Setting Description
0.2...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.2 Hz

[Fast stop Assign] FSt

Fast stop.
The stop is activated when the input changes to 0 or the bit changes to 1 (bit in [I/O profile] IO at 0).
If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3-wire
control] tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C and if [2-wire type] tCt is set to [Level] LEL or [Fwd
priority] PFO.
If not, a new run command must be sent.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration

328 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[DI1 (Low L1L...L8L Digital input DI1...DI8 used at low level
level)]...[DI8 (Low
NOTE: DI8 low level selection can be accessed on drives with a power
level)]
greater than 22kW.
[DI11 (Low L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if VW3A3203 I/O extension
level)]...[DI16 (Low module has been inserted
level)]

[Ramp Divider] dCF

Fast Stop deceleration ramp reduction coefficient.
The ramp that is enabled ([Deceleration] dEC or [Deceleration 2] dE2) is then divided by this coefficient
when stop requests are sent.
Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time.

Setting Description
0...10 Setting range
Factory setting: 4

[DC Injection Assign] dCI

DC injection brake assignment.

WARNING
UNINTENDED MOVEMENT
 Do not use DC injection to generate holding torque when the motor is at a standstill.
 Use a holding brake to keep the motor in the standstill position.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

This parameter can be accessed if:

 Brake assignment] BLC is set to [No] no, or
 Motor control type] Ctt is not set to [Sync. mot.] SYN or [Sync.CL] FSY or [Reluctance Motor]
SRVC or [SYN_U VC] SYNU.
DC injection braking is initiated when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1.
If the input returns to state 0 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3-wire
control] tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C and if [2-wire type] tCt is set to [Level] LEL or [Fwd
priority] PFO. If not, a new run command must be sent.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration

NVE61643 03/2020 329

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[DC inject. level 1] IdC

DC injection current.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Level of DC injection braking current activated via digital input or selected as stop mode.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC injection] dCI, or
 [DC.Brake DI] dCI is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.1...1.41 In (1) Setting range
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.
Factory setting: 0.7 In (1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

330 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[DC injection time 1] tdI

DC injection time 1.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Maximum current injection time [DC inject. level 1] IdC. After this time, the injection current becomes
[DC inject. level 2] IdC2.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC injection] dCI, or
 [DC.Brake DI] dCI is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.1...30 s Setting range
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.
Factory setting: 0.5 s

[DC inject. level 2] IdC2

DC injection current 2.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Injection current activated by digital input or selected as stop mode once period [DC injection time 1] tdI
has elapsed.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC injection] dCI, or
 [DC Injection Assign] dCI is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.1 In (1)...[DC inject. level 1] IdC Setting range
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.
Factory setting: 0.5 In (1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

NVE61643 03/2020 331

Complete settings CSt-

[DC Inj Time 2] tdC

2nd DC injection time.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] IdC2 for injection, selected as stop mode only.
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC injection] dCI.

Setting Description
0.1...30 s Setting range
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.
Factory setting: 0.5 s

[SwitchOnDisable Stp] dOtd

Disable operation stop mode.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Freewheel Stop] nSt The drive stops in freewheel when switching from the operating state
Operation enabled to the operating state Switched on.
[Ramp Stop] rMP The drive stops on ramp when switching from the operating state
Operation enabled to the operating state Switched on.
Factory setting

332 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.12
[Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection]

[Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection]

[Auto DC injection] AdC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Auto DC injection]

About This Menu

This menu presents the automatic injection of motor current function. This is used to hold the rotor of the
motor at the end of the deceleration ramp.

[Auto DC Injection] AdC

Automatic DC Injection.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
If the parameter [Auto DC Injection] ADC is set to [Continuous] Ct, DC injection is always active, even
if the motor does not run.
 Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
UNINTENDED MOVEMENT
 Do not use DC injection to generate holding torque when the motor is at a standstill.
 Use a holding brake to keep the motor in the standstill position.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Automatic current injection on stopping (at the end of the ramp).

NOTE: There is an interlock between this function and [Motor fluxing] FLU. If [Motor fluxing] FLU is set
to [Continuous] FCt, [Auto DC Injection] AdC must be [No] nO.
[Auto DC Injection] AdC is forced to [No] nO when [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] nO. This
parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No injection
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Adjustable injection time
[Continuous] Ct Continuous standstill injection

NVE61643 03/2020 333

Complete settings CSt-

[Auto DC inj Level 1] SdC1

Auto DC injection level 1.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Level of standstill DC injection current.

This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Auto DC Injection] AdC is not set to [No] nO, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to [FVC] FVC or [Sync.CL] FSY.

Setting Description

0...1.1 In (1) Setting range

Factory setting: 0.7 In (1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Auto DC Inj Time 1] tdC1

Auto DC injection time 1.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC Injection] AdC is not set to [No] nO.
This time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time, if [Motor control type ] Ctt is set to:
 [Sync. mot.] SYn, or
 [Sync.CL.] FSY, or
 [SYN_U VC] SYnU, or
 [Reluctance Motor] srvC

Setting Description
0.1...30.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.5 s

[Auto DC inj Level 2] SdC2

Auto DC injection level 2.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Second level of standstill DC injection current.

334 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

This parameter can be accessed if:

 [Auto DC Injection] AdC is not set to [No] nO, and
 Motor control type] CTT is not set to [FVC] FVC or [Sync.CL] FSY

Setting Description
0...1.1 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 0.5 In (1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Auto DC Inj Time 2] tdC2

Auto DC injection time 2.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of
amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Second standstill injection time.

This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Auto DC Injection] AdC is set to [Yes] YES, and
 [Motor control type] CTT is not set to [FVC] FVC or [Sync.CL] FSY.

AdC SdC2 Operation

YES x

Ct ≠0

Ct =0

Run command

Speed

Setting Description
0.0...30.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 s

NVE61643 03/2020 335

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.13
[Generic functions] - [Ref. operations]

[Generic functions] - [Ref. operations]

[Ref. operations] OAI- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Ref. operations]

About This Menu

Summing input / subtraction input / multiplier

A (Fr1 or Fr1b + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3

NOTE:
 If SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3 are not assigned, they are set to 0.
 If MA2, MA3 are not assigned, they are set to 1.
 A is limited by the minimum LSP and maximum HSP parameters.
 For a multiplication, the signal on MA2 or MA3 is interpreted as a %. 100% corresponds to the
maximum value of the corresponding input. If MA2 or MA3 is sent via the communication bus or
Display Terminal, an MFr multiplication variable must be sent via the bus or Display Terminal.
 Reversal of the direction of operation in the event of a negative result can be blocked (see [Reverse
Disable] rIn).

[Summing Input 2] SA2

Summing input 2.
Selection of a reference to be added to [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 or [Ref.1B channel] Fr1b.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
Factory Setting
[AI1] AI1 Analog input AI1
[AI2]...[AI3] AI2...AI3 Analog input AI2...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref. Freq- Rmt. Term] LCC Reference Frequency via remote terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-CANopen] CAn Reference frequency via CANopen if a CANopen module has been
inserted
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been
Module] inserted
[Embedded Ethernet] EtH Embedded Ethernet
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[AI Virtual 1] AIv1 Virtual analogic input 1

336 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[DI7 PulseInput]...[DI8 PI7...PI8 Digital input DI7...DI8 used as pulse input
PulseInput]
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater
than 22kW.
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up to
22kW.

[Summing Input 3] SA3

Summing input 3.
Selection of a reference to be added to [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 or [Ref.1B channel] Fr1b.
Identical to [Summing Input 2] SA2

[Subtract Ref Freq 2] dA2

Subtract reference frequency 2.
Selection of a reference to be subtracted from [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 or [Ref.1B channel] Fr1b.
Identical to [Summing Input 2] SA2

[Subtract Ref Freq 3] dA3

Subtract reference frequency 3.
Selection of a reference to be subtracted from [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 or [Ref.1B channel] Fr1b.
Identical to [Summing Input 2] SA2.

[Ref Freq 2 Multiply] MA2

Reference frequency 2 multiply (in % of the source range).
Selection of a multiplier reference [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 or [Ref.1B channel] Fr1b.
Identical to [Summing Input 2] SA2.

[Ref Freq 3 Multiply] MA3

Reference frequency 3 multiply (in % of the source range).
Selection of a multiplier reference [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 or [Ref.1B channel] Fr1b.
Identical to [Summing Input 2] SA2.

NVE61643 03/2020 337

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.14
[Generic functions] - [Preset speeds]

[Generic functions] - [Preset speeds]

[Preset speeds] PSS- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Preset speeds]

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

Combination Table for Preset Speed Inputs

2, 4, 8 or 16 speeds can be preset, requiring 1, 2, 3 or 4 digital inputs respectively.
It is necessary to configure:
 2 and 4 speeds in order to obtain 4 speeds.
 2, 4 and 8 speeds in order to obtain 8 speeds.
 2, 4, 8 and 16 speeds in order to obtain 16 speeds.

16 Preset Freq 8 Preset Freq (PS8) 4 Preset Freq (PS4) 2 Preset Freq (PS2) Speed Reference
(PS16)
0 0 0 0 Reference 1 (1)
0 0 0 1 SP2
0 0 1 0 SP3
0 0 1 1 SP4
0 1 0 0 SP5
0 1 0 1 SP6
0 1 1 0 SP7
0 1 1 1 SP8
1 0 0 0 SP9
1 0 0 1 SP10
1 0 1 0 SP11
1 0 1 1 SP12
1 1 0 0 SP13
1 1 0 1 SP14
1 1 1 0 SP15
1 1 1 1 SP16

(1) Reference 1 = SP1, refer to diagram (see page 221)

338 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[2 Preset Freq] PS2

2 preset freq assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[4 Preset Freq] PS4

4 preset freq assignment.
Identical to [2 Preset Freq] PS2
To obtain 4 speeds, you must also configure 2 speeds.

[8 Preset Freq] PS8

8 preset freq assignment.
Identical to [2 Preset Freq] PS2
To obtain 8 speeds, you must also configure 2 and 4 speeds.

[16 Preset Freq] PS16

16 preset freq assignment.
Identical to [2 Preset Freq] PS2
To obtain 16 speeds, you must also configure 2, 4 and 8 speeds.

NVE61643 03/2020 339

Complete settings CSt-

[Preset speed 2] SP2 to [Preset speed 16] SP16

Preset speed 2 to preset speed 16. See the combination table for preset speed inputs (see page 338).

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting:
 [Preset speed 2] SP2: 10.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 3] SP3: 15.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 4] SP4: 20.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 5] SP5: 25.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 6] SP6: 30.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 7] SP7: 35.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 8] SP8: 40.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 9] SP9: 45.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 10] SP10: 50.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 11] SP11: 55.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 12] SP21: 60.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 13] SP13: 70.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 14] SP14: 80.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 15] SP15: 90.0 Hz
 [Preset speed 16] SP16: 100.0 Hz

340 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.15
[Generic functions] - [+/- speed]

[Generic functions] - [+/- speed]

[+/- speed] Upd- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [+/- speed]

About This Menu

This function can be accessed if reference channel [Ref Freq 2 Config] Fr2 is set to [Ref Frequency via
DI] UPdt
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
2 types of operations are available:
 Use of single action keys: 2 digital inputs are required in addition to the operating directions.
The input assigned to the “+ speed” command increases the speed, the input assigned to the “– speed”
command decreases the speed.
 Use of double action keys: Only one digital input assigned to “+ speed” is required.

+/– speed with double-press buttons:

Description: 1 button pressed twice (2 steps) for each direction of rotation. A contact closes each time the
button is pressed.

Setting Released (– Speed) First Press (Speed Second Press (Faster)

Maintained)
Forward button – a a and b
Reverse button – c c and d

DI1 Forward
DIx Reverse
DIy + speed

NVE61643 03/2020 341

Complete settings CSt-

Do not use this +/– speed type with a 3-wire control.

Whichever type of operation is selected, the max. speed is set by [High speed] HSP.
NOTE: If the reference is switched via [Freq Switch Assign] rFC from any reference channel to another
reference channel with "+/– speed", the value of reference [Motor Frequency] rFr (after ramp) may be
copied at the same time in accordance with the [Copy Ch1-Ch2] COP parameter.
This helps to prevent the speed from being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place.

[+ Speed Assign] USP

Increase speed input assignment.
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

342 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[- Speed Assign] dSP

Down speed input assignment. See the assignment conditions.
Parameter settings identical to [+ Speed Assign] USP.
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1.

[Ref Frequency Save] Str

Reference frequency saves. This parameter can be accessed if [+ Speed Assign] USP is not set to [Not
Assigned] nO or [- Speed Assign] dSP is not set to [Not Assigned] no.
Associated with the "+/– speed" function, this parameter can be used to save the reference:
 When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM).
 When the supply mains or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM).

Therefore, next time the drive starts up, the speed reference is the last reference frequency saved.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No save] nO Not saved
Factory setting
[Save to RAM] rAM +/- speed with saving of the reference frequency in RAM
[Save to EEprom] EEP +/- speed with saving of the reference frequency in EEPROM

NVE61643 03/2020 343

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.16
[Generic functions] - [+/- speed around ref]

[Generic functions] - [+/- speed around ref]

[+/- speed around ref] SrE- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [+/- speed around ref]

About This Menu

The function can be accessed for reference channel [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
The reference is given by [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 or [Ref.1B channel] Fr1b with
summing/subtraction/multiplication functions and preset speeds if relevant (see the diagram below).
For improved clarity, it calls this reference A. The action of the +speed and –speed keys can be set as a
% of this reference A. On stopping, the reference (A +/– speed) is not saved, so the drive restarts with
reference A+ only.
The maximum total reference is limited by [High Speed] HSP and the minimum reference by [Low Speed]
LSP.

[+ Speed Assign] USI

Upper speed assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting

344 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[- Speed Assign] dSI

Down speed assignment. See the assignment conditions.
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1.
Possible assignments: Identical to [+ Speed Assign] USI (see above).

[+/-Speed limitation] SrP

Up/Down speed limit.
This parameter limits the variation range with +/– speed as a % of the reference. The ramps used in this
function are [Acceleration 2] AC2 and [Deceleration 2] dE2.
This parameter can be accessed if [ + Speed Assign] USI or [- Speed Assign] dSI is not set to [No]
no.

Setting Description
0...50% Setting range
Factory setting: 10%

[Acceleration 2] AC2
Acceleration 2 ramp time.
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of
this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.
This parameter can be accessed if [ + Speed Assign] USI or [- Speed Assign] dSI is not set to [No]
no.

NVE61643 03/2020 345

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Description

0.00...6,000 s (1) Setting range

Factory setting: 5.00 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] Inr.

[Deceleration 2] dE2
Deceleration 2.
Time to decelerate from the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS to 0. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of
this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.
This parameter can be accessed if [ + Speed Assign] USI or [- Speed Assign] dSI is not set to [No]
no.

Setting Description
0.00...6,000 s (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 5.00 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] Inr.

346 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.17
[Generic functions] - [Jump frequency]

[Generic functions] - [Jump frequency]

[Jump frequency] JUF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Jump frequency]

About This Menu

This function helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated
frequency.
This function can be used to help prevent reaching a frequency, which could cause resonance. Setting the
parameter to 0 disables the function.
The following figure is an example of the jump frequency function with one skip frequency defined by [Skip
Frequency] JPF:

F Frequency
t time
JPF [Skip frequency]
JFH [Skip.Freq.Hysteresis]
FRH [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq]
FRH_out [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] after the jump frequency function

[Skip Frequency] JPF

Jump frequency.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Skip Frequency 2] JF2

Jump frequency 2.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[3rd Skip Frequency] JF3

Jump frequency 3.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

NVE61643 03/2020 347

Complete settings CSt-

[Skip.Freq.Hysteresis] JFH
Jump frequency bandwidth.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one skip frequency JPF, JF2, or JF3 is different from 0.
Skip frequency range: between JPF – JFH and JPF + JFH for example.
This adjustment is common to the 3 frequencies JPF, JF2, JF3.

Setting Description
0.1...10.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 1.0 Hz

348 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.18
[Generic functions] - [PID controller]

[Generic functions] - [PID controller]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[PID controller] PId- Overview 350
[PID Feedback] Fdb- Menu 354
[PID Reference] rF- Menu 360
[PID preset references] PrI- Menu 363
[PID Reference] rF- Menu 365
[Settings] St- Menu 366

NVE61643 03/2020 349

Complete settings CSt-

[PID controller] PId- Overview

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

Block Diagram
The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PID feedback (measurement).

The PID feedback needs to be assigned to one of the analog inputs AI1 to AI5 or a pulse input, according
to whether any I/O extension module has been inserted.
The PID reference needs to be assigned to the following parameters:
 Preset references via digital inputs ([Ref PID Preset 2] rP2, [Ref PID Preset 3] rP3, [Ref PID Preset
4]rP4).
 In accordance with the configuration of [Intern PID Ref] PII:
 [Internal PID ref] rPI, or
 Reference A [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 or [Ref.1B channel] Fr1b.

Combination Table for Preset PID References:

DI (Pr4) DI (Pr2) Pr2 = nO Reference

rPI or Fr1b
0 0 rPI or Fr1b
0 1 rP2
1 0 rP3
1 1 rP4

A predictive speed reference can be used to initialize the speed on restarting the process.

350 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Scaling of feedback and references:

 [Min PID feedback] PIF1, [Max PID feedback] PIF2 parameters can be used to scale the PID
feedback (sensor range). This scale MUST be maintained for all other parameters.
 [Min PID Process] PIP1, [Max PID Process] PIP2 parameters can be used to scale the adjustment
range, for example the reference. Check that the adjustment range remains within the sensor range.
The maximum value of the scaling parameters is 32,767. To facilitate the installation, it is recommended
to use values as close as possible to this maximum level, while retaining powers of 10 in relation to the
actual values. The scaling is without unit if [Type of control] tOCt is set to [NA] nA, in % if set to
[OTHER] OtHEr.

Example
Adjustment of the volume in a tank, 6...15 m3.
3 3
 Probe used 4-20 mA, 4.5 m for 4 mA and 20 m for 20 mA, with the result that PIF1 = 4,500 and
PIF2 = 20,000.
 Adjustment range 6 to 15 m3, with the result that PIP1 = 6,000 (min. reference) and PIP2 = 15,000
(max. reference).
 Example references:
 rP1 (internal reference) = 9,500
 rP2 (preset reference) = 6,500
 rP3 (preset reference) = 8,000
 rP4 (preset reference) = 11,200

Other parameters:
 Reversal of the direction of correction [PID Inversion] PIC. If [PID Inversion] PIC is set to [No] nO,
the speed of the motor increases when the detected error is positive (for example pressure control with
a compressor). If [PID Inversion] PIC is set to [Yes] YES, the speed of the motor decreases when
the detected error is positive (for example temperature control using a cooling fan).
 The integral gain may be short-circuited by a digital input.
 A warning on the [PID feedback] PiF may be configured.
 A warning on the [PID error] rPE may be configured.

NVE61643 03/2020 351

Complete settings CSt-

"Manual - Automatic" Operation with PID

This function combines the PID controller, the preset speeds, and a manual reference. Depending on the
state of the digital input, the speed reference is given by the preset speeds or by a manual reference input
via the PID function.
Manual PID reference [Manual PID reference] PIM:
 Analog inputs AI1 to AI5
 Pulse inputs

Predictive speed reference [Predictive Speed Ref] FPI:

 [AI1] AI1: analog input
 [AI2] AI2: analog input
 [AI3] AI3: analog input
 [AI4] AI4: analog input if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted
 [AI5] AI5: analog input if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted
 [Ref.Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC: Display Terminal
 [Modbus] Mdb: integrated Modbus
 [Com. Module] nEt: fieldbus option module (if inserted)
 [CANopen] CAn: CANopen® (if inserted)
 [Embedded Ethernet] EtH: embedded Ethernet (on ATV340•••N4E drives).

Setting Up the PID Controller

1. Configuration in PID mode.
Refer to the Block Diagram (see page 350).
2. Perform a test in factory settings mode.
To optimize the drive, adjust [PID Prop.Gain] rPG or [PID Intgl.Gain] rIG gradually and independently,
and observe the effect on the PID feedback in relation to the reference.
3. If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect.

Step Action
1 Perform a test with a speed reference in manual mode (without PID controller) and with the drive on load
for the speed range of the system:
 In steady state, the speed must be stable and comply with the reference, and the PID feedback signal
must be stable.
 In transient state, the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly, and the PID feedback must
follow the speed. If not, see the settings for the drive and/or sensor signal and wiring.
2 Switch to PID mode.
3 Set [PID ramp] PrP to the minimum permitted by the mechanism without triggering an [DC Bus
Overvoltage] ObF.
4 Set the integral gain [PID Intgl.Gain] rIG to minimum.
5 Leave the derivative gain [PID derivative gain] rdG at 0.
6 Observe the PID feedback and the reference.
7 Switch the drive ON/OFF a number of times or vary the load or reference rapidly a number of times.
8 Set the proportional gain [PID Prop.Gain] rPG in order to ascertain the compromise between response
time and stability in transient phases (slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing).
9 If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state, gradually increase the integral gain [PID
Intgl.Gain] rIG, reduce the proportional gain [PID Prop.Gain] rPG in the event of instability (pump
applications), find a compromise between response time and static precision (see diagram).
10 Lastly, the derivative gain may permit the overshoot to be reduced and the response time to be
improved, although this is more difficult to obtain a compromise in terms of stability, as it depends on 3
gains.
11 Perform in-production tests over the whole reference range.

352 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics:

Parameter Rise time Overshoot Stabilization time Static error

rPG + -- + = -
rIG + - ++ + --
rdG + = - - =

NVE61643 03/2020 353

Complete settings CSt-

[PID Feedback] Fdb- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [PID controller] [Feedback]

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

[Type of Control] tOCt

Type of control for the PID = unit choice.

Setting Code / Value Description

[nA] nA No units
Factory setting
[Other] Other Other control and unit (%)

[PID Feedback] PIF

PID controller feedback.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[AI Virtual 1] AIv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up to
22kW.

[AI1 Type] AI1t

Configuration of analog input AI1.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI1] AI1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
Factory setting
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA

[AI1 min value] UIL1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI1] AI1, and
 [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

354 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI1 max value] UIH1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI1] AI1, and
 [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

[AI1 min. value] CRL1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI1] AI1, and
 [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AI1 max. value] CrH1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI1] AI1, and
 [AI Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

[AI1 range] AI1L

AI1 scaling selection.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI1] AI1, and
 [AI1 Type] AI1T is set to [Current] 0A

This parameter is forced to [0-100%] POS if:

 [AI1 Type] AI1T is not set to [Current] 0A, or
 [AI1 min. value] CRL1 is lower than 3.0 mA.

Setting Code / Value Description

[0-100%] PoS Unidirectional: AI1 current scaling is 0% up to 100%.
Factory setting
[-/+100%] PoSnEG Bidirectional: AI1 current scaling is -100% up to 100%.
[AI1 min. value] CRL1 corresponds to -100%. [AI1 max. value] CRH1
corresponds to 100%.

[AI2 Type] AI2t

Configuration of analog input AI2.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI2] AI2

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc
Factory setting

NVE61643 03/2020 355

Complete settings CSt-

[AI2 min value] UIL2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI2] AI2, and
 [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 354).

[AI2 max value] UIH2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI2] AI2, and
 [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 355).

[AI3 Type] AI3t

Configuration of analog input AI3.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI3] AI3.
Identical to [AI2 Type] AI2t (see page 355).

[AI3 min value] UIL3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI3] AI3, and
 [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 354).

[AI3 max value] UIH3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI3] AI3, and
 [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 355).

[AI3 min. value] CrL3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI3] AI3, and
 [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 355).

[AI3 max. value] CrH3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI3] AI3, and
 [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 355).

356 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI3 range] AI3L

AI3 scaling selection.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI3] AI3, and
 [AI3 Type] AI3T is set to [Current] 0A

Identical to [AI1 range] AI1L (see page 355).

[AI4 Type] AI4t

Configuration of analog input AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted, and
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI4] AI4.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc

[AI4 min value] UIL4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI4] AI4, and
 [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 354).

[AI4 max value] UIH4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI4] AI4, and
 [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 355).

[AI4 min. value] CrL4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI4] AI4, and
 [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 355).

[AI4 max. value] CrH4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI4] AI4, and
 [AI4 Type] AI4t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 355).

NVE61643 03/2020 357

Complete settings CSt-

[AI4 range] AI4L

AI4 scaling selection.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI4] AI4, and
 [AI4 Type] AI4T is set to [Current] 0A

Identical to [AI1 range] AI1L (see page 355).

[AI5 Type] AI5t

Configuration of analog input AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted, and
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI5] AI5.

Identical to [AI4 Type] AI4t.

[AI5 min value] UIL5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI5] AI5, and
 [AI4 Type] AI5t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 354).

[AI5 max value] UIH5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI5] AI5, and
 [AI4 Type] AI5t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Identical to [AI1 max value] UIH1 (see page 355).

[AI5 min. value] CrL5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI5] AI5, and
 [AI5 Type] AI5t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 (see page 355).

[AI5 max. value] CrH5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI5] AI5, and
 [AI5 Type] AI5t is set to [Current] 0A.

Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 (see page 355).

[AI5 range] AI5L

AI5 scaling selection.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is set to [AI5] AI5, and
 [AI5 Type] AI5T is set to [Current] 0A

Identical to [AI1 range] AI1L (see page 355).

358 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Min PID feedback] PIF1

Minimum PID feedback.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
0...[Max PID feedback] PIF2 Setting range
Factory setting: 100

[Max PID feedback] PIF2

Maximum PID feedback.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
[Min PID feedback] PIF1...32,767 Setting range
Factory setting: 1,000

[PID feedback] rPF

Value for PID feedback, display only.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[Min Fbk Warning] PAL

Minimum feedback level warning (for [PID Low Fdbck Warn] PFAL warning).
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: 100

[Max Fbk Warning] PAH

Maximum feedback level warning (for [PID High Fdbck Warn] PFAH warning).
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: 1,000

NVE61643 03/2020 359

Complete settings CSt-

[PID Reference] rF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [PID controller] [PID Reference]

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

[Intern PID Ref] PII

Internal PID reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO The PID controller reference is given by [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 or
[Ref.1B channel] Fr1b with summing/subtraction/multiplication
functions. Refer to the block diagram.
Factory setting
[Yes] YES The PID controller reference is internal via [Internal PID ref] rPI.

[Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1

Configuration reference frequency 1.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No, and
 [Intern PID Ref] PII is set to [No] NO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
[AI1] AI1 Analog input AI1
Factory Setting
[AI2]...[AI3] AI2...AI3 Analog input AI2...AI3
NOTE: AI3 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater
than 22 kW.
[AI Virtual 1] AIv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref.Freq-Rmt.Term] LCC Reference Frequency via remote terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-CANopen] CAn Reference frequency via CANopen if a CANopen module has been
inserted
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been
Module] inserted
[Embedded Ethernet] EtH Embedded Ethernet
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up to
22kW.

360 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Min PID reference] PIP1

Minimum PID reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
[Min PID feedback] PIF1...[Max PID Setting range
reference] PIP2 Factory setting: 150

[Max PID reference] PIP2

Maximum PID reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Description
[Min PID reference] PIP1...[Max PID Setting range
feedback] PIF2 Factory setting: 900

[Internal PID ref] rPI

Internal PID reference.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No, and
 [Intern PID Ref] PII is set to [Yes] YES.

Setting Description
[Min PID reference] PIP1...[Max PID Setting range
reference] PIP2 Factory setting: 150

[Auto/Manual assign.] PAU

Auto/Manual select input.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration

NVE61643 03/2020 361

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Manual PID Reference] PIM

Manual PID reference.
Reference input in manual mode.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] nO, and
 [Auto/Manual assign.] PAU is not set to [No] nO.

The preset speeds are active on the manual reference if they have been configured.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up to
22kW.

362 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[PID preset references] PrI- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [PID controller] [Reference frequency] [PID preset
references]

About This Menu

The function can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PIF is assigned.

[2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2

2 PID Preset assignment.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[4 PID Preset Assign] Pr4

4 PID Preset assignment.
Identical to [2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 (see page 363).
Verify that [2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 has been assigned before assigning this function.

NVE61643 03/2020 363

Complete settings CSt-

[Ref PID Preset 2] rP2

Second PID preset reference.
This parameter can be accessed only if [2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 is assigned.

Setting Description
[Min PID reference] PIP1...[Max PID Setting range
reference] PIP2 Factory setting: 300

[Ref PID Preset 3] rP3

Third PID preset reference.
This parameter can be accessed only if [4 PID Preset Assign] Pr4 is assigned.

Setting Description
[Min PID reference] PIP1...[Max PID Setting range
reference] PIP2 Factory setting: 600

[Ref PID Preset 4] rP4

Fourth PID preset reference.
This parameter can be accessed only if [4 PID Preset Assign] Pr4 and [2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 are
assigned.

Setting Description
[Min PID reference] PIP1...[Max PID Setting range
reference] PIP2 Factory setting: 900

364 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[PID Reference] rF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [PID controller] [PID Reference]

[Predictive Speed Ref] FPI

Predictive speed reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref.Freq- LCC Reference frequency via remote terminal
Rmt.Term]
[Ref. Freq- Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
Modbus]
[Ref. Freq- CAn Reference frequency via CANopen
CANopen]
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via communication module
Module]
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Embedded EtH Embedded Ethernet
Ethernet]
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up to
22kW.

[Speed Input %] PSr

PID speed input % reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.

Setting Description
1...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

NVE61643 03/2020 365

Complete settings CSt-

[Settings] St- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [PID controller] [Settings]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PIF is not set to [Not Configured] No.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

[PID Prop.Gain] rPG

PID proportional gain.

Setting Description
0.01...100.00 Setting range
Factory setting: 1.00

[PI Intgl.Gain] rIG

Integral gain.

Setting Description
0.01...100.00 Setting range
Factory setting: 1.00

[PID derivative gain] rdG

Derivative gain.

Setting Description
0.00...100.00 Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00

[PID ramp] PrP

PID acceleration/deceleration ramp, defined to go from [Min PID reference] PIP1 to [Max PID reference]
PIP2 and conversely.

Setting Description
0.0...99.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 s

[PID Inversion] PIC

PID inversion.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Yes

[PID Min Output] POL

PID controller minimum output in Hz.

Setting Description
-599.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

366 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[PID Max Output] POH

PID controller maximum output in Hz.

Setting Description
Setting range
Factory setting: 60.0 Hz

[PID Error Warning] PEr

PID error warning.

Setting Description
0...65,535 Setting range
Factory setting: 100

[PID Integral OFF] PIS

Integral shunt.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive (the PID integral is enabled).
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active (the PID integral is disabled).

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

NVE61643 03/2020 367

Complete settings CSt-

[PID acceleration time] ACCP

PID: acceleration during start-up.
PID start ramp can be applied before starting the PID controller to allow reaching quickly the PID reference
without increasing PID gains.

Setting Description
0.01...99,99 s Setting range
Factory setting: 5.00 s
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 according to [Ramp increment] Inr

[PID Start Ref Freq] SFS

PID start reference frequency.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
If [PID Start Ref Freq] SFS is lower than [Low speed] LSP, this function
has no effect.
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

368 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.19
[Generic functions] - [Threshold reached]

[Generic functions] - [Threshold reached]

[Threshold reached] tHrE- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Threshold reached]

[Low I Threshold] CtdL

Current low threshold value (for [Low Current Reached] CTAL warning).

Setting Description
0...65,535 A Setting range
Factory setting: 0 A

[High Current Thd] Ctd

Current high threshold value (for [Current Thd Reached] CTA warning).

Setting Description
0...65,535 A Setting range
Factory setting: Drive nominal current

[Low Freq. Threshold] FtdL

Motor low frequency threshold (for [Mot Freq Low Thd] FTAL warning).

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Motor Freq Thd] Ftd

Motor frequency threshold (for [Mot Freq High Thd] FTA warning).

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 50.0 Hz

[2 Freq. Threshold] F2dL

Motor low frequency second threshold (for [Mot Freq Low Thd 2] F2AL warning).

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Freq. threshold 2] F2d

Motor frequency threshold 2 (for [Mot Freq High Thd 2] F2A warning).

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 50.0 Hz

NVE61643 03/2020 369

Complete settings CSt-
[Motor Thermal Thd] ttd
Motor thermal state threshold (for [Motor Therm Thd reached] TSA warning).

Setting Description

0...118% Setting range

Factory setting: 100%

[Motor2 therm. level] ttd2

Motor 2 thermal state threshold (for [Mot2 Therm Thd reached] TS2 warning).

Setting Description

0...118% Setting range

Factory setting: 100%

[Motor3 therm. level] ttd3

Motor 3 thermal state threshold (for [Mot3 Therm Thd reached] TS3 warning).

Setting Description

0...118% Setting range

Factory setting: 100%

[Motor4 therm. level] ttd4

Motor 4 thermal state threshold (for [Mot4 Therm Thd reached] TS4 warning).

Setting Description

0...118% Setting range

Factory setting: 100%

[Reference high Thd] rtd

Reference frequency high threshold (for [Ref Freq High Thd reached] RTAH warning).

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Reference low Thd] rtdL

Reference frequency low threshold (for [Ref Freq Low Thd reached] RTAL warning).

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[High torque thd.] ttH

High torque threshold (for [High Torque Warning] TTHA warning).

Setting Description
-300...300% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Low torque thd.] ttl

Low torque threshold (for [Low Torque Warning] TTLA warning).

Setting Description
-300...300% Setting range
Factory setting: 50%
370 NVE61643 03/2020
 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.20
[Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command]

[Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command]

[Mains contactor command] LLC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Mains contactor command]

About This Menu

The line contactor closes every time a run command (forward or reverse) is sent and opens after every
stop, as soon as the drive is locked. For example, if the stop mode is stop on ramp, the contactor opens
when the motor reaches zero speed.
NOTE: The drive control power supply must be provided via an external 24 Vdc source.

NOTICE
DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Do not use this function at intervals of less than 60 s.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Example circuit (24 Vdc power supply):

DI• = Run command [Forward] Frd or [Reverse] rrS

R•A/R•C = [Mains Contactor] LLC
DIn = [Drive Lock] LES
NOTE: The Run/Reset key must be pressed once the emergency stop key has been released.

NVE61643 03/2020 371

Complete settings CSt-

[Mains Contactor] LLC

Mains contactor control.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[R2]...[R3] r2...r3 Relay output R2...R3
NOTE: R3 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22 kW.
[R4]...[R6] r4...r6 Relay output R4...R6 if VW3A3204 relay output option module has been
inserted
[DQ11 Digital dO11...dO12 Digital output DQ11...DQ12 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
Output]...[DQ12 inserted
Digital Output]
[DQ1 Digital dO1...dO2 Digital output DQ1...DQ2
Output]...[DQ2
NOTE: DQ2 selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
Digital Output]
30 kW.

[Drive Lock] LES

Drive lock assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Mains Contactor] LLC is not set to [No] No.
The drive locks when the assigned input or bit changes to 0.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[DI1 (Low L1L...L8L Digital input DI1...DI8 used at low level
level)]...[DI8 (Low
NOTE: DI8 low level selection can be accessed on drives with a power
level)]
greater than 22kW.
[DI11 (Low L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if VW3A3203 I/O extension
level)]...[DI16 (Low module has been inserted
level)]

[Mains V. time out] LCt

Monitoring time for closing of line contactor.

372 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Description
1...999 s Setting range
Factory setting: 5 s

NVE61643 03/2020 373

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.21
[Generic functions] - [Output contactor cmd]

[Generic functions] - [Output contactor cmd]

[Output contactor cmd] OCC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Output contactor cmd]

About This Menu

This function allows the drive to control and/or monitor a contactor installed between the drive and the
motor.
The control of the output contactor by the drive is activated by assigning [Out. contactor Assign] OCC. A
request to close the contactor is done when a run command is activated. A request to open the contactor
is done when no current is applied to the motor.
The monitoring of the output contactor by the drive is activated by assigning the feedback to [Output
contact. Fdbk] RCA. In the event of an inconsistency, the drive triggers:
 [Out Contact Opened Error] FCF2 error, if the [Output contact. Fdbk] RCA is not closed before the
end of [Delay to motor run] DBS or if the [Output contact. Fdbk] RCA opens if the motor is running.
 [Out Contact Closed Error] FCF1 error, if [Output contact. Fdbk] RCA is not opened before the end
of [Delay to open con.] DAS or if the [Output contact. Fdbk] RCA closes if the motor is stopped.

NOTE:
 [Out Contact Opened Error] FCF2 error can be cleared by a transition from 1 to 0 of the run command.
 [Out. contactor Assign] OCC and [Output contact. fdbk] rCA can be used individually.
 If the DC injection braking function is used, the output contactor does not close as long as DC injection
braking is active

374 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

1 OCC and RCA assigned

2 RCA assigned
3 OCC assigned
t Time
R Run command
OCC Output contactor
RCA Output contactor feedback
NA Not Assigned
MF Motor frequency

[Out. Contactor Assign] oCC

Output contactor control.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function not assigned.
Factory setting
[R2]...[R3] R2...R3 Relay output R2...R3
NOTE: R3 selection can be accessed on drives with a power higher than
22 kW.
[R4]...[R6] R4...R6 Relay output R4...R6 if VW3A3204 relay output option module has been
inserted.
[DQ1 Digital do1...do2 Digital output DQ1…DQ2
Output]...[DQ2
NOTE: DQ2 selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
Digital Output]
30 kW.
[DQ11 Digital do11...do12 Digital output DQ11...DQ12 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
Output]...[DQ12 inserted.
Digital Output]

[Output contact fdbk] rCA

Output contactor fbdk.
The motor starts to run when the assigned digital input or bit switches to 0.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting

NVE61643 03/2020 375

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[DI1 (Low L1L...L8L Digital input DI1...DI8 used at low level
level)]...[DI8 (Low
NOTE:
level)]
 DI8 low level selection can be accessed on drives with a power higher
than 22kW
 On drives with a power lower than 30 kW, DI6 and DI7 respectively
correspond to DQ1 an DQ2 used as digital inputs through the wiring.
[DI11 (Low L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if VW3A3203 I/O extension
level)]...[DI16 (Low module has been inserted
level)]
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Delay to motor run] dbS

Delay to close o/p cont.
This parameter delays:
 Motor control following the sending of a run command when the drive only monitors the output contactor.
 The [Out Contact Opened Error] FCF2 error monitoring if the [Output contact fdbk] RCA is assigned.

The time delay must be greater than the closing time of the output contactor.
This parameter can be accessed if [Out. contactor Assign] OCC or [Output contact fdbk] RCA is
assigned.

Setting Description
0.05...60.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.15 s

[Delay to open con.] dAS

Delay to open contactor
This delay must be greater than the opening time of the output contactor.
If the value of digital input assigned to the [Output contact fdbk] RCA is not 0 at the end of this delay, [Out
Contact Closed Error] FCF1 error is triggered. If this parameter is set to 0, the [Out Contact Closed Error]
FCF1 error is not monitored.
This parameter can be accessed if [Output contact fdbk] RCA is assigned.

Setting Description
0.00...5.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.10 s

376 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.22
[Generic functions] - [Reverse disable]

[Generic functions] - [Reverse disable]

[Reverse disable] rEIn- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Reverse disable]

[Reverse Disable] rIn

Reverse direction disable.
Reverse direction requests sent by digital inputs are taken into account.
Reverse direction requests sent by the Display Terminal or sent by the line are not taken into account.
Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID, summing input, and so on, is interpreted as a zero
reference (0 Hz).

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Yes

NVE61643 03/2020 377

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.23
[Generic functions] - [Torque limitation]

[Generic functions] - [Torque limitation]

[Torque limitation] tOL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Torque limitation]

About This Menu

There are 2 types of torque limitation:
 With a value that is fixed by a parameter (torque or power)
 With a value that is set by an analog input (AI or pulse)

If both types are enabled, the lowest value is taken into account.
These 2 types can be configured or switched remotely using a digital input or via the communication bus.

1 Torque limitation via parameter

2 Lowest value taken into account
3 Torque limitation via analog input, RP
4 Limitation value
5 Torque limitation via parameter in power

[Torque limit activ.] tLA

Activation of the permanent torque limitation.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[Yes] yes Yes

378 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Pmax Motor] tPMM

Maximum power in motor mode.
This parameter can be accessed if [Torque limit activ.] tLA is not set to [Not Assigned] nO.

Setting Description
10...300% Setting range
Factory setting: 300%

[Pmax Generator] tPMG

Maximum acceptable power in generator mode.
This parameter can be accessed if [Torque limit activ.] tLA is not set to [Not Assigned] nO.

Setting Description
10...300% Setting range
Factory setting: 300%

[Torque increment] IntP

Torque limitation increment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Torque limit activ.] tLA is not set to [No] nO.
Selection of units for the [Motoring torque lim] tLIM and [Gen. torque limit] tLIG parameters.

Setting Code / Value Description

0.1% 0.1 Unit 0.1%
1% 1 Unit 1%
Factory setting

NVE61643 03/2020 379

Complete settings CSt-

[Motoring torque lim] tLIM

Motor torque limitation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Torque limit activ.] tLA is no set to [No] nO.
Torque limitation in motor mode, as a % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance with the
[Torque increment] IntP parameter.

Setting Description
0...300% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Gen. torque limit] tLIG

Generative torque limitation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Torque limit activ.] tLA is not set to [No] nO.
Torque limitation in generator mode, as a % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance with
the [Torque increment] IntP parameter.

Setting Description
0...300% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

[Analog limit activ.] tLC

Activation (analog input) by a digital input.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ref Torque Assign] TAA or [Ref Torque 2 Assign] TAA2 is
configured.
Identical to [Torque limit activ.] tLA.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0:
 The limitation is specified by the [Motor torque limit]tLIM and [Gen. torque limit] tLIG parameters
if [Torque limit activ.] tLA is not set to [No] nO.
 No limitation if [Torque limit activ.] tLA is set to [No] nO.

If the assigned input or bit is at 1: the limitation depends on the input assigned by [Ref Torque Assign]
tAA or [Ref Torque 2 Assign] tAA2.
NOTE: If both limitation (by input assigned and parameter) are enabled at the same time, the lowest value
is taken into account.

[Ref Torque Assign] tAA

Activation by an analog value.
If the function is assigned, the limitation varies between 0% and 300% of the rated torque based on the 0%
to 100% signal applied to the assigned input.
Examples:12 mA on a 4-20 mA input results in a limitation to 150% of the rated torque 2.5 Vdc on a 10 Vdc
input results in 75% of the rated torque.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Analog input is not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[AI Virtual 1] AIv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[DI7 PI7...PI8 Digital input DI7...DI8 used as pulse input
PulseInput]...[DI8
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
PulseInput]
22kW.

380 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up to
22kW.

[Ref Torque Switch Assign] tASU

Reference torque switch assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ref Torque Assign] TAA or [Ref Torque 2 Assign] TAA2 are not
set to [No] no.
Identical to [Torque limit activ.] tLA.

[Ref Torque 2 Assign] tAA2

Activation by another analog value.
Identical to [Ref Torque Assign] tAA.

[Trq/I limit. stop] SSb

Torque current limitation: behavior configuration.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
Factory setting
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Spd maintained] rLS Speed maintained as long as the detected error persists and the run
command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

[Trq/I limit. time out] StO

Torque current limitation: [Torque Limitation Error] SSF error delay and [Torque Limit Reached] SSA
warning delay.

Setting Description
0...9,999 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 1,000 ms

NVE61643 03/2020 381

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.24
[Generic functions] - [2nd current limit.]

[Generic functions] - [2nd current limit.]

[2nd current limit.] CLI- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [2nd current limit.]

[Current Limitation2]LC2
Current limitation switching assignment
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the first current limitation is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the second current limitation is active.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Current Limit2 Value]CL2

Current limitation 2 value.
This parameter can be accessed if [Current Limitation2]LC2 is not set to [No]nO.

382 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
 Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor.
 Verify that the parameter [Current Limitation] CLi is set to a value lower or equal to the value shown
in this table.
 Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements
in determining the current limit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The adjustment range is limited to 1.8 In.

NOTE: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss]OPL if this has been
enabled. If it is less than the no-load motor current, the motor cannot run.

Setting Description
0...1.8 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 1.8 In(1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Current limitation]CLI
First current limitation value

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
 Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor.
 Verify that the parameter [Current Limitation] CLi is set to a value lower or equal to the value shown
in this table.
 Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements
in determining the current limit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The adjustment range is limited to 1.8 In.

NOTE: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss]OPL if this has been
enabled. If it is less than the no-load motor current, the motor cannot run.

Setting Description
0...1.8 In (1) Setting range
Factory setting: 1.8 In(1)
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

NVE61643 03/2020 383

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.25
[Generic functions] - [Jog]

[Generic functions] - [Jog]

[Jog] jOG- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Jog]

[Jog Assign]Jog
Jog assignment.
The JOG function is only active if the command channel and the reference channels are on the terminals.
This function can be used if:
 [PID Feedback] PiF is set to [Not Configured] no, and
 [Brake logic control] bLC is set to [No] no, and
 [High speed hoisting] HSO is set to [No] no, and
 [+ Speed Assign] USI and [- Speed Assign] DSI are set to [Not Assigned] no, and
 [Ref Freq 2 Config] FR2 is set to [Ref Frequency via DI] UPDT.

The function is active when the assigned input or bit is at 1.

Example: 2-wire control operation ([2/3-Wire Control] tCC = [2-Wire Control ] 2C.

MF Motor frequency
Rf Reference
Rp Ramp
Rp: 0.1 s Ramp forced to 0.1 S
Fw Forward
R Reverse

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted

384 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Jog frequency] JGF

This parameter can be accessed if [Jog Assign] JOG is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Hz

[Jog Delay] JGt

This parameter can be accessed if [Jog Assign] (JOG) is not set to [No] (nO).

Setting Description
0.0...2.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.5 s

NVE61643 03/2020 385

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.26
[Generic functions] - [High Speed Switching]

[Generic functions] - [High Speed Switching]

[High Speed Switching] CHS- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [High Speed Switching]

[2 High speed] SH2

2 High speed assign.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[Mot Freq High FtA Motor frequency high threshold reached
Thd]
[2nd Freq Thd F2A Second frequency threshold reached
Reached]
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[4 High speed] SH4

4 High speed assign.
NOTE: In order to obtain 4 High speed, [2 High speed] SH2 must also be configured.
Identical to [2 High speed] SH2.

386 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[High speed] HSP

Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low speed] LSP and [Max frequency]
tFr.
The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [60Hz NEMA] 60.
To help prevent [Motor Overspeed] SOF error, it is recommended to have [Max Frequency] TFR equal
to or higher than 110% of [High Speed] HSP.

Setting Description
0...599 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 50 Hz

[High speed 2] HSP2

Visible if [2 High speed] SH2 is not set to [No] nO.
Identical to [High speed] HSP.

[High speed 3] HSP3

Visible if [4 High speed] SH4 is not set to [No] nO.
Identical to [High speed] HSP.

[High speed 4] HSP4

Visible if [4 High speed] SH4 is not set to [No] nO.
Identical to [High speed] HSP.

NVE61643 03/2020 387

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.27
[Generic functions] - [Memo reference frequency]

[Generic functions] - [Memo reference frequency]

[Memo reference frequency] SPM- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Memo reference frequency]

About This Menu

Saving a speed reference value using a digital input command lasting longer than 0.1 s.
 This function is used to control the speed of several drives alternately via a single analog reference and
one digital input for each drive.
 It is also used to confirm a line reference (communication bus or network) on several drives via a digital
input. This allows movements to be synchronized by getting rid of variations when the reference is set.
 The reference is acquired 100 ms after the rising edge of the request. A new reference is not then
acquired until a new request is made.

FrH Reference frequency before ramp

rUn Run command
DIx (SPM) [Ref Freq Memo assign] SPM

[Ref Freq Memo assign] SPM

Reference frequency memory assignment
Function active if the assigned input is at active state.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted

388 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.28
[Generic functions] - [Brake logic control]

[Generic functions] - [Brake logic control]

[Brake logic control] BLC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Brake logic control]

About This Menu

Identical to [Brake logic control] BLC- menu (see page 277).

NVE61643 03/2020 389

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.29
[Generic functions] - [Limit switches]

[Generic functions] - [Limit switches]

[Limit switches] LSt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Limit switches]

About This Menu

This function can be used to manage trajectory limits using limit switches
The stop mode is configurable.When the stop contact is activated, startup in the other direction is
authorized.
Example:

R Reverse
R1 Reverse stop
F Forward
F1 Forward stop

The stop is activated when the input is at 0 (contact open).

[Stop FW assign] LAF

Stop forward limit assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

390 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[DI1 (Low L1L...L8L Digital input DI1...DI8 used at low level
level)]...[DI8 (Low
NOTE: DI8 low level selection can be accessed on drives with a power
level)]
greater than 22kW.
[DI11 (Low L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if VW3A3203 I/O extension
level)]...[DI16 (Low module has been inserted
level)]

[Stop RV assign] LAr

Stop reverse limit assignment.
Identical to [Stop FW assign] LAF.

[Stop type] LAS

Stop type on limit switch.
This parameter can be accessed if [Stop FW assign] LAF or [Stop RV assign] LAr is assigned.
When the assigned input changes to 0, the stop is controlled in accordance with the selected
type.Restarting is only authorized for the other operating direction once the motor has stopped. If the two
inputs [Stop FW assign] LAF and [Stop RV assign] LAr are assigned and at state 0, restarting will be
impossible.

Setting Code / Value Description

[On Ramp] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[Freewheel Stop] nSt Freewheel stop
Factory setting

NVE61643 03/2020 391

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.30
[Generic functions] - [Positioning by sensors]

[Generic functions] - [Positioning by sensors]

[Positioning by sensors] LPO

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Positioning by sensors]

About This Menu

This function is used for managing positioning using position sensors or limit switches linked to digital
inputs or using control word bits:
 Slowing down
 Stopping

The activation level for the inputs and bits can be configured on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) or a
falling edge (change from 1 to 0). The example below has been configured on a falling edge:

Fc Forward run command

Rc Reverse run command
F Frequency
FW Forward
FSd Forward Slowdown
FS Forward Stopping
St Stop
R Reverse

392 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

The slowdown mode and stop mode can be configured.

The operation is identical for both directions of operation. Slowdown and stopping operate according to the
same logic, described below.
Example: Forward slowdown, on falling edge
 The forward slowdown takes place on a falling edge (switch from 1 to 0) of the input assigned to forward
slowdown if it occurs in forward direction. The reference frequency value is limited to [Low Speed]
LSP.
 In the forward slowdown area, the movement in the opposite direction is authorized at high speed.
 The slowdown command is deleted on a rising edge (switch from 0 to 1) of the input assigned to forward
slowdown if it occurs in reverse direction.
 A forward slowdown is stored, even in the event of a power outage.
 A bit or a digital input can be assigned to disable this function.
 Although forward slowdown is disabled while the disable input or bit is at 1, sensor changes continue to
be monitored and saved.
Example: Positioning on a limit switch, on falling edge

R Reverse
R1 Reverse slowdown
R2 Reverse stop
F Forward
F1 Forward slowdown
F2 Forward stop

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Verify correct connection of the limit switches.
 Verify the correct installation of the limit switches. The limit switches must be mounted in a position far
enough away from the mechanical stop to allow for an adequate stopping distance.
 You must release the limit switches before you can use them.
 Verify the correct function of the limit switches.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Operation with short cams:

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
When operating for the first time or after a reset of the configuration to the factory settings, the motor must
always be started outside of the Slowdown and Stop ranges.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
When the drive is switched off, it stores the range which it is currently in.
If the system is moved manually while the drive is off, you must restore the original position before
switching it on again.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

NVE61643 03/2020 393

Complete settings CSt-

In this instance, when operating for the first time or after restoring the factory settings, the drive must
initially be started outside the slowdown and stop zones in order to initialize the function.

F1 Forward slowdown
F1z Forward slowdown zone
F2 Forward stop
F2z Forward stop zone

Operation with long cams:

In this instance, there is no restriction, which means that the function is initialized across the whole
trajectory.

F1 Forward slowdown
F1z Forward slowdown zone
F2 Forward stop
F2z Forward stop zone

Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch

This function can be used to control the stopping of the moving part automatically once a preset distance
has been traveled after the slowdown limit switch. On the basis of the rated linear speed and the speed
estimated by the drive when the slowdown limit switch is tripped, the drive will induce the stop at the
configured distance. This function is useful in applications where one manual-reset overtravel limit switch
is common to both directions. It will then only respond to help management if the distance is exceeded.
The stop limit switch retains priority in respect of the function.
The [Deceleration type] dSF parameter can be configured to obtain either of the functions described
below:

394 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

A Slowdown limit switch reached

B Automatic stop at a distance
D Distance
F Frequency
SF Slowdown frequency

Note:
 If the deceleration ramp is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress, this distance will not be
observed.
 If the direction is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress, this distance will not be observed.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Verify that the configured distance is actually possible.
This function does not replace the limit switch.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

[Stop FW limit sw.] SAF

Stop switch forward.
If the parameters SAF, SAr, dAF and dAr are set in such a way that the signal is triggered with a rising
edge, no command is triggered in the case of an interruption of the signal cable to the switch or if the switch
becomes inoperative.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
In your risk assessment, take into account all potential consequences of triggering a signal with a rising
edge.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

If this parameter is assigned to a virtual digital, the function is active if the assigned input or bit is at 0.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] No Not assigned
Factory setting.

NVE61643 03/2020 395

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[DI1 (Low level)] L1L...L8L Digital input DI1...DI8 used at low level
...[DI8 (Low level)] NOTE: DI8 low level selection can be accessed on drives with a power
greater than 22kW.
[DI11 (Low L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if VW3A3203 I/O extension
level)]...[DI16 (Low module has been inserted
level)]
[CD00]...[CD15] Cd00...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.15 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[C101]...[C115] C101...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C201]...[C215] C201...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C301]...[C315] C301...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C501]...[C515] C501...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration

[Stop RV limit sw.] SAr

Stop switch reverse.
Identical to [Stop FW limit sw.] SAF.

[Forward Slowdown] dAF

Slowdown attained forward.
Identical to [Stop FW limit sw.] SAF.

[Reverse Slowdown] dAr

Slowdown attained reverse.
Identical to [Stop FW limit sw.] SAF.

[Disable limit sw.] CLS

Limits switches clearing.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If [Disable limit sw.] CLS is set to an input and activated, the limit switch management will be disabled.
 Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

The action of the limit switches is disabled when the assigned bit or input is at 1. If, at this time, the drive
is stopped or being slowed down by limit switches, it will restart up to its speed reference.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.

396 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Stop type] PAS

Stop type on limit switch activation.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.

Setting Code / Value Description

[On Ramp] rMP Follow ramp
Factory setting
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop (ramp time reduced by [Ramp Divider] dCF
[Freewheel Stop] nSt Freewheel stop

[Deceleration type] dSF

Limit switch deceleration adaptation.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Standard] Std Uses the [Deceleration] dEC or [Deceleration 2] dE2 ramp (depending
on which has been enabled)
Factory setting
[Optimized] OPt The ramp time is calculated on the basis of the actual speed when the
slowdown contact switches, in order to limit the operating time at low speed
(optimization of the cycle time: the slowdown time is constant regardless of
the initial speed)

[Stop distance] Std

Stop distance.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned. Activation
and adjustment of the "Stop at distance calculated after the slowdown limit switch" function.

NVE61643 03/2020 397

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Function inactive
Factory setting
[0.01...10.00] 0.01...10.00 Stop distance range in meters

[Nom linear speed] nLS

Rated linear speed.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned and [Stop
distance] Std is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.20...5.00 m/s Factory setting: 1.00 m/s

[Stop corrector] SFd

Scaling factor applied to the stop distance to compensate, for example, a non-linear ramp.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned and [Stop
distance] Std is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
50...200% Factory setting: 100%

[Memo Stop] MStP

Stop switch memorization.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No memorization of limit switch
[Yes] YES Memorization of limit switch
Factory setting

[Priority restart] PrSt

Priority given to the starting even if stop switch is activated.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No restart priority if stop switch is activated
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Priority to restart even if stop switch is activated

[Memo Slowdown] MSLO

Slowdown switch memorization.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No memorization of the slowdown switch.
[Yes] YES Memorization of the slowdown switch.
Factory setting

398 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.31
[Generic functions] - [Torque control]

[Generic functions] - [Torque control]

[Torque control] tOr- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Torque control]

About This Menu

This function can be used if [Motor control type] CTT is set to [SVCV] SVC or [FVC] FVC or [Sync.
mot.] SYn or [Sync.CL] FSY.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
NOTE: This function is not compatible with the handling of the [Load slipping] AnF error.

The function can be used to switch between operation in speed regulation mode and operation in torque
control mode.
In torque control mode, the speed may vary within a configurable "deadband". When it reaches a lower or
upper limit, the drive automatically reverts to speed regulation mode and remains at this limit speed. The
regulated torque is therefore no longer maintained and two scenarios may occur.
 If the torque returns to the required value, the drive returns to torque control mode.
 If the torque does not return to the required value at the end of a configurable period, the drive switches
to [Torque Reg Warning] rtA or [Torque timeout] SrF.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

NVE61643 03/2020 399

Complete settings CSt-

AB, CD Fallback" to speed regulation

BC Torque control zone
E Ideal operating point

The torque sign and value can be transmitted via a logic output and an analog output.

[Trq/spd switching] tSS

Torque / speed regulation switching by a logic input.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[Yes] yes Yes
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration

400 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Torque ref. channel] tr1

Channel for torque reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.
NOTE: [Torque reference] LTR can be accessed in [Display] menu, [Drive parameters] submenu.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[Ref. Freq- LCC Reference frequency via remote terminal
Rmt.Term]
[Ref. Freq- Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
Modbus]
[Ref. Freq- CAn Reference frequency via CANopen
CANopen]
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via communication module
Module]
[Embedded EtH Embedded Ethernet
Ethernet]
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[DI7 PI7...PI8 Digital input DI7...DI8 used as pulse input
PulseInput]...[DI8
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
PulseInput]
22kW.
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Note: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up
to 22kW.

[Torque Ref Assign] tri

Torque reference channel assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted

NVE61643 03/2020 401

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet Modbus
TCP regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[Torque ref. tr1 Torque reference channel 1
channel]
[Torque ref. 2 tr2 Torque reference channel 2
channel]

[Torque ref. 2 channel] tr2

Torque reference channel 2.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.
Identical to [Torque ref. channel] tr1 (see page 401).

[Torque ref. sign] tSd

Assignment for the inversion of the sign of the reference for the torque regulation function.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.
Identical to [Trq/spd switching] tSS (see page 400).

[Torque ratio] trt

Torque regulation: torque ratio.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description

0.0...1000.0% Coefficient applied to [Torque ref. channel] tr1 or [Torque ref. 2 channel]
tr2
Factory setting: 100.0%

[Torque Ratio Assign] tqr

Torque regulation: torque ratio value selection.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Analog input is not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1...AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4...AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[AI Virtual 1] AIv1 Virtual analogic input 1

402 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[DI7 PI7...PI8 Digital input DI7...DI8 used as pulse input
PulseInput]...[DI8
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
PulseInput]
22kW.
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded
encoder is used.
NOTE: Embedded encoder is only available on drives with power up to
22kW.

[Torque Ref Offset] tqop

Torque reference offset.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description

-1000.0...1000.0% Setting range

Factory setting: 0.0%

[Torque Offset Assign] tqO

Torque regulation: Torque offset value selection
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.
Identical to [Torque Ratio Assign] tqr (see page 402).

[Low Torque] Ltq

Low torque threshold.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.
This parameter cannot be higher than [High Torque] HTQ .

Setting Description

-300.0...[High Torque] HTQ Setting range

Factory setting: -300.0%

[High Torque] Htq

High torque threshold.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.
This parameter cannot be lower than [Low Torque] Ltq.

Setting Description

[Low Torque] Ltq...300.0% Setting range

Factory setting: 300.0%

[Torque ramp time] trP

Torque ramp time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description

0.00...99.99 s Rise and fall time for a variation of 100% of the rated torque
Factory setting: 3.00 s

NVE61643 03/2020 403

Complete settings CSt-

[Torque Filter] trf

Torque filter activation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Not activated.
Factory setting
[Yes] yes Activated

[Torque Filter Bandwidth] trw

Torque filter bandwidth.
This parameter can be accessed if [Torque Filter] trf is set to [Yes] yes.

Setting Description

1...1000 Hz Setting range

Factory setting: 20 Hz

[Torque control stop] tSt

Torque regulation: stop command type.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Speed] SPd Speed regulation stop, in accordance with the [Type of stop] STT
configuration
[Freewheel Stop] nSt Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Spin] SPn Zero torque stop, but maintaining the flux in the motor (only in close loop)

[Spin time] SPt

Torque regulation: spin time.
Spin time following stop, in order to remain ready to restart quickly.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no, and
 [Torque control stop] tSt is set to [Spin] SPn.

Setting Description

0.0...3600.0 s Setting range

Factory setting: 1.0 s

[Positive deadband] dbp

Torque regulation positive deadband.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.
Value added algebraically to the speed reference.
Example for dbP = 10:
 If reference = +50 Hz : +50 + 10 = 60 Hz
 If reference = -50 Hz : -50 + 10 = -40 Hz

Setting Description

0...2 x [Max Frequency] tFr Setting range

Factory setting: 10 Hz

404 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Negative deadband] dbn

Torque regulation negative deadband.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.
Value subtracted algebraically from the speed reference.
Example for dbn = 10:
 If reference = +50 Hz: + 50 - 10 = 40 Hz
 If reference = -50 Hz: -50 - 10 = -60 Hz

Setting Description

0...2 x [Max Frequency] tFr Setting range

Factory setting: 10 Hz

[Torque ctrl time out] rtO

Torque control time-out.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.
Time following automatic exit of torque control mode in the event of an error or a warning has been
triggered.

Setting Description
0.0...999.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 60 s

[Torque Ctrl ErrorResp] tOb

Response to torque control error.
This parameter can be accessed if [Trq/spd switching] tSS is not set to [No] no.
Response of drive once time [Torque ctrl time out] rtO has elapsed.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Warning] ALrM Warning is triggered on time-out
Factory setting
[Error] FLt An error is triggered with freewheel stop

NVE61643 03/2020 405

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.32
[Generic functions] - [Parameters switching]

[Generic functions] - [Parameters switching]

[Parameters switching] MLP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Parameters switching]

About This Menu

A set of 1 to 15 parameters from the [Parameter Selection] SPS list (see page 407) can be selected and
2 or 3 different values assigned. These 2 or 3 sets of values can then be switched using 1 or 2 digital inputs
or control word bits. This switching can be performed during operation (motor running). It can also be
controlled based on 1 or 2 frequency thresholds, whereby each threshold acts as a digital input (0 =
threshold not reached, 1 = threshold reached).

Values 1 Values 2 Values 3

Parameter 1 Parameter 1 Parameter 1 Parameter 1
... ... ... ...
Parameter 15 Parameter 15 Parameter 15 Parameter 15
Input DI or bit or frequency 0 1 0 or 1
threshold 2 values
Input DI or bit or frequency 0 0 1
threshold 3 values

NOTE: Do not modify the parameters in [Parameter Selection] SPS (see page 407), because any
modifications made in this menu will be lost on the next power-up. The parameters can be adjusted during
operation in the [Parameters switching]MLP- menu, on the active configuration.

[2 Parameter sets] CHA1

Parameter switching assignment 1.
Switching 2 parameter sets.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[Mot Freq High FtA Motor frequency high threshold reached
Thd]
[2nd Freq Thd F2A Second frequency threshold reached
Reached]
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration

406 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[3 Parameter sets] CHA2

Parameter switching assignment 2.
Identical to [2 Parameter sets] CHA1.
Switching 3 parameter sets.
NOTE: In order to obtain 3 parameter sets, it is necessary to configure first [2 Parameter sets] CHA1.

[Parameter Selection] SPS

This parameter can be accessed if [2 Parameter sets] CHA1 is not set to [No] nO.
Making an entry in this parameter opens a window containing all the adjustment parameters that can be
accessed. Select 1 to 15 parameters using OK key. Parameter(s) can also be deselected using OK key.
Available parameters for parameters switching function are:

Parameter Code
[Ramp increment] Inr
[Acceleration] ACC
[Deceleration] dEC
[Acceleration 2] AC2
[Deceleration 2] dE2
[Begin Acc round] tA1
[End Acc round] tA2
[Begin Dec round] tA3
[End Dec round] tA4
[Low Speed] LSP
[High Speed] HSP
[High Speed 2] HSP2
[High Speed 3] HSP3
[High Speed 4] HSP4
[Motor Th Current] ItH
[IR compensation] UFr
[Slip compensation] SLP
[K speed loop filter] SFC
[Speed time integral] SIt
[Speed prop. gain] SPG
[Inertia Factor] SPGU
[Ramp Divider] dCF
[DC Inj Level 1] IdC
[DC Inj Time 1] tdI
[DC Inj Level 2] IdC2

NVE61643 03/2020 407

Complete settings CSt-

Parameter Code
[DC Inj Time 2] tdC
[Auto DC inj Level 1] SdC1
[Auto DC Inj Time 1] tdC1
[Auto DC inj Level 2] SdC2
[Auto DC Inj Time 2] tdC2
[Switching frequency] SFr
[Current Limitation] CLI
[Current Limit2 Value] CL2
[Motor fluxing] FLU
[Low Speed Timeout] tLS
[Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE
[Jog frequency] JGf
[Jog Delay] JGt
[Preset speed 2]...[Preset speed 16] SP2... SP16
[+/- Speed limitation] srp
[Multiplying coeff.] MFr
[Brk Release Current] ibr
[Brake release I Rev] ird
[Brake Release time] brt
[Brake release freq] bir
[Brake engage freq] ben
[Brake engage delay] tbe
[Brake engage time] bet
[Jump at reversal] jdC
[Time to restart] ttr
[BRH b4 freq] bFtd
[Motor torque limit] tlim
[Gen. torque limit] tlig
[Torque ratio] trt
[Low Torque] ltq
[High Torque] Htq
[PID Prop.Gain] rPG
[PID Intgl.Gain] rIG
[PID derivative gain] rdG
[PID ramp] PrP
[PID Min Output] POL
[PID Max Output] POH
[PID Start Ref Freq] SFS
[PID acceleration time] ACCP
[Min fbk Warning] PAL
[Max fbk Warning] PAH
[PID error Warning] PEr
[Speed input %] PSr
[Ref PID Preset 2] rP2
[Ref PID Preset 3] rP3
[Ref PID Preset 4] rP4
[PID Fdbk Range] PFMr
[PID Fdbk Error Delay] PFMd

408 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameter Code
[DC Inj Time 2] tdC
[Auto DC inj Level 1] SdC1
[Auto DC Inj Time 1] tdC1
[Auto DC inj Level 2] SdC2
[Auto DC Inj Time 2] tdC2
[Switching frequency] SFr
[Current Limitation] CLI
[Current Limit2 Value] CL2
[Motor fluxing] FLU
[Low Speed Timeout] tLS
[Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE
[Jog frequency] JGf
[Jog Delay] JGt
[Preset speed 2]...[Preset speed 16] SP2... SP16
[+/- Speed limitation] srp
[Multiplying coeff.] MFr
[Brk Release Current] ibr
[Brake release I Rev] ird
[Brake Release time] brt
[Brake release freq] bir
[Brake engage freq] ben
[Brake engage delay] tbe
[Brake engage time] bet
[Jump at reversal] jdC
[Time to restart] ttr
[BRH b4 freq] bFtd
[Motor torque limit] tlim
[Gen. torque limit] tlig
[Torque ratio] trt
[Low Torque] ltq
[High Torque] Htq
[PID Prop.Gain] rPG
[PID Intgl.Gain] rIG
[PID derivative gain] rdG
[PID ramp] PrP
[PID Min Output] POL
[PID Max Output] POH
[PID Start Ref Freq] SFS
[PID acceleration time] ACCP
[Min fbk Warning] PAL
[Max fbk Warning] PAH
[PID error Warning] PEr
[Speed input %] PSr
[Ref PID Preset 2] rP2
[Ref PID Preset 3] rP3
[Ref PID Preset 4] rP4
[PID Fdbk Range] PFMr
[PID Fdbk Error Delay] PFMd

NVE61643 03/2020 409

Complete settings CSt-

Parameter Code
[High Current Thd] Ctd
[Low I Threshold] CtdL
[High torque thd.] ttH
[Low torque thd.] ttl
[Motor Freq Thd] Ftd
[Low Freq.Threshold] FtdL
[Freq. threshold 2] F2d
[2 Freq. Threshold] F2dL
[Freewheel stop Thd] FFt
[Motor Therm Thd] ttd
[Reference high Thd] rtd
[Reference low Thd] rtdL
[Skip Frequency] JPF
[Skip Frequency 2] JF2
[3rd Skip Frequency] JF3
[Skip Freq.Hysteresis] JFH
[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] LUn
[Unld.Thr.0.Speed] LUL
[Unld. FreqThr. Det.] rMUd
[Hysteresis Freq] Srb
[Underload T.B.Rest.] FtU
[Ovld Detection Thr.] LOC
[Overload T.B.Rest.] FtO
[Fan mode] FFM
[Pmax Motor] tPMM
[Pmax Generator] tPMG
[Stall Max Time] StP1
[Stall Current] StP2
[Stall Frequency] StP3
[AI1 Th Warn Level] tH1A
[AI3 Th Warn Level] tH3A
[AI4 Th Warn Level] tH4A
[AI5 Th Warn Level] tH5A
[AI1 Th Error Level] tH1F
[AI3 Th Error Level] tH3F
[AI4 Th Error Level] tH4F
[AI5 Th Error Level] tH5F
[Load correction] lbC

[Set 1] PS1- to [Set 3] PS3-

3 possible sets of values.
Making an entry in this menu opens a settings window containing the selected parameters in the order in
which they were selected.
Access to each menu in order to configure their own set of values.

410 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.33
[Generic functions] - [Stop after speed timeout]

[Generic functions] - [Stop after speed timeout]

[Stop after speed timeout] PrSP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Stop after speed timeout]

Sleep/Wake-Up in Speed Control Mode

The drive is in Speed control mode, when PID is not active, typically when:
 PID is not configured (the motor speed setpoint is controlled by an external PLC, for example).
 PID is in manual mode (manual application mode, for example).
 PID is not active because Channel 1 is not selected (forced local mode enabled, for example).

When the drive is used in Speed Control (PID not used or not active), a speed condition is used to switch
the application to the sleep state. When the drive is in sleep state, the motor is restarted if the sleep
condition disappears.
This function avoids prolonged operation at low speeds when neither useful nor compliant with the system
constraints. It stops the motor after a period of operation at reduced speed. This time and speed can be
adjusted.
In Speed control mode, Sleep/Wake-up is managed according to the following rules:
 The motor is stopped when [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH and [Output frequency] rFr become and stay
lower than [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE during [Low Speed Timeout] tLS.
 The motor is restarted when [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH > [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.]
SLE.

1 Nominal [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function action: after [Low Speed Timeout] tLS time, the motor is stopped
according to the current deceleration ramp
2 [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH becomes greater than [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE and run order
still present [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is deactivated
3 [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is not activated because [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH becomes greater than
[Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE before [Low Speed Timeout] tLS has expired
4 [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is not activated because [Output frequency] rFr becomes greater than [Low
speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE before [Low Speed Timeout] tLS has expired
5 [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is not activated because [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH stays greater than [Low
speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE

NVE61643 03/2020 411

Complete settings CSt-

[Low Speed Timeout] tLS

Low speed timeout

Setting Description
0.0...999.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 s

[Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE

Sleep offset threshold.
This parameter can be accessed if [Low Speed Timeout] tLS is not set to 0.
Adjustable restart threshold (offset) following a stop after prolonged operation at [Low speed] LSP +
[Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE, in Hz. The motor restarts if the reference rises above (LSP + SLE) and if a run
command is still present.

Setting Description
1.0...[Max Frequency] tFr Setting range
Factory setting: 1.0 Hz

412 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.34
[Generic functions] - [DC bus supply]

[Generic functions] - [DC bus supply]

[DC bus supply] dCO- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [DC bus supply]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed on 480V Drives with power greater than 22kW.
It gives the possibility to switch off/on drives supplied by a common DC bus without stopping the supply
unit. Direct power supply via the DC bus requires a protected direct current source with adequate power
and voltage as well as a suitably dimensioned resistor and capacitor precharging contactor. Consult
Schneider Electric for information about specifying these components.
The Direct Power Supply via Dc Bus function can be used to control the precharging contactor via a relay
or a logic input on the drive.
Example circuit using R2 relay:

1 DC power supply
2 +24 Vdc

[DC Charging Assign] dCO

DC Bus charge assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
Factory setting

NVE61643 03/2020 413

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[R2]...[R3] r2...r3 Relay output R2...R3
NOTE: R3 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22 kW.
[R4]...[R6] r4...r6 Relay output R4...R6 if VW3A3204 relay output option module has been
inserted
[DQ11 Digital dO11...dO12 Digital output DQ11...DQ12 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
Output]...[DQ12 inserted
Digital Output]
[DQ1 Digital dO1...dO2 Digital output DQ1...DQ2
Output]...[DQ2
NOTE: DQ2 selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
Digital Output]
30 kW.

[DC Bus Charge Time] DCT

DC Bus charge option time.
This parameter can be accessed if [DC Charging Assign] dCO is not set to [Not Assigned] no.

Setting Description
0.00...10.00 s Factory setting: 0.00 s

414 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.35
[Generic functions] - [Multimotors config]

[Generic functions] - [Multimotors config]

[Multimotors config] MMC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [Multimotors config]

Motor or Configuration Switching

The drive may contain up to 4 configurations, which can be saved using the [Save Configuration] SCSi
parameter.
Each of these configurations can be activated remotely, enabling adaptation to:
 2 to 4 different motors or mechanisms (multi-motors mode).
 2 to 4 different configurations for a single motor (multi-configurations mode).

The two switching modes cannot be combined.

Note: Observe the following conditions:
 Switching may take place when stopped (drive locked). If a switching request is sent during operation,
it will be executed at next stop.
 When switching between motors, the concerned power and control terminals must be switched as
appropriate.
 All configurations must share the same hardware configuration; otherwise the drive locks in [Incorrect
Configuration] CFF.
 Switching to a configuration that does not exist causes the drive to lock in [Empty Configuration]
CFI4.

Menus and Parameters Switched in Multi-Motor Mode

In multi-configurations mode, communication parameters are not switched.
 [Motor parameters] MPA- menu.
 [Input/Output] IO- menu.
 [Generic functions] CSGF- menu except for the [Multimotors config] MMC- function (to be
configured once only).
 [Generic monitoring] GPR- menu.
 [My menu] MyMn- menu.

NVE61643 03/2020 415

Complete settings CSt-

Transfer of a Drive Configuration to Another one, With Display Terminal, When the Drive Uses [Multimotors config] MMC-
Function

Switching Command
Depending on the number of motors or selected configurations (2 to 4), the switching command is sent
using one or two digital inputs. The table below lists the possible combinations.

DI (CnF1) DI (CnF2) Number of configurations

2 motors or configurations 3 motors or configurations or active motors
0 0 0
1 0 1
0 1 2
1 1 3

416 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Schematic Diagram for Multi-Motor Mode

Auto-Tuning in Multi-Motor Mode

This auto-tuning can be performed:
 Manually using a Digital input when the motor changes.
 Automatically each time the motor is activated for the first time after switching on the drive if the
[Automatic autotune] AUt parameter is set to [Yes] YES.
Motor thermal states in multimotor mode:
The drive helps to protect the three motors individually. Each thermal state takes into account all stop times
if the drive power is not switched off.

NOTICE
MOTOR OVERHEATING
The motor thermal state of each motor is not saved when drive is switched off.
When the drive is switched on, it is not aware of the thermal state of the connected motor or motors.
 To enable correct temperature monitoring of the motors, install an external temperature sensor for
each motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Configuration Information Output

In the [Input/Output] IO- menu, a Digital output can be assigned to each configuration or motor (2 to 4)
for remote information transmission.
NOTE: As the [Input/Output] IO- menu is switched, these outputs must be assigned in all configurations
in which information is required.

NVE61643 03/2020 417

Complete settings CSt-

[Multimotors] CHM
Multimotors selection.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Multiconfiguration possible
Factory setting
[Yes] yes Multimotor possible

[2 Configurations] CnF1
Switching of two motors or 2 configurations.

[3 Configurations] CnF2
Switching of three motors or 3 configurations.
NOTE: In order to obtain 4 motors or 4 configurations, [2 Configurations] CnF1 must also be configured.
Identical to [2 Configurations] CnF1

418 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.36
[Generic functions] - [24V Supply Output]

[Generic functions] - [24V Supply Output]

[24V Supply Output] S24V- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic functions] [24V Supply Output]
This menu can be accessed on drives with a power lower than 30 kW.

[24V Supply Output] S24V

24V Supply Output

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no 24V pin is used as input supply.
[Yes] yes 24V pin is used as output supply.
Factory setting

NVE61643 03/2020 419

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.37
[Generic Functions] [External Weight Measurement]

[Generic Functions] [External Weight Measurement]

[External weight meas.] ELM- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic Functions] [External weight meas.]

About This Menu

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Perform a comprehensive commissioning test to verify correct operation of the weight sensor under all
operating and error conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

This function uses the information supplied by a weight sensor to adapt the [Brk Release Current] Ibr
(the torque current) of the [Brake logic control] BLC- function. Depending on the settings, the brake
release current can be positive or negative. The signal from the weight sensor can be assigned to an
analog input (usually a 4 - 20 mA signal), to the pulse-in input or to the encoder input, according to the type
of weight sensor.
For example, but not limited to, the weight sensor can measure the total weight of a hoisting winch and its
load.
The brake release current is adapted in accordance with the curve below.

CP1 Point 1 Y
CP2 Point 2 Y
LP1 Point 1 X
LP2 Point 2 X
ZL Zero Load
WSS Weight Sensor Signal

This curve can represent a weight sensor on an application, where zero load on the motor is different from
zero load on the application.

[Weight Sensor Assign] PES

Weight sensor assignment.

420 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

If [Brake assignment] bLC is not configured, this parameter is forced to [Not Configured] nO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not configured.
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] AI1..AI3 Analog input AI1...AI3.
NOTE: AI3 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[AI4]...[AI5] AI4..AI5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted.
[AI Virtual 1] AIV1 Virtual analogic input 1.
[DI7 PI7..PI8 Digital input DI7...DI8 used as pulse input.
PulseInput]...[DI8
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
PulseInput]
22 kW.
[Rp] PI Pulse input.
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.
[Encoder] PG Encoder reference if an encoder module has been inserted.

[Point 1 X] LP1
Ext weight point 1 X.
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor Assign] PES is assigned.

Setting Description
0.0...99.99 % Setting range
This parameter can't be equal or higher than [Point 2 X] LP2.
Factory setting: 0.00 %

[Point 1Y] CP1

Ext weight point 1Y.
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor Assign] PES is assigned.

Setting Description
-1.1…1.1 In (1) Setting range in A
Factory setting: 0.7 * [Nom Motor Current] NCR
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Point 2 X] LP2
Ext weight point 2 X.
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor Assign] PES is assigned.

Setting Description
0.01...100.00 % Setting range
This parameter can't be equal or higher than [Point 1 X] LP1.
Factory setting: 50.00 %

[Point 2Y] CP2

Ext weight point 2Y.
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor Assign] PES is assigned.

Setting Description
-1.1…1.1 In(1) Setting range in A
Factory setting: [Nom Motor Current] NCR
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

NVE61643 03/2020 421

Complete settings CSt-

[Ibr 4-20 mA loss] IBRA

Brake release current in the event of the loss of the weight sensor information.
This parameter can be accessed if the weight sensor is assigned to an analog current input (PES = AIx)
and the 4-20 mA loss monitoring function is deactivated (LFLx = No).
[AIx min. value] CrLx must be equal or greater than 4 mA and [Ibr 4-20 mA loss] IBRA must be set
to a value consistent with your application.
For a hoisting application, the advisable setting is [Nom Motor Current] nCr.

Setting Description

0…1.1 In(1) Setting range in A.

Factory setting: 0 A
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate.

422 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.38
[Generic monitoring]

[Generic monitoring]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Process underload] ULd- Menu 424
[Process overload] OLd- Menu 426
[Stall monitoring] StPr- Menu 428
[Thermal monitoring] tPP- Menu 429
[Frequency meter] FqF- Menu 430

NVE61643 03/2020 423

Complete settings CSt-

[Process underload] ULd- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic monitoring] [Process underload]

Process Underload Detected Error

A process underload is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a minimum time
[Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt, which is configurable:
 The motor is in steady state and the torque is below the set underload limit ([Unld.Thr.0.Speed] LUL,
[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] LUn, [Unld. FreqThr. Det.] rMUd parameters).
 The motor is in steady state when the offset between the frequency reference and motor frequency falls
below the configurable threshold [Hysteresis Freq] Srb.
Between zero frequency and the rated frequency, the curve reflects the following equation: torque = LUL
+ (LUn - LUL) x (frequency)2 / (rated frequency)2The underload function is not active for frequencies
below rMUD.

1 Underload zone.

A relay or a digital output can be assigned to the signaling of this detected error in the [Input/Output] IO-
, [I/O assignment] IOAS- menus.

[Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt

Underload detection time delay.
A value of 0 deactivates the function and makes the other parameters inaccessible.

Setting Description
0...100 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0 s

[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] LUn
Underload threshold at nominal motor speed [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS, as a % of the rated motor torque.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt is not set to 0.

Setting Description
20...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 60%

424 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Unld.Thr.0.Speed] LUL
Underload threshold at zero frequency as a % of the rated motor torque.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt is not set to 0.

Setting Description
0...[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] LUn Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

[Unld. FreqThr. Det.] rMUd

Minimum frequency underload detection threshold.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt is not set to 0.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Hysteresis Freq] Srb

Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which defines a steady
state operation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt or [Ovld Time Detect.] TOLis not set to 0.

Setting Description
0.3...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.3 Hz

[Underload Mangmt.] UdL

Underload management.
Behavior on switching to underload detection.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld T. Del. Detect] ULt is not set to 0.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FST Fast stop

[Underload T.B.Rest.] FtU

Minimum time permitted between an underload being detected and any automatic restart.
To allow an automatic restart, the value of [Fault Reset Time] tAr must exceed this parameter by at least
1 minute.
This parameter can be accessed if [Underload Mangmt.] UdL is not set to [Ignore] No.

Setting Description
0...6 min Setting range
Factory setting: 0 min

NVE61643 03/2020 425

Complete settings CSt-

[Process overload] OLd- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic monitoring] [Process overload]

About This Menu

A process overload error is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a minimum time
[Ovld Time Detect.] tOL, which is configurable:
 The drive is in [Current limitation] CLI mode during acceleration, deceleration, or,
 The motor is in steady state and the [Motor Current] LCR is above the set overload threshold [Ovld
Detection Thr.] LOC.
The motor is in steady state when the offset difference between [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FRH and [Motor
Frequency] RFR is less than the configurable threshold [Hysteresis Freq] Srb.

NOTE: Process overload monitoring is always active in [Current limitation] CLI state.

[Ovld Time Detect.] tOL

Overload reaction time.
A value of 0 deactivates the function and makes the other parameters inaccessible.

Setting Description
0...100 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0 s

[Ovld Detection Thr.] LOC

Overload threshold.
Overload detection threshold, as a % of the rated motor current [Nom Motor Current] nCr. This value
must be less than the limit current in order for the function to work.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Time Detect.] tOL is not set to 0.

Setting Description
70...150% Setting range
Factory setting: 110%

426 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Hysteresis Freq] Srb

Hysteresis for steady state.
Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which defines a steady
state operation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Time Detect.] tOL or [Unld T. Del. Detect.] ULT is not set to 0.

Setting Description
0.3...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.3 Hz

[Ovld.Proces.Mngmt] OdL
Behavior on switching to overload detection.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Time Detect.] tOL is not set to 0.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop

[Overload T.B.Rest.] FtO

Minimum time permitted between an overload being detected and any automatic restart.
In order to allow an automatic restart, the value of [Fault Reset Time] tAr must exceed this parameter
by at least 1 minute.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Time Detect.] tOL or [Ovld.Process.Mngmt] odL is not set to
0.

Setting Description
0...6 min Setting range
Factory setting: 0 min

NVE61643 03/2020 427

Complete settings CSt-

[Stall monitoring] StPr- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic monitoring] [Stall monitoring]

About This Menu

This function helps to prevent a motor overload by monitoring the motor current and the speed rise time.
A stalling condition is when:
 An output frequency is smaller than the stalling frequency [Stall Frequency] StP3
 And an output current is higher than the stalling current [Stall Current] StP2
 During a time longer than the stalling time [Stall Max Time] StP1

When a stalling condition occurs, a [Motor Stall Error] StF error is triggered.

[Stall Monitoring] StPC

Stall monitoring activation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function disabled
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Function enabled

[Stall Max Time] StP1

Motor stall maximum time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Stall Monitoring] StPC is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.0...200 s Setting range
Factory setting: 60.0 s

[Stall Current] StP2

Stall monitoring current level, as a % of the rated motor current [Nom Motor Current] NCR.
This parameter can be accessed if [Stall Monitoring] StPC is not set to [No] nO.
The factory setting changes to 150.0 % if [Dual rating] DRT is set to [Heavy Duty] High.

Setting Description
0.0...120.0% Setting range
Factory setting: 150.0%

[Stall Frequency] StP3

Stall monitoring frequency level.
This parameter can be accessed if [Stall Monitoring] StPC is not set to [No] nO.

Setting Description
0.0...[Max Frequency] tfr Setting range
Factory setting: 2.0 Hz

428 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Thermal monitoring] tPP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic monitoring] [Thermal monitoring]

About This Menu

Identical to [Thermal monitoring] tPP- Menu (see page 184).

NVE61643 03/2020 429

Complete settings CSt-

[Frequency meter] FqF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Generic monitoring] [Frequency meter]

About This Menu

This function uses the "Pulse input" input and can only be used if the "Pulse input" input is not being used
for another function.

Example of Use
An indexed disk driven by the motor and connected to a proximity sensor can be used to generate a
frequency signal that is proportional to the speed of rotation of the motor.

When applied to the "Pulse input" input, this signal supports:

 Measurement and display of the motor speed: signal frequency = 1/T. This frequency is displayed with
the [Measured Freq] FqS.
 Overspeed detection (if the measured speed exceeds a preset threshold, the drive triggers an error).
 Brake failure detection if brake logic control has been configured: If the speed does not drop sufficiently
quickly following a command to engage the brake, the drive triggers an error. This function can be used
to detect worn brake linings.
 Detection of a speed threshold that can be adjusted using [Pulse warning thd.] FqL (see page 431)
and is assignable to a relay or digital output.

[Frequency meter] FqF

Frequency Meter function activation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
Factory Setting
[DI7 PulseInput]...[DI8 PI7...PI8 Digital input DI7...DI8 used as pulse input
PulseInput]
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater
than 22kW.
[RP] PI Pulse input
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on drives with a power below than
30 kW.

[Pulse scal. divider] FqC

Coefficient for measure.
The frequency measured is displayed with the [Measured Freq] FqS parameter.

Setting Description
1.0...100.0 Setting range
Factory setting: 1.0

430 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Overspd. pulse thd.] FqA

Maximum frequency authorized.
Activation and adjustment of overspeed monitoring: [Motor Overspeed] SOF.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No motor overspeed monitoring
Factory setting
0...30 kHz Adjustment of the frequency tripping threshold on the "Pulse input" input
divided by [Pulse scal. divider] FqC.

[Pulse overspd delay] tdS

Time before triggering in over-speed.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 s

[Level fr. pulse ctrl] Fdt

Feedback detection threshold.
Activation and adjustment of monitoring for the pulse input (speed feedback): [Encoder Feedback Loss]
SPF.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No monitoring of speed feedback
Factory setting
0.0...599 Hz Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold for tripping a speed feedback
detection. (difference between the estimated frequency and the measured
speed).

[Pulse thd. wo Run] Fqt

Frequency threshold wear brake.
Activation and adjustment of brake feedback monitoring: [Brake Feedback] brF. If brake logic control
[Brake assignment] bLC is not configured, this parameter is forced to [No] nO.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No brake monitoring
Factory setting
1...1,000 Hz Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold to trigger a [Brake Feedback]
brF error (detection of speeds other than 0).

[Pulse wo Run delay] tqb

Time before triggering in wear brake.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 s

[Pulse warning thd.] FqL

Frequency level.
This parameter can be accessed if [Frequency meter] FQF is not set to [Not configured] no.

Setting Description
0...30,000 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0 Hz

NVE61643 03/2020 431

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.39
[Input/Output] - [I/O assignment]

[Input/Output] - [I/O assignment]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[DI1 assignment] L1A- to [DI8 assignment] L8A- Menus 433
[DI11 assignment] L11A- to [DI16 assignment] L16A- Menus 433
[DI7 Pulse Input Assign] PI7A- Menu 434
[DI8 Pulse Input Assign] PI8A- Menu 435
[Encoder Pulse Assign] PTGA- Menu 435
[RP assignment] PIA- Menu 436
[AI1 assignment] AI1A- to [AI5 assignment] AI5A- Menus 436
[AIV1 assignment] Av1A- Menu 436

432 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[DI1 assignment] L1A- to [DI8 assignment] L8A- Menus

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [I/O assignment] [DI8 assignment]

About These Menus

On drives with a power equal to or lower than 22 kW, DI6 and DI7 are respectfully DO1 and DO2 used as
Digital Input.
DI8 is only accessible on drive with power greater than 22 kW.

[DI1 Low Assignment] L1L to [DI8 Low Assignment] L8L

DI1 low assignment to DI8 low assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with digital input in
order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

[DI1 High Assignment] L1H to [DI8 High Assignment] L8H

DI1 high assignment to DI8 high assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with digital input in
order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

[DI11 assignment] L11A- to [DI16 assignment] L16A- Menus

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [I/O assignment] [DI11 assignment] to [DI16 assignment]

About These Menus

Identical to [DI1 assignment] L1A- menu (see page 433).
These menus can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DI11 Low Assignment] L11L to [DI16 Low Assignment] L16L

DI11 to DI16 low assignment.
Read-only parameters, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with the digital input
in order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

[DI11 High Assignment] L11H to [DI16 High Assignment] L16H

DI11 to DI16 high assignment.
Read-only parameters, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with the digital input
in order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is
displayed.

NVE61643 03/2020 433

Complete settings CSt-

[DI7 Pulse Input Assign] PI7A- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [I/O assignment] [DI7 Pulse Input Assign]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed on the Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the [DI7
Frequency Measured] PFC7 parameter.
This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22 kW.

[DI7 Pulse Input Assign] PI7A

DI7 pulse input assignment.
It displays all the functions associated with the pulse input in order to verify, for example, for compatibility
problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
[Torque Ref Offset] tqo Torque offset source
[Torque Ref Ratio] tqr Torque ratio source
[Ref Frequency 1] Fr1 Reference frequency 1
[Ref Frequency 2] Fr2 Reference frequency 2
[Ref Frequency 2 SA2 Reference frequency 2 summing
Summing]
[Torque limitation] taa Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
[Torque limitation taa2 Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
2]
[Subtract Ref Freq dA2 Subtract reference frequency 2
2]
[Forced local] FLOC Forced local reference source1
[Ref Frequency 2 MA2 Reference frequency 2 multiplier
multiplier]
[Ref Frequency 3 MA3 Reference frequency 3 multiplier
multiplier]
[Torque reference] tr1 Torque regulation: torque set point 1
[Torque reference tr2 Torque regulation: torque set point 2
2]
[Frequency Meter] fqf Frequency meter function activation
[External Feed teff External feed-forward
Forward]

434 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[DI8 Pulse Input Assign] PI8A- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [I/O assignment] [Pulse Input DI8 Assign]

About This Menu

Identical to [DI7 Pulse Input Assign] PI7A-.
Following parameters can be accessed on the Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the [DI8
Frequency Measured] PFC8 parameter.
This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22kW.

[Pulse Input DI8 Assign] PI8A

Pulse Input DI8 Assignment.
Identical to [Pulse Input DI7 Assign] PI7A (see page 434)

[Encoder Pulse Assign] PTGA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [I/O Assignment] [Encoder Pulse Assign]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed on the Graphic Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the
[Encoder Config] PG parameter.
This parameter can be accessed if an encoder module has been plugged.

[Encoder Pulse Assign] PTGA

Encoder pulse assignment.
It displays all the functions associated with the pulse input in order to verify, for example, compatibility
problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.
Identical to [Pulse Input DI7 Assign] PI7A (see page 434).

NVE61643 03/2020 435

Complete settings CSt-

[RP assignment] PIA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [I/O assignment] [RP assignment]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed on drives with a power lower than 30kW.

[RP assignment] PiA

Pulse input assignment
Identical to [Pulse Input DI7 Assign] PI7A (see page 434)

[AI1 assignment] AI1A- to [AI5 assignment] AI5A- Menus

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [I/O assignment] [AI1 assignment] to [AI5 assignment]

About These Menus

AI3 can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22kW.
AI4 and AI5 can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[AI1 Assignment] AI1A to [AI5 Assignment] AI5A

Analog input AI1 functions assignment to Analog input AI5 functions assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated the related analog input
in order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

[AIV1 assignment] Av1A- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [I/O assignment] [AIV1 assignment]

[AIV1 Assignment] Av1A

Virtual analog input function assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with the related virtual
analog input in order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems. If no functions have been assigned,
[No] nO is displayed.

436 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.40
[Input/Output] - [DI/DQ]

[Input/Output] - [DI/DQ]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[DI1 Configuration] di1- to [DI8 Configuration] di8- Menus 438
[DI11 Configuration] dI11- to [DI16 Configuration] Menus 439
[DI7 Pulse Config] PAI7- Menu 440
[DI8 Pulse Config] PAI8- Menu 442
[Pulse Input] PTI- Menu 443
[Encoder Config] PG- Menu 445
[PTO configuration] Pto- Menu 446
[PTO configuration] Ptoo- Menu 448
[DQ1 Configuration] dO1- Menu 451
[DQ2 Configuration] dO2- Menu 453
[DQ11 Configuration] dO11- Menu 454
[DQ12 Configuration] dO12- Menu 456

NVE61643 03/2020 437

Complete settings CSt-

[DI1 Configuration] di1- to [DI8 Configuration] di8- Menus

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [DI1 Configuration] to [DI8 Configuration]

About These Menus

On drives with a power equal to or lower than 22 kW, DI6 and DI7 are respectfully DO1 and DO2 used as
Digital Input.
DI8 is only accessible on drive with power greater than 22 kW.

[DI1 Low Assignment] L1L to [DI8 Low Assignment] L8L

DI1 to DI8 low assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with the related digital
input in order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

[DI1 High Assignment] L1H to [DI8 High Assignment] L8H

DI1 to DI8 high assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with the related digital
input in order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.
The digital input DI1 is assigned to:
 [Forward] FRD in 2-wire control
 [Run] RUN in 3-wire control.

[Run] RUN and [Forward] FRD settings cannot be modified manually.

NOTE: In IO profile, the assignment of [Run] RUN (respectively [Forward] FRD) switches to [CD00]
CD00 in 2-wire control (respectively 3-wire control).
The digital input DI2 is assigned to [Forward] FRD in 3-wire control. [Forward] FRD setting cannot be
modified manually.
NOTE: In IO profile, the assignment of [Forward] FRD switches to [CD01] CD01 in 3-wire control.

[DI1 Delay] L1d to [DI8 Delay] L8d

DI1 to DI8 delay.
NOTE: Commands received via this digital input are processed once the delay time set via this parameter
has elapsed.

Setting Description
0...200 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 2 ms

438 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[DI11 Configuration] dI11- to [DI16 Configuration] Menus

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [DI11 Configuration] to [DI16 Configuration]

About These Menus

Identical to [DI1 Configuration] dI1- menu (see page 438).
These menus can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DI11 Low Assignment] L11L to [DI16 Low Assignment] L16L

DI11 to DI16 low assignment.

[DI11 High Assignment] L11H to [DI16 High Assignment] L16H

DI11 to DI16 high assignment.

[DI11 Delay] L11d to [DI16 Delay] L16d

DI11 to DI16 delay.

NVE61643 03/2020 439

Complete settings CSt-

[DI7 Pulse Config] PAI7- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [DI7 Pulse Config]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed on the Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the [DI7
Frequency Measured] PFC7 parameter.
This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22 kW.

[DI7 Pulse Input Assign] PI7A

DI7 pulse input assignment.
It displays all the functions associated with the pulse input in order to verify, for example, for compatibility
problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
[Torque Ref Offset] tqo Torque offset source
[Torque Ref Ratio] tqr Torque ratio source
[Ref Frequency 1] Fr1 Reference frequency 1
[Ref Frequency 2] Fr2 Reference frequency 2
[Ref Frequency 2 SA2 Reference frequency 2 summing
Summing]
[PID Feedback] PIF PI controller feedback
[Torque limitation] taa Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
[Torque limitation taa2 Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
2]
[Subtract Ref Freq dA2 Subtract reference frequency 2
2]
[Manual PID Ref.] PIM Manual speed reference of the PID controller (auto-man)
[PID Ref FPI PID reference frequency
Frequency]
[Ref Frequency 3 SA3 Reference frequency 3 summing
Summing]
[Ref Frequency Fr1b Reference frequency 1B
1B]
[Subtract Ref Freq dA3 Subtract reference frequency 3
3]
[Forced local] FLOC Forced local reference source1
[Ref Frequency 2 MA2 Reference frequency 2 multiplier
multiplier]
[Ref Frequency 3 MA3 Reference frequency 3 multiplier
multiplier]
[Torque reference] tr1 Torque regulation: torque set point 1
[Torque reference tr2 Torque regulation: torque set point 2
2]
[Frequency Meter] fqf Frequency meter function activation
[External Feed teff External feed-forward
Forward]

440 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[DI7 PulseInput Low Freq] PIL7

DI7 pulse input low frequency.
Pulse input scaling parameter of 0% in Hz x 10 unit.

Setting Description
0.00...30,000.00 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 Hz

[DI7 PulseInput High Freq] PIH7

DI7 pulse input high frequency.
Pulse input scaling parameter of 100% in Hz x 10 unit.

Setting Description
0.00...30.00 kHz Setting range
Factory setting: 30.00 kHz

[DI7 Frequency Filter] PFI7

Interference filtering pulse input cut-off time of the low-filter.

Setting Description
0...1,000 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

NVE61643 03/2020 441

Complete settings CSt-

[DI8 Pulse Config] PAI8- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [DI8 Pulse Config]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed on the Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the [DI8
Frequency Measured] PFC8 parameter.
This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22 kW.

[DI8 Pulse Input Assign] PI8A

DI8 Pulse Input assignment.
Identical to [DI7 Pulse Input Assign] PI7A (see page 440).

[DI8 PulseInput Low Freq] PIL8

DI8 pulse input low frequency.
Identical to [DI7 PulseInput Low Freq] PIL7 (see page 441).

[DI8 PulseInput High Freq] PIH8

DI8 pulse input high frequency.
Identical to [DI7 PulseInput High Freq] PIH7 (see page 441).

[DI8 Frequency Filter] PFI8

Interference filtering pulse input cut-off time of the low-filter.
Identical to [DI7 Frequency Filter] PFI7 (see page 441).

442 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Pulse Input] PTI- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [Pulse Input]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed on drives with a power lower than 30kW.

[RP assignment] PiA

PTI Assignement

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
[Torque Ref Offset] tqo Torque offset source
[Torque Ref Ratio] tqr Torque ratio source
[Ref Frequency 1] Fr1 Reference frequency 1
[Ref Frequency 2] Fr2 Reference frequency 2
[Ref Frequency 2 SA2 Reference frequency 2 summing
Summing]
[PID Feedback] PIF PI controller feedback
[Torque limitation] taa Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
[Torque limitation taa2 Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
2]
[Subtract Ref Freq dA2 Subtract reference frequency 2
2]
[Manual PID Ref.] PIM Manual speed reference of the PID controller (auto-man)
[PID Ref FPI PID reference frequency
Frequency]
[Ref Frequency 3 SA3 Reference frequency 3 summing
Summing]
[Ref Frequency Fr1b Reference frequency 1B
1B]
[Subtract Ref Freq dA3 Subtract reference frequency 3
3]
[Forced local] FLOC Forced local reference source1
[Ref Frequency 2 MA2 Reference frequency 2 multiplier
multiplier]
[Ref Frequency 3 MA3 Reference frequency 3 multiplier
multiplier]
[Torque reference] tr1 Torque regulation: torque set point 1
[Torque reference tr2 Torque regulation: torque set point 2
2]
[Frequency Meter] fqf Frequency meter function activation
[External Feed teff External feed-forward
Forward]

[PTI Low Freq] PTIL

Pulse Train Input low frequency.

Setting Description
-1000000.00...1000000.00 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0 Hz

NVE61643 03/2020 443

Complete settings CSt-

[PTI High Freq] PTIH

Pulse Train Input high frequency.

Setting Description
-1000000.00...1000000.00 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0 Hz

[PTI Filter Time Analog] PTIT

PTI filter time analog

Setting Description
0...1000 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

[PTI Mode] PTIM

PTI mode

Setting Code / Value Description

[A/B] Ab A/B input signals
Factory Setting
[Pulse/Dir] Pd Pulse direction input signals
[CW/CCW] CwCCW Clockwise/Counterclockwise input signals

[PTI Filter Time Inp] PTIS

PTI Filter Time Input

Setting Description
0.00...13.00 µs Setting range
Factory setting: 0.25 µs

[PTI Counting Dir Inv] PTII

PTI direction inversion

Setting Code / Value Description

[OFF] OFF No inversion of counting direction
Factory Setting
[ON] On Inversion of counting direction

444 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Encoder Config] PG- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [Encoder Config]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed on the Graphic Display Terminal by pressing the OK key on the
[Encoder Config] PG parameter.
This parameter can be accessed only if an encoder module has been inserted or embedded encoder is
used.

[Encoder Pulse Assign] PTGA

Encoder pulse assignment.
It displays all the functions associated with the pulse input in order to verify, for example, compatibility
problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

[Encoder Pulse Assign] PGA

Reference Type.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Encoder] ENC Encoder
Factory Setting
[Frequency Generator] PTG Pulse train generator is connected to the encoder board.

[Freq Min Value] PEIL

Frequency min value.
Pulse input scaling parameter of 0% in kHz x 10 unit.

Setting Description
-300.00..300.00 kHz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 kHz

[Freq Max Value] PEFR

Frequency max value.
Pulse input scaling parameter of 100% in kHz x 10 unit.

Setting Description
-300.00..300.00 kHz Setting range
Factory setting: 300 kHz

[Freq Signal Filter] EFI

Frequency signal filter.

Setting Description
0...1000 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

NVE61643 03/2020 445

Complete settings CSt-

[PTO configuration] Pto- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [PTO configuration]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22 kW.

[PTO Assign] PtO

Pulse train output assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
[Motor Current] OCr Current in the motor, from 0 to 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the
Installation manual and on the drive nameplate)
Factory Setting
[Motor Frequency] OFr Output frequency, from 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[Ramp out.] OrP From 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[Motor torq.] trq Motor torque, from 0 to 3 times the rated motor torque
[Sign. torque] Stq Signed motor torque, between –3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ sign corresponds to the motor mode and the – sign to the generator mode
(braking).
[sign ramp] OrS Signed ramp output, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[PID ref.] OPS PID controller reference between [Min PID reference] PIP1 and [Max
PID reference] PIP2
[PID feedbk] OPF PID controller feedback between [Min PID feedback] PIF1 and [Max PID
feedback] PIF2
[PID error] OPE PID controller detected error between –5% and +5% of [Max PID feedback]
PIF2 – [Min PID feedback] PIF1
[PID output] OPI PID controller output between [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP
[Motor power] OPr Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Nominal Motor Power] nPr
[Mot thermal] tHr Motor thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Drv thermal] tHd Drive thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Measured Motor ofrr Measured motor frequency
Freq ]
[Sig. o/p frq.] OFS Signed output frequency, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[Mot therm2] tHr2 Motor thermal 2 state
[Mot therm3] tHr3 Motor thermal 3 state
[Mot therm4] tHr4 Motor thermal 4 state
[Unsigned Trq Ref] utr Unsigned torque reference
[Signed Trq Ref] str Signed torque reference
[Torque lim.] tql Torque limit
[Motor volt.] UOP Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS
[DC Bus voltage] VbUS DC bus voltage
[Copy PI8] COPY Copy Pulse

446 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[PTO Max Output Freq] PtOH

Pulse train output maximum output frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [PTO Assign] PTO is not set to [Not configured] nO.

Setting Description
1.00...30.00 kHz Setting range
Factory setting: 4.00 kHz

[PTO Min Output Freq] PtOL

Pulse train output minimum output frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [PTO Assign] PTO is not set to [Not configured] nO.

Setting Description
1.00...30.00 kHz Setting range
Factory setting: 1.00 kHz

NVE61643 03/2020 447

Complete settings CSt-

[PTO configuration] Ptoo- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [PTO configuration]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed on drives with a power lower than 30 kW.

[PTO Mode Selection] PtOM

Pulse train output assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
Factory Setting
[PTI Signal] PTI PTI signal.
[PTO Assigned CONS PTO assigned parameter.
Param]

[PTO Assign] PtOE

PTO assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [PTO Mode Selection] PTOM is set to [PTO Assigned Param]
ConS.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
NOTE: In this case, the output can be activated/deactivated by fieldbus.
refer to [Enable PTO fallback] POFE (see page 449).
[Motor Current] OCr Current in the motor, from 0 to 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the
Installation manual and on the drive nameplate)
Factory Setting
[Motor Frequency] OFr Output frequency, from 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[Ramp out.] OrP From 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[Motor torq.] trq Motor torque, from 0 to 3 times the rated motor torque
[Sign. torque] Stq Signed motor torque, between –3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ sign corresponds to the motor mode and the – sign to the generator mode
(braking).
[sign ramp] OrS Signed ramp output, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[PID ref.] OPS PID controller reference between [Min PID reference] PIP1 and [Max
PID reference] PIP2
[PID feedbk] OPF PID controller feedback between [Min PID feedback] PIF1 and [Max PID
feedback] PIF2
[PID error] OPE PID controller detected error between –5% and +5% of [Max PID feedback]
PIF2 – [Min PID feedback] PIF1
[PID output] OPI PID controller output between [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP
[motor power] OPr Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Nominal Motor Power] nPr
[Mot thermal] tHr Motor thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Drv thermal] tHd Drive thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Measured Motor ofrr Measured motor frequency
Freq ]
[Sig. o/p frq.] OFS Signed output frequency, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[Mot therm2] tHr2 Motor thermal 2 state
[Mot therm3] tHr3 Motor thermal 3 state

448 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Mot therm4] tHr4 Motor thermal 4 state
[Unsigned Trq Ref] utr Unsigned torque reference
[Signed Trq Ref] str Signed torque reference
[Torque lim.] tql Torque limit
[Motor volt.] UOP Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS
[DC Bus voltage] VbUS DC bus voltage
[Copy PI8] COPY Copy Pulse

[PTO High Freq] PtOu

PTO high frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [PTO Mode Selection] PTOM is not set to [PTO Assigned Param]
ConS.

Setting Description
-1,000,000.00…1,000,000.00 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 1,000,000.00 Hz

[PTO Low Freq] PtOb

PTO low frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [PTO Mode Selection] PTOM is not set to [PTO Assigned Param]
ConS.

Setting Description
-1,000,000.00…1,000,000.00 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 Hz

[PTO Freq Value] PtOF

PTO frequency value.
This parameter can be accessed if [PTO Mode Selection] PTOM is not set to [PTO Assigned Param]
ConS.

Setting Description
-1,000,000.00…1,000,000.00 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: _

[Enable PTO fallback] POFE

Enable PTO fallback.
This parameter can be accessed if [PTO Mode Selection] PTOM is set to [PTO Assigned Param]
ConS.
This parameter is forced to [No] No if [PTO Assign] PTOE is set to a value different from [No] No.
If the output is controlled by fieldbus and this parameter is set to [No] No, communication interruption will
not reset the output.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
 Set this parameter to [Yes] Yes to reset the output if an error is triggered.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

NVE61643 03/2020 449

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Fallback feature disabled.
When the output is assigned, the PTO value is defined according to its
assignment (see page 448)
When the corresponding output is not assigned, the PTO value is controlled
via the internal parameter PTOF. If an error is triggered, the output remains
unchanged.
Factory setting
[Yes] YES The PTO value is controlled via the internal parameter PTOF . Refer to
communication parameter addresses file (see page 16).
If an error is detected, the PTO value reset to [PTO Low Freq] PTOB.

450 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[DQ1 Configuration] dO1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [DQ1 Configuration]

[DQ1 Assignment] dO1

Digital output 1 assignment.
Identical to [R2 Assignment] r2 (see page 478).

[DQ1 Delay time] DO1D

DQ1 activation delay time

Setting Description
0...60,000 ms Setting range
0...9,999 ms then 10.00...60.00 s on the Display Terminal
Factory setting: 0 ms

[DQ1 Active at] DO1S

DQ1 status (output active level)

Setting Code / Value Description

[1] POS State 1 when the information is true
Factory Setting
[0] nEG State 0 when the information is true

[DQ1 Holding time] dO1H

DQ1 holding delay time.

Setting Description
0...9,999 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

[Enable DQ1 fallback] LO1F

Enable DQ1 fallback.
This parameter is forced to [No] No if:
 for drive with power equal to or lower than 22kW, another function is assigned to DI6/DQ1 (see [DI6 Low
Assignment] L6L, [DI6 High Assignment] L6H and [DQ1 Assignment] DO1).
 for drive with power equal to or greater than 30kW, another function is assigned to DQ/PTO (see [DQ1
Assignment] DO1 and [PTO Assign] PTO).
If the output is controlled by fieldbus and this parameter is set to [No] No, communication interruption will
not reset the output.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
 Set this parameter to [Yes] Yes to reset the output if an error is triggered.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

NVE61643 03/2020 451

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Fallback feature disabled.
When the output is assigned, the output value is defined according to its
assignment (see page 451).
Depending on the configuration of PTO - DQ Switch (SW2), when the
corresponding output is not assigned, the output value is controlled via:
 a bit of OL1R (if DQ selected),
 the internal parameter PTOC (if PTO selected).

If an error is triggered, the output remains unchanged.

Factory setting
[Yes] YES Fallback feature enabled.
Depending on the configuration of PTO - DQ Switch (SW2), the output value
is controlled via:
 a bit of OL1R (if DQ selected),
 the internal parameter PTOC (if PTO selected).

Refer to the communication parameter addresses file (see page 16).

If an error is detected, the output is:
 reset (if DQ selected),
 reset to [PTO Min Output Freq] PTOL (if PTO selected).

452 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[DQ2 Configuration] dO2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [DQ2 Configuration]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed on drives with power below 30kW.

[DQ2 Assignment] dO2

Digital output 1 assignment.
Identical to [DQ1 Assignment] do1 (see page 451).

[DQ2 Delay time] DO2D

DQ2 activation delay time
Identical to [DQ1 Delay time] do1D (see page 451).

[DQ2 Active at] DO2S

DQ2 status (output active level)
Identical to [DQ1 Active at] do1S (see page 451).

[DQ2 Holding time] dO2H

DQ2 holding delay time.
Identical to [DQ1 Holding time] do1H (see page 451).

[Enable DQ2 fallback] LO2F

Enable DQ2 fallback.
This parameter is forced to [No] No if another function is assigned to DI7/DQ2 (see [DI7 Low Assignment]
L7L, [DI7 High Assignment] L7H and [DQ2 Assignment] DO2).
If the output is controlled by fieldbus and this parameter is set to [No] No, communication interruption will
not reset the output.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
 Set this parameter to [Yes] Yes to reset the output if an error is triggered.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Fallback feature disabled.
When the output is assigned, the state of the output is defined according to
its assignment (see page 453).
When the corresponding output is not assigned, the state of the output is
controlled via a bit of OL1R. If an error is triggered, the output remains
unchanged.
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Fallback feature enabled.
The output value is controlled via a bit of OL1R. Refer to the
communication parameter addresses file (see page 16).
If an error is detected, the output is reset.

NVE61643 03/2020 453

Complete settings CSt-

[DQ11 Configuration] dO11- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [DQ11 Configuration]

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DQ11 Assignment] dO11

Digital output 11 assignment.
Identical to [R2 Assignment] r2 (see page 478)

[DQ11 actv delay] d11d

DQ11 activation delay time.
The delay cannot be set for the [Operating State “Fault”] FLt and [Mains Contactor] LLC assignments,
and remains at 0.
The state modification only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information
becomes true.

Setting Description
0...60,000 ms Setting range
0...9,999 ms then 10.00...60.00 s on the Display Terminal
Factory setting: 0 ms

[DQ11 status] d11S

DQ11 status (output active level).

Setting Code / Value Description

[1] POS State 1 when the information is true
Factory Setting
[0] nEG State 0 when the information is true

The configuration [1] POS cannot be modified for the following assignments:
 [Operating State "Fault"] Flt,
 [Mains Contactor] LLC,
 [Brake Sequence] bLC,

[DQ11 hold delay] d11H

DQ11 holding delay time.
The holding time cannot be set for the [Operating State “Fault”] FLt, [Brake Sequence] bLC, and
[Mains Contactor] LLC assignments, and remains at 0.
The holding time cannot be set and remains at 0 for the following assignments:
 [Operating State "Fault"] Flt,
 [Mains Contactor] LLC,
 [Brake Sequence] bLC,

The state modification only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information
becomes false.

Setting Description
0...9,999 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

454 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Enable DQ11 fallback] d11F

Enable DQ11 fallback.
This parameter is forced to [No] No if [DQ11 Assignment] DO11 is set to a value different from [No] No.
If the output is controlled by fieldbus and this parameter is set to [No] No, communication interruption will
not reset the output.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
 Set this parameter to [Yes] Yes to reset the output if an error is triggered.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Fallback feature disabled.
When the output is assigned, the state of the output is defined according to
its assignment (see page 454).
When the corresponding output is not assigned, the state of the output is
controlled via a bit of OL1R. If an error is triggered, the output remains
unchanged.
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Fallback feature enabled.
The output value is controlled via a bit of OL1R. Refer to the
communication parameter addresses file (see page 16).
If an error is detected, the output is reset.

NVE61643 03/2020 455

Complete settings CSt-

[DQ12 Configuration] dO12- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [DI/DQ] [DQ12 Configuration]

About This Menu

Identical to [DQ11 Configuration] dO11- Menu (see page 454).
Following parameters can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[DQ12 Assignment] dO12

Digital output 12 assignment.

[DQ12 actv delay] d12d

DQ12 activation delay time.

[DQ12 status] d12S

DQ12 status (output active level).

[DQ12 hold delay] d12H

DQ12 holding delay time.

[Enable DQ12 fallback] d12F

Enable DQ12 fallback.
Identical to [Enable DQ12 fallback] D11F (see page 455)

456 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.41
[Input/Output] - [Analog I/O]

[Input/Output] - [Analog I/O]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[AI1 configuration] AI1- Menu 458
[AI2 configuration] AI2- Menu 460
[AI3 configuration] AI3- Menu 461
[AI4 configuration] AI4- Menu 463
[AI5 configuration] AI5- Menu 465
[AQ1 configuration] AO1- Menu 466
[AQ2 configuration] AO2- Menu 471
[Virtual AI1] AV1- Menu 473

NVE61643 03/2020 457

Complete settings CSt-

[AI1 configuration] AI1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI/AQ] [AI1 configuration]

About This Menu

The input can be delinearized by configuring an intermediate point on the input/output curve of this input:

R Reference
C / VI Current or Voltage Input
1 [Y Interm. point]
2 [Min value] (0%)
3 [X Interm. point]
4 [Max value] (100%)

NOTE: For [X Interm. point], 0% corresponds to [Min value] and 100% to [Max value].

[AI1 Assignment] AI1A

Analog input AI1 functions assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with input AI1 in order
to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] nO is displayed.

[AI1 Type] AI1t

Configuration of analog input AI1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
Factory setting
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA

[AI1 Min. value] UIL1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AI1 Max. value] UIH1

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

458 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI1 Min. value] CrL1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AI1 Max. value] CrH1

AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

[AI1 filter] AI1F

AI1 cutoff time of the low filter.

Setting Description
0.00...10.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 s

[AI1 Interm. point X] AI1E

Input delinearization point coordinate. Percentage of the physical input signal.
0% corresponds to [AI1 min value] (U1LI)
100% corresponds to [AI1 max value] (U1HI)

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

[AI1 Interm. point Y] AI1S

Input delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).
Percentage of the internal frequency reference corresponding to the [AI1 Interm. point X] (AI1E)
percentage of physical input signal.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 0%

[AI1 Range] AI1L

AI1 scaling selection.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] AI1T is set to [Current] 0A.
This parameter is forced to [0-100%] POS if:
 [AI1 Type] AI1T is not set to [Current] 0A, or
 [AI1 min. value] CRL1 is lower than 3.0 mA

Setting Code / Value Description

[0-100%] POS Unidirectional: AI1 current scaling is 0% up to 100%.
Factory Setting
[+/-100%] PoSnEG Bidirectional: AI1 current scaling is -100% up to 100%.
[AI1 min. value] CRL1 corresponds to -100%. [AI1 max. value] CRH1
corresponds to 100%.

NVE61643 03/2020 459

Complete settings CSt-

[AI2 configuration] AI2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI/AQ] [AI2 configuration]

[AI2 Assignment] AI2A

AI2 functions assignment.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 458).

[AI2 Type] AI2t

Configuration of analog input AI2.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc
Factory setting

[AI2 min value] UIL2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 min value] UIL1 (see page 458).

[AI2 Max .value] UIH2

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] AI2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] UIH1 (see page 458).

[AI2 filter] AI2F

AI2 filter.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 459).

[AI2 Interm. point X] AI2E

AI2 delinearization input level.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] AI1E (see page 459).

[AI2 Interm. point Y] AI2S

AI2 delinearization output level.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] AI1S (see page 459).

460 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI3 configuration] AI3- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI/AQ] [AI3 configuration]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22kW.

[AI3 Assignment] AI3A

AI3 functions assignment.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 458).

[AI3 Type] AI3t

Configuration of analog input AI3.
Identical to [AI2 Type] AI2t (see page 460) with factory setting: [Current] 0A.

[AI3 Min. value] UIL3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min. value] UIL1 (see page 458).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

[AI3 Max. value] UIH3

AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] UIH1 (see page 458).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

[AI3 Min. value] CrL3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min. value] CrL1 (see page 459).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

[AI3 Max. value] CrH3

AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] CrH1 (see page 459).
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3t is set to [Current] 0A.

[AI3 filter] AI3F

AI3 cutoff time of the low filter.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 459).

[AI3 X Interm. point] AI3E

AI3 delinearization input level.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] AI1E (see page 459).

[AI3 Y Interm. point] AI3S

AI3 delinearization output level.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] AI1S (see page 459).

NVE61643 03/2020 461

Complete settings CSt-

[AI3 Range] AI3L

AI3 scaling selection.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] AI3T is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 Type] AI1T (see page 462)

462 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI4 configuration] AI4- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI/AQ] [AI4 configuration]

[AI4 Assignment] AI4A

AI4 functions assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 458).

[AI4 Type] AI4t

Configuration of analog input AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] n10U -10/+10 Vdc

[AI4 Min value] UIL4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min value] UIL1 (see page 458).

[AI4 Max. value] UIH4

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] UIH1 (see page 458).

[AI4 Min. value] CrL4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min. value] CrL1 (see page 459).

[AI4 Max. value] CrH4

AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] CrH1 (see page 459).

[AI4 filter] AI4F

AI4 cutoff time of the low filter.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 459).

[AI4 X Interm. point] AI4E

AI4 delinearization input level.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] AI1E (see page 459).

[AI4 Y Interm. point] AI4S

AI4 delinearization output level.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] AI1S (see page 459).

NVE61643 03/2020 463

Complete settings CSt-

[AI4 Range] AI4L

AI4 scaling selection.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI4 Type] AI4T is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 Type] AI1T (see page 464)

464 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[AI5 configuration] AI5- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI/AQ] [AI5 configuration]

[AI5 Assignment] AI5A

AI5 functions assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] AI1A (see page 458).

[AI5 Type] AI5t

Configuration of analog input AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI4 Type] AI4t. (see page 463)

[AI5 Min. value] UIL5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min. value] UIL1 (see page 458).

[AI5 Max. value] UIH5

AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] UIH1 (see page 458).

[AI5 Min. value] CrL5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 Min. value] CrL1 (see page 459).

[AI5 Max. value] CrH5

AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 Max. value] CrH1 (see page 459).

[AI5 filter] AI5F

AI5 cutoff time of the low filter.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 filter] AI1F (see page 459).

[AI5 X Interm. point] AI5E

AI5 delinearization input level.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] AI1E (see page 459).

[AI5 Y Interm. point] AI5S

AI5 delinearization output level.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] AI1S (see page 459).

[AI5 Range] AI5L

AI5 scaling selection.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI5 Type] AI5T is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 Type] AI1T (see page 465)
NVE61643 03/2020 465
Complete settings CSt-

[AQ1 configuration] AO1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI/AQ] [AQ1 configuration]

Minimum and Maximum Output Values

The minimum output value, in volts, corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the
maximum value corresponds to its upper limit. The minimum value may be greater than the maximum
value.

PA Parameter assigned
C / VO Current or voltage output
UL Upper limit
LL Lower limit
1 [Min Output] AOLx or UOLx
2 [Max Output] AOHx or UOHx

Scaling of the Assigned Parameter

The scale of the assigned parameter can be adapted in accordance with the requirements by modifying
the values of the lower and upper limits with two parameters for each analog output.
These parameters are given in %. 100% corresponds to the total variation range of the configured
parameter, so: 100% = upper limit - lower limit.
For example, [Sign. torque] Stq which varies between –3 and +3 times the rated torque, 100%
corresponds to 6 times the rated torque.
 The [Scaling AQx min] ASLx parameter modifies the lower limit: new value = lower limit + (range x
ASLx). The value 0% (factory setting) does not modify the lower limit.
 The [Scaling AQx max] ASHx) parameter modifies the upper limit: new value = lower limit + (range x
ASLx). The value 100% (factory setting) does not modify the upper limit.
 [Scaling AQx min] ASLx must always be lower than [Scaling AQx max] ASHx.

466 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

UL Upper limit of the assigned parameter

LL Lower limit of the assigned parameter
NS New scale
1 ASHx
2 ASLx

Application Example
The value of the motor current at the AQ1 output is to be transferred with 0...20 mA, range 2 in motor, In
motor being the equivalent of a 0.8 In drive.
 The [Motor Current] OCr parameter varies from 0 to 2 times the rated drive current.
 [Scaling AQ1 min] ASL1 must not modify the lower limit, which therefore remains at its factory setting
of 0%.
 [Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1 must modify the upper limit by 0.5x the rated motor torque, or 100 - 100/5
= 80% (new value = lower limit + (range x [Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1).

[AQ1 Assignment] AO1

AQ1 assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
NOTE: In this case, the output can be activated/deactivated by fieldbus.
refer to [Enable AQ1 fallback] AOF1 (see page 469)
[Motor Current] OCr Current in the motor, from 0 to 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the
Installation manual and on the drive nameplate)
[Motor Frequency] OFr Output frequency, from 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
Factory Setting
[Ramp out.] OrP From 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[Motor torq.] trq Motor torque, from 0 to 3 times the rated motor torque
[Sign. torque] Stq Signed motor torque, between –3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ sign corresponds to the motor mode and the – sign to the generator mode
(braking).
[sign ramp] OrS Signed ramp output, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[PID ref.] OPS PID controller reference between [Min PID reference] PIP1 and [Max
PID reference] PIP2
[PID feedbk] OPF PID controller feedback between [Min PID feedback] PIF1 and [Max PID
feedback] PIF2
[PID error] OPE PID controller detected error between –5% and +5% of [Max PID feedback]
PIF2 – [Min PID feedback] PIF1
[PID output] OPI PID controller output between [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP

NVE61643 03/2020 467

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Motor power] OPr Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Nominal Motor Power] nPr
[Mot thermal] tHr Motor thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Drv thermal] tHd Drive thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated thermal state
[Torque 4Q] tr4q Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The
+ and - signs correspond to the physical direction of the torque, regardless
of mode (motor or generator)
[Measured Motor ofrr Measured motor frequency
Freq]
[Sig. o/p frq.] OFS Signed output frequency, between –[Max Frequency] tFr and +[Max
Frequency] tFr
[Mot therm2] tHr2 Motor thermal 2 state
[Mot therm3] tHr3 Motor thermal 3 state
[Mot therm4] tHr4 Motor thermal 4 state
[Unsigned Trq Ref] utr Unsigned torque reference
[Signed Trq Ref] str Signed torque reference
[Torque lim.] tql Torque limit
[Motor volt.] UOP Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS
[M/S Out Speed msso Master / slave output speed reference
Reference]
[M/S Out Torque msto Master / slave output torque reference
Reference]

[AQ1 Type] AO1t

AQ1 type.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting

[AQ1 min output] AOL1

AQ1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 mA

[AQ1 max output] AOH1

AQ1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Current] 0A.

Setting Description
0.0...20.0 mA Setting range
Factory setting: 20.0 mA

468 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[AQ1 min Output] UOL1

AQ1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Vdc

[AQ1 max Output] UOH1

AQ1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] AO1t is set to [Voltage] 10U.

Setting Description
0.0...10.0 Vdc Setting range
Factory setting: 10.0 Vdc

[Scaling AQ1 min] ASL1

AQ1 scaling parameter of 0%.
Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

Setting Description
0.0...100.0% Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0%

[Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1

AQ1 scaling parameter of 100%.
Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.

Setting Description
0.0...100.0% Setting range
Factory setting: 100.0%

[AQ1 Filter] AO1F

AQ1 cutoff time of the low-filter.

Setting Description
0.00...10.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.00 s

[Enable AQ1 fallback] AOF1

Enable AQ1 fallback.
This parameter is forced to [No] No if [AQ1 Assignment] AO1 is set to a value different from [No] No.
If the output is controlled by fieldbus and this parameter is set to [No] No, communication interruption will
not reset the output.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
 Set this parameter to [Yes] Yes to reset the output if an error is triggered.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

NVE61643 03/2020 469

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Fallback feature disabled.
When the output is assigned, the output value is defined according to its
assignment (see page 467)
When the corresponding output is not assigned, the output value is
controlled via the internal parameter AO1R. If an error is triggered, the
output remains unchanged.
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Fallback feature enabled.
The output value is controlled via the internal parameter AO1R . Refer to
the communication parameter addresses file (see page 16).
If an error is detected, the output is reset.

470 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[AQ2 configuration] AO2- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI/AQ] [AQ2 configuration]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22kW.

[AQ2 assignment] AO2

AQ2 assignment.
Possible assignments: Identical to [AQ1 assignment] AO1 with the factory setting: [Motor Current] OCr.

[AQ2 Type] AO2t

AQ2 type.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Voltage] 10U 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting

[AQ2 min output] AOL2

AQ2 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 min output] AOL1 (see page 468).

[AQ2 max output] AOH2

AQ2 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AQ1 max output] AOH1 (see page 468).

[AQ2 min Output] UOL2

AQ2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 min Output] UOL1 (see page 469).

[AQ2 max Output] UOH2

AQ2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ2 Type] AO2t is set to [Voltage] 10U.
Identical to [AQ1 max Output] UOH1 (see page 469).

[Scaling AQ2 min] ASL2

AQ2 scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [Scaling AQ1 min] ASL1 (see page 469).

[Scaling AQ2 max] ASH2

AQ2 scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1 (see page 469).

NVE61643 03/2020 471

Complete settings CSt-

[AQ2 Filter] AO2F

AQ2 cutoff time of the low-filter.
Identical to [AQ1 Filter] AO1F (see page 469).

[Enable AQ2 fallback] AOF2

Enable AQ1 fallback.
Identical to [Enable AQ1 fallback] AOF1 (see page 469)

472 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Virtual AI1] AV1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [AI/AQ] [Virtual AI1]

[AIV1 Assignment] Av1A

Virtual analog input function assignment. Read-only parameter.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
[Torque Ref Offset] tqo Torque offset source
[Torque Ref Ratio] tqr Torque ratio source
[Ref Frequency 2 SA2 Reference frequency 2 summing
Summing]
[Torque limitation] taa Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
[Torque limitation 2] taa2 Torque limitation: activation by an analog value
[Subtract Ref Freq 2] dA2 Subtract reference frequency 2
[Ref Frequency 3 SA3 Reference frequency 3 summing
Summing]
[Subtract Ref Freq 3] dA3 Subtract reference frequency 3
[Ref Frequency 2 MA2 Reference frequency 2 multiplier
multiplier]
[Ref Frequency 3 MA3 Reference frequency 3 multiplier
multiplier]

[AIV1 Channel Assignment] AIC1

Channel assignment for virtual analog input AIV1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-CANopen] CAn Reference frequency via CANopen if a CANopen module has been
inserted
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module has been
Module] inserted
[Embedded Ethernet] EtH Embedded Ethernet
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[AIV1 Type] AV1T

Configuration of virtual analog input AIV1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[+/-8192] inEG -8192/+8192
Factory setting
[+/-100%] PnEG -100.00/+100.00 %

NVE61643 03/2020 473

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.42
[Input/Output] - [Relay]

[Input/Output] - [Relay]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[R1 configuration] r1- Menu 475
[R2 configuration] r2- to [R6 configuration] r6- Menus 478
[Input/Output] io- Menu 479

474 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[R1 configuration] r1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [Relay] [R1 configuration]

[R1 Assignment] r1
R1 assignment.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Not assigned
NOTE: In this case, the state of the output can be
activated/deactivated by fieldbus. Refer to [Enable R1 Fallback]
R1F (see page 477)
[Operating State Fault] FLt Operating state fault
Factory setting
[Drive Running] rUn Drive running
[Mot Freq High Thd] FtA Motor frequency threshold ([Motor Freq Thd] FTD) reached
[High Speed Reached] FLA High speed reached
[Current Thd Reached] CtA Motor current threshold ([High Current Thd] CTD) reached
[Ref Freq Reached] SrA Frequency reference reached
[Motor Therm Thd Reached] tSA Motor thermal threshold ([Motor Therm Thd] TTD) reached
[PID Error Warning] PEE PID error warning
[PID Feedback Warning] PFA PID feedback warning
[Mot Freq High Thd 2] F2A Second frequency threshold ([Freq. threshold 2] F2D) reached
[Drv Therm Thd Reached] tAd Drive thermal threshold reached
[Ref Freq High Thd Reached] rtAH Frequency reference high threshold reached
[Ref Freq Low Thd Reached] rtAL Frequency reference low threshold reached
[Mot Freq Low Thd] FtAL Frequency low threshold ([Low Freq.Threshold] FTDL)
reached
[Motor Freq Low Thd 2] F2AL Second frequency low threshold ([2 Freq. Threshold] F2DL)
reached
[Low Current Reached] CtAL Current low threshold ([Low I Threshold] CTDL) reached
[Process Undld Warning] ULA Underload warning
[Process Overload Warning] OLA Overload warning
[Forced Run] ern Emergency Run
[Slack Rope Warning] rsda Rope Slack
[High Torque Warning] ttHa High torque threshold
[Forward] MFrd Run forward
[Reverse] MrrS Run reverse
[HMI Cmd] BMP Control via the Graphic Display Terminal is active. (only active
with Local/Remote button)
[Ramp switching] rp2 Ramp switching state
[Mot2 Therm Thd reached] ts2 Motor 2 thermal threshold (TTD2) reached
[Mot3 Therm Thd reached] ts3 Motor 3 thermal threshold (TTD3) reached
[Mot4 Therm Thd reached] ts4 Motor 4 thermal threshold (TTD4) reached
[Neg Torque] AtS Actual torque sign
[Cnfg.0 act.] CnF0 Configuration 0 active
[Cnfg.1 act.] CnF1 Configuration 1 active
[Cnfg.2 act.] CnF2 Configuration 2 active
[Configuration 3 Active] CnF3 Configuration 3 active
[set 1 active] CFP1 Parameter set 1 active
[set 2 active] CFP2 Parameter set 2 active
[set 3 active] CFP3 Parameter set 3 active

NVE61643 03/2020 475

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[DC Bus Charged] dbL DC bus charged
[In braking] BRS In braking sequence
[Power removal state] PrM Power removal state.
Without power supply, the information cannot be delivered. With
this setting value, the power supply must be not external.
[Pulse Warn Thd Reached] fqla Pulse warning threshold reached
[I present] MCP Motor current present
[Limit Switch Reached] lsa Limit switch function activated
[Dynamic Load Warning] dlda Dynamic load detection
[Warning Grp 1] AG1 Warning group 1
[Warning Grp 2] AG2 Warning group 2
[Warning Grp 3] AG3 Warning group 3
[Warning Grp 4] AG4 Warning group 4
[Warning Grp 5] AG5 Warning group 5
[External Error Warning] EFA External error warning
[Undervoltage Warning] USA Undervoltage warning
[Preventive UnderV Active] UPA Undervoltage prevention warning
[Slipping warn] ana Anti-veering warning
[Drive Thermal Warning] tHA Drive thermal state warning
[Load Mvt Warn] bsa Brake speed warning
[Brake Contact Warn] bCa Brake contact warning
[Lim T/I Reached] ssa Torque current limitation warning
[Trq ctrl Warning] rta Torque control time-out warning
[IGBT Thermal Warning] tJA Thermal junction warning
[BR Temp Warning] boa Braking resistor temperature warning
[DBR Active] brAS DBR Active
[AI3 4-20 Loss Warning] AP3 AI3 4-20 mA loss warning
[AI4 4-20 Loss Warning] AP4 AI4 4-20 mA loss warning
[AI5 4-20 Loss Warning] AP5 AI5 4-20 mA loss warning
[Ready] rdY Ready to start
[AI1 4-20 Loss Warning] AP1 AI1 4-20 mA loss warning
[AI1 Th Warning] tp1a Thermal 1 alarm
[Fallback speed] frf Reaction on event / fallback speed
[Speed Maintained] rls Reaction on event / maintain speed
[Per Type of Stop] stt Reaction on event / stop on STT without an error triggered after
stop.
[AI3 Th Warning] tp3a Thermal 3 warning
[AI4 Th Warning] tp4a Thermal 4 warning
[AI5 Th Warning] tp5a Thermal 5 warning
[AI5 4-20 Loss Warning] ap5 AI5 4-20 mA loss warning
[Pos. Target Reached] PPWS Position target reached
[Temp Sens AI2 Warn] TS1A Temperature sensor AI1 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI3 Warn] TS3A Temperature sensor AI3 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI4 Warn] TS4A Temperature sensor AI4 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI5 Warn] TS5A Temperature sensor AI5 warning (open circuit)

476 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[R1 Delay time] r1d

R1 activation delay time.
The state modification takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes
true.
The delay cannot be set for the [Operating State Fault] FLt assignment; and remains at 0.

Setting Description
0...60,000 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

[R1 Active at] r1S

R1 status (output active level).

Setting Code / Value Description

1 POS State 1 when the information is true
Factory setting
0 nEG State 0 when the information is true

Configuration [1] POS cannot be modified for the [Operating State “Fault”] FLt assignment.

[R1 Holding time] r1H

R1 holding delay time.
The state modification takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes
false.
The holding time cannot be set for the [Operating State “Fault”] FLt assignment, and remains at 0.

Setting Description
0...9,999 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 0 ms

[Enable R1 fallback] r1F

Enable relay1 fallback.
This parameter is forced to [No] No if [R1 Assignment] R1 is set to a value different from [No] No.
If the output is controlled by fieldbus and this parameter is set to [No] No, communication interruption will
not reset the output.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
 Set this parameter to [Yes] Yes to reset the output if an error is triggered.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Fallback feature disabled.
When the output is assigned, the state of the output is defined according to
its assignment (see page 475)
When the corresponding output is not assigned, the state of the output is
controlled via a bit of OL1R. If an error is triggered, the output remains
unchanged.
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Fallback feature enabled.
The state of the relay is controlled via a bit of OL1R. Refer to the
communication parameter addresses file (see page 16).
If an error is triggered, the output is reset.

NVE61643 03/2020 477

Complete settings CSt-

[R2 configuration] r2- to [R6 configuration] r6- Menus

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output] [Relay] [R2 configuration] to [R6 configuration]

About These Menus

Identical to [R1 configuration] r1- Menu (see page 475).
R3 can be accessed on drives with a power greater than 22kW.
R4, R5 and R6 can be accessed if VW3A3204 relay output option module has been inserted.

[R2 Assignment] r2 to [R6 Assignment] r6

R2 to R6 assignment.
Identical to [R1 Assignment] r1 (see page 475) in addition to:

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] NO Not assigned
Factory setting
[Brake Sequence] BLC Brake sequence
[Mains Contactor] LLC Mains contactor control
[DC charging] DCO DC charging
[Output cont] OCC Output contactor control.

[R2 Delay time] r2d to [R6 Delay time] r6d

R2 to R6 activation delay time.

[R2 Active at] r2S to [R6 Active at] r6S

R2 to R6 status (output active level).

[R2 Holding time] r2H to [R6 Holding time] r6H

R2 to R6 holding delay time.

[R2 Holding time] r2F to [R6 Holding time] r6F

Enable relay 2 fallback to Enable relay 6 fallback.

478 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Input/Output] io- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Input/Output]

About This Menu

This parameter can be accessed with the Plain Text Remote Terminal or via the commissioning software.

[Ref Freq Template] bSP

Reference frequency template selection.
This parameter defines how the speed reference is taken into account, for analog inputs and pulse input.
In the case of the PID controller, this is the PID output reference.
The limits are set by the [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP parameters

Setting Code / Value Description

[Standard] bSd

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0, the frequency = [Low speed] LSP

Factory setting
[Pedestal] bLS

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0 to [Low speed] LSP, the frequency = [Low speed] LSP

NVE61643 03/2020 479

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Deadband] bnS

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0 to [Low speed] LSP the frequency = 0

[Deadband at 0%] bnS0

F Frequency
R Reference

This operation is the same as [Standard] bSd, except that in the following
cases at zero reference, the frequency = 0: The signal is less than [Min
nvalue], which is greater than 0 (example: 1 Vdc on a 2–10 Vdc input) The
signal is greater than [Min nvalue], which is greater than [Max value]
(example: 11 Vdc on a 10–0 Vdc input).
If the input range is configured as “bidirectional”, operation remains identical
to [Standard] bSd.

480 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.43
[Encoder configuration]

[Encoder configuration]

[Encoder configuration] IEN- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Encoder configuration]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if an encoder module (VW3A3420, VW3A3422, VW3A3423, or VW3A3424)
has been inserted, and the available selections depend on the type of encoder module used.

Encoder Check Procedure

This procedure applies to all types of encoder.

Step Action
1 Configure the parameters of the encoder used
2 Set [Motor control type] Ctt to a value other than [FVC] FvC even if it is the required configuration.
For example, use [SVC V] vvC for an asynchronous motor and [Sync. mot.] SYn for a synchronous
motor.
3 Configure the motor parameters in accordance with the specifications on the nameplate.
 Asynchronous motor: [Nominal motor power] nPr, [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS, [Nom Motor Current]
nCr, [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS, [Nominal Motor Speed] nSP.
 Synchronous motor: [Sync Nominal I] nCrS, [Nom SyncMotor Speed ] nSPS, [Pole pairs]
PPnS, [Syn. EMF constant] PHS, [Autotune L d-axis] LdS, [Autotune L q-axis] LqS, [SyncMotor
Stator R] rSAS.
4 Set [Encoder usage] EnU to [No] nO.
5 Perform auto-tuning
6 Set [Encoder check] EnC to [Yes] YES
7 Set the motor rotating at stabilized speed around 15% of the rated speed for at least 3 seconds, and use
the [Display] mon menu to monitor its behavior using [Measured output fr.] MMF parameter.
8 If an [Encoder] EnF error is detected, [Encoder check] EnC returns to [No] nO.
 Check the parameter settings (see steps 1 to 5 above).
 Check that the mechanical and electrical operation of the encoder, its power supply, and connections
are all OK.
 Reverse the direction of rotation of the motor ([Output Ph Rotation] PHr parameter) or the encoder
signals
9 Repeat the operations from step 6 onwards until [Encoder check] EnC changes to [Done] dOnE
10 If necessary, change [Motor control type] Ctt to [FVC] FvC or [Sync.CL] FSY.
NOTE: In this case [Encoder usage] EnU is automatically set to [Speed Regulation] REG.

[Encoder Type] UeCP

Encoder type.
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3420 or VW3A3422 or VW3A3424 are inserted.
The list of choice depends on the encoder module inserted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Undefined] und Unknow / No encoder type selected
Factory setting
[Hiperface] SCHP SinCos Hiperface encoder
[SinCos] SC SinCos encoder
[SSI] SSI SSI encoder

NVE61643 03/2020 481

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[RS422] Ab AB encoder
[Resolver] rES Resolver encoder
[EnDat 2.2] En22 Endat 2.2 encoder
[HTL] HTL HTL encoder

[AB Encoder Type] ENS

AB Encoder type configuration
This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [RS422] AB or [HTL] HTL.
NOTE: This parameter is forced to [AABB] AAbb if the encoder module is different from HTL encoder.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If you use an HTL encoder module (VW3A3424) and set [Encoder Usage] Enu to [Speed Regulation]
rEG, you must set the parameter [AB Encoder Type] EnS to [AABB] AAbb.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[AABB] AABB A, /A, B, /B signals
Factory setting
[AB] AB A, B signals
[A] A A signal
NOTE: In the case of an HTL encoder module, this parameter cannot be
set to [A] A, if [Encoder usage] ENU is set to [Speed Regulation] REG.

[Encoder supply volt.] UeCv

Encoder supply voltage.
Rated voltage of encoder used. The list of choice depends on the encoder module inserted.
This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] UECP is not set to:
 [Undefined] Und, or
 [Resolver] rES.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Undefined] und Not defined
Factory setting
[5 Vdc] 5v 5 Volts
[12 Vdc] 12v 12 Volts
[15 Vdc] 15v 15 Volts
[24 Vdc] 24v 24 Volts

[Number of pulses] PGI

Number of pulses per encoder revolution.
The parameter can be accessed if
 An encoder module VW3A3420 has been inserted and if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [RS422] AB
or,
 An encoder module VW3A3424 has been inserted and if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [HTL] HTL.

Setting Description
100...10,000 Factory setting: 1024

482 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Encoder check] ENC

Encoder check activation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not done] no Check not performed
[Yes] YES Activates monitoring of the encoder.
[Done] dOne Check performed successfully.
The check procedure checks:
 The direction of rotation of the encoder/motor
 The presence of signals (wiring continuity)
 The number of pulses/revolution. If an error is detected, the drive
triggers an [Encoder] EnF .

[Encoder usage] ENu

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Function inactive
[Speed Monitoring] SEC The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only.
[Speed Regulation] rEG The encoder provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring. This
configuration is automatic if the drive is configured for closed-loop operation
[Motor control type] Ctt = [FVC] fvCor [Sync.CL] FSY. If [Motor
control type] Ctt = [SVC V] VVC the encoder operates in speed
feedback mode and enables static correction of the speed to be performed.
This configuration is not accessible for other [Motor control type] Ctt
values.
NOTE: In the case of a HTL encoder module, this parameter cannot be set
to [Speed Regulation] REG if [AB Encoder Type] EnS is set to [A] A.
[Speed Reference] PGR The encoder provides a speed reference. It can only be selected with an
incremental encoder module.

[Encoder rotation inv.] Enri

Inversion of encoder rotation direction.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Inversion of the encoder deactivated
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Inversion of the encoder activated

[Resolver Exct. Freq.] rEFq

Resolver excitation frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [Resolver] RES.

Setting Code / Value Description

[3 kHz] 3K 3 kHz
[4 kHz] 4K 4 kHz
[5 kHz] 5K 5 kHz
[6 kHz] 6K 6 kHz
[7 kHz] 7K 7 kHz
[8 kHz] 8K 8 kHz
Factory setting
[9 kHz] 9K 9 kHz
[10 kHz] 10K 10 kHz
[11 kHz] 11K 11 kHz
[12 kHz] 12K 12 kHz

NVE61643 03/2020 483

Complete settings CSt-

[Transformation ratio] trES

Resolver transformation ratio.
This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [Resolver] rES.

Setting Code / Value Description

[0.3] 03 0.3
[0.5] 05 0.5
Factory setting
[0.8] 08 0.8
[1.0] 10 1.0

[Resolver poles nbr] rPPn

Resolver poles pair number.
This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [Resolver] rES.

Setting Code / Value Description

[2 poles] 2P 2 poles
Factory setting
[4 poles] 4P 4 poles
[6 poles] 6P 6 poles
[8 poles] 8P 8 poles

[Sincos lines count] uELC

SinCos lines count.
This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] uECP is set to [SinCos] SC.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Undefined] Und Undefined
Factory setting
[1...10000] Setting range

[SSI parity] SSCP

SSI Parity
This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [SSI] SSI

Setting Code / Value Description

[Undefined] Und Undefined
Factory setting
[No parity] nO No parity
[Even parity] EVEn Even parity

[SSI frame size] SSFS

SSI frame size (in number of bits).
The parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [SSI] SSI

Setting Description
[Auto] AUtO...31 Setting range
Factory setting: [Auto] AUtO

484 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Nbr of revolutions] EnMr

Number of revolutions.
Format of the number of revolutions (in number of bits).
The parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [SSI] SSI

Setting Description
[Undefined] Und...25 Setting range
Factory setting: [Undefined] Und

[Turn bit resolution] Entr

Turn bit resolution.
Resolution per revolution (in number of bits).
The parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [SSI] SSI

Setting Description
[Undefined] Und...25 Setting range
Factory setting: [Undefined] Und

[SSI code type] SSCD

SSI code type.
The parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [SSI] SSI

Setting Code / Value Description

[Undefined] Und Undefined
Factory setting
[Binary code] bIn Binary code
[Gray code] GrAY Gray code

[Clock frequency] EnSP

Clock frequency.
The parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] UECP is set to [SSI] SSI

Setting Code / Value Description

[200 kHz] 200K 200 kHz
Factory setting
[1 Mhz] 1M 1 MHz

[AB Encoder Max Freq] AbMF

AB encoder maximum frequency.
This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder Type] uECP is set to [RS422] Ab or [HTL] HTL and,
[Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] Epr.
This parameter can be used in case of EMC perturbations to adjust the filter of the encoder.

Setting Code / Value Description

[150 kHz] 150K 150 kHz
[300 kHz] 300K 300 kHz
Factory setting
[500 kHz] 500K 500 kHz
[1000 kHz] 1M 1000 kHz

NVE61643 03/2020 485

Complete settings CSt-

[Encoder filter activ.] FFA

Encoder feedback filter activation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] Epr and:
 [Encoder usage] Enu is not set to [No] no, or
 [Emb Enc Usage] EENu is not set to [No] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Filter deactivated
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Filter activated

[Encoder filter value] FFr

Encoder feedback filter value.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Encoder filter activ.] FFA is set to [Yes] yes.

Setting Description
0.0...40.0 ms Setting range
Factory setting: according to encoder rating

[Stop on top Z] toSt

Stop on next top Z detection.
This parameter can be used for homing. If the approach speed is set to high an [DC Bus Overvoltage]
ObF error will be triggered.
Some encoder provides a top Z signal. With the function linked to this parameter, it is possible to stop the
motor on the detection of this signal.
 If the assigned input or bit is at 1 (high level), the function is active: the drive stops the motor with a fast
stop on the detection of the next top Z signal.
 If [2/3-wire control] tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C and if [2-wire type] tCt is set to [Level] LEL
or [Fwd priority] PFO, the motor restarts when the assigned input or bit switches to 0 (low level) with
a run command still activated. If it is not the case, a new run command must be sent.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 A VW3A3420 Digital encoder module has been inserted and [Encoder type] ueCp is set to [RS422]
ab.
 An embedded encoder is present and if [Emb Enc Type] EECP is set to [RS422] ab.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration

486 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Reset Position Assign] rPoS

Reset position assignment.
This parameter resets the value of [PLC Encoder Pulse] PUC and [Enc pulse count] PUCD parameters.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr
Identical to [Stop on top Z] toSt.

NVE61643 03/2020 487

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.44
[Embedded Encoder]

[Embedded Encoder]

[Embedded Encoder] IEE- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Embedded Encoder]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed on drives with power up to 22kW and if no encoder module (VW3A3420,
VW3A3422, VW3A3423 or VW3A3424) has been inserted.

[Emb Enc Type] EECP

Encoder type.
The list of choice depends on the encoder module inserted.

Setting Code / Value Description

[None] nOnE No encoder connected
Factory setting
[AB] Ab AB encoder
[SinCos] SC SinCos encoder

[Emb Enc Supply Volt] EECv

Embedded encoder supply voltage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[5 Vdc] 5v 5 Volts
[12 Vdc] 12v 12 Volts
Factory setting
[24 Vdc] 24v 24 Volts

[Emb Enc Pulses Nb] EPGI

Number of pulses per encoder revolution.
The parameter can be accessed if [Emb Encoder Type] EECP is set to [RS422] Ab

Setting Description
100...10,000 Factory setting: 1024

[Encoder check] ENC

Encoder check activation.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not done] no Check not performed
[Yes] YES Activates monitoring of the encoder.
[Done] dOne Check performed successfully.
The check procedure checks:
 The direction of rotation of the encoder/motor
 The presence of signals (wiring continuity)
 The number of pulses/revolution. If an error is detected, the drive
triggers an [Encoder] EnF .

488 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Emb Enc Usage] EENu

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Function inactive
Factory setting
[Speed Monitoring] SEC The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only.
[Speed Regulation] rEG The encoder provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring. This
configuration is automatic if the drive is configured for closed-loop operation
([Motor control type] Ctt = [FVC] fvC or [Sync.CL] FSY. If [Motor
control type] Ctt = [SVC V] VVC the encoder operates in speed
feedback mode and enables static correction of the speed to be performed.
This configuration is not accessible for other [Motor control type] Ctt
values.
[Speed Reference] PGR The encoder provides a speed reference. It can only be selected with an
incremental encoder module.

[Emb Enc Rotation Inv] EEri

Inversion of encoder rotation direction.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Inversion of the encoder deactivated
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Inversion of the encoder activated

[Emb Enc Sincos lines] EELC

SinCos lines count.
This parameter can be accessed if [Emb Encoder Type] EECP is set to [SinCos] SC.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Undefined] Und Undefined
Factory setting
[1...10000] Setting range

[Encoder filter activ.] FFA

Encoder feedback filter activation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] enu is not set to [No] no.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Encoder usage] Enu is not set to [No] no, or
 [Emb Enc Usage] EENu is not set to [No] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Filter deactivated
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Filter activated

[Encoder filter value] FFr

Encoder feedback filter value.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
 [Encoder filter activ.] FFA is set to [Yes] yes.

Setting Description
0.0...40.0 ms Setting range
Factory setting: according to encoder rating

NVE61643 03/2020 489

Complete settings CSt-

[Stop on top Z] toSt

Stop on next top Z detection.
This parameter can be used for homing. If the approach speed is set to high an [DC Bus Overvoltage]
ObF error will be triggered.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Emb Encoder Type] EECP is set to [RS422] ab.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Reset Position Assign] rPoS

Reset position assignment.
This parameter resets the value of [Encoder pulse count] PUC and [Enc pulse count] PUCD
parameters.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr
Identical to [Stop on top Z] toSt.

490 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.45
[Error/Warning handling]

[Error/Warning handling]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Auto fault reset] Atr- Menu 492
[Fault reset] rSt- Menu 493
[Catch on the fly] FLr- Menu 495
[Error detect disabling] InH- Menu 497
[External error] EtF- Menu 499
[Output phase loss] OPL- Menu 501
[Input phase loss] IPL- Menu 502
[4-20mA loss] LFL- Menu 503
[Fallback speed] LFF- Menu 504
[Fieldbus monitoring] CLL- Menu 505
[Embedded Modbus TCP] EMtC- Menu 506
[Communication module] COMO- Menu 507
[Undervoltage handling] USb- Menu 510
[Ground Fault] GrFL- Menu 512
[Motor thermal monit] tHt- Menu 513
[Encoder monitoring] Sdd- Menu 515
[Braking Resistor monit] brP- Menu 516
[Torque or i lim. detect] tId- Menu 518
[Drive overload monit] obr- Menu 519
[Warn grp 1 definition] A1C- to [Warn grp 5 definition] A5C- Menus 521

NVE61643 03/2020 491

Complete settings CSt-

[Auto fault reset] Atr- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Auto fault reset]

[Auto Fault Reset] Atr

Automatic fault reset.
This function can be used to automatically perform individual or multiple Fault Resets. If the cause of the
error that has triggered the transition to the operating state Fault disappears while this function is active,
the drive resumes normal operation. While the Fault Reset attempts are performed automatically, the
output signal [Operating state Fault] is not available. If the attempts to perform the Fault Reset are not
successful, the drive remains in the operating state Fault and the output signal [Operating state Fault]
becomes active.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
 Verify that the fact that the output signal "Operating state Fault" is not available while this function is
active does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

The drive fault relay remains activated if this function is active. The speed reference and the operating
direction must be maintained.
It is recommended to use 2-wire control ([2/3-wire control] tCC is set to [2 wire] 2C and [2-wire type]
tCt is set to [Level] LEL, refer to [2/3-wire control] tCC.
If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time [Fault Reset Time] tAr has elapsed, the
procedure is aborted and the Drive response to external error. remains locked until it is turned off and then
on again.
The detected error codes, which permit this function, are listed in the Diagnostics part of the manual.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Automatic restart, after locking in error state, if the detected error has
disappeared and the other operating conditions permit the restart. The
restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by
increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then 1 minute for the
following attempts.

[Fault Reset Time] tAr

Maximum time for automatic restart function.
This parameter appears if [Auto Fault Reset] Atr is set to [Yes] YES. It can be used to limit the number
of consecutive restarts on a recurrent detected error.

Setting Code / Value Description

[5 minutes] 5 5 minutes
Factory setting
[10 minutes] 10 10 minutes
[30 minutes] 30 30 minutes
[1 hour] 1h 1 hour
[2 hours] 2h 2 hours
[3 hours] 3h 3 hours
[Unlimited] Ct Continuous

492 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Fault reset] rSt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Fault reset]

[Fault Reset Assign] rSF

Fault reset input assignment.
Detected errors are cleared manually when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 if the cause of the
detected error has been removed.
All errors cannot be cleared via a Fault Reset. Refer to the table in the part Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting to have the full list (see page 575).
The STOP/RESET key on the Display Terminal performs the same function.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
[DI1]...[DI6] LI1...LI6 Digital input DI1...DI6
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
Factory setting: [DI4] Li4
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Product Restart] rP
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and then restarts the drive. During this Restart procedure, the
drive goes through the same steps as if it had been switched off and on again. Depending on the wiring
and the configuration of the drive, this may result in immediate and unanticipated operation.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and restarts the drive
 Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Product restart.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr mode.
This parameter can be used to reset all detected errors without having to disconnect the drive from the
supply mains.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Reinitialization. Press and hold down the OK key for 2 s. The parameter
changes back to [No] nO automatically as soon as the operation is
complete. The drive can only be reinitialized when locked.

NVE61643 03/2020 493

Complete settings CSt-

[Prod Restart Assign] rPA

Product restart assignment.
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and then restarts the drive. During this Restart procedure, the
drive goes through the same steps as if it had been switched off and on again. Depending on the wiring
and the configuration of the drive, this may result in immediate and unanticipated operation. The Restart
function can be assigned to a digital input

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and restarts the drive
 Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr mode.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted

494 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Catch on the fly] FLr- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Catch on the fly]

[Catch On Fly] FLr

Catch on the fly.
Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events:
 Loss of line supply or disconnection.
 Clearing clearance of current detected error or automatic restart.
 Freewheel stop.

The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated or measured speed of the motor at the time of
the restart, then follows the ramp to the reference speed.
This function requires 2-wire level control.
When the function is operational, it activates at each run command, resulting in a slight delay of the current
(0.5 s max).
[Catch On Fly] FLr is forced to [No] nO if
 Motor Control Type Ctt is set to [FVC] FVC or [Sync.CL] FSY, or
 [Auto DC Injection] AdC is set to [Continuous] Ct, or
 [Brake assignment] bLC is not set to [No] no, or
 [BL Mode] bqM is not set to [No] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Function inactive.
Factory setting
[Yes On YES Function active only after freewheel stop.
Freewheel]
[Yes Always] ALL Function active after all stop type

NOTE: For synchronous reluctance motor, it is recommended to set [Angle Setting Type] ASt to
[Rotational Current Injection] RCi.

[Catch on Fly Sensitivity] VCb

Catch on fly sensitivity.
This parameter can only be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPR.
Setting the value of parameter [Catch on Fly Sensitivity] VCb too low may cause a wrong estimation of
the speed of the motor.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Only reduce gradually the value of parameter [Catch on Fly Sensitivity] VCb.
 During commissioning, verify that the drive and the system operate as intended by performing tests
and simulations in a controlled environment under controlled conditions
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Setting Description
0.10...100.00 V Setting range
Factory setting: 0.20 V

NVE61643 03/2020 495

Complete settings CSt-

[Catch On Fly Mode] Cofm

Velocity detection method for the Catch on Fly function.
[Catch On Fly Mode] Cofm is forced to [Measured] HwCof for synchronous motors.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Measured] HwCof Hardware catch on the fly
The motor voltage signal should be greater than [Catch on Fly Sensitivity]
vCb to be able to estimate the speed.
Factory setting
[Computed] swCof Software catch on the fly
A signal is injected to estimate the speed and the position of the rotor.
[Computed] swcof method is not effective for a motor velocity range
exceeding -HSP or +HSP.

496 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Error detect disabling] InH- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Error detect disabling]

[Disable Error Detect] InH

Disable error detection.
In rare cases, the monitoring functions of the drive may be unwanted because they impede the purpose of
the application. A typical example is a smoke extractor fan operating as a part of a fire protection system.
If a fire occurs, the smoke extractor fan should operate as long as possible, even if, for example, the
permissible ambient temperature of the drive is exceeded. In such applications, damage to or destruction
of the device may be acceptable as collateral damage, for example, to keep other damage from occurring
whose hazard potential is assessed to be more severe.
A parameter is provided to disable certain monitoring functions in such applications so that automatic error
detection and automatic error responses of the device are no longer active. You must implement
alternative monitoring functions for disabled monitoring functions that allow operators and/or master
control systems to adequately respond to conditions which correspond to detected errors. For example, if
overtemperature monitoring of the drive is disabled, the drive of a smoke extractor fan may itself cause a
fire if errors go undetected. An overtemperature condition can be, for example, signaled in a control room
without the drive being stopped immediately and automatically by its internal monitoring functions.

DANGER
MONITORING FUNCTIONS DISABLED, NO ERROR DETECTION
 Only use this parameter after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and
standards that apply to the device and to the application.
 Implement alternative monitoring functions for disabled monitoring functions that do not trigger
automatic error responses of the drive, but allow for adequate, equivalent responses by other means
in compliance with all applicable regulations and standards as well as the risk assessment.
 Commission and test the system with the monitoring functions enabled.
 During commissioning, verify that the drive and the system operate as intended by performing tests
and simulations in a controlled environment under controlled conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.

If the assigned input or bit state is:
 0: error detection is enabled.
 1: error detection is disabled.

Current errors are cleared on a rising edge from 0 to 1 of the assigned input or bit.
Detection of following errors can be disabled: ANF, BOF, BSQF, CNF, COF, DLF, ENF, EPF1, EPF2,
ETHF, FCF1, FCF2, FDR1, FDR2, FWER, IHF, INFB, INFD, INFJ, INFK, INFP, INFR, INFS, INFT, INFU,
INFV, LFF1, LFF3, LFF4, LFF5, MDLF, MDLF, MSDF, OBF, OHF, OLC, OLF, OPF1, OPF2, OSF, PGLF,
PHF, SLF1, SLF2, SLF3, SOF, SPF, SRF, SSF, STF, T1CF, T3CF, T4CF, T5CF, TECF, TH1F, TH3F,
TH4F, TH5F, THEF, TJF, TLOF, TNF, ULF, USF.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration

NVE61643 03/2020 497

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

498 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[External error] EtF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [External error]

[Ext Error Assign] EtF

External error assignment.
If the assigned bit state is:
 0: there is no external error.
 1: there is an external error

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI8] LI1...LI8 Digital input DI1...DI8
NOTE: DI8 selection can be accessed on drives with a power greater than
22kW.
[DI11]...[DI16] LI11...LI16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been
inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] IO configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated Modbus Serial in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated Modbus Serial
regardless of configuration
[C201]...[C210] C201...C210 Virtual digital input CMD2.01...CMD2.10 with CANopen® fieldbus module in
[I/O profile] IO configuration
[C211]...[C215] C211...C215 Virtual digital input CMD2.11...CMD2.15 with CANopen® fieldbus module
regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus module in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus module regardless
of configuration
[C501]...[C510] C501...C510 Virtual digital input CMD5.01...CMD5.10 with integrated Ethernet in [I/O
profile] IO configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.
[C511]...[C515] C511...C515 Virtual digital input CMD5.11...CMD5.15 with integrated Ethernet
regardless of configuration
NOTE: This selection can be accessed on ATV340•••N4E drives.

[Ext Error Resp] EPL

Drive response to external error.
Type of stop in the event of an external detected error.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO External detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

NVE61643 03/2020 499

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] Stt (see page 327),
without tripping. In this case, the detected error relay does not open and the
drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected error has been removed,
according to the restart conditions of the active command channel (for
example, according to [2/3-wire control] tCC and [2-wire type] tCt
(see page 234)if control is via the terminals). Configuring a warning for this
detected error is recommended (assigned to a digital output, for example)
in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
[Fallback speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed(1)
[Speed rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected error
maintained] occurred, as long as the detected error is active and the run command has
not been removed(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC Injection] dCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with some other
functions.
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

[Fallback Speed] LFF

Fall back speed.
This parameter can be accessed if the error response parameter is set to [Fallback Speed] LFF.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

500 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Output phase loss] OPL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Output phase loss]

[OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL

Output phase loss assignment.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If output phase monitoring is disabled, phase loss and, by implication, accidental disconnection of cables,
are not detected.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

NOTE: [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL is set to [Function Inactive] nO when [Motor control type] Ctt is
set to [SYN_U VC] SYn, [Sync.CL.] FSY, [SYN_U VC] SYnU or [Reluctance Motor] SrVC.
Additionally if [HF inj. activation] [HFI] is set to [No] NO, [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL is forced to
[Function Inactive] No.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Function Inactive] nO Function inactive
[OPF Error YES Tripping on [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL with freewheel stop
Triggered] Factory setting
[No Error OAC No detected error triggered, but management of the output voltage in order
Triggered] to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established and
catch on the fly performed (even if this function has not been
configured).The drive switches to [Output cut ]SOC state after [OutPhL
Time] Odt time. Catch on fly is possible as soon as the drive is in stand
by output cut [Output cut] SOC state.

[OutPhaseLoss Delay] Odt

Output (motor) phase loss detection time.
Time delay for taking the [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL detected error into account.

Setting Description
0.5...10 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.5 s

NVE61643 03/2020 501

Complete settings CSt-

[Input phase loss] IPL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Input phase loss]

[InPhaseLoss Assign] IPL

Loss of input phase error response.
If one supply mains phase is missing and if this leads to performance decrease, an [Input phase loss]
PHF error is triggered.
If 2 or 3 supply mains phases are missing, the drive operate until an [Supply Mains UnderV] USF error is
triggered.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO The input phase loss monitoring function is disabled to be used when the
drive is supplied via a single-phase supply or by the DC bus
[Freewheel] YES The drive stops in freewheel in case of a supply mains phase loss has been
detected

502 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[4-20mA loss] LFL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [4-20mA loss]

[AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1

Response to 4-20mA loss on AI1.
Drive behavior on AI1 4-20 event.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored. This is the only possible configuration if [AI1 min.
value] CrL1 is not greater than 3 mA
Factory setting
[Freewheel] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] Stt, without tripping. In
this case, the error relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as
soon as the detected error disappears, according to the restart conditions
of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3-wire control]
tCC and [2-wire type] tCt if control is via the terminals). Configuring a
warning for this detected error is recommended (assigned to a digital
output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop
[fallback spd] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Spd maint.] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected error
occurred, as long as the detected error is active and the run command has
not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with some other
functions
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

[AI3 4-20mA loss] LFL3

Response to 4-20mA loss on AI3.
Drive behavior on AI3 4-20 event.
Identical to [AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1

[AI4 4-20mA loss] LFL4

Response to 4-20mA loss on AI4.
Drive behavior on AI4 4-20 event.
Identical to [AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

[AI5 4-20mA loss] LFL5

Response to 4-20mA loss on AI5.
Drive behavior on AI5 4-20 event.
Identical to [AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1
This parameter can be accessed if VW3A3203 I/O extension module has been inserted.

NVE61643 03/2020 503

Complete settings CSt-

[Fallback Speed] LFF

Fall back speed.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

[Fallback speed] LFF- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Fallback speed]

[Fallback Speed] LFF

Fall back speed.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

504 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Fieldbus monitoring] CLL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Fieldbus monitoring]

[Modbus Error Resp] SLL

Response to Modbus interruption.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to nO, Modbus communication monitoring is disabled.
 Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
 Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
 Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the commissioning
procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with integrated Modbus.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] Stt, without tripping. In
this case, the error relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as
soon as the detected error disappears, according to the restart conditions
of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3-wire control]
tCC and [2-wire type] tCt if control is via the terminals)(1)
[fallback spd] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed(1)
[Spd maint.] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected error
occurred, as long as the detected error is active and the run command has
not been removed(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with some other
functions
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

[Fallback Speed] LFF

Fall back speed.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

NVE61643 03/2020 505

Complete settings CSt-

[Embedded Modbus TCP] EMtC- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Embedded Modbus TCP]

[Eth Error Response] EtHL

Ethernet error response.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to nO, Ethernet communication monitoring is disabled.
 Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
 Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
 Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the commissioning
procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

The error response to a communication interruption is effective if the communication channel is involved
in the active command channel.
NOTE: For ATV340•••••S, the setting of this parameter must be let to [Freewheel] Yes.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] Stt, without tripping. In
this case, the error relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as
soon as the detected error disappears, according to the restart conditions
of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3-wire control]
tCC and [2-wire type] tCt if control is via the terminals)(1)
[fallback spd] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed(1)
[Spd maint.] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected error
occurred, as long as the detected error is active and the run command has
not been removed(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with some other
functions
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

[Fallback Speed] LFF

Fall back speed.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

506 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Communication module] COMO- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Communication module]

[Fieldbus Interrupt Resp] CLL

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to nO, fieldbus communication monitoring is disabled.
 Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
 Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
 Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the commissioning
procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Response to fieldbus module communication interruption.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] Stt, without tripping. In
this case, the error relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as
soon as the detected error disappears, according to the restart conditions
of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3-wire control]
tCC and [2-wire type] tCt if control is via the terminals)(1)
[fallback spd] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed(1)
[Spd maint.] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected error
occurred, as long as the detected error is active and the run command has
not been removed(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with some other
functions
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

[CANopen Error Resp] COL

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to nO, CANopen communication monitoring is disabled.
 Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
 Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
 Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the commissioning
procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Response to CANopen error.

Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with CANopen®.

NVE61643 03/2020 507

Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] Stt, without tripping. In
this case, the error relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as
soon as the detected error disappears, according to the restart conditions
of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3-wire control]
tCC and [2-wire type] tCt if control is via the terminals)(1)
[fallback spd] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed(1)
[Spd maint.] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected error
occurred, as long as the detected error is active and the run command has
not been removed(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with some other
functions
(1) Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital output
to its indication.

[Eth Error Response] etHl

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to nO, Ethernet communication monitoring is disabled.
 Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
 Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
 Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the commissioning
procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Response to Ethernet error.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Spd maintained] rLS Speed maintained as long as the detected error persists and the run
command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

508 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Fallback Speed] LFF

Fall back speed.

Setting Description
0.0...599.0 Hz Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0 Hz

NVE61643 03/2020 509

Complete settings CSt-

[Undervoltage handling] USb- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Undervoltage handling]

[Undervoltage Resp] USb

Response to undervoltage.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Error Triggered] 0 The drive triggers an error (the detected error relay assigned to [Operating
State Fault] FLt will be opened)
Factory setting
[Error Triggered 1 The drive triggers an error (the detected error relay assigned to [Operating
w/o Relay] State Fault] FLt remains closed)
[Warning 2 The warning and detected error relay remain closed. The warning can be
Triggered] assigned to a digital output or a relay

[Mains Voltage] UrES

Rated voltage of the mains supply in Vac.
The factory setting value of this parameter depends of drive rating.

Settings Code / Value Description

[380 Vac] 380 380 Vac
[400 Vac] 400 400 Vac
[415 Vac] 415 415 Vac
[440 Vac] 440 440 Vac
[460 Vac] 460 460 Vac
[480 Vac] 480 480 Vac

[Undervoltage Level] USL

Undervoltage level.
The factory setting is determined by the drive voltage rating.

Setting Description
100...354 Vac Setting range, according to drive rating
Factory setting: According to drive rating

[UnderVolt Timeout] USt

Undervoltage timeout.

Setting Description
0.2...999.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0.2 s

[Stop Type PLoss] StP

Controlled stop on power loss.
Behavior in the event of the undervoltage prevention level being reached.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No action
Factory setting
[DC Maintain] MMS This stop mode uses the inertia of the application to maintain the control
block powered, and thus to keep operational I/O state and fieldbus link as
long as possible.

510 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ramp stop] rMP Stop following an adjustable deceleration ramp [Max stop time] StM in
order to help to prevent from uncontrolled stop of the application.
[Freewheel Stop] LnF Lock (freewheel stop) without triggering an error

[UnderV. Restart Tm] tSM

Undervoltage restart time.
This parameter can be accessed if [CtrlStopPLoss] StP is set to [Ramp stop] rMP.
The time delay before authorizing the restart after a complete stop for [CtrlStopPLoss] StP is set to
[Ramp stop] rMP if the voltage has returned to normal.

Setting Description
1.0...999.9 s Setting range
Factory setting: 1.0 s

[Prevention Level] UPL

Undervoltage prevention level.
This parameter can be accessed if [CtrlStopPLoss] StP is set to [No] nO.
The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the [Mains
Voltage] UrES value.

Setting Description
141...414 V Setting range
Factory setting: According to drive rating

[Max Stop Time] StM

Maximum stop time.
This parameter can be accessed if [CtrlStopPLoss] StP is set to [Ramp stop] rMP.
This parameter defines the deceleration ramp time in case of mains loss. During this controlled stop, the
drive is powered thanks to the inertia of the application, the motor is in generator mode. It is recommended
to verify that the deceleration set is compatible with the application inertia.

Setting Description
0.01...60.00 s Setting range
Factory setting: 1.00 s

[DC Bus Maintain Time] tbS

DC bus maintain time.
This parameter can be accessed if [CtrlStopPLoss] StP is set to [DC Maintain] MMS.

Setting Description
1...9999 s Setting range
Factory setting: 9999 s

NVE61643 03/2020 511

Complete settings CSt-

[Ground Fault] GrFL- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Ground Fault]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if [Access Level] is set to [Expert] EPr
If the internal ground fault detection [Ground Fault] GrFL causes unwanted results in your application,
it is possible to substitute the internal ground fault detection by an approriate external ground fault
monitoring system. Setting the parameter [Ground Fault] GrFL to [No] No or to a percentage value of
the nominal current of the drive disables the internal ground fault detection of the drive or reduces its
effectiveness. Therefore, you must install an external ground fault detection system that is able to reliably
detect ground faults.

DANGER
GROUND FAULT MONITORING DISABLED
 Only set the parameter [Ground Fault] GrFL to [No] no or to a percentage value of the nominal
current of the drive after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
 Implement an alternative, external ground fault monitoring function that allows for an adequate,
equivalent response to a ground fault of the drive in compliance with all applicable regulations and
standards as well as the risk assessment.
 Commission and test the system with all monitoring functions enabled.
 During commissioning, verify that the alternative, external ground fault detection system properly
detects any type of ground faults by performing tests and simulations in a controlled environment
under controlled conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

[Ground Fault Activation] GrFL

Ground fault error response.
NOTE: The setting of this parameter is taken into account after a product restart.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no Disables error detection
[Yes] yES Use product internal value. Around 25 % of the drive nominal current on
drives with a power greater than 11 kW. Around 50 % of the drive nominal
current on drives with a power equal or lower than 11 kW.
Factory setting
0.0...100.0% _ Setting range, in % of the drive nominal current

512 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Motor thermal monit] tHt- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Motor thermal monit]

About this Menu

Motor thermal protection by calculating the I2t.
NOTE: The motor thermal state is memorized when the drive is switched off. The power-off time is used
to calculate the motor thermal state at the next startup.
 Self-cooled motors: The trigger curves depend on the motor frequency.
 Forced-cooled motors: Only the 50 Hz trigger curves needs to be considered, regardless of the motor
frequency.
Below a curve for 50Hz motor.

Below a curve for 60Hz motor.

NVE61643 03/2020 513

Complete settings CSt-

[Motor Th Current] ItH

Motor thermal monitoring current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate.

Setting Description

0.2...1.8_In(1) Setting range

Factory setting: According to drive rating
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the drive nameplate.

[Motor Thermal Mode] tHt

Motor thermal monitoring mode.
NOTE: An error is detected when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and reactivation occurs
when the state falls back below 100%.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No thermal monitoring
[Self cooled] ACL Self ventilated motor
Factory setting
[Force-cool] FCL Fan-cooled motor

514 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Encoder monitoring] Sdd- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Encoder monitoring]

[Load slip detection] Sdd

Load slipping monitoring function.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] No No error triggered. The warning may be assigned to a digital output or a
relay
Factory setting
[Yes] yES Error triggered. [Load slip detection] Sdd is set to [Yes] yes if [Motor
control type] Ctt is set to [FVC] fvC or [Sync.CL] FSY.
The [Load slipping] anf error is triggered by compairing the ramp output
and the speed feedback, and is effective for speeds greater than 10% of the
[Nominal Motor Freq] frs.
In the event of an error is triggered, the drive will stop in freewheel, and if
the brake logic control function has been configured, the brake command
will be set to 0.

[Encoder Coupling Monit] eCC

Encoder coupling monitoring.
This parameter can be accessed if [Encoder usage] enu is not set to [No] no.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] No Error not monitored
Factory setting
[Yes] yES Error monitored. If the brake logic control function has been configured, the
factory setting changes to [Yes] yes.
[Encoder Coupling Monit] ECC set to [Yes] yes is only possible if:
 [Load slip detection] Sdd is set to [Yes] yes, and
 [Encoder usage] ENu is not set to [NO] No, and
 [Brake assignment] blC is not set to [No] no

The error monitored is the break in the mechanical coupling of the encoder.
In the event of an error, the drive will switch to a freewheel stop, and if the
brake logic control function has been configured, the brake command will
be released.

[Encoder check time] eCt

Encoder check time.
This parameter can be accessed if:
 [Encoder usage] enu is not set to [No] no, and
 [Encoder Coupling Monit] ECC is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description
2.0...10.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 2.0 s

NVE61643 03/2020 515

Complete settings CSt-

[Braking Resistor monit] brP- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Braking Resistor monit]

About This Menu

This function is used to monitored the thermal state of the brake resistors.
The calculation used for the monitoring estimates the overall thermal state of all the brake resistors. The
brake resistor monitoring function does not replace the thermal contact monitoring of each managed
braking resistor. This function does not monitor the IGBT, the short circuit and the presence of the braking
resistor(s).The internal calculation uses the characteristics of the equivalent braking resistor such as the
time constant, the equivalent power and the rated value of the resistor. Refer to the braking resistor
supplier to gather the information. See for example the following table:

catalog number time constant catalog time constant catalog number time constant
(in s) number (in s) (in s)
VW3A7730 23 VW3A7740 39 VW3A7750 74
VW3A7731 39 VW3A7741 50 VW3A7751 116
VW3A7732 36 VW3A7742 161 VW3A7752 94
VW3A7733 74 VW3A7743 140 VW3A7753 179
VW3A7734 94 VW3A7744 131 VW3A7754 227
VW3A7735 140 VW3A7745 167 VW3A7755 235
VW3A7736 104 VW3A7746 202 VW3A7756 271
VW3A7737 217 VW3A7747 236 VW3A7757 289
VW3A7738 283 VW3A7748 234

Depending on the setting of [Braking Resistor Monit] bro, if [DBR thermal state] tHb reaches 100 %,
the error [Braking Resistor ovld] bof or the warning [BR Thermal Warning] BOA is triggered.

[Braking Resistor Monit] bro

Braking resistor monitoring.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] No No braking resistor monitoring (thereby preventing access to the other
function parameters).
Factory setting
[Warning] yES The warning may be assigned to a logic output or a relay.
[Error] flt Triggering a [Braking Resistor ovld] bof with locking of drive (freewheel
stop).

[Braking Resistor Power] brp

Rated power of the resistor used.
Insert the total power of all installed braking resistors.
This parameter can be accessed if [Braking Resistor Monit] bro is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description
0.1...3,000.0 kW Setting range
Factory setting: 0.1 kW

516 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Braking Resistor Value] brV

Rated value of the braking resistor in ohms.
This parameter can be accessed if [Braking Resistor Monit] bro is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description
0.1...200.0 Ohm Setting range
Factory setting: 0.1 Ohm

[Braking Resist T Constant] brtC

Braking resistor time constant.
This parameter can be accessed if [Braking Resistor Monit] bro is not set to [No] no.

Setting Description
0...200 s Setting range
Factory setting: 45 s

[DBR thermal state] tHb

Braking Resistor thermal state.
Read-only parameter.
At power on, the value is updated according to the time the drive has been powered off.
This parameter is expressed in % of the nominal power ([Braking Resistor Power] brp).

Setting Description
0...118% Setting range
Factory setting: _

NVE61643 03/2020 517

Complete settings CSt-

[Torque or i lim. detect] tId- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Torque or I limit detect]

[Trq/I limit. stop] SSb

Torque current limitation: behaviour configuration.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
Factory setting
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Spd maintained] rLS Speed maintained as long as the detected error persists and the run
command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC injection] dCI DC injection
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

[Trq/I limit. time out] StO

Torque current limitation: [Torque Limitation Error] SSF error delay and [Torque Limit Reached] SSA
warning delay.

Setting Description
1...9,999 ms Setting range
Factory setting: 1,000 ms

518 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Drive overload monit] obr- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Drive overload monit]

Drive Overload Monitoring

When [Drive Overload Monit] TLOL is set to [I2t Current Reduction] I2T, the drive will adapt
automatically its overload capabilities.
The current limitation will be automatically reduced depending of the machine cycles.
If [Dual Rating] DRT is set to [Normal rating] NORMAL, the maximum overload capabilities are:
 110% of drive nominal current for 60 seconds.
 135% of drive nominal current for 2 seconds.

If [Dual Rating] DRT is set to [Heavy Duty] HIGH, the maximum overload capabilities are:
 150% of drive nominal current for 60 seconds.
 180% of drive nominal current for 2 seconds.

If the drive currents is greater than the 2 or 60 seconds limits given above, the current limitation of the drive
will be reduced automatically and the [Current Reduction] TLOW warning will be activated.
The current limitation can be reduced up to drive nominal current.
NOTE: The overload state is stored when the product is powered off. At next power on, the drive will react
according to the value of [I2t Actual Load Value] TLOA.

[DriveTemp ErrorResp] oHl

Drive overtemperature error response.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Ignore] nO Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter but without an error
triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected error persists
and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Spd maintained] rLS Speed maintained as long as the detected error persists and the run
command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
1 Because, in this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output
to its indication.

[Drv Thermal Warning] tHa

Drive thermal state warning (for [Drv Therm Thd reached] TAD warning).

Setting Description
0...118% Setting range
Factory setting: 100%

NVE61643 03/2020 519

Complete settings CSt-

[Drive Overload Monit] tlol

Drive overload monitoring activation.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
If [Drive Overload Monit] tLoL is set to [Disable] diS, the monitoring of the drive overheating is
disabled.
 Verify that the settings of this parameter does not result in equipment damage.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

The factory setting is [I2t Current Reduction] I2T for drives with power up to 22kW and [Disabled] diS
for drives with power greater than 22kW.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Disabled] dis Disabled
[I2t Current I2t I2t Current Reduction
Reduction]
[Error Triggered] trip Error triggered
[Reduce to I Nom lim The motor current is limited to drive nominal current.
Drive]

[I2t Actual Load Value] TLOA

I²t actual integral load value.
If the value of this parameter is greater than 100%, the current limitation is automatically reduced.
 This value increases only if the actual current is greater than the drive nominal current.
 This value decreases automatically depending of internal calculations.

Setting Description
-3276.7...3276.7 % Setting range
Factory setting: -

[I2t Mean Load Value] TLOM

I²t mean load value
This parameter indicates the average load value of the drive.

Setting Description
-3276.7...3276.7 % Setting range
Factory setting: -

520 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Warn grp 1 definition] A1C- to [Warn grp 5 definition] A5C- Menus

Access
[Complete settings] [Error/Warning handling] [Warning groups config] [Warn grp 1 definition] to
[Warn grp 5 definition]

About This Menu

The following submenus group the warnings into 1 to 5 groups, each of which can be assigned to a relay
or a digital output for remote signaling.
When one or a number of warnings selected in a group occur, this warning group is activated.

List of Warnings
The list of warning codes is available in the chapter "Diagnostics and Troubleshooting" (see page 570).

NVE61643 03/2020 521

Complete settings CSt-

Section 8.46
[Maintenance]

[Maintenance]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Diagnostics] dAU- Menu 523
[Customer event 1] CE1- Menu 524
[Customer event 2] CE2- to [Customer event 5] CE5- Menus 525
[Customer events] CUEv- Menu 526
[Fan management] FAMA- Menu 527
[Maintenance] CSMA- Menu 527

522 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Diagnostics] dAU- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Maintenance] [Diagnostics]

About This Menu

This menu allows you to make simple test sequences for diagnostics.

[FAN Diagnostics] FNT

Diagnostics of internal fan(s).
This starts a test sequence.

[LED Diagnostics] HLT

Diagnostics of product LED(s).
This starts a test sequence.

[IGBT Diag w motor]IWT

Diagnostics of product IGBT(s).
This will start a test sequence with the connected motor (open circuit/short-circuit).

[IGBT Diag w/o motor]IWOT

Diagnostics of product IGBT(s).
This starts a test sequence without the motor (short-circuit).

NVE61643 03/2020 523

Complete settings CSt-

[Customer event 1] CE1- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Maintenance] [Customer events] [Customer event 1]

About This Menu

This menu allows you to define customized customer events based on the time.

[Config Warning 1] CCA1

Configuration of customer warning 1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not Configured] nO Not configured
Factory setting
[Counter] CPt Counter
[Date And Time] dt Date and time

[Counter Limit 1] CCL1

Configuration counter limit 1.

Setting Description
0...4294967295 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0 s

[Counter Source 1] CCS1

Configuration counter source 1.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Mains/Control ON] 0 Mains or control supply on
[Mains Supply ON] 1 Mains supply on
[Drv In Run State] 2 Drive in running state
Factory setting

[Current Counter 1] CC1

Current counter 1.

Setting Description
0...4294967295 s Setting range
Factory setting: 0 s

[Date Time Warn 1] Cdt1

Date time warning 1.
This parameter can be accessed with the Display Terminal only.

Setting Description
hh:mm DD/MM/YYYY Setting range
Factory setting: 00:00 01/01/2000

524 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Customer event 2] CE2- to [Customer event 5] CE5- Menus

Access
[Complete settings] [Maintenance] [Customer events] [Customer event 2] to [Customer event 5]

About This Menu

Identical to [Customer event 1] CE1- menu (see page 524).

[Config Warning 2] CCA2 to [Config Warning 5] CCA5

Configuration of customer warning 2 to 5.

[Counter Limit 2] CCL2 to [Counter Limit 5] CCL5

Configuration counter limit 2 to 5.

[Counter Source 2] CCS2 to [Counter Source 5] CCS5

Configuration counter source 2 to 5.

[Current Counter 2] CC2 to [Current Counter 5] CC5

Current counter 2.

[Date Time Warn 2] Cdt2 to [Date Time Warn 2] Cdt5

Date time warning 2 to 5.
This parameter can be accessed with the Display Terminal only.

NVE61643 03/2020 525

Complete settings CSt-

[Customer events] CUEv- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Maintenance] [Customer events]

[Warning Clearing] CAr

Customer warning clearing.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No Warning nO No warning clearing
Clearing] Factory setting
[Clear Event 1 rA1 Clear event 1 warning
Warning]
[Clear Event 2 rA2 Clear event 2 warning
Warning]
[Clear Event 3 rA3 Clear event 3 warning
Warning]
[Clear Event 4 rA4 Clear event 4 warning
Warning]
[Clear Event 5 rA5 Clear event 5 warning
Warning]

526 NVE61643 03/2020

 Complete settings CSt-

[Fan management] FAMA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Maintenance] [Fan management]

About This Menu

Fan speed and [Fan Operation Time] FPbt are monitored values.
An abnormal low speed or the fan trigger a warning [Fan Feedback Warning] FFdA. As soon as [Fan
Operation Time] FPbt reach the predefined value of 45,000 hours, a warning [Fan Counter Warning]
FCtA is triggered.
[Fan Operation Time] FPbt counter can be set to 0 by using the [Counter Reset] rPr parameter.

[Fan Mode] FFM

Fan activation mode.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Standard] Std The operation of the fan is enabled when the motor is running. According to
the drive rating, this could be the only available setting
Factory setting
[Always] rUn The fan is always activated
[Never] stp If the software version is:
 up to V1.5 (excluded), the fan of the drive is disabled.
 V1.5 or higher, this selection has no effect. The operation of the fan is
enabled when the motor is running
[Economy] eco The fan is activated only if necessary, according to the internal thermal state
of the drive

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the ambient temperature does not exceed 40 °C (104° F) if the fan is disabled.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

If the software version is up to V1.5 (excluded) and the [Fan Mode] FFM is set to [Never] StP, the fan
of the drive is disabled.

[Maintenance] CSMA- Menu

Access
[Complete settings] [Maintenance]

[Time Counter Reset] rPr

Time counter reset.
NOTE: The list of possible values depends on the product size.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[Run Time Reset] rtH Run time reset
[Power ON Time PtH Power ON time reset
Reset]
[Reset Fan FtH Reset fan counter
Counter]
[Clear NSM] nsm Clear number of motor starts

NVE61643 03/2020 527

Complete settings CSt-

528 NVE61643 03/2020

 Altivar Machine ATV340
Communication COM-
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 9
[Communication] COM-

[Communication] COM-

Introduction

[Communication] COM- menu presents the fieldbus submenus.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Modbus Fieldbus] Md1- Menu 530
[Com. scanner input] ICS- Menu 532
[Com. scanner output] OCS- Menu 533
[Modbus HMI] Md2- Menu 534
[Embd Eth Config] EtE- Menu 535
[Fast Device Replacement] Fdr- Menu 536
[CANopen] CnO- Menu 538
[DeviceNet] dnC- Menu 538
[Profibus] PbC- Menu 538
[Profinet] PnC- Menu 538
[Powerlink] EPL- Menu 538
[EtherCAT Module] EtC- Menu 538

NVE61643 03/2020 529

Communication COM-

[Modbus Fieldbus] Md1- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Comm parameters] [Modbus SL] [Modbus Fieldbus]

About This Menu

This menu is related to the Modbus serial communication port on the bottom of the control block.
Refer to the Modbus serial manual.

[Modbus Address] Add

Drive Modbus address.

Setting Description
[OFF] Off ...247 Setting range
Factory setting: [OFF] Off

[Modbus add Com.C.] AMOC

Modbus adress of COM option board
This parameter can be accessed if an Ethernet-IP fieldbus module has been inserted

Setting Description
[OFF] Off ...247 Setting range
Factory setting: [OFF] Off

[Bd.RateModbus] tbr
Baud rate Modbus.

Setting Code / Value Description

[4800 bps] 4k8 4,800 Bauds
[9600 bps] 9k6 9,600 Bauds
[19200 bps] 19k2 19,200 Bauds
Factory setting
[38.4 Kbps] 38k4 38,400 Bauds

[Term Word Order] tWO

Terminal Modbus: word order.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPR.

Setting Code / Value Description

[OFF] OFF Low word first
[ON] On High word first
Factory setting

[Modbus Format] tFO

Modbus communication format.

Setting Code / Value Description

[8-O-1] 8o1 8 bits odd parity 1 stop bit
[8-E-1] 8E1 8 bits even parity 1 stop bit
Factory setting
[8-N-1] 8n1 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit
[8-N-2] 8n2 8 bits no parity 2 stop bits

530 NVE61643 03/2020

 Communication COM-

[Modbus Timeout] ttO

Modbus timeout.

Setting Description
0.1 ...30.0 s Setting range
Factory setting: 10.s

[Mdb Com Stat] COM1

Modbus communication status.

Setting Code / Value Description

[r0t0] r0t0 Modbus no reception, no transmission
[r0t1] r0t1 Modbus no reception, transmission
[r1t0] r1t0 Modbus reception, no transmission
[r1t1] r1t1 Modbus reception and transmission

NVE61643 03/2020 531

Communication COM-

[Com. scanner input] ICS- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Comm parameters] [Modbus SL] [Modbus Fieldbus] [Com. scanner input]

[Scan. IN1 address] nMA1

Address of the first input word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 3201 (EtA)

[Scan. IN2 address] nMA2

Address of the second input word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 8604 (rFrd)

[Scan. IN3 address] nMA3

Address of the third input word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[Scan. IN4 address] nMA4

Address of the fourth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.

[Scan. IN5 address] nMA5

Address of the fifth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.

[Scan. IN6 address] nMA6

Address of the sixth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.

[Scan. IN7 address] nMA7

Address of the seventh input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.

[Scan. IN8 address] nMA8

Address of the eighth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.

532 NVE61643 03/2020

 Communication COM-

[Com. scanner output] OCS- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Comm parameters] [Modbus SL] [Modbus Fieldbus] [Com. scanner output]

[Scan.Out1 address] nCA1

Address of the first output word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 8501(CMd)

[Scan.Out2 address] nCA2

Address of the second output word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 8602(LFrd)

[Scan.Out3 address] nCA3

Address of the third output word.

Setting Description
0...65535 Setting range
Factory setting: 0

[Scan.Out4 address] nCA4

Address of the fourth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.

[Scan.Out5 address] nCA5

Address of the fifth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.

[Scan.Out6 address] nCA6

Address of the sixth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.

[Scan.Out7 address] nCA7

Address of the seventh output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.

[Scan.Out8 address] nCA8

Address of the eighth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.

NVE61643 03/2020 533

Communication COM-

[Modbus HMI] Md2- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Comm parameters] [Modbus SL] [Modbus HMI]

About This Menu

This menu is related to the Modbus serial communication port on the front of the control block. It is used
by default for the Display Terminal. The Display Terminal is only compliant with the following settings: [HMI
Baud Rate] tbr2 equal to [19200 bps] 19k2, [Term 2 word order] tWO2 equal to [HIGH] On and
[HMI Format] tFO2 equal to [8-E-1] 8E1.

[HMI Baud Rate] tbr2

Baud rate Modbus.

Setting Code / Value Description

[4800 bps] 4k8 4,800 Bauds
[9600 bps] 9k6 9,600 Bauds
[19200 bps] 19k2 19,200 Bauds
Factory setting
[38.4 Kbps] 38k4 38,400 Bauds

[Term 2 word order] tWO2

Terminal Modbus 2: Word order.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPR.

Setting Code / Value Description

[LOW] OFF Low word first
[HIGH] On High word first
Factory setting

[HMI Format] tFO2

HMI format.

Setting Code / Value Description

[8-O-1] 8o1 8.o.1.
[8-E-1] 8E1 8.E.1.
Factory setting
[8-N-1] 8n1 8.n.1.
[8-N-2] 8n2 8.n.2.

[Mdb com start] COM2

Modbus communication status.

Setting Code / Value Description

[r0t0] r0t0 Modbus no reception, no transmission
[r0t1] r0t1 Modbus no reception, transmission
[r1t0] r1t0 Modbus reception, no transmission
[r1t1] r1t1 Modbus reception and transmission

534 NVE61643 03/2020

 Communication COM-

[Embd Eth Config] EtE- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Comm parameters] [Embd Eth Config]

About This Menu

Refer to the Ethernet embedded manual.

[Device Name] PAn

The FDR (Fast Device Replacement) service is based on identification of the device by a “Device Name”.
In the case of the Altivar drive, this is represented by the [Device Name] PAn parameter. Check that all
the network devices have different “Device Names”.

[IP Mode Ether. Embd] IM00

IP mode Ethernet embedded.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Fixed] ManU Fixed address

[BOOTP] bOOtP BOOTP
[DHCP] dHCP DHCP
Factory setting

[IP address] IC0

IP Address (IC01, IC02, IC03, IC04).

Setting Description
0...255 Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0.0.0

[Mask] IM0
Subnet mask (IM01, IM02, IM03, IM04).

Setting Description
0...255 Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0.0.0

[Gateway] IG0
Gateway address (IG01, IG02, IG03, IG04).

Setting Description
0...255 Setting range
Factory setting: 0.0.0.0

NVE61643 03/2020 535

Communication COM-

[Fast Device Replacement] Fdr- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Comm parameters] [Embd Eth Config] [Fast Device Replacement]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if [IP mode Ether. Embd] iM00 is set to [DHCP] dHCP.

[Enable FDR] Fdv0

Enable FDR function.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no FDR service disabled
Factory setting
[Yes] YES FDR service enabled

[FDR Action] FdA0

FDR action.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not active] idLE No FDR action

Factory setting
[Save] SAvE FDR save command
[Rest] rESt FDR restore command

[FDR Operating State] FdS0

FDR operating state.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Initialization] init Initialization
[Not active] idLE Function not active
Factory setting
[Operational] oPE Operational
[Ready] rEAdY Ready
[IP Configuration] iPC IP configuration
[Not Configured] unCF Function not configured
[Reading GEt Download the current configuration
Configuration]
[Writing SEt Save the current configuration
Configuration]
[Applying APP Applying the configuration to the drive
Configuration]

[FDR Error Status] Fdr0

FDR error status.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No Error] no No error
Factory setting
[Server Timeout] tout Server timeout
[Server No File] SnF No file on server
[Server Corrupt CrPt Invalid file on server
File]
[Server Empty File] EPtY Empty file on server

536 NVE61643 03/2020

 Communication COM-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Drive Invalid File] Hinv Invalid file on drive
[CRC Error] CrC CRC error
[Version vrM Version incompatibility between drive and file
Incompatibility]
[Drive No File] HnF No file on drive
[Server Reading SiZE File size reading error on server
Size]
[Drive Opening oPEn drive can not open the file
File]
[Drive Reading rEAd drive can not read the file
File]
[Incompatibility] SCnt File incompatibility
[Drive Invalid ninv drive name is invalid
Name]
[Server Incorrect FSiZ Incorrect file size on server
File Size]
[Drive Writing File] HWF drive can not write the file
[Server Writing SWF Server can not write the file
File]

NVE61643 03/2020 537

Communication COM-

[CANopen] CnO- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Comm parameters] [CANopen]

About This Menu

Refer to the CANopen fieldbus module manual.

[DeviceNet] dnC- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Comm parameters] [DeviceNet]

About This Menu

Refer to the DeviceNet fieldbus module manual.

[Profibus] PbC- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Comm parameters] [Profibus]

About This Menu

Refer to the Profibus DP fieldbus module manual.

[Profinet] PnC- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Comm parameters] [Profinet]

About This Menu

Refer to the PROFINET fieldbus module manual.

[Powerlink] EPL- Menu

Access
[Communication] [Comm parameters] [Powerlink]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if Powerlink module (VW3A3619) has been insert. Refer to Powerlink manual
for more information.

[EtherCAT Module] EtC- Menu

Access
[Communication] [EtherCAT Module]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed if EtherCAT module has been insert. Refer to EtherCAT manual for more
information.

538 NVE61643 03/2020

 Altivar Machine ATV340
File management FMt-
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 10
[File management] FMt-

[File management] FMt-

Introduction

[File management] FMt- menu presents the management of drive configuration files.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Transfer config file] tCF- Menu 540
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu 540
[Parameter group list] FrY- Menu 541
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu 542
[Firmware update diag] FWUD- Menu 543
[Identification] OId- Menu 545
[Package version] PFV- Menu 545
[Firmware update] FWUP- Menu 546

NVE61643 03/2020 539

File management FMt-

[Transfer config file] tCF- Menu

Access
[File management] [Transfer config file]

[Copy to the drive] OPF

This allows to select a previously saved drive configuration from the Display Terminal memory and transfer
it to the drive.
The drive needs to be restarted after a configuration file transfer.

[Copy from the drive] SAF

This allows to save the actual drive configuration into the Display Terminal memory.
NOTE: The Graphic Display Terminal can store up to 16 configuration files.

[Factory settings] FCS- Menu

Access
[File management] [Factory settings]

About This Menu

This parameter allows to select the configuration to restore in case of factory setting operation.

[Config. Source] FCSI

Setting Code / Value Description

[Macro-Conf] InI Factory setting parameter set
Factory setting
[Config 1] CFG1 Customer parameter set 1
[Config 2] CFG2 Customer parameter set 2
[Config 3] CFG3 Customer parameter set 3

540 NVE61643 03/2020

 File management FMt-

[Parameter group list] FrY- Menu

Access
[File management] [Factory settings] [Parameter group list]

About This Menu

Selection of menus to be loaded.
NOTE: In factory configuration and after a return to "factory settings", [Parameter group list] FrY will be
empty.

[All] ALL
All parameters in all menus.

[Drive Configuration] drM

Load [Complete settings] CSt- menu.

[Motor Param] MOt

Load [Motor parameters] MPA- menu.

[Comm. Menu] COM

Load [Communication] COM- menu.
This parameter can be accessed if [Config. Source] FCSI is set to [Macro-Conf] ini.

[Display Config.] dIS

Load [Display screen type] MSC- menu.
This parameter can be accessed if [Config. Source] FCSI is set to [Macro-Conf] ini.

NVE61643 03/2020 541

File management FMt-

[Factory settings] FCS- Menu

Access
[File management] [Factory settings]

[Go to Factory settings] GFS

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that restoring the factory settings is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

It is only possible to revert to the factory settings if at least one group of parameters has previously been
selected.

[Save Configuration] SCSI

Save configuration.
The active configuration to be saved does not appear for selection. For example, if it is [Config 0] Str0,
only [ Config 1] Str1, [Config 2] Str2 and [ Config 3] Str3 appear. The parameter changes back
to[No] nO as soon as the operation is complete.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[Config 0] Str0 Store customer parameter set 0
[Config 1] Str1 Store customer parameter set 1
[Config 2] Str2 Store customer parameter set 2
[Config 3] Str3 Store customer parameter set 3

542 NVE61643 03/2020

 File management FMt-

[Firmware update diag] FWUD- Menu

Access
[File management] [Firmware update] [Firmware update diag]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed in expert mode and Graphic Display Terminal must be used to complete the
firmware update procedure.

[Firmware Update Status] FWSt

Setting Code / Value Description

[Inactive] CHECK Firmware update inactive
[PwrUpd in POWER Power update in progress
progress]
[PwrUpd Pending] PEND Power update pending
[Ready] RDY Firmware update ready
[Inactive] NO Firmware update inactive
[Succeeded] SUCCD Firmware update succeeded
[Update Error] FAILED Update error
[In Progress] PROG Firmware update in progress
[Requested] RQSTD Firmware update requested
[Transfer In TRLD Transfer in progress
Progress]
[Transfer Done] TROK Transfer done
[Package cleared] CLEAR Package cleared
[Warning] SUCWR Firmware update succeeded with warnings
[Drive State Error] FLSTA Drive state error
[Package Error] FLPKG Package error
[Saving conf] SAvE Firmware update is saving the current configuration
[Post Script] POSt Firmware update is doing the post FWUPD

[Firmware Update Error] FWEr

Setting Code / Value Description

[No Error] NO No error
[Lock Error] LOCK Lock error
[Package Error] MD5 Package error
[Package COMP Package compatibility error
compatibility error]
[Ask error] ASK Ask error
[Reset Drive Error] RESET Reset drive error
[Conf Saving SAVE Configuration saving warning
Warning]
[Conf Loading LOAD Configuration loading warning
Warning]
[Post Script SCP Post script warning
Warning]
[Package DES Package description error
Description Error]
[Package not PKG Package not found
found]
[Power Supply SPWr Power supply error
error]
[Boot M3 error] BTM3 Boot M3 error

NVE61643 03/2020 543

File management FMt-

Setting Code / Value Description

[Boot C28 error] BTC28 Boot C28 error
[M3 Error] M3 M3 error
[C28 error] C28 C28 error
[CPLD error] CPLD CPLD error
[Boot Power Error] PWR Boot power error
[Emb. Eth Boot EMBT Embedded ethernet boot error
Error]
[Emb. Eth Error] EMIL Embedded ethernet error
[Emb. Eth Web EMWB Embedded ethernet WebServer error
Error]
[Module Eth Boot OPTBT Module ethernet boot error
Error]
[Module Eth Error] OPTIL Module ethernet error
[Module Eth Web OPTWB Module ethernet WebServer error
Error]
[Password PSWD Password enabled
enabled]
[Flash Error] MEM Flash error
[Package error] IFO Package information error

544 NVE61643 03/2020

 File management FMt-

[Identification] OId- Menu

Access
[File management] [Firmware update] [Identification]

About This Menu

This is a read-only menu that cannot be configured. It enables the following information to be displayed:
 Drive reference, power rating, and voltage
 Drive software version
 Drive serial number
 Type of option modules present, with their software version
 Display Terminal type and version

[Package version] PFV- Menu

Access
[File management] [Firmware update] [Package version]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed in expert mode.

[Package Type] PKtp

Firmware Update Package Type

Setting Code / Value Description

[Product] Prd Firware update product package
[Module] OPt Firware update option package
[Spare part] SPr Firware update spare parts package
[Customized] CUS Firware update customized package
[Indus] Ind Firware update industrialization package

[Package Version] PKVS

Firmware Update Package Version

Setting Description

0...65,535 Setting range

Factory setting: _

NVE61643 03/2020 545

File management FMt-

[Firmware update] FWUP- Menu

Access
[File management] [Firmware update]

About This Menu

This menu can be accessed in expert mode.

[Update Firmware] FWAP

Firmware Update Application.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no No
Factory setting
[Yes] yes Yes

[Abort Firmware Update] FWCL

Firmware Update Clear.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] no No
Factory setting
[Yes] yes Yes

546 NVE61643 03/2020

 Altivar Machine ATV340
My preferences MYP-
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 11
[My preferences] MYP-

[My preferences] MYP-

Introduction

[My preferences] MYP- menu presents the possible settings for the user-defined HMI and
parameter access.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
11.1 [Language] 548
11.2 [Password] 549
11.3 [Parameter access] 551
11.4 [Customization] 553
11.5 [Date & Time settings] 557
11.6 [Access level] 558
11.7 [Webserver] 559
11.8 [Functions key mgnt] 560
11.9 [LCD settings] 561
11.10 [QR code] 562
11.11 [Pairing password] 563

NVE61643 03/2020 547

My preferences MYP-

Section 11.1
[Language]

[Language]

[Language] LnG- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Language]

About This Menu

This menu allows to select the Display Terminal language.

548 NVE61643 03/2020

 My preferences MYP-

Section 11.2
[Password]

[Password]

[Password] COd- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Password]

About This Menu

Enables the configuration to be protected with an access code or a password to be entered in order to
access a protected configuration:
 The drive is unlocked when the password is set to [No password defined] nO or when the correct
password has been entered. All menus can be accessed.
 Before protecting the configuration with a password, you must:
 Define the [Upload rights] ULr and [Download rights] dLr.
 Make a careful note of the password and keep it in a place where you are able to find it.

Locking the drive modifies the menu access. If the password is locked:
 [My Menu ] MYMN- menu (in [Simply Start] SYS- menu) remains visible if not empty,
 [Dashboard] DSH-, [Diagnostics] DIA- and [Display] MON- menus remain visible with the read-
only parameters. Sub-menus with settable parameters are not visible.
 [Complete Settings] CST- and [Communication] COM- menus are not visible,
 [Transfer config file] TCF- menu (in [File Management] FMT- menu) remains visible.
 in the [My preferences] MYP- menu, remains visible:
 [Language] LNG,
 [Password] COD- menu,
 [Display screen Type] MSC- menu (in [Customization] CUS- menu),
 [Date & Time settings] RTC,
 [Access Level] LAC, and
 [LCD settings] CNL- menu.

[Password status] PSSt

Password status.
Read only parameter.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No password nO No password defined
defined] Factory setting
[Password is UL Password is unlocked
unlocked]
[Password is LOC Password is locked
locked]

[Password] PWd
6-characters password.To lock the drive, define and enter your password. [Password status] PSSt value
switches to [Password is locked] LOC.
To unlock the drive, the password must be entered. Once the correct code has been entered, the drive is
unlocked and [[Password status] PSSt value switches to [Password is unlocked] UL. Access will be
locked again the next time the drive is switched on.
To modify the password, unlock the drive then enter the new password. Entering a new password locks
the drive.
To remove the password, the drive must be unlocked and the password 000000 must be entered.
[[Password status] PSSt value switches to [No password defined] NO. At next switch-on, the drive
remains unlocked.

NVE61643 03/2020 549

My preferences MYP-

[Upload rights] ULr

Upload rights.

Code / Value Description

Setting
[Permitted] ULr0 Commissioning tools or the Display Terminal can save the whole
configuration (password, monitoring, configuration)
Factory setting
[Not allowed] ULr1 Commissioning tools or the Display Terminal cannot save the configuration
if the drive is not protected by a password or if the in-correct password has
been entered

[Download rights] DLr

Download rights.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Locked drv] DLr0 Lock drive: the configuration can be downloaded to the drive only if the drive
is protected by a password, which is the same as the password of the
configuration to be downloaded
[Unlock. drv] DLr1 Unlock drive: the configuration can be downloaded to the drive or a
configuration can be modified if the drive is unlocked or is not protected by
a password
Factory setting
[Not allowed] DLr2 The configuration cannot be downloaded
[Lock/unlock] DLr3 Combination of [Locked drv] dLr0 and [Unlock. drv] dLr1

550 NVE61643 03/2020

 My preferences MYP-

Section 11.3
[Parameter access]

[Parameter access]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Restricted channels] PCd- Menu 552
[Restricted param] PPA- Menu 552
[Visibility] VIS- Menu 552

NVE61643 03/2020 551

My preferences MYP-

[Restricted channels] PCd- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Parameter access] [Restricted access] [Restricted channels]

About This Menu

Following channels can be selected to disable the accessibility to the related parameters.

[HMI] COn
Display Terminal.

[PC Tool] PWS

DTM-based commissioning software.

[Modbus] Mdb
Embedded Modbus serial.

[CANopen] CAn
CANopen fieldbus module.

[Com. Module] nEt

Fieldbus option module.

[Restricted param] PPA- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Parameter access] [Restricted access] [Restricted param]

About This Menu

In these screens, all parameters in the [Complete settings] CSt- menu can be protected and are
displayed for selection, except for the Expert parameters.
Press the All key to select all the parameters. Press the None key again to deselect all the parameters.
Content of the [Complete settings] CSt- menu. No selections can be made in this screen if there are no
parameters.

[Visibility] VIS- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Parameter access] [Visibility]

About This Menu

Selection to display all parameters or only the active parameters.

[Parameters] PVIS
Parameters.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Active] ACt Only active parameters can be accessed

Factory setting
[All] ALL All parameters can be accessed

552 NVE61643 03/2020

 My preferences MYP-

Section 11.4
[Customization]

[Customization]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[My menu config.] MYC- Menu 554
[Display screen type] MSC- Menu 554
[Param. Bar Select] PbS- Menu 555
[Customer parameters] CYP- Menu 555
[Service message] SEr- Menu 556

NVE61643 03/2020 553

My preferences MYP-

[My menu config.] MYC- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Customization] [My menu config.]

About This Menu

This menu allows to customize the [My Menu] MYMn- menu (see page 54).

[Parameter Selection] UMP

Content of the [Complete settings] CSt- menu.
No selection can be made in this screen if there are no parameters.

[Selected List] UML

This menu allows to sort the selected parameters.

[My Menu] MYMn

Used to define the name of the customized menu.

[Display screen type] MSC- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Customization] [Display screen type]

About This Menu

This parameter allows to select the type of display for the default screen.

[Display value type] Mdt

Type of screen display.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Digital] dEC Digital values

Factory setting
[Bar graph] bAr Bar graph
[List] LISt List of values
[Vu Meter] vUMEt Vu meter

[Parameter Selection] MPC

Customized selection.
This view allows to select the parameters to display on the default screen.

554 NVE61643 03/2020

 My preferences MYP-

[Param. Bar Select] PbS- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Customization] [Param. Bar Select]

About This Menu

This view allows to select the parameters to display on the top line of the Display Terminal screen.

[Customer parameters] CYP- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Customization] [Customer parameters]

About This Menu

This menu allows to rename up to 15 parameters.

[Parameter Selection] SCP

Parameter selection.
This view allows to select up to 15 parameters.

[Custom Selection] CPM

Customized selection.
This view allows to set for each selected parameter:
 The name
 The unit if relevant (a custom unit is available)
 A multiplier (1...1000) if relevant
 A divisor (1...1000) if relevant
 An offset (-99.00...99.00) if relevant

NVE61643 03/2020 555

My preferences MYP-

[Service message] SEr- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Customization] [Service message]

About This Menu

This menu allows to define a user-defined service message (5 lines, 23 digits per line).
This message can be displayed in [theDiagnostics] dIA-, [Diag. data] ddt- menu and [Service
message] SEr- submenus.

[LINE 1] SML01
Line 1.

[LINE 2] SML02
Line 2.

[LINE 3] SML03
Line 3.

[LINE 4] SML04
Line 4.

[LINE 5] SML05
Line 5.

556 NVE61643 03/2020

 My preferences MYP-

Section 11.5
[Date & Time settings]

[Date & Time settings]

[Date/time settings] RTC- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Date/time settings]

About This Menu

This view allows to set date and time. This information is used for the time stamping of all logged data.
If a time server is connected over Ethernet and configured in the webserver, date and time data are
updated automatically according to the configuration.
Date and time information shall be available (time server available and configured, or Display Terminal
plugged) at drive power up to enable the time stamping of the logged data.
Modifying these settings will modify previously logged data value in case of average data based on time.

NVE61643 03/2020 557

My preferences MYP-

Section 11.6
[Access level]

[Access level]

[Access level] LAC- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Access level]

[Access Level] LAC

Level of access control.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Basic] bAS Access to the [Simply start] SYS-, [Dashboard] dSH-, [Diagnostics]
dIA-, [File management] FMT- and [My preferences] MYP- menus
only.
[Standard] Std Access to all menus.
Factory setting
[Expert] EPr Access to all menus and to additional parameters.

558 NVE61643 03/2020

 My preferences MYP-

Section 11.7
[Webserver]

[Webserver]

[Webserver] WbS- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Webserver]

About This Menu

This menu allows to manage Web services.

[EnableWebserver] EWEE
Enable Web services for the embedded Ethernet adapter.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO Webserver disabled
[Yes] YES Webserver enabled
Factory setting

[Reset EmbWeb] rWPE

Reset the embedded Ethernet webserver to its default configuration.

Setting Code / Value Description

[No] nO No
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Yes

[Webserver default password] wdp

8-digits password. A unique password is provided and must be entered at the first connection of the
webserver in order to have access to the administrator accout (username = ADMIN).
NOTE: The Webserver default password is also written on the product nameplate.

NVE61643 03/2020 559

My preferences MYP-

Section 11.8
[Functions key mgnt]

[Functions key mgnt]

[Functions key mgnt] FKG- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [Functions key mgnt]

About This Menu

This menu allows to assign functions to the Display Terminal function keys.

[F1 key assignment] Fn1

Function key 1. Following possible assignments cannot be accessed in [I/O profile] IO configuration.

Setting Code / Value Description

[Not assigned] nO Not assigned
Factory setting
[Jog] fjog Function key jog affectation
[Preset Speed 1] FPS1 Function key preset speed 1 assignment
[Preset Speed 2] FPS2 Function key preset speed 2 assignment
[PID Ref FPr1 Function key preset PID 1 assignment
Frequency 1]
[PID Ref FPr2 Function key preset PID 2 assignment
Frequency 2]
[+Speed] FuSP Function key faster assignment
[-Speed] FdSP Function key slower assignment

[F2 key assignment] Fn2

Function key 2.
Identical to [F1 key assignment] Fn1.

[F3 key assignment] Fn3

Function key 3.
Identical to [F1 key assignment] Fn1.

[F4 key assignment] Fn4

Function key 4.
Identical to [F1 key assignment] Fn1.

560 NVE61643 03/2020

 My preferences MYP-

Section 11.9
[LCD settings]

[LCD settings]

[LCD settings] CnL- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [LCD settings]

About This Menu

This menu allows to set the Display Terminal related parameters.

[Screen Contrast] CSt

Screen contrast setting.

Setting Description
0...100% Setting range
Factory setting: 50%

[Standby] SbY
Stand-by delay.
NOTE: Disabling the automatic standby function of the display terminal backlight will reduce the backlight
service time.

Setting Description
nO...10 min Automatic backlight OFF time
Factory setting: 10 min

[Display Terminal locked] KLCK

Display Terminal key locked. Press ESC and Home keys to Lock manually & unlock the Display Terminal
keys. The Stop key remains active when the Display Terminal is locked.

Setting Description
nO...10 min Setting range
Factory setting: 5 min

NVE61643 03/2020 561

My preferences MYP-

Section 11.10
[QR code]

[QR code]

[QR code] qrC- Menu

Access
[My preferences] [QR code]

About This Menu

This menu can only be accessed with the Graphic Display Terminal.
It gives access to 5 QR Codes:
 [QR Code] QCC: scanning this QR code brings to a landing page on Internet with the information on
the Technical product datasheet and a link for Schneider Electric App available for services.
 [My link 1] MYL1- to [My link 4] MYL4-: 4 QR codes customized with the commissioning software.
By default, scanning these QR codes brings to the same landing page as [QR Code] QCC. To
customize these QR codes with SoMove, go to “Device > HMI Personalization > QR codes”.
NOTE: The name “My link x” can also be changed during the customization.

562 NVE61643 03/2020

 My preferences MYP-

Section 11.11
[Pairing password]

[Pairing password]

[Pairing password] PPi

Access
[My preferences] [Pairing password]

About This Menu

This function can only be accessed in Expert mode.This function is used to detect whenever an option
module has been replaced or the software has been modified in any way. When a pairing password is
entered, the parameters of the option modules currently inserted are stored. On every subsequent power-
up, these parameters are verified and, in the event of a discrepancy, the drive locks in [Boards
Compatibility] HCF. Before the drive can be restarted, it is necessary to revert to the original situation or
reenter the pairing password.
The following parameters are verified:
 The type of option modules.
 The software version of the drive and the option modules.
 The serial number for the control block boards.

[Pairing password] PPI

Operation as a pair password.

Setting Description
[OFF] OFF...9,999 Setting range
Factory setting: OFF

The [OFF] OFF value signifies that the pairing password function is inactive.
The [ON] On value signifies that the pairing password function is active and that a password is required
to start the drive in the event of a [Boards Compatibility] HCF detected error.
As soon as the password has been entered, the drive is unlocked and the code changes to [ON] On.

NVE61643 03/2020 563

My preferences MYP-

564 NVE61643 03/2020

 Altivar Machine ATV340
Maintenance and Diagnostics
NVE61643 03/2020

Part III
Maintenance and diagnostics

Maintenance and diagnostics

What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
12 Maintenance 567
13 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 569

NVE61643 03/2020 565

Maintenance and Diagnostics

566 NVE61643 03/2020

 Altivar Machine ATV340
Maintenance
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 12
Maintenance

Maintenance

Maintenance

Limitation of Warranty
The warranty does not apply if the product has been opened, except by Schneider Electric services.

Servicing

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Read and understand the instructions in Safety Information chapter before performing any procedure in
this chapter.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

The temperature of the products described in this manual may exceed 80 °C (176 °F) during operation.

WARNING
HOT SURFACES
 Ensure that any contact with hot surfaces is avoided.
 Do not allow flammable or heat-sensitive parts in the immediate vicinity of hot surfaces.
 Verify that the product has sufficiently cooled down before handling it.
 Verify that the heat dissipation is sufficient by performing a test run under maximum load conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING
INSUFFICIENT MAINTENANCE
Verify that the maintenance activities described below are performed at the specified intervals.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Adherence to the environmental conditions must be ensured during operation of the drive. In addition,
during maintenance, verify and, if appropriate, correct all factors that may have an impact on the
environmental conditions.

Part concerned Activity Interval (1)

Overall condition All parts such as housing, HMI, Perform a visual inspection At least every year
control block, connections, etc.
Corrosion Terminals, connectors, screws, Inspect and clean if required
EMC plate
Dust Terminals, fans, enclosures air Inspect and clean if required
inlets and air outlets, air filters of
cabinet
Floor standing drives filter mats Inspect At least every year
Change At least every 4 years
(1) Maximum maintenance intervals from the date of commissioning. Reduce the intervals between maintenance to
adapt maintenance to the environmental conditions, the operating conditions of the drive, and to any other factor
that may influence the operation and/ or maintenance requirements of the drive.

NVE61643 03/2020 567

Maintenance

Part concerned Activity Interval (1)

Cooling Wall mounting drives fan Verify the fan operation At least every year
Replace the fan, see catalog and After 3 to 5 years,
the instructions sheets on depending on the operating
www.schneider-electric.com. conditions
Fastening All screws for electrical and Verify tightening torques
mechanical connections
(1) Maximum maintenance intervals from the date of commissioning. Reduce the intervals between maintenance to
adapt maintenance to the environmental conditions, the operating conditions of the drive, and to any other factor
that may influence the operation and/ or maintenance requirements of the drive.

Spares and Repairs

Serviceable product. Please contact your Customer Care Center on:
www.schneider-electric.com/CCC.

Long Time Storage

If the drive was not connected to mains for an extended period of time, the capacitors must be restored to
their full performance before the motor is started.

NOTICE
REDUCED CAPACITOR PERFORMANCE
 Apply mains voltage to the drive for one hour before starting the motor if the drive has not been
connected to mains for the following periods of time:
 12 months at a maximum storage temperature of +50°C (+122°F)
 24 months at a maximum storage temperature of +45°C (+113°F)
 36 months at a maximum storage temperature of +40°C (+104°F)

 Verify that no Run command can be applied before the period of one hour has elapsed.
 Verify the date of manufacture if the drive is commissioned for the first time and run the specified
procedure if the date of manufacture is more than 12 months in the past.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

If the specified procedure cannot be performed without a Run command because of internal mains
contactor control, perform this procedure with the power stage enabled, but the motor being at standstill
so that there is no appreciable mains current in the capacitors.

Fan Replacement
It is possible to order a new fan for the drive maintenance, see the catalog numbers on www.schneider-
electric.com.

Customer Care Center

For additional support, you can contact our Customer Care Center on:
www.schneider-electric.com/CCC.

568 NVE61643 03/2020

 Altivar Machine ATV340
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
NVE61643 03/2020

Chapter 13
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Overview
This chapter describes the various types of diagnostics and provides troubleshooting assistance.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Read and understand the instructions in Safety Information chapter before performing any procedure in
this chapter.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
13.1 Warning Codes 570
13.2 Error Codes 572
13.3 FAQ 628

NVE61643 03/2020 569

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Section 13.1
Warning Codes

Warning Codes

Warning Codes

List of Available Warnings Messages

Setting Code Description

[No Warning stored] NOA No warning stored
[Fallback Frequency] FRF Reaction on event: Fallback frequency
[Speed Maintained] RLS Reaction on event: Speed maintained
[Type of stop] STT Reaction on event: Stop following [Type of stop] STT
without triggering an error
[Ref Frequency Warning] SRA Frequency reference reached
[PID error Warning] PEE PID error warning (see page 367)
[PID Feedback Warn] PFA PID feedback warning (see page 359)
[PID High Fdbck Warn] PFAH PID feedback high threshold reached (see page 359)
[PID Low Fdbck Warn] PFAL PID feedback low threshold reached (see page 359)
[Limit Switch Reached] LSA Limit switch reached (see page 390)
[Slack Rope Warning] RSDA Slack rope warning (see page 304)
[Dynamic Load Warning] DLDA Dynamic load warning (see page 305)
[AI3 Th Warning] TP3A AI3 Thermal warning (see page 184)
[AI4 Th Warning] TP4A AI4 Thermal warning (see page 184)
[AI5 Th Warning] TP5A AI5 Thermal warning (see page 184)
[AI1 4-20 Loss Warning] AP1 AI1 4-20 mA loss warning (see page 503)
[AI3 4-20 Loss Warning] AP3 AI3 4-20 mA loss warning (see page 503)
[AI4 4-20 Loss Warning] AP4 AI4 4-20 mA loss warning (see page 503)
[AI5 4-20 Loss Warning] AP5 AI5 4-20 mA loss warning (see page 503)
[Drive Thermal Warning] THA Drive overhearting warning (see page 519)
[IGBT Thermal Warning] TJA IGBT thermal state warning
[Fan Counter Warning] FCTA Fan counter speed warning (see page 527)
[Fan Feedback Warning] FFDA Fan feedback warning (see page 527)
[BR Thermal Warning] BOA Braking resistor thermal warning
[Ext. Error Warning] EFA External error warning (see page 499)
[Undervoltage Warning] USA Undervoltage warning (see page 510)
[Preventive UnderV Active] UPA Controlled stop threshold is reached (see page 510)
[Mot Freq High Thd] FTA Motor frequency high threshold 1 reached
(see page 369)
[Mot Freq Low Thd] FTAL Motor frequency low threshold 1 reached
(see page 369)
[Pulse Warn Thd Reached] FQLA Pulse warning threshold reached (see page 430)
[Mot Freq Low Thd 2] F2AL Motor frequency low threshold 2 reached
(see page 369)
[High Speed Reached] FLA High speed reached warning
[Ref Freq High Thd reached] RTAH Reference frequency high threshold reached
(see page 370)
[Ref Freq Low Thd reached] RTAL Reference frequency low threshold reached
(see page 370)
[2nd Freq Thd Reached] F2A Motor frequency high threshold 2 reached
(see page 369)
[Current Thd Reached] CTA Motor current high treshold reached (see page 369)

570 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Setting Code Description

[Low Current Reached] CTAL Motor current low threshold reached (see page 369)
[High Torque Warning] TTHA High torque threshold reached (see page 370)
[Low Torque Warning] TTLA Low torque threshold reached (see page 370)
[Process Undld Warning] ULA Underload warning (see page 424)
[Process Overload Warning] OLA Overload warning (see page 426)
[Torque Limit Reached] SSA Torque limit reached (see page 518)
[Torque Control Warning] RTA Torque control warning (see page 399)
[Drv Therm Thd reached] TAD Drive thermal threshold reached
[Motor Therm Thd reached] TSA Motor thermal threshold reached (see page 370)
[Mot2 Therm Thd reached] TS2 Motor 2 thermal threshold reached (see page 370)
[Mot3 Therm Thd reached] TS3 Motor 3 thermal threshold reached (see page 370)
[Mot4 Therm Thd reached] TS4 Motor 4 thermal threshold reached (see page 370)
[Power High Threshold] PTHA Power high threshold reached
[Power Low Threshold] PTHL Power low threshold reached
[Cust Warning 1] CAS1 Customer warning 1 active (see page 524)
[Cust Warning 2] CAS2 Customer warning 2 active (see page 525)
[Cust Warning 3] CAS3 Customer warning 3 active
[Cust Warning 4] CAS4 Customer warning 4 active
[Cust Warning 5] CAS5 Customer warning 5 active
[Power Cons Warning] POWD Power consumption warning
[Slipping warn] ANA Slipping warning (see page 515)
[Load Mvt Warn] BSA Load movement warning
[Brake Cont Warn] BCA Brake contact warning (see page 290)
[AI1 Th Warning] TP1A AI1 Thermal warning (see page 184)
[Current Reduc Warn] TLOW Current reduction warning (see page 520)
[M/S Device Warn] MSDA Master/Slave device warning (see page 236)
[Backlash Warn] BSQA Backlash warning (see page 309)
[Encoder Thermal Warn] TPEA Encoder module thermal warning (see page 184)
[Temp Sens AI1 Warn] TS1A Temperature sensor AI1 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI3 Warn] TS3A Temperature sensor AI3 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI4 Warn] TS4A Temperature sensor AI4 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI5 Warn] TS5A Temperature sensor AI5 warning (open circuit)
[DC Bus Ripple War] DCRW DC Bus Ripple Warning (see page 218)

NVE61643 03/2020 571

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Section 13.2
Error Codes

Error Codes

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Overview 575
[Load slipping] AnF 576
[Angle error] ASF 576
[Brake Control] bLF 577
[Brake Resistor ovid] bOF 577
[Brake Feedback] brF 578
[Backlash Error] BSqF 578
[DB unit sh. circuit] bUF 579
[DB unit op. circuit] bUFO 579
[Circuit Breaker Error] CbF 580
[Incorrect Configuration] CFF 580
[Invalid Configuration] CFI 581
[Conf Transfer Error] CFI2 581
[Pre-settings Transfer Error] CFI3 582
[Empty Configuration] CFI4 582
[Fieldbus Com Interrupt] CnF 583
[CANopen Com Interrupt] COF 583
[Precharge Capacitor] CrF1 584
[Channel Switch Error] CSF 584
[DC Bus Ripple Error] DCRE 585
[Dynamic Load Error] dLF 585
[Encoder Coupling] ECF 586
[EEPROM Control] EEF1 586
[EEPROM Power] EEF2 587
[Encoder] EnF 587
[External Error] EPF1 588
[Fieldbus Error] EPF2 588
[Embd Eth Com Interrupt] EtHF 589
[Out Contact Closed Error] FCF1 589
[Out Contact Opened Error] FCF2 590
[FDR 1 Error] FDR1 590
[FDR 2 Error] FDR2 591
[Firmware Update Error] FWEr 591
[Boards Compatibility] HCF 592
[Input Overheating] iHF 592
[Internal Link Error] ILF 593
[Internal Error 0] InF0 593
[Internal Error 1] InF1 593
[Internal Error 2] InF2 594
[Internal Error 3] InF3 594

572 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Topic Page
[Internal Error 4] InF4 594
[Internal Error 6] InF6 595
[Internal Error 7] InF7 595
[Internal Error 8] InF8 595
[Internal Error 9] InF9 596
[Internal Error 10] InFA 596
[Internal Error 11] InFb 596
[Internal Error 12] InFC 597
[Internal Error 13] InFD 597
[Internal Error 14] InFE 597
[Internal Error 15] InFF 598
[Internal Error 16] InFG 598
[Internal Error 17] InFH 598
[Internal Error 18] InFi 599
[Internal Error 19] InFJ 599
[Internal Error 20] InFk 600
[Internal Error 21] InFl 600
[Internal Error 22] InFM 600
[Internal Error 25] InFP 601
[Internal Error 27] InFr 601
[Input Contactor] LCF 602
[AI1 4-20mA loss] LFF1 602
[AI3 4-20mA loss] LFF3 603
[AI4 4-20mA loss] LFF4 603
[AI5 4-20mA loss] LFF5 604
[Load Mvt Error] MdCF 604
[MultiDrive Link Error] MdLF 605
[M/S Device Error] MSdF 605
[DC Bus Overvoltage] ObF 606
[Overcurrent] OCF 606
[Drive Overheating] OHF 607
[Process Overload] OLC 607
[Motor Overload] OLF 608
[Single Output Phase Loss] OPF1 608
[Output Phase Loss] OPF2 609
[Supply Mains Overvoltage] OSF 609
[Program Loading Error] PGLF 610
[Program Running Error] PGrF 610
[Input phase loss] PHF 611
[Rotation Angle Monit] RAdF 611
[Safety Function Error] SAFF 612
[Safety Violation] SAVF 612
[Motor short circuit] SCF1 613
[Ground Short Circuit] SCF3 613
[IGBT Short Circuit] SCF4 614
[Motor Short Circuit] SCF5 614

NVE61643 03/2020 573

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Topic Page
[Safety Config Error] SCFF 615
[Modbus Com Interruption] SLF1 615
[PC Com Interruption] SLF2 616
[HMI Com Interruption] SLF3 616
[Safety IO Error] SIOF 617
[Motor Overspeed] SOF 617
[Encoder Feedback Loss] SPF 618
[Torque timeout] SrF 618
[Torque Limitation Error] SSF 619
[Motor Stall Error] StF 619
[AI1 Thermal Sensor Error] t1CF 620
[AI3 Thermal Sensor Error] t3CF 620
[AI4 Thermal Sensor Error] t4CF 621
[AI5 Thermal Sensor Error] t5CF 621
[Encoder Th Sensor Error] tECF 622
[AI1 Th Level Error] tH1F 622
[AI3 Th Level Error] tH3F 623
[AI4 Th Level Error] tH4F 623
[AI5 Th Level Error] tH5F 624
[Encoder Th Detected Error] tHEF 624
[IGBT Overheating] tJF 625
[Drive Overload] tLOF 625
[Autotuning Error] tnF 626
[Process Underload] ULF 626
[Supply Mains UnderV] USF 627

574 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Overview

Clearing the Detected Error

This table presents the steps to follow if intervention on the drive system is required:

Step Action
1 Disconnect all power, including external control power that may be present.
2 Lock all power disconnects in the open position.
3 Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge (the drive LEDs are not indicators of the
absence of DC bus voltage).
4 Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA/+ and PC/- terminals to ensure that the voltage is less
than 42 Vdc.
5 If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely, contact your local Schneider Electric representative.
Do not repair or operate the drive.
6 Find and correct the cause of the detected error.
7 Restore power to the drive to confirm that the detected error has been rectified.

After the cause has been removed, the detected error can be cleared by:
 Switching off the drive.
 Using the [Product Restart] rP parameter.
 Using the digital input or the control bit assigned to [Prod Restart Assign] rPA.
 Using the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr- function.
 A digital input or control bit set to the [Fault reset] rSt- function.
 Pressing the STOP/RESET key on the Display Terminal depending on the setting of [Stop Key Enable]
PSt.

How To Clear the Error Code?

The following table summarizes the possibilities to clear a detected error:

How to clear the error code after the cause has been List of the cleared error
removed
 Switch off the drive. All detected error.
 Use the [Product Restart] rP parameter.
 Use the digital input or the control bit assigned to [Prod
Restart Assign] rPA.
 As soon as its cause has been removed. CFF, CFI, CFI2, CFI3, CFI4, CSF, FWER, HCF, PGLF,
PHF, USF
 Use the digital input or the control bit assigned to ANF, ASF, BRF, BSQF, ECF, ENF, MDCF, SOF, SPF,
[Fault Reset Assign] rSF. TNF
 Press the STOP/RESET key.

 Use the digital input or the control bit assigned to BLF, BOF, CNF, COF, DLF, EPF1, EPF2, ETHF, FCF2,
[Fault Reset Assign] rSF. FDR1, FDR2, IHF, INF9, INFB, INFD, LCF, LFF1, LFF3,
 Press the STOP/RESET key. LFF4, LFF5, MDLF, MSDF, OBF, OHF, OLC, OLF, OPF1,
 Use the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr- function. OPF2, OSF, RADF, SCF4, SCF5, SLF1, SLF2, SLF3,
SRF, SSF, STF, T1CF, T3CF, T4CF, T5CF, TECF, TH1F,
TH3F, TH4F, TH5F, THEF, TJF, TLOF, ULF

NVE61643 03/2020 575

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Load slipping] AnF

Probable Cause
Not following the ramp. The difference between the output frequency and the speed feedback is not
correct.

Remedy
 Confirm the drive rating according to the application (motor, load, and so on.)
 Verify the motor, gain, and stability parameters.
 Add a braking resistor.
 Verify the mechanical coupling and wiring of the encoder.
 If the torque control function is used and if the encoder is assigned to speed feedback,
 Set [Load slip detection] Sdd = [No] nO.

 Set both [Positive deadband] dbP and [Negative deadband] dbn to a value less than 10% of the
nominal motor frequency.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

[Angle error] ASF

Probable Cause
This error is triggered during the phase-shift angle measurement if the motor phase is disconnected or if
the motor inductance is too high.

Remedy
 Verify the motor phases and the maximum current allowed by the drive.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

576 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Brake Control] bLF

Probable Cause
 Brake release current not reached.
 The torque set point is not reached.
 The fluxing current is not stable.

Remedy
 Verify the drive/motor connection.
 Verify the motor windings.
 Verify the [Brk Release Current] Ibr and [Brake release I Rev] Ird settings.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Brake Resistor ovid] bOF

Probable Cause
The braking resistor is overloaded

Remedy
 Wait for the braking resistor to cool down.
 Verify the nominal power of the braking resistor.
 Verify the [Braking Resistor Power] brP and [Braking Resistor Value] brv parameters.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 577

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Brake Feedback] brF

Probable Cause
 The status of the brake feedback contact or the status of the brake relay feedback is not correct
compared to the brake logic control.
 The brake does not stop the motor quickly enough (detected by measuring the speed on the "Pulse
input" input).

Remedy
 Verify the brake feedback circuit.
 Verify the brake logic control circuit.
 Verify the brake behavior.
 Verify that the setting of [Brake Release Time] BRT and [Brake Engage Time] BET take into account
the brake response time, [Brake Fdbk Filter] FbCI and [Brake Rly Fdbk Filter] FBRI.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

[Backlash Error] BSqF

Probable Cause
The torque threshold used for backlash function can not be reached after [BL Monit Delay] bqt.

Remedy
 Verify the settings
 Verify the coupling

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

578 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[DB unit sh. circuit] bUF

Probable Cause
 Short-circuit from braking circuit.
 Braking unit not connected. (not applicable for drive system braking unit option).

Remedy
 Verify the wiring of the braking unit.
 Verify that the braking unit value is not too low.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[DB unit op. circuit] bUFO

Probable Cause
 Open-circuit from braking circuit.
 Braking resistor not connected.

Remedy
 Verify the wiring of the braking resistor.
 Verify by measurement that the resistance of the braking resistor is not too high.
 Verify the parameter brI1.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

NVE61643 03/2020 579

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Circuit Breaker Error] CbF

Probable Cause
The DC bus voltage level is not correct compared to the circuit breaker logic control (start or stop pulse)
after the configured timeout [Mains V. time out] LCt.

Remedy
 Verify the circuit breaker logic control (pulse time for start and stop).
 Verify the mechanical state of the circuit breaker.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Incorrect Configuration] CFF

Probable Cause
 Option module changed or removed.
 Control block replaced by a control block configured on a drive with a different rating.
 The current configuration is inconsistent.

Remedy
 Verify that there is no detected error on the option module.
 In the event of the control block being changed deliberately, see the remarks below.
 Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup configuration if it is valid.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

580 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Invalid Configuration] CFI

Probable Cause
Invalid configuration. The configuration loaded in the drive via the commissioning tool or fieldbus is
inconsistent.

Remedy
 Verify the loaded configuration.
 Load a valid configuration.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Conf Transfer Error] CFI2

Probable Cause
 The configuration transfer to the drive was not successful or interrupted.
 The configuration loaded is not compatible with the drive.

Remedy
 Verify the configuration loaded previously.
 Load a compatible configuration.
 Use PC software commissioning tool to transfer a compatible configuration
 Perform a factory setting

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 581

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Pre-settings Transfer Error] CFI3

Probable Cause
The configuration transfer to the drive was not successful or interrupted.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Empty Configuration] CFI4

Probable Cause
The selected configuration for the [Multimotors config] MMC- function has not been created previously.

Remedy
 Verify the configurations saved.
 Switch to a compatible configuration.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

582 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Fieldbus Com Interrupt] CnF

Probable Cause
Communication interruption on fieldbus module.
This error is triggered when the communication between the fieldbus module and the master (PLC) is
interrupted.

Remedy
 Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
 Verify the wiring.
 Verify the timeout.
 Replace the option module.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[CANopen Com Interrupt] COF

Probable Cause
Communication interruption on the CANopen® fieldbus

Remedy
 Verify the communication fieldbus.
 Verify the timeout.
 Refer to the CANopen® user manual.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 583

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Precharge Capacitor] CrF1

Probable Cause
 Charging circuit control detected error or charging resistor damaged.

Remedy
 Turn off the drive and then turn on again.
 Verify the internal connections.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Channel Switch Error] CSF

Probable Cause
Switch to an invalid channel.

Remedy
Verify the function parameters.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

584 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[DC Bus Ripple Error] DCRE

Probable Cause
Persistent ripple observed on the DC bus or DC bus capacitors damaged.

Remedy
 Turn off the drive and then turn on again.
 Verify correct behavior of the input filter.
 Verify the mains wirings.
 Verify the internal connections.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Dynamic Load Error] dLF

Probable Cause
Load variation out of range.

Remedy
Verify for a mechanical cause of load instability.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 585

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Encoder Coupling] ECF

Probable Cause
The mechanical coupling of the encoder is broken.
The detection is active when [Encoder Coupling Monit] ECC parameter is set to [Yes] YES.
It triggers the error when the speed feedback is 0 and the drive is in torque or current limitation.
The limits for speed feedback are:
 5 Hz for minimum
 10% of [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS for maximum
 Verify the setting of [Encoder Coupling Monit] ECC parameter.
 Verify the setting of [Encoder check time] ECt parameter.

The monitoring is not compatible with torque or current limitation functions.

Remedy
Verify the mechanical coupling of the encoder.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

[EEPROM Control] EEF1

Probable Cause
An error of the internal memory of the control block has been detected.

Remedy
 Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
 Switch off the product.
 Return to factory settings.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

586 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[EEPROM Power] EEF2

Probable Cause
An error of the internal memory of the power board has been detected.

Remedy
 Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
 Switch off the product.
 Return to factory settings.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Encoder] EnF

Probable Cause
Encoder feedback error.
The difference between the measured and estimated speed is greater than 4% of [Nominal Motor Freq]
FrS or [Sync Nominal Freq] FrSS.

Remedy
 Verify the configuration parameters for the encoder used.
 Verify the mechanical and electrical operation of the encoder.
 Verify the consistency between the encoder signals and the direction of rotation of the motor.
 If necessary, reverse the direction of rotation of the motor ([Output Ph rotation] PHr parameter)
 Verify the encoder module.
 Verify the encoder type and supply voltage.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 587

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[External Error] EPF1

Probable Cause
 Event triggered by an external device, depending on user.
 An external error has been triggered via Embedded Ethernet.

Remedy
Remove the cause of the external error.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Fieldbus Error] EPF2

Probable Cause
Event triggered by an external device, depending on user.

Remedy
Remove the cause of the external error.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

588 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Embd Eth Com Interrupt] EtHF

Probable Cause
Communication interruption on the Ethernet IP ModbusTCP bus.

Remedy
 Verify the communication bus.
 Refer to the Ethernet user manual.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Out Contact Closed Error] FCF1

Probable Cause
The output contactor remains closed although the opening conditions have been met.

Remedy
 Verify the output contactor and its wiring.
 Verify the contactor feedback wiring.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

NVE61643 03/2020 589

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Out Contact Opened Error] FCF2

Probable Cause
The output contactor remains opened although the closing conditions have been met.

Remedy
Verify the output contactor and its wiring. Verify the contactor feedback wiring.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[FDR 1 Error] FDR1

Probable Cause
 Embedded Ethernet FDR error
 Communication interruption between the drive and the PLC
 Configuration file incompatible, empty or invalid
 Drive rating not consistent with the configuration file

Remedy
 Verify the drive and PLC connection
 Verify the communication workload
 Restart the transfer of configuration file from drive to PLC

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

590 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[FDR 2 Error] FDR2

Probable Cause
 Ethernet fieldbus module FDR error
 Communication interruption between the drive and the PLC
 Configuration file incompatible, empty or corrupted
 Drive rating not consistent with the configuration file

Remedy
 Verify the drive and PLC connection
 Verify the communication workload
 Restart the transfer of configuration file from drive to PLC

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Firmware Update Error] FWEr

Probable Cause
Firmware update function has detected an error.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 591

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Boards Compatibility] HCF

Probable Cause
Hardware configuration error.
The [Pairing password] PPI parameter has been enabled and an option module has been changed.

Remedy
 Refit the original option module.
 Confirm the configuration by entering the [Pairing password] PPI if the module was changed
deliberately.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Input Overheating] iHF

Probable Cause
The AFE brick temperature is too high.

Remedy
Verify the drive ventilation and the ambient temperature. Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

592 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Link Error] ILF

Probable Cause
Communication interruption between option module and the drive.

Remedy
 Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
 Verify the connections.
 Replace the option module.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 0] InF0

Probable Cause
 Communication interruption between microprocessors of the control board.
 The power board rating is not valid.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 1] InF1

Probable Cause
The power board rating is not valid.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

NVE61643 03/2020 593

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 2] InF2

Probable Cause
The power board is incompatible with the control block software.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 3] InF3

Probable Cause
Internal communication detected error.

Remedy
 Verify the wiring on drive control terminals (internal 10V supply for analog inputs overloaded).
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 4] InF4

Probable Cause
Internal data inconsistent.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

594 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 6] InF6

Probable Cause
 The option module installed in the drive is not recognized.
 The removable control terminal modules (if existing) are not present or not recognized.
 The embedded Ethernet adapter is not recognized.

Remedy
 Verify the catalog number and compatibility of the option module.
 Plug the removable control terminal modules after the drive has been switched off.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 7] InF7

Probable Cause
Communication interruption with CPLD component of Control board.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 8] InF8

Probable Cause
The internal power switching supply is not correct.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

NVE61643 03/2020 595

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 9] InF9

Probable Cause
An error on the current circuit measurement has been detected.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Internal Error 10] InFA

Probable Cause
The input stage is not operating correctly.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 11] InFb

Probable Cause
The internal drive thermal sensor is not operating correctly.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

596 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 12] InFC

Probable Cause
Internal current supply error.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 13] InFD

Probable Cause
Differential current deviation.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Internal Error 14] InFE

Probable Cause
Internal microprocessor detected error.

Remedy
 Verify that the error code can be cleared.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

NVE61643 03/2020 597

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 15] InFF

Probable Cause
Serial memory flash format error.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 16] InFG

Probable Cause
Communication interruption or internal error of output relays option module

Remedy
 Verify that the option module is correctly connected to the slot
 Replace the option module.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 17] InFH

Probable Cause
Communication interruption with the Extension module of digital & analog I/O or internal error of the
Extension module of digital & analog I/O.

Remedy
 Verify that the option module is correctly connected to the slot
 Replace the option module.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

598 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 18] InFi

Probable Cause
Safety Module Internal Error
 Communication interruption with Safety function module.
 Internal error of the Safety function module.

Remedy
 Verify the Safety Module errors for additional information.
 Verify that the option module is correctly inserted into the slot.
 Replace the option module.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 19] InFJ

Probable Cause
An error on the encoder module has been detected.

Remedy
 Verify if the encoder option module is connected correctly to the slot.
 Verify the compatibility of the encoder.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

NVE61643 03/2020 599

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 20] InFk

Probable Cause
Option module interface board error.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 21] InFl

Probable Cause
Internal Real Time Clock error. It could be a communication error between the keypad and the drive or a
clock oscillator start error.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 22] InFM

Probable Cause
An error on the embedded Ethernet adapter has been detected.

Remedy
Verify the connection to the Ethernet port.
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

600 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 25] InFP

Probable Cause
Incompatibility between Control Board hardware version and firmware version.

Remedy
 Update the firmware package.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 27] InFr

Probable Cause
Diagnostics in CPLD have detected an error.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

NVE61643 03/2020 601

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Input Contactor] LCF

Probable Cause
The drive is not switched on even though [Mains V. time out ] LCt timeout has elapsed.

Remedy
 Verify the input contactor and its wiring.
 Verify the [Mains V. time out ] LCt timeout.
 Verify the supply mains/contactor/drive wiring.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI1 4-20mA loss] LFF1

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI1.
This error is triggered when the measured current is below 2 mA.

Remedy
 Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
 Verify the setting of [AI1 4-20mA loss] LFL1 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

602 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI3 4-20mA loss] LFF3

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI3.
This error is triggered when the measured current is below 2 mA.

Remedy
 Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
 Verify the setting of [AI3 4-20mA loss] LFL3 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI4 4-20mA loss] LFF4

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI4.
This error is triggered when the measured current is below 2mA.

Remedy
 Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
 Verify the setting of [AI4 4-20mA loss] LFL4 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 603

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI5 4-20mA loss] LFF5

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI5.
This error is triggered when the measured current is below 2 mA.

Remedy
 Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
 Verify the setting of [AI5 4-20mA loss] LFL5 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Load Mvt Error] MdCF

Probable Cause
Load movement for which no command has been given.

Remedy
Verify the brake command circuit. Verify the brake.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

604 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[MultiDrive Link Error] MdLF

Probable Cause
 The communication has been interrupted while running.
 The function has detected an inconsistency in the system configuration.

Remedy
 Check the communication network.
 Check the configuration of the multi-drive link function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[M/S Device Error] MSdF

Probable Cause
 For a master, one or more slaves are not present or not ready.
 For a slave, the master is not present.

Remedy
 Verify the drive status.
 Verify the settings of the master/slave architecture.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 605

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[DC Bus Overvoltage] ObF

Probable Cause
 Deceleration time too short or driving load too high.
 Supply mains voltage too high.

Remedy
 Increase the deceleration time.
 Configure the [Dec ramp adapt.]brA function if it is compatible with the application.
 Verify the supply mains voltage.
 Verify the braking circuit capability if present.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Overcurrent] OCF

Probable Cause
 Parameters in the [Motor data] MOA- menu are not correct.
 Inertia or load too high.
 Mechanical locking.

Remedy
 Verify the motor parameters.
 Verify the size of the motor/drive/load.
 Verify the state of the mechanism.
 Decrease [Current limitation] CLI.
 Increase the switching frequency.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

606 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Drive Overheating] OHF

Probable Cause
Drive temperature too high.

Remedy
Verify the motor load, the drive ventilation, and the ambient temperature. Wait for the drive to cool down
before restarting.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Process Overload] OLC

Probable Cause
Process overload.

Remedy
 Verify and remove the cause of the overload.
 Verify the parameters of the [Process overload] OLd- function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 607

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Motor Overload] OLF

Probable Cause
Triggered by excessive motor current.

Remedy
 Verify the setting of the motor thermal monitoring
 Verify the motor load. Wait for the motor to cool down before restarting
 Verify the setting of the following parameters:
 [Motor Th Current] ITH

 [Motor Thermal Mode] THT

 [Motor Therm Thd] TTD
 [MotorTemp ErrorResp] OLL

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Single Output Phase Loss] OPF1

Probable Cause
Loss of one phase at drive output.

Remedy
Verify the wiring from the drive to the motor.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

608 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Output Phase Loss] OPF2

Probable Cause
 Motor not connected or motor power too low.
 Output contactor opened.
 Instantaneous instability in the motor current.

Remedy
 Verify the wiring from the drive to the motor.
 If an output contactor is being used, set [OutPhaseLoss Assign] OPL to [No Error Triggered] OAC.
 If the drive is connected to a low-power motor or not connected to a motor: In factory settings mode,
motor phase loss detection is active [Output Phase Loss] OPL = [OPF Error Triggered] YES.
Deactivate motor phase loss detection [Output Phase Loss] OPL = [Function Inactive] nO.
 Verify and optimize the following parameters: [IR compensation] UFr, [Nom Motor Voltage] UnS and
[Rated mot. current] nCr and perform [Autotuning] tUn.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Supply Mains Overvoltage] OSF

Probable Cause
 Supply mains voltage too high.
 Disturbed supply mains.

Remedy
Verify the supply mains voltage.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 609

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Program Loading Error] PGLF

Probable Cause
Verify that the error code can be cleared.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Program Running Error] PGrF

Probable Cause
Verify that the error code can be cleared.

Remedy
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

610 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Input phase loss] PHF

Probable Cause
 Drive incorrectly supplied or a tripped fused.
 One phase is unavailable.
 3-phase Drive used on a single-phase supply mains.
 Unbalanced load.

Remedy
 Verify the power connection and the fuses.
 Use a 3-phase supply mains.
 Disable the detected error by [Input phase loss] IPL = [No] nO if single phase supply mains or DC
bus supply is used.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Rotation Angle Monit] RAdF

Probable Cause
The monitoring of the rotation angle has detected a too high deviation.

Remedy
 Check for mechanical problems in the system.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 611

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Safety Function Error] SAFF

Probable Cause
 Debounce time exceeded.
 Internal hardware error.
 STOA and STOB have a different status (high/low) for more than 1 second.

Remedy
 Verify the wiring of the digital inputs STOA and STOB.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Safety Violation] SAVF

Probable Cause
 Safety Module Violation Error.
 Safety Module has detected a violation of defined limits.

Remedy
 Verify the Safety Module errors for additional information.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

612 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Motor short circuit] SCF1

Probable Cause
Short-circuit or grounding at the drive output.

Remedy
 Verify the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the motor insulation.
 Adjust the switching frequency.
 Connect chokes in series with the motor.
 Verify the adjustment of speed loop and brake.
 Increase the [Time to restart] ttr

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Ground Short Circuit] SCF3

Probable Cause
Significant ground leakage current at the drive output if several motors are connected in parallel.

Remedy
 Verify the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the motor insulation.
 Adjust the switching frequency.
 Connect chokes in series with the motor.
 Verify the adjustment of speed loop and brake.
 Increase the [Time to restart] ttr
 If you have long cables, verify the setting of [Ground Fault Activation] GrFL.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

NVE61643 03/2020 613

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[IGBT Short Circuit] SCF4

Probable Cause
Power component detected error.
At product power-on, the IGBTs are tested for short circuit. Thereby an error (short circuit or interruption)
has been detected on at least one IGBT. The time to check each transistor is between 1 and 10 μs.

Remedy
Verify the setting of [Output Short Circuit Test] Strt parameter.
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Motor Short Circuit] SCF5

Probable Cause
Short-circuit at drive output.

Remedy
 Verify the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the motor’s insulation.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

614 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Safety Config Error] SCFF

Probable Cause
 Safety Module Configuration Error.
 Incorrect configuration linked to the Safety Module has been detected.

Remedy
 Verify the Safety Module errors for additional information.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Modbus Com Interruption] SLF1

Probable Cause
Communication interruption on the Modbus port.

Remedy
 Verify the communication bus.
 Verify the timeout.
 Refer to the Modbus user manual.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 615

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[PC Com Interruption] SLF2

Probable Cause
Communication interruption with the commissioning software.

Remedy
 Verify the commissioning software connecting cable.
 Verify the timeout.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[HMI Com Interruption] SLF3

Probable Cause
Communication interruption with the Graphic display terminal.
This error is triggered when the command or reference value are given using the Graphic Display Terminal
and if the communication is interrupted during more than 2 seconds.

Remedy
 Verify the Graphic display terminal connection.
 Verify the timeout.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

616 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Safety IO Error] SIOF

Probable Cause
 Safety Module IO Error.
 Error on input / output of the Safety Module.
 Error on encoder signal.

Remedy
 Verify the Safety Module errors for additional information.
 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Motor Overspeed] SOF

Probable Cause
 Instability or driving load too high.
 If a downstream contactor is used, the contacts between the motor and the drive have not been closed
before applying a Run command.
 The overspeed threshold (corresponding to 110 % of [Max frequency] TFR) has been reached.

Remedy
 Verify the motor parameter settings.
 Verify the size of the motor/drive/load.
 Verify and close the contacts between the motor and the drive before applying a Run command.
 Verify the consistency between [Max frequency] TFR and [High Speed] HSP. It is recommended to
have at least [Max frequency] TFR ≥ 110% * [High Speed] HSP.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 617

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Encoder Feedback Loss] SPF

Probable Cause
 Encoder feedback signal missing.
 No top Z signal after two rotations has been done.
 No signal on the pulse input, if the input is used for speed measurement.
 Noise on the encoder feedback signal.
 Encoder consumption exceeds power supply maximum current.

Remedy
 Verify the error code value [Encoder Fdbck Error] EnCE.
 Verify the wiring between the encoder and the drive.
 Verify the encoder.
 Verify the encoder settings.
 Verify the wiring of the pulse input and the sensor used.
 Use a shielded cable and ground both ends.
 Verify the encoder power supply. Reduce [Encoder Supply Voltage] UECV value.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

[Torque timeout] SrF

Probable Cause
The torque control function is not able to regulate the torque within the configured dead band. The drive
has switched to speed control for longer than [Torque ctrl time out] rtO.

Remedy
 Verify the settings of the [Torque control] tOr- function.
 Verify that there are no mechanical constraints.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

618 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Torque Limitation Error] SSF

Probable Cause
The drive was in torque limitation or current limitation state during [Trq/I Limit Timeout] StO.

Remedy
 Verify the settings of the [Torque limitation] tOL- function.
 Verify that there are no mechanical constraints.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Motor Stall Error] StF

Probable Cause
The stall monitoring function has detected an error.
The [Motor Stall Error] STF is triggered on the following conditions:
 The output frequency is smaller than the stalling frequency [Stall Frequency] STP3
 The output current is higher than the stalling current [Stall Current] STP2
 For a duration longer than the stalling time S[tall Max Time] STP1.

Remedy
 Search for a mechanical blocking of the motor.
 Search for a possible cause of motor overload.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 619

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI1 Thermal Sensor Error] t1CF

Probable Cause
The thermal monitoring function has detected an error of the thermal sensor connected to the analog input
AI1:
 Open circuit, or
 Short circuit

Remedy
 Verify the sensor and its wiring.
 Replace the sensor.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI3 Thermal Sensor Error] t3CF

Probable Cause
The thermal monitoring function has detected an error of the thermal sensor connected to the analog input
AI3:
 Open circuit, or
 Short circuit

Remedy
 Verify the sensor and its wiring.
 Replace the sensor.
 Verify the setting of[ AI3 Type] AI3T parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

620 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI4 Thermal Sensor Error] t4CF

Probable Cause
The thermal monitoring function has detected an error of the thermal sensor connected to the analog input
AI4:
 Open circuit, or
 Short circuit

Remedy
 Verify the sensor and its wiring.
 Replace the sensor.
 Verify the setting of [AI4 Type] AI4T parameter

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI5 Thermal Sensor Error] t5CF

Probable Cause
The thermal monitoring function has detected an error of the thermal sensor connected to the analog input
AI5:
 Open circuit, or
 Short circuit

Remedy
 Verify the sensor and its wiring.
 Replace the sensor.
 Verify the setting of [AI5 Type] AI5T parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 621

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Encoder Th Sensor Error] tECF

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a thermal sensor on the encoder module analog
input:
 Open circuit, or
 Short circuit.

Remedy
 Verify the sensor and its wiring.
 Replace the sensor.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI1 Th Level Error] tH1F

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature on analog input AI1.

Remedy
 Search for a possible cause of overheating.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

622 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI3 Th Level Error] tH3F

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature on analog input AI3.

Remedy
 Search for a possible cause of overheating.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI4 Th Level Error] tH4F

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature on analog input AI4.

Remedy
 Search for a possible cause of overheating.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 623

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI5 Th Level Error] tH5F

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature on analog input AI5.

Remedy
 Search for a possible cause of overheating.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Encoder Th Detected Error] tHEF

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature on encoder module analog input.

Remedy
 Search for a possible cause of overheating.
 Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

624 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[IGBT Overheating] tJF

Probable Cause
Drive power stage overheating.

Remedy
 Verify the size of the load/motor/drive according to environment conditions.
 Reduce the switching frequency.
 Increase the ramp time.
 Decrease the current limitation.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Drive Overload] tLOF

Probable Cause
The [Drive overload monit] Obr- function has detected an error.

Remedy
 Verify the size of the load/motor/drive according to environment conditions.
 Verify the settings of the [Drive Overload Monit] tLOL parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 625

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Autotuning Error] tnF

Probable Cause
An error has been detected during a (standstill) motor tune or a tune in rotation.
 Special motor or motor whose power is not suitable for the drive.
 Motor not connected to the drive.
 Motor not stopped.
 For a tune in rotation, the motor has been stopped prematurely.
 The configuration of the drive (including the configuration of the tune in rotation) does not fit the use of
tune in rotation with your application.
 The motor cannot operate correctly during a tune in rotation.

Remedy
 Verify that the motor/drive are compatible.
 Verify that the motor is connected to the drive during autotuning.
 If an output contactor is being used, verify that it is closed during autotuning.
 Verify that the motor is present and stopped during autotuning.
 In case of reluctance motor, reduce [PSI Align Curr Max] MCr.
 In case of error detected during a tune in rotation:
 Verify the run order remain active all along the tune in rotation.
 Increase [Acceleration] ACC and [Deceleration] DEC. They must not be set to value close to 0 s.
 If [Nb of Repetitions] TNBR is different from 1, decrease [2nd Id max current] IDH2.
 If Nb of Repetitions TNBR is different from 1, increase [2nd Id min current] IDL2.
 If possible, remove the load of the motor.
 Set back [Rotation Tune Freq] TLFR to [Nominal Motor Freq] FRS / 2. If the error continues to be
triggered, decrease [Rotation Tune Freq] TLFR.
 If possible, decrease [Nb of Repetitions] TNBR.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause
has been removed.

[Process Underload] ULF

Probable Cause
Process underload.

Remedy
 Verify and remove the cause of the underload.
 Verify the parameters of the [Process underload] Uld- function

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset
Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

626 NVE61643 03/2020

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Supply Mains UnderV] USF

Probable Cause
 Supply mains too low.
 Transient voltage dips.

Remedy
Verify the voltage and the parameters of [Undervoltage handling] USb.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

NVE61643 03/2020 627

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Section 13.3
FAQ

FAQ

FAQ

Introduction
If the display does not light up, verify the supply mains to the drive.
The assignment of the fast stop or freewheel functions help to prevent the drive starting if the
corresponding digital inputs are not switched on. The drive then displays [Freewheel] nSt in freewheel
stop and [Fast stop] FSt in fast stop. This is a normal behavior since these functions are active at zero
so that the drive is stopped if there is a wire break.
Verify that the run command input is activated in accordance with the selected control mode ([2/3-wire
control] tCC and [2-wire type] tCt parameters).
If the reference channel or command channel is assigned to a fieldbus, when the supply mains is
connected, the drive displays [Freewheel] nSt. It remains in stop mode until the fieldbus gives a
command.

Drive lock in blocking state

The drive is locked in a blocking state and displays [Freewheel Stop] nSt, if a Run command such as
Run forward, Run reverse, DC injection is still active during:
 A product reset to the factory settings,
 A manual "Fault Reset" using [Fault Reset Assign] RsF,
 A manual "Fault reset" by applying a product switched off and on again,
 A stop command given by a channel that is not the active channel command (such as Stop key of the
display terminal in 2/3 wires control),
It will be necessary to deactivate all active Run commands prior to authorizing a new Run command.

Option Module Changed or Removed

When an option module is removed or replaced by another, the drive locks in [Incorrect configuration]
CFF error mode at power-on. If the option module has been deliberately changed or removed, the
detected error can be cleared by pressing the OK key twice, which causes the factory settings to be
restored for the parameter groups affected by the option module.

Control Block Changed

When a control block is replaced by a control block configured on a drive with a different rating, the drive
locks in [Incorrect configuration] CFF error mode at power-on. If the control block has been deliberately
changed, the detected error can be cleared by pressing the OK key twice, which causes all the factory
settings to be restored.

628 NVE61643 03/2020

 Altivar Machine ATV340
Glossary
NVE61643 03/2020

Glossary

D
Display terminal
The display terminal menus are shown in square brackets.
For example: [Communication]
The codes are shown in round brackets.
For example: COM-
Parameter names are displayed on the display terminal in square brackets.
For example: [Fallback Speed]
Parameter codes are displayed in round brackets.
For example: LFF

E
Error
Discrepancy between a detected (computed, measured, or signaled) value or condition and the specified
or theoretically correct value or condition.

F
Factory setting
Factory settings when the product is shipped
Fault
Fault is an operating state. If the monitoring functions detect an error, a transition to this operating state is
triggered, depending on the error class. A "Fault reset" is required to exit this operating state after the
cause of the detected error has been removed. Further information can be found in the pertinent standards
such as IEC 61800-7, ODVA Common Industrial Protocol (CIP).
Fault Reset
A function used to restore the drive to an operational state after a detected error is cleared by removing
the cause of the error so that the error is no longer active.

M
Monitoring function
Monitoring functions acquire a value continuously or cyclically (for example, by measuring) in order to
check whether it is within permissible limits. Monitoring functions are used for error detection.

P
Parameter
Device data and values that can be read and set (to a certain extent) by the user.
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage, low voltage with isolation. For more information: IEC 60364-4-41
PLC
Programmable logic controller
Power stage
The power stage controls the motor. The power stage generates current for controlling the motor.

NVE61643 03/2020 629

Glossary

W
Warning
If the term is used outside the context of safety instructions, a warning alerts to a potential error that was
detected by a monitoring function. A warning does not cause a transition of the operating state.

630 NVE61643 03/2020

 ATV340_Programming_Manual_EN_NVE61643_05

www.schneider-electric.com/contact 03/2020